Fike 8506A 8506A Thermal True ~ RMS Multimeter — Instruction ManualTable of Contents ‘SECTION TWTLE 1 INTRODUCTION AND SPECIFICATIONS .. INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION ... ‘Thermal True-RMS Modular Construction Microprocessor Control Software Calibration Recirculating Remainder A/D Conversion Options and Accessories. SPECIFICATIONS .. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS INTRODUCTION . SHIPPING INFORMATION ... INSTALLATION ..... OPERATING FEATURES OPERATING NOTES ..... Tnpit Power... Fuse Location aa Required Hardware... Power-Up Configuration «.. 2.22. Display .-.... fa 2-46. Front Panel Push Buttons wicesecse 253, Measurement Terminals and Controls 2-69, Function sssse-0e 7 2-72, Measurement Parameters 2102, Mathematic Operations DMS. Special Operations... 2124, Remote Control : 2428. Calibration Mode «+++ 2438, Sean Advance 2140, Systems Use 2-142, OPERATION = 2143, Initial Tun-On -... 2147, Initial Set-Up. 2-152, Measurement Instructions 2170, APPLICATIONS . (continued on page i)TABLE OF CONTENTS, continued SECTION TITLE 2 REMOTE PROGRAMMING COMMANDS . 3. THEORY OF OPERATION INTRODUCTION ...... BLOCK DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION | ‘Bus Structure Controller Front Panel DC Signal Conditioner Active Filter Fast R? A/D Converter Thermal Trve-RMS Converter Front/Rear Switch Assembly CIRCUIT ANALYSIS... Introduction... Controller Front Panel DC Signal Conditioner Finter/External Reference Fast R? A/D Converter Thermal True RMS-Converter Module | MAINTENANCE 41, 43. 46 4. 49, 411 413, 415, 417 419, 421 423 425, 427 422 434 436, 437, 440, 449, 454, 455; 457. 459, 461 435 INTRODUCTION ........ SERVICE INFORMATION GENERAL MAINTENANCE ‘Top and Bottom Cover Removal and Instal Line Voltage Selection Fuse Replacement. Module Installation Module Removal Module Disassembly and) Reassembly Calibration Memory Replacement Front Panel PCB Removal Power Supply PCB Assembly Removal : Power Supply Interconnect Assembly Removal Front/Rear Switch Assembly ... Motherboard PCB Removal Cleaning Instructions... PERFORMANCE TEST |. Introduction DC Performance Test ‘Thermal True-RMS Converter Performance Test CALIBRATION ADJUSTMENTS Tntroduetion Initial Procedure Power Supply a DC Calibration Procedure AC Calibration Procedure TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Notes... Non-recurring Adjustments — Factory Selected Component Replacement Procedures 4 (Continued on page ti) e@TABLE OF CONTENTS, continued seer me ® sr ornentActae rats. ‘TABLE OF CONTENTS ... $4, INTRODUCTION ........ $4, HOWTO OBTAIN PARTS OPTION AND ACCESSORY INFORMATION .. TABLE OF CONTENTS « GENERAL INFORMATION MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION SOFTWARE CALIBRATION SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ‘TABLE OF CONTENTSList of Tables Options Accessories Specifications nt ‘Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Default Configurations Diplay eres ee Operating Ranges BI Error Codes... Fier Modes (VDC, ADC, Onis) Resolution Applications Programming instructions. Programming Insrecions (305A, $506) Module Commands Logie. Decoded ID Bus Logic Test Equipment Low Range DC Votag Tests Autoranging Charactervation Points | 110 mV Tests 390 mV on the 300 mV Range Tesis 390 mv on the 3V Range Tests IV on the IV Range Tests. 39V on the 3V Range Tests 39V on the 30V Range Tests TOV on the JOV Range Tests 35V on the 30V Range Tests TOOV on the 100 Range Tests 10OV on the SOOV Range Tests 300V on the SOOV Range Tests Power Supply Verifications Linearity Checks. .....- Amplifier and Attenuator Adjustments Faulty Module Isolation ve Controller Troubleshooting Front Panel Troubleshooting DC Signal Conditioner Troubies ‘Active Filter Troubleshooting... R? A/D Converter Troubleshooting . w (continued on page ¥) BEEEEESI 1 I z 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 SIESESEEES SRR BELIST OF TABLES, continued ® TABLE TITLE 425. ‘Thermal True-RMS Converter Module Troubleshooting . 426. RMS Sensor Troubleshooting and Replacement ... 427, ‘Thermal Trve-RMS Converter Typical Test Voltages 428. ‘Thermal True-RMS Converter Attenuator Logic Table 429. Amplifier Offset Resistor Selection 430. C7 Selection Values 431, C18 Selection Values 4:32. C25 Seleetion Values 12. 433, C26 Selection Values |:FIGURE Frontispiece List of Illustrations TITLE 506A ‘Thermal True RMS Multimeter... Dimension Drawing Conteois, Indicators, and Connectors. Front Panel Push Buttons Programming Hierarchy Guard Connections Measurement Connections Block Diagram Analog Signal Flow «2.20.04 Background Software Process Foreground Software Process Controller Block Diagram ... con DC Signal Conditioner Block Diagram Active Filter Block Diagram = R? A/D Converter Block Diagram... Ideal Curve Thermal True RMS Functional Block Diagram Timing Circuits .. ee Reset Logie . Status Latch Wait Logic ACK Panel : Interrupt Generation Logie Front Panel .... DC Signal Conditioner Filter/External Reference Fast R? A/D Converter (Analog) Thermal True-RMS Conversion... Power Supply Settings ..--2+..040. Connections for Low Range DC Voltage Tests - Connections for High Range DC Voltage Tests DC External Reference Test : Equipment Set-Up A Equipment Set-Up B Equipment Set-Up C Equipment Set-Up D Equipment Set-Up E 413 +4 +16 (continued on page vit)LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS, continued SECTION 410. 41 412, 413, Equipment Set-Up F Equipment Set-Up G ... Equipment Set-Up Hse... Power Supply Troubleshooting -{85064 Thormal RMS Diglial Multimeter441. INTRODUCTION 1-2. This eight-section manual provides comprehensive information for installing, operating and maintaining Your Fluke digital multimeter. Complete descriptions and instructions are included for the instrument mainframe, forall modules necessary in making thermal true-rmsand de volts measurements, and for any optional modules ordered with the instrument. Appropriate sectionalized information is included with any optional modules subsequently ordered and may be inserted in Section 6 1-3, DESCRIPTION 1-4. The multimeter features 6-1/2 digit resolution, full annunciation and simplicity of operation. Modular construction, microprocessor control, anda bus structure provide excellent flexibility. Memory programming from the front panei(or through a remote interface) controls all measurement parameters, mathematical operations and special operations, The standard hardware configuration allows for measurement of thermal true-rms volts on ight ranges and de volts in five ranges. An averaging mode is available to automatically optimize display resolution and stability for each range in de volts, resistance, and de current functions. Extended resolution is also available in the ac vols function. Optional modules are available for de current (five ranges), and resistance (eight ranges) in two-wire or four-wire arrangements. 445, Thermal True-RMS Conversion 1-6. The thermaltrue-rms feature allows the operator to measure the true-rms value of an ac signal ataccuracies of up to 012% with a reading rate of one every six seconds, This response time compares favorably with that of existing thermal transfer standards which can take up to five minutes to complete a measurement. 1-7. Modular Construction 18. Considerable versatility is realized through unique modular construction, All active components are contained in modules which plug into a mainframe Section 1 Introduction & Specifications motherboard. This module-to-motherboard mating, combined with bus architecture and microprocessor control, yields ease of option selection. 149, Microprocessor Control 10. All modules fonction under direct control of a microprocessor based controller. Each module is addressed by the controller as virtual memory. Scaling factors and offset values can be applied separately, stored in memory, and automatically used as factors in all subsequent readings. Digital filtering utilizes averaged samples for each reading, 4-11. Software Calibration 1-12, The 8506A features. microprocessor-controlled calibration of all ranges and functions, Any range can be calibrated using a reference input of any known value from 60% of range to full scale. Software calibration can. bbe performed using front-panel or remote control, allowing recertification without opening the case or removing the multimeter from the system, 1448, Recirculating Remainder A/D Conversion I-14. The multimeter adapts Fluke's patented recirculating remainder (R2) A/D conversion technique to mictoprocessor control. This combination provides fast, accurate, linear measurements and long-term stability 1-48. Options and Accessories 1-16. Remote interfaces, ade current converter, and an ‘ohms converter are among the options and accessories available for use with the multimeter. Refer to Tables 1-1 ‘and, 1-2 for complete listings. Any one of the three Remiote Interface modules (Option 05, 06, or 07) may be installed at one time, 4-17, SPECIFICATIONS 1-18. Mainframe specifications for acvolts, devolts and dderatio measurement capabllityare presented inTable1-3 Optional function specifications are supplied with the respective option modules and included in Section 6. 1Table 1-1. Options Table 1-2. Accassorios ‘MODEL OF ae PART NO, ane 1W04-205-800 | Sibineh Rack Adaptor 100-260-610 | 18-inch Rack Slides 1Ma0-200-610 | 24-inch Rack Slides 80K- | High Voltage Probe ‘onms Converter Current Shunts IEEE Standard 488-1975 Interface 0K-40 | High Voltage Probe Bit Serial Asynchronous Interface BanF | High Frequency Probe B5RF | High Frequency Probe Either Option G2A or Option 08 ean Yeog! IEEE Sta. Cable, 1 Motor Length be instaliog at ono timo, yoo | EEE Std. Cable, 2 Meter Length Yyaoos IEEE Std. Cable, 4 Motor Length Parallot interface ‘Only one of Options 06, 08, and O7 ‘can be installed at any time. nais-7011K* [extender Cara ig-7190K* | static Controier Mis-7191k~ | Test Module mis-7o1aK* | Bus Interconnect end Monitor “For use during service or repait: Table 1-8. Specifications GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. ‘Dimensions coseesssss 10.8 om High x 43.2 om Wide x 42.5 em Long (4.28 in High x 17 in Wide x 18.75 in Long)(See Figure 1-1) Weight BASIC coeneeseseees 10 ka (22 ibs) FULLY LOADED, 12 kg (26 toe) ‘Operating Power VOLTAGE oe 100V ac, 120V ac, 220V ac, oF 240V ac (2:10%) BASIC INSTRUMENT POWER 12 watts FULLY LOADED POWER, 2h watts FREQUENCY 47 Hz to 63 He (400 Hz available on request) Warm-Up EILIIIIINN 2 hours to rated accuracy ‘Shock and Vibration Meats requirements of MIL-T-28800 for type Ill, class 8, style € equipment, ‘Temperature Rang OPERATING. 0°G to 60c NON-OPERATING 40°C 10 70°C ‘Humidity Ran OC TO 18°C ..... coveeees 808% BH. 18°C TO 40°C. 75% RH 40°C TO 50°C 45% FH Maximum Terminal Voltage LO TO GUARD 327 ms GUARD TO CHASSIS. 500V rms HISENSE TO HI SOURCE 427V ams. LO SENSE TO LO SOURCE 127V ms Hi SENSE TO LO SENSE 1000V rms oF 1200¥ de HI SOURCE TO LO SOURCE 280V rms‘Table 1-3. Specifications (cont) ‘85060 ‘AC VOLTAGE Input Characteristics FULL SCALE RESOLUTION RANGE 5% DIGITS SE DISHTS™ 5a O1GTTS | INPUT IMPEDANCE 700 mv 126.00 mv 7 7 1M 200 mv 400.000 mv = aw 1.250007 Ww row 2% w 400000 Ww ton ov 2.80000 sow 100 hunted by | soy 40.0000" sow 100 so 125.0007 cow mv <<180 pF S00 600.0000 100 1mv “In AVG operating mode ‘Accuracy HIGH ACCURACY MODE :(% of Reading + Number of Counts) 24 HOUR: 25°C 21°C FREQUENCY IN HERTZ Rance [iT | 407 | 20xTO | SoKTO ] ToOKTO | ZOqKTO ] SoORTO 40" 20k 50k 300K | 200 | "500% aut 700 mv oo2+s [| oos | oz+0 | o6+0 | ss+0 | aseo | | 300 mV to rov | 008+0 | o012+0 | oo¢+0 | o2+0 | os+0 | 15+0 | as+o sv | ooa+o | oo12+0 | ooeso | o2z+0 | os+0 | as+o | 120 soov | o08+0 | oor2+0 | oo4+o | o2+0 | r0+0 | aseo | — soov? | ov+o | oors+o | oom+o| ozara | — = - 90 day: 28° 35°C FREQUENCY IN HERTZ Rance [TOTO | 4010 | 20kTO | 60KTO ] TOoKTO | 200KTO | SOTO 40" 20K 50k sox __| 200 _| 500% aut toomv [| o08+0 | ooas+s | o06+0 | o2+0 | os+o | 15+0 | a5v0 300mvto | o08+0 roy | 008+0 | oot6+0 | ocs+0 | o2+0 | os+o | 15+0 | aseo sv | o0s+o | oo1e+0 | o0s+0 | oz+0 | os+0 | aso | taro tov | o08+0 | oore+o | o06+0 | o2+0 | 10+0 | aseo | — soov | oov+0 | oote+o | oos+0| oas+o | — 7 ‘with slow fer506A, Table 1-3, Specifications (cont) ‘AC VOLTAGE (cont) Input Characterietice (cont) 380 DAY: 25°0 25°C ADD TO THE 90 DAY SPECIFICATION PER MONTH THE FOLLOWING % OF READING FREQUENCY IN HERTZ AL woTo | aoTo | 2oxto | sox To | 100K T0 | 2oox To | soo TO RANGes |__40 20k 50k so0% | 200k | 500% ™ 0.008 | oor | oo | oo | ocar | oo on NOTES: ‘AC coupled, 54 dlglts, input evel >0.25 x ull scale, For6'4lits multiply Number of Counteby 10. For input levels between 0.1 x and 0.25 x ull scale, add counts for the 100 mv, 1V, 10V, and 100V Fanges, add 15 counts for the 300 mV, SV, SOV ranges, and add 25 counts for the SOOV range, * Relative to calibration standards, within 1 nour of de zero, » Add 0,02 x (Input voltage / 600) % of Reading to the specification, “For input equencies above 700 kHz, forthe 300 mV and 2V ranges ad 1.5% tothe specication ENHANCED MODE: Add thetollowing (% of Reading + Number of Counts) tothe High Accuracy Mode: Specifications s TIME SINGE FIRST READING RANGE + <5 MINUTES: <30 MINUTES: 100 mV. WV, TOV, 100 OF0 0008+ 4 300 my, sv, soy o+o 0.003 + 4 s00v oro 0.000+ 6 “AG-coupied, 87 digits, temperature change 0.25x ull scale, 40 Hzto20kHz, temperature chango| 120 d8, de to 60 hortz, with 1000 in series with either load SETTLING TIME High Accuracy Mode ...-+-.sssee+++ Sample time = 3.6 seconds Hold time = 2.5 eaconds Measurement time = 6 seconds the state ofthe instruments unknown, two complete measurement times will be required to guarantee a correct roading. Use of the ‘external trigger mode wil alwaysallow a8 second measuromenttime. Enhanced Mode. ....-. ‘Tho frst reading requires the sama time as the High Accuracy Mod Subsoquent readings occur every 500 milisaconas. If the input changes 19% the analog settling time to 90 Day mid-band accuracy is 115 saconds. Normal Mode «..-ssseesessseseevee Settling times for large changes are non-linear. Zoro to Full Scale changes require 2.0 seconds to settle to 90 Day, mid-band specifications, Full seale to 1/10th full scale changes require 30 seconds to sete to 1/10th ful sale, mid-band; 90 day specifications. Small changes (<1%) settle to rid-band specifications in <1.5 ‘seconds,‘Table 1-3. Spocitications (cont) ‘AC VOLTAGE (cont) Operating Characteristics (cont) AUTORANGE POINTS: RANGE UPRANGE DOWNRANGE: 100 mv. 125,000 mv I None 300 mv 400.000 mv no mv w 1.250007 0.382v av 4.09000 4av tov 12.5000 3.52V sov 40.0000¥ iW 100 +25.000v 35.2 ‘500V ‘None t10¥ OPERATING RANGE OVERRANGE wmiinun UNDERRANGE RANGE DISPLAY ‘SPECIFIED. DISPLAY HHH LeveL ELLLL 00 mv 725.000 mv 125 mv 625 mv 300 mv 400.000 mv 40 mv 20 mv wv 1.25000 125 mv 25 mv av 4.00000 400 mV 200 mV tov +2.5000v 128v 625 mv sov 40,0000¥ av wv r00v 128.000v r28v easy so0v 600.000 eov, ov DC VOLTAGE Input Characteristics RESOLUTION FULL SCALE input 6 DIGITS 7A o RESISTANCE oiGits* Digits ‘200.0000 mm 00 av ‘>10,0000 Ww | 2.000000 tw >10,000Ma sv | 2o,00000 tow 10.0008 so0v 4128.00 100 av roma r000v 1200.00 mv soma *“Tiaigit resolution: in AVG operating mode‘Table 1-3. Spocifications (cont) DG VOLTS: 296 of Reading + Number of Counts) 26-HOUR 0-DAY 2erc #190 2a 45°C (OPERATING MODE (OPERATING MODE NORM AVG NORM ava" 100 mv 0.0018 + 15 (0.0010 + 8 0.0025 + 40 ‘0.0020 +8 v 0.0008 +7 0.0005 + 4 0.0018 + 8 o.0012 +6 10 0.0008 or 6° 0.0005 or 50" 0.0010 + 8 ‘0.0008 + 6o* so0v 0.0010 +6 0.0008 + 5 o0ots +8 0.0018 +6 1000 o.0008 + 6 0.0005 + 5 0018 +8 0.0018 +6 Whichever is greater 0-Day: 23°@ 28°C ‘Add to the 80-day specifieation per month the falowing % of Reading and Number of Counts, OPERATING MODE NORM aver 0.00017 +56 (0.0001 +041 ‘0.0001 + 0.1 0.0001 + 0.1 0.0001 + 0.1 0.00008 + 1 0.000134 0.1 0001 + 0 0.00013 +041 0001 + 0-1 NOTES: 52. ‘Relative to calibration stancards, 4-hour warm-up, within + hour of de zero. After software calibration ‘add the following to the 24 hour accuracy specification TIME SINCE INTERNAL NUMBER OF (HARDWARE) CALIBRATION COUNTS" <30 Days. <80 Days <1 Year >i Year “with 6¥-aigi display, For 7itdigits, multiply Number of Counts by 10. 27 6 digit mode of operation. ‘after 4-hour warm-up, within 1 hour of de 2670‘Table 1-3, Specifications (cont) ting Characteristics TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT: (Hh of Reading + Number of Counts)/°C RANGE 0°C TO 18°C AND 28°C TO 50°C 300 mv .0008 +5 Ww 0003 + + rv 0002 + 05+ r00v 0.0003 + 1 so00v 0.0003 4 0s “Multiply Number of Counts by 10 for AVG operating mode (?iedigit), INPUT BIAS CURRENT AT TIME OF ADJUSTMENT T-YEAR 28°0 21°C | TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT <£20 pA 10,000 Mn relative to Ohms Guard! or Sense LO. BIAS CURRENT External Reference HI or LO celative to Ohms Guard? or Sense LO-100 68 DIS 08 RESPONSE TIME. ‘Analog Settling Time FILTER MODE FILTER To 0.01% OF TO 0.001% OF COMMAND. STEP CHANGE STEP CHANGE Bypassed Ft ame 20ms Fast FO or F3 40 ms 50 me Slow ForFe 400 ms 500 ms NOTES: (00 Ratio) "A = 10V de range accuracy for the appropriate period of time. 8 = Input signal function and range accuracy for the appropriate period of time. ‘Vn = Minimurn allowable External Reference Voltage = +0.000tV, oF View /10* (whichever is greater), Iwo = Absolute value of tho External Roference Voltage *Ohms Guard is available through tho roar input.‘Tabla 1-3, Speattestions (cont) DC RATIO (cont) ‘Operating Characteristics (cont) Digitizing Time MAXIMUM RATIO DISPLAY EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT Polarity High Level Low Level Pulse Wiath Connector Maximum Input Maximum Shell to Ground Vottag SCAN ADVANCE OUTPUT Polarity... High Level Low Level Pulse Wieth Connector Maximum Shell o Ground Voltage For 2 to 2” samples per reading aigitizing time i trom 196 ms 109 ‘minutes 6 seconds using a 60 He ae line with times Increasing 20% using a 60 Hz ac line, Selectabie in 18 binary steps, +1.00000 Ea May be wired internally fr elther rising o falling edge. Factory wires for fang edge, +4.3V (rinimum) +0.7V (maximum) 10 us (mirimurn BNC with the outer shail at interface common s0v 0v Positive Dav (TTL High) 40.70 (TTL Low) 8 4s (minimum) BNC with the outer shell at interface comman 300 eee (agen 48.38 om. Hi it ——-+ (2285) FRONT VIEW 180m (104) — 6.28 om (1842 in) ——— RIGHT SIDE VIEW Figure 1-1. Dimension Drawing2-1. INTRODUCTION 2.2. Installation and operation of the multimeter are ‘explained in this section. These instructions should be ead thoroughly prior to multimeter operation. Once a familiarization with the instrument is achieved, parts of this section serve asa quick reference, Explanations and applications are provided forall standard functions and. operations. Should any difficulties arise, contact your nearest Fluke Sales Representative (listed in Section 7) ot the John Fluke Mfg. Co.,Inc.; (P.O. Box C9090; Everett, WA. 98206; te. (206) 342-6300). 2-3, SHIPPING INFORMATION 2-4. ‘The multimeter is packaged and shipped ina foam- packed container. Upon receipt of the instrument, a thorough inspection should be made to reveal any possible shipping damage. Special instructions for inspection and claims are included with the shipping 2:5. If reshipment is necessary, the original container should be used. 1f the orginal container isnot available, a new container ean be obtained from John Fluke Mig Co., Inc. Please reference the instrument model number when coguesting 2 new shipping container. 2:6, INSTALLATION 27. Non-marring feet and a tt-down bail arrangement are installed on the instrament for field or bench use. A rack-mounting kit and rack slides are available for use ‘withthe standard 19-inch equipment racks, Information regarding installation and rack-mounting accessories is contained in Section 6. 24. The multimeter operates from 100, 120, 220,0r 240V ac 108% at 50 or 60 He. Section 2 Operating Instructions WARNING ‘TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, PROPER- Ly GROUND THE CHASSIS, A’ GROUND CONNECTION IS PROVIDED ON THE ‘THREE-PRONG POWER CONNECTOR. IF PROPER GROUND IN YOUR POWER ‘SYSTEM IS IN DOUBT, MAKE A SEPARATE GROUND CONNECTION TO THE REAR PANEL CHASSIS BINDING POST. OTHERWISE, THE POSSIBILITY OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK MAY EXIST IF HIGH VOLTAGE IS MEASURED WITH THE LEADS REVERSED (INPUT HI GROUNDED). 2.9. OPERATING FEATURES 2-10. Front and rear panel features are illustrated in Figure 2-1 and described in Table 2-1. Use this information for initial familiarization with the ‘multimeter, A full explanation of al features is presented later ia this section, 2-11. OPERATING NOTES 2-12. input Power 2413, A binding post on the rear pancl has been provided as an earth ground connection, Line voltage feleetion (J00, 120, 220, or 240V 2c) is explained in Seetion 4. With the exception of slower reading atesand filter time-outs, operation at $0 Hz is identical to that at 60 He 2-14, Fuse Location 215, The bine fuse (0.5A MDL Slow Blow for 100 or 120V a6, oF 0.25 MDL Slow Blow for 220 or 240V ac) is located on the lower right side ofthe rear panel (next to the power connector). The current and ohms protection fuse(1.5A AGC) is located in the lower right-hand corner ‘of the front panel for front input connections and on the left side of the rear panel (as seen from the reat) for rear aFigure 2-4, Controle, Indlestors, and Connectors Table 21. Controls, indeators, and Connectors DESCRIPTION ‘Mantissa Fiols Exponent Field Function Annunciators ‘TRIGGER Push Quttons FUNCTION Push Buttons RANGE Push Buttons ZERO Push Button recall 20r0 values. Refer to text for uso with Calibration Memory: Digplaye 5) 6, oF 7 digits with decimal point. Also dlsplays errors, overrange warnings, underrange watrings (V AC only), prompts, numerics, recalled values, ard limits indications. Polarity and value of exponent shown for engineering notation of display [Anmunciator() light to indicate function selected TRIGGER push buttons are used te select continuous (AUTO) or individual (MANUAL/EXTERNAL) messuromant triggers “These buttons are used to select any of nine measurement functions: ae volts (HI ACCUR, ENHD, NORMAL): ¢e volis (VDC); dc coupled ac volts (simataneously push V DC and one ofthe three ac volts buttons}; resistance (OHMS), or dc currant (A DC) AUTO toggles into/out of Autoranging mode, changing range only when necessary (Up}/(Down} push buttons exit Autoranging and increase/decrease one Fange with first use. E8ch succeeding use steps to the next higher! lowee range (1 available). Used to toggle into/out of the Zero mode (V DG or OHMS only). A new zero value ig stored each time the mode is entered. This value Is applied to the selected range and tall highar ranges within the same function, AlsousedtoControls, Indleators, and Connectors (cont) NAME DESCRIPTION ‘MEMORY Push Buttons ‘Aiorage Push Button Input Terminats Guard Solector ‘Ohms Solector Fear input Selector ‘Currenvonms Fuse MODIFIER Push Buttons ‘Numeric Push Buttons ‘CONTROL Push Buttons ‘Status Annunciators ‘STORE fe used to Inia memory entry for displayed values or numeric RECALL commands display of a memory value. HV/LO are used wnen storing oF recaling limit values, oF recalling peak values. AVG toggles inte/out of Averaging rode in V DC, OHMS, or A DC, and tenables extended resolution in V AC. Measurement connections, GUARD is connected to SENSE LO when disengaged (out): GUARD is Hloatee to allow external connection when engages (i), Push in for 4-wire ohms measurements using OHMS SENSE (HI, LO) an (OHMS SOURCE (HI, LO) terminals. Pushagainto gisengagetor2-wire ohms ‘measurements using OHMS SENSE (HI, LO) terminals. in V AC functions, {Uso of the 4T position is recommended to minimize input capacitance. The ‘Ohms Solactor has no affect on rear inputs. Push in to eonneot rear analog Input terminals and disconnect front terminals. Push again to disengage, reconnecting tront terminals and disconnecting rear terminals. Position ofthe switch can be sensed remotely Use AGE 1.58, ‘SAMPLE selects the number of samples-per-reading in V DC, OHMS, or A DC, (Not used in V AC). FILTER elects the filter mode, OFFSET Mathematic Operations SCALING {that moaity the ext rer — (reading value. PEAK the use of the reading. Liners, {eee ‘Operations that modity ‘when enabled by initially pushing the STORE button, these push buttonsean be used to enter numeries, exponents, and related potanty signs ESET initiates a power-up reset. LCL/RMT usage depends on the remote interface in use ‘a. the IEEE interface (-05) is usod, LCL/RMT toggles from remote to Toca, But not from local to remote. Ifthe Bit Soria (-08) or Parallel (-07) Intertece is used, LOL/AMT taggles betwoen (ocal and remote. ‘SAMPLE flashes to show a new reading in progress. FILTER lights whenever a slow filer Is selected. ‘AUTO lights for Autoranging EXT lights whan External Reference is enabled (disabies Soaling). AVG/(GAL) lights (steady) for Averaging mode or flashes tor Calibration mode ZZERO lights when a zero correction value is In uss (V DC, OHMS oniy) ‘OFFSET lights when Ottsot mode is enabled [SCALE lignts whan Scaling mode is selected (disables Externe! Reference) PEAK lights when Peak mode is enabied. REMOTE lights when the multimeter 1s controlled through @ remote interface. 28Controls, indicators, and Connectors (cont) NAME DESCRIPTION POWER Switen Scan Advance Output Chassis Ground Remote interface Power Connector Une Fuse Calipration Switch External Trigger Rear Analog input Fer Input Fuse Push ON/push OFF. Calibration mode must be off before cycling power on or of. TTL compatible control signals to external scanner (S0-ohm output impedance) Einding post for ground connections Connector on optional remote interface module. ‘Three-prong connector accepting line core with ground wire Use 1/24 Slow Blow for 100 or 120V 2¢. 1/44 Slow Blow for 220 oF 240 ae. Reter to Fuse Replacoment in Section 4 Activates Calibration moge (AVG/(CAL) annunciator flashes) Enabled by front panel MANUAL/EXTEANAL push button, Aternate connections for al ront panel inputs (enabled when Resr Input Selector on front panel is pushed in). EXT REF Hi and LO inputs are also Included, but are not switched, Use AGC 1.54, input connections. Refer to Fuse Replacement inSection _ remote control, The resistance and de current modules 4 before replacing any fuse 2-16. Required Hardware 2-17. The multimeter must be equipped with the procedures in Section 4 following modules forstandard operation (ae volts and de volts) 1. Controller (blank display if not installed) Active Filter (Error 2 if not installed) (Options G2 and 03 respectively) cannot be installed atthe same time. If itis necessary to check, install or replace modules, refer to Module Installation and Removal 2:19. An“Ervor 9” indication appears in the multimeter display whenever a function is selected and the respective function module is faulty or missing. Refer to Error Codes later in this section for error descriptions and remedies. At power-up, the multimeter identifies the hardware configuration by displaying “Cand a series of A/D Converter (Error 5 if not installed) alphanumeries. The Thermal True-RMS Converter is lsolator (Ezror 9 at power-up if not installed) DC Signal Conditioner(Brror9 if not installed) Thermal True-RMS Converter NOTE ‘identified as “A”. Optional modules are identified by the respective option number, An “8 appears in the exponent display at power-up or reset when the Isolatoris installed. For example, a multimeter configured withthe Current Shunts (Option 03), the IEEE Remote Interface (Option 05), and the Isolatoris identified witha power-up display of “C3SA 8”, ‘The Thermal True-RMS Converters the only 2-20. Power-Up Configuration ac converter that can be used inthe A306. If 2L. At power initialization, or whenever the RESET. another type of ae converter is installed in the button is pushed, the multimeter assumes the power-up 85064, an Error E condition willbe specified configuration. Basically, the instrument assumes the ‘a power-up or reset Y DC function, 1000V manual range, filler mode FO, sample factor 7, with all modes and values disabled. The 218. Additional modules are necessary when using the power-up (oF reset) configuration isfully defined in Table ‘multimeter in resistance or de current functions of for 2-2 a‘Table 22. Detault Configurations POWERUP OR RESET ‘SELECTION OF NEW FUNGTION (1) ‘CONOTTION DISPLAY GONOTION ISLAY Fonetion BC vorts Voeen ‘New Function YEVACADC.oF OFS on Range: 7000" Wanval_| AUTO ot ‘Autoranaina ‘AUTO on Tagger Aut ‘SAMPLE Tashoe Feiains Previous Tigger Mode_| SAMPLE tasking Sto Fier 7 FILTER af ‘Sea Notes 23 and chart FILTER on or off Same 7 SAMPLE nashow ‘See Note 3 and ena SAMPLE Tats Oise ‘Di vaue 0 | OFFSET of OH roe value OFFSET off ‘Sealing Value 1 | SCALE off ‘Of stain value SCALE att External Ratrence | OW Note @ | EXT AEF off ier at vals EXTAEF of imi ‘ft Vale 0 | Normal Do ‘retains value Rome Display oak it BERK Of OF retains Tat vale Kal ‘Averaging on AVGIICAL) nat on peasy | OF (8) ‘AVGI(CAL) sot on 6 Zoro On, cat ZERO on ale’ Woda values ard “ZERO on (VOC:OHMS) Memory Velues stale (5) orot Gaibralon Woe | Note 8 News 1. Re-aeleaton of the same function sets autoranging (AUTO on), but retains al other mode values and states. 2. Imvac tunetions, ony titer modes F and FO are allowed. In OC, OHMS, or ADG. iter modes, F0.F1.F2,anéFBareallowed, 3. Averaging mode le availabe OO, OHMS, nd ADC chly. The AVG button can also bo used in VAC functions to command ‘extended rzelution only. averaging modewasinetfet selecting VOC, OHMS, or ADC sas titer modo FOandsampteseting7. 11 Oo. OFS, or ADC Isrosoloted wrnout changing the fneton, the state of Average modo snot changed. one tre existing iter rode and sample ating are retained. 4. The External Reference vale is ntolied to the muttmeter sofware number whenever power-up o°reetoecurs. RECALL ExT 'REF can tnen bo utes te dapla tis number, Ary subeoquent activation of External ference mace replace the sofware umber withthe actual etereal reference valve, While VAG funtions, EXT REF cannot be used to wthar recall the software umber + stvato External eterence mode, ‘5. The alitation mode stateis ono of solely dependentonthe postion ofthe rearpanelCalitration Switch, Bonot eye power ‘on or off wth this ewiich ON, caloraton mode ents ae applied to tn reacing as fllows {Gain cottaction factors ere always apaties (Calibration made on or ft Zero values are soptes whenever Zero mode is on (Caleation mad on or off, VDC or OHMS seocted), However tho Zoro values uses depond on the Calloration made stat, H Calistion mode & 6, the values used are those stored in Caltration Merny. I Calibration modeis fhe Clibation Marry valves aro loaded nto aternporarymemary st power Spor eset-Temporary memory valves a8 laine at function alection and canbe cranged(when Caleration madeisef without affecting the valve stored in Caivation Memory. voc To: VAC OHMS. ‘anc ‘manual ranging etalne manus ranging and previous range. It autoranging,retaine avtoranging beginning st previous range, Fier mode retained, ‘vtoranging gine a highest range (1000V, 100 Magotns, or 1A) elaine provous titer mace (For FO} Samp factor 7 ‘Autoranging ‘Bein a 200 Fiter mode of (FO) Tautoranging Begins at righest range (Y000V, 100 Mogohms, or 1A) Retaine previous ftar mage (F, FO, Ft, F2, oF) Retains previous sample tector506A, 2-22. Display 2:28. MEASUREMENT READING 2-24, The measurement display consists of mantissa and exponent ficids. The mantissa presents polarity, $-1/2, 6 1/2 or T-1/2 digit resolution (range and function dependent) and automatic decimal placement, In addition, the mantissa displays range identifiers (V AC only), mumeric storing entries, recalled values, error and warning information, and interactive programming information (prompt). 2.25. When very large or small readings are displayed, the exponent field is also used to maintain maximum resolution. A negative exponent field polarity indicates ‘multiplication of the mantissa by the displayed power of ten (-3 means 001). A positive exponent field polarity indicates multiplication of the mantissa (+3 means 1000), Exponent values of -6, ~3, +3.80r +6 are available for displayed readings. Additional exponents of -9 or +9are elsplayed when storing offset or sealing factors entered ‘with the front panel push buttons 2:26. The measurement display is altered under certain conditions. Use of the AVG pushbutton changes displ resolution in some range and funetion combinations When AVG is pushed (Average mode enabled, AVG)(CAL) annuncistor on) in the V DC, A DC, or ‘OHMS function, an extra digit of resolution is provided in certain ranges. V DC (IOV range) now displays 7-1/2 digits (6-1/2 digits are still displayed in the other VDC ranges). A DC displays 61/2 digits in all applicable anges while the multimeter isin the Averaging mode. In the OHMS function, a total of 6-1/2 digits is available in all ranges. Average mode is not available in any V AC function, but the AVG pushbutton can still be used to ‘enable extended resolution, Resolution ineach range and function is summarized in Table 2-3. The display is spnificantly altered when the Limits mode selected (any function), The entire measurement display is then devoted to an indication of HI, LO, or PASS. 2:27. ANNUNCIATORS 2.28. Selecting a valid function causes the respective ‘annunciator(s) to light, One annunciator lights if sc volts high accuracy (HI ACCUR), ac volts normal (NORMAL), de volts (V DO), resistance (OHMS), of de current (A DO) is selected. Two annunciators ight if volts enhanced (ENH'D) or ac volts normal (er high accuracy) and de coupled ac volts (HEACCUR + DC, ‘or NORMAL + V DO) are selected. Three ennunciators light when de coupled ac volts enanced (ENH'D + V DC) is selected. Ordinarily, the V DC anauneiator lights in the power-up or reset configuration. 2.29. Status annunciatorslightto signify various modes of operation. Annunciators (as defined in parentheses) light when any of the following modes are enabled: Peake (PEAK), Scaling (SCALE), or External Reference 26 (EXT), Averaging (AVG), Offset (OFFSET), Autoranging (AUTO), or V DC/Ohms Zero (ZERO), ‘The FILTER annunciator lights (steadily) whenever the slow filter is selected (filter on mode in V AC). With a distinctive display of HI, LO, of PASS, the Limits mode requires no separate status annunciator, 2-30, The SAMPLE annunciator blinks to signifya new zeading in progress. Depending on the function selected, ‘wo response patternsare available. If the multimeter isin one of theac volts functions (NORMAL, HI ACCUR, or ENH'D), SAMPLE blinks at predetermined rates, AC Volts High Accuracy causes SAMPLE to blink on once every six seconds. AC Volts Normal causes SAMPLE to blink on once every 0.5 second, AC Volts Enhanced causes SAMPLE 19 blink on once as an initial high sceuracy reading is taken, then (after six seconds) to ‘continue blinking once every 0.5 second. 2.31, When the multimeter is setfor devolts resistance, for de curreat functions, the SAMPLE annunciator ashes at the reading (display update) rate for sample settings from 0 through 7. The flash rate for sample settings, 1, and 2 is very rapid and causes the SAMPLE. annunciator to appear to be steadily lighted, For sample settings from 8 through 17, the SAMPLE annunciator ‘ashes atthe sample setting 7 rate ony. Sinoe these higher sample settings may require considerable time for a sisplay update, this feature is necessary to insure thatthe operator is aware of a reading in progress. 2-02. RANGE IDENTIFIER 2.33. The mukimeter momentarily displays a range identifier whenever a V AC function i selected and when ‘anew range isselected ina V AC function. For example, +500 is displayed when @ V AC function is selected (and the previous function was V DC, A DC, or OHMS), ‘When changing from one V AC function to another, the previously enabled range is retained and momentarily displayed. The appropriate range identifier is displayed for any subsequent range change (whether the instrument isin auto or manual ranging), The range can be verified at any time by reselecting the same V AC function. This action causes no change in the multimeter, other than a ‘momentary interruption of measurements (during which the range identifier is displayed). In V DC, A DC, and ‘OHMS functions, the range is identified by the position of the decimal point 2.84. OVERRANGE INDICATION NOTE The accuracy of a VAC reading is a function of the input level. Therefore, accuracy is specified within the minimum and overrange input levels defined in Table 2-4. VAC inputs ‘ouside this range are not displayed.‘Table 23. Display ‘The reading (with decimal point) is displayed as shown in each function and range. The use of mathematic ‘operations (SCALING or EXT REF and OFFSET) may altar these pattorns, Tho uso of LIMITS causes a cisplay of Hi, LO, or PASS. vac RANGE IDENTIFIER* NORMAL RESOLUTION 100-3) 166.88 86 a2 +800 (3) 668.8888 “3 A 1 ao a a 10 18. ga 30 a 00 ! aa. +800 888.8888 (Aditional digit in V AC extended resolution is shown in lighter print.) DISPLAY EXPONENT oa aomams wmonmbs a wo pice E 28 +8 28 28 8 mmm mH manana aomnam Bang | DMH9DODHoD BDog | ooagamoD aooe | DoDooDoD bonne | ommanmam aban | mnmonmamm boos | baahooao Boom | DaDMODOOM #9,998998 (Additional digit in averaging mode is shown in lighter print)‘Table 2-4. Operating Range UNDERRANGE rein) MINIMUM SPECIFIED Level OVERRANGE (HHH) 6.25 mv 20 mv 625 mv 200 ev 825 mv 2v 6.26v 30V 125 mV 125 mw 40 mv 400 mv 125 mv 125 400 mv wv 125v 125v w 40 ro5v resv cov 200 ‘OVERRANGE RANGE (HHHHHH) 109 mv 200 mv Ww a tov 20 s00v rev 000 x200v ‘OVERRANGE (HHAHHH) 250 pA 2 ma 18 mA 128 mA 4.20, OVERRANGE (HHHHHH) 200 2000 2Ka 2540. 250k9 41M0 35 M0 205 Ma 2-35, ‘The measurement display presents a distinct indication when overrange inputs are detected in any function, An input voltage exoeeding the full seale value for the range selected causcs a display of HHHHHH. In VAC functions, full scale values approximate maximum specified levels (as required to maintain accuracy), The overrange indication therefore also serves as an upper accuracy limit indication 2-98, LOW INPUT INDICATION 2.37. The multimeter notfiesthe userif the input levels too low to maintain specified reading accuracy (V AC functions only). IfaV AC function isselected, LLLLLLis displayed whenever the input voltage is less than approximately 5% of full scale 2:98. WARNING INDICATION 2.39, When in the Scaling, External Reference, Offset ‘or Limits mode, there may be no readily discernible 28 display of the true measurement value, la these modes of ‘operation, the multimeter provides a distinctive display ‘when the voltage is 30V or higher atthe front panel input connections. If this voltage exceeds the overload point for the range in use, the Overrange Indication (ashing HHHHHH) is displayed. If this voltage does not exceed the range overload point, a single H is flashed in the ‘exponent display. NOTE Flashing indicators in the digit or exponent display are a warning only: they have no effect ‘on instrument operation 2-40. ERROR CODES 21, Error codes offer considerable help in identifying Improper procedures or equipment configurations, These codes are explained in Table 2-5.‘Table 2-5. Error Codes ‘CODE Error 0 Error? Error6 Ercoc7 Error Error A Eror Error & Ercor d Error Error Error? Ercora Error 4 enor & MOMENTARY ERROR CONDITIONS (The reading in progress is aborted, but multimeter operation is automatically restored with the next trigger. The function annunciator remains on during a momentary error condition.) FAULT V DC/Ohm Zer6, zero attempted in wrong function (not V OC or OHMS) or an overrange hhas been enteres. Store attempted during overrange condition. Display overtiow error. Extemal Reference error - voltage on on Input exceeds 20V de, Controliee module i faulty Mega! push button usage in any of the three VAC modes lilegal push button sequence in Calibration mode, Invalid push button sequence, o entered. legal value Calibration Memory chip faulty oF not instaled. Sccurs wnen storing inte, or recalling tram, Galioration Memory, Cal Memory checksum problem. ‘Ohms connection problem. ‘SOLUTION Check function, Only V DG er OHMS ave permissible, Change to higher range, oF {i storing eal cor- rection factor) use lower value source. Check offeet and scaling values. Revise external reterence input. Power off: replace Controller module. Use correct button(s). Wait til dsplay clears. Use correct sequence. Wait tl display clears, Use correct sequence ‘or value within limits, oplace or Install Calbration Memory chip. Try new power-up. It necessary, reprogram Cat Memory. Replacement of Calibration Memory may be necessary, Verity proper connections. Check input protection fuses. LATCHING ERROR CONDITIONS. (A valid function must be selected to restore multimeter operation. All function annunciatore ara off during a latching error condition.) System error, usually eppears at power-up or reset Filter module faulty or not instalies DO Signal Concitioner module feulty or not installa, OHMS, oF A OC error. ‘Analog to Digital Converter Module error. Function selection error. The funetlon module selected is faulty oF not installed. V DC problem ‘casas Error 3, ‘At power-up or reset only, an unaliowed ac convorter is installed or the Calisration Memory modula Is installed, Repest power-up or raset Power oft; raplace or ingtall filter module Power oft; roplace or install DC Signal Con- ditioner moaule (Check for improper input level. Check function ‘causing error indication. Applicable module may eed replacement or instalation, Power off replace oF instal Analog to Digital Converter module Select valid function to clear orror condition. Power off replace or install appropriate module Powor oft, remove tho unallowed ac converter or tho Calibration Memory module. The Thermal True RMS Converter is the only ac converter {allowed in the 8506A. The Calibration Memory is 2 standard part of the controlir506A, 2.42, INTERACTIVE PROGRAMMING INFOR- MATION 2-43, ‘The multimeter displays prompting messages uring STORE and RECALL operations, Whenever the STORE button is pushed, the display responds with“. The operator may now designate cither the displayed value or Keysttoked numeries as the programming entry I the displayed reading is being stored, pushing the appropriate terminator button (SCALING, HI OR LO for limits, or OFFSET) completes the operation. The mukimeter adopts both the mode specified with the terminator and the value previously displayed. If eystroked numerics ace being stored, the multimeter displays the digits as they are entered from the front panel. Once all numbers for a particular mode are entered, the appropriate terminator button (SCALING, HI, LO, OFFSET) is pushed. With V DC, OHMS, or ‘A DC functions, kevstroked numerics can be used 10 center the filter mode and sample factor, When either the displayed value or keystroked numerics have been entered, the display resomes the measurement reading function (or HI, LO, PASS in the Limits mode) when the terminator button is pushed 2-44. The RECALL button commands a display of @ ‘stored factor ot value, The procedure requires the following two steps when recalling the offset value, the scaling factor, the filter mode, the sample setting, or the aero value 1. Push the RECALL button (display responds with “P, 2._Push the appropriate terminator button (OFFSET, SCALING, FILTER, SAMPLE or ZERO), The respective Value is displayed as longas the terminator button is held depressed. Once the terminator button is released, the multimeter ‘resumes operation; no mode or value is changed, 2.45, Three push button steps are required to recall a limit or peak value, First press RECALL (*T). Then specify whether upper or lower limit or peak is desired by pressing HI or LO (display responds with “YES?"). Finally, push the appropriate terminator button (LIMITS or PEAK). 2-46, Front Panol Push Buttons. 2-47. The multimeter employs 26 color-coded push buttons on the front panel. Most of the push buttons control more then one function. For example, maay ‘mode control push buttons also serve as numeric entry push buttons when used during a store operation. The ‘number of keystrokes required for any operation is kept to a minimum. Refer to Figure 2-2 for a description of each push button and, where applicable, examples of typical programming operations. 210 248. Operation of the multimeter is straightforward Preset measurement configurations are made at power up, reset, of function scleetion, Programmed values are retained whenever the range or function is changed Desired mode changes are made independently following 4 programming hierarchy of: 1, Measurement Parameters 2. Mathematie Operations Special Operations 249, Measurement parameters define operations that affect the resolution, stability, and accuracy of the reading, Depending on the function selected. aspecifieset, of parameters is available, In V AC functions (HI ACCUR, ENH'D, NORMAL), range, filter, extended resolution, and trigger may be specified. In V DC, OHMS, and A DC functions, range, fiker, trigger, sample, and averaging may be specified. The Zero operation can be performed in the V DC and OHMS. functions only 2-50, Matbematic operations (External Reference or Scaling, Offset) alter the reading to operator requirements, For example, when Offsets used, only the difference between the reading and the offset value 3s displayed. External Reference may not be used in V AC functions. 251, Special operations (LIMITS, PEAK) specify how the reading is used. For example, Peak mode can be used. tocontinuowsly update a record of the highest and lowest readings, and/or Limits mode may be used fora HI, LO, for PASS display of the measurement reading. A ‘comprehensive setup routine issummarized in Figure 2-3 ‘All or part of this routine can be used to establish oF change measurement parameters, mathematic ‘operations, oF special operations, 2-52. Use the push buttons in steady and methodical ‘manner when programming the multimeter. Error codes ‘usualy identify any programming problem and specify 2 solution (refer to Table 2-5). A numeric entry may be ‘aborted at any time prior to termination by pushing the CE button. The multimeter responds by displaying “?: ‘another numeri entry may now be made, or the displayed ‘value may be stored by pushing the desired terminator button. A store or recall operation may be entirely aborted prior to execution by pressing STORE or RECALL a second time, The multimeter reverts to its state priorto thestore orrecalloncea momentary Error C condition elapses.“The FUNCTION push buttons allow selection of the analog measurament function. Standard functions include: 2c volts (NORMAL, ENH'D, HI ACCUR) and de volts (VDC). Optional funetions include resistance (OHMS) and.current (ancy HI ACCUR ial O NORMAL Bl Oo Oo O Push HI ACCUR for maximum ac volts accureey with six second reading times. Eight ranges are available (100 mV, 300 mv, 1V, BV, 10V, SOV, 100V, S00V), Standard resolution i Si digits on al ranges. Extended resolution (6% digits) is available when the AVG bution is pushes. Push ENH'D for an initial HI ACCUR moasurement, which is used to correct subsequent measurements made at NORMAL mode speed. The same eight ranges are avallablo. Extended resolution (6 digit) is available when the AVG button is pushed. Push NORMAL for somewhat reduced ac votts accuracy, but witn fast reading times, The same fight ranges are available. Extended resolution (6% cigs) is available when the AVG button is pushed, Push V 06 ‘or dc voltage measurements with 61 cig resotulion on five ranges (100 mY, 1V, 10V, ‘00, 1090¥). Push OHMS to make resistance measuroments with 51 oF 6% digit resolution on eight ranges (10 ohms, 100 ofime, 1 klonm, 1Okilohms, 100 kilonms, 1 Megohm, 10 Megehms, 100 Megohme). The ‘hms Converter module (Option G2) must be instlle. NOTE Either two-wire o¢ fourwire resistance measurements can be made. Refer to Measurement Terminals end Controls. Push A DC for dc current measurements with 5% digit resolution on five ranges (100 uA, 1 mA, 10 mA, 100 mA, 1A). The Current Shunts modula (Option 09) must be installed Figure 2-2 Front Panel Push ButtonsMANUAL/ EXTERNAL wf . 0 MuTO UTERRAL ‘The AUTO itriggen push button selects the Auto Trigger mode, A flashing SAMPLE annunciator verifies Auto Trigger operation, 1H used in Auto Trigger mode, the MANUAL/EXTERNAL push button disables the Auto Trigger ‘mode (SAMPLE annunciator stops flashing), enabies the front panel Manual Triggering mode, and ‘arms the External Triggering mode, If used in Manual Trigger mode, the MANUAL/EXTERNAL, push button triggers a new measurement: any reading already in progress is aborted and the new reading begun immediately. The display, once updated, is held unti the next manual tigger. An ‘external tigger applied through the rear panel external trigger lack similarly commands a naw reading. An external trigger applied simultaneously with a font panel manual trigger will be Ignored. AUTO must be pushed to reenter the Auto Triggering mode, AUTO RANGE toggles into/out ofthe Autaranging mode, changing the existing rangeitneceesary. The AUTO annunciator lights when Autoranging ie selected. Each use ofthis manual ranging push button selects the next higher available range. AUTO was Previously activated, use of the up-range push button toggles out of Autoranging (AUTO annuneiator off) and steps to the next higher range. No rangechangeie ettected ifthe multimeteris already in the highest range, Use of the downerange push button causes the multimeter to toggle out of Autoranging (AUTO lannunciator off) and assume the next lower avaliapie ange. Each successive ute of the down range button selects the next lower range. No range change is effected if the multimoters already Inthe lowest range. Figure 2-2. Front Panel Push Buttons (cont)CONTROL RESET LOL/BRT @ 0 “The RESET push button fs powerl: ll modes and stored values (other than calibration factors) Oo fare lost If RESET is pressed. Once RESET is used, the multimeter essumes the Power-Up Configuration (without aetual power loss), Temporary zero values are replaced with zero values stored in Calibration Memary. LOLAMT Depending on the remote interface being used, pushing the LCL/RMT button may cause one of oO ‘three multimeter responses. 1) Ifthe IEEE Interface (Option 05) is installed, LOL/RMT can be used to command local Conteol only ifthe multimeter is already in cemote control. LCL/RMT cannot command remote control H the Bit Serial Interfage (Option 06) or the Parallel intorface (Option 07) sinstallee, LOLIRMT can be used to alternately select lacs! or remote control. If no remote interface is intalled, use of LCL/RMT causes a latching error condition, ‘PRODIFIERS : i EXT REF UMITS PEAK SAUEPLE FILTER OFFSET SCALING DODoooood EXT REF —_TnoEXT AEF button toggles into/out ofthe External Reterence mode in V OC, OHMS, and ADC functions only Ether External Reference of Scaling may be enable: selection of one mode [1] ste ne chr Aterponerun ors RECALL EXT REF can bousatoidery sofware Note ‘The extemal roterence voltage, apiied through the rear input connetor, i displayed as long av EXT REF i hla depreseed ‘The LIMITS push button toggles into/out ofthe imite mode without changing stored limits values, A display of Hl, LO, or PASS denotes use ofthe Limits mode. ‘The PEAK push button toggles intofout of the Peak mode, While in the Peak mode (PEAK annunciator lighted), a continuously updated record ofthe highast and lowest reading values is stored. These valuss are also held in memory after tho mode is disabled, Reentry into the Peak ‘made causes previously recorded values to be erased and a new series of peak values tobe stored Figure 2-2. Front Penel Push Buttons (cont)SAMPLE O (CAL DATE) SCALING O the devolts(¥.0C), resistance (OHMS), or dccurrent(A DC) tunctioni selected, SAMPLE can be \ised fo select the number of samples to be averaged foreach display update SAMPLE cannot be Used in V AC functions. ‘AG Vols functions normally use filter mode FO. The titer can be selected for these functions {ifthe ‘input frequancy Is less than 40 Hz) by oushing FILTER. The accuracy of theinstrument is cegraced it the filter is selected for higher input frequencies VDC, A DC.or OHMS's selacted, FILTER can be used to toggle between the slow fiter mode F- FILTER annunciator on} and the fast filter (FO - FILTER annunciator off) Alternately, any of fve Combinations of filter and timeouts can be selected as programmed numerics The OFFSET push button can be used to toggle Into/out ofthe Offset mode (OFFSET annunciator lights), Two methods aro available for simultaneously entering an offset valve and activating the ‘Offset mode 1) Anumerie value may beentered using astore sequence, Forexample, store an offset of 128 as toliows: STORE 1 . 2 § OFFSET 2) A displayed reading can be stored as the offset value. Use the following sequence: STORE OFFSET NOTE In some instances, the displayed value may not be an appropriate otiset value. For example, i the displayed valves being used to zero the multimeter, itis important toverity that no other mathematic operations are in effect. In such acasa, check that OFFSET, SCALING. and EXT FEF annunciators are all off before storing & new offset valve, When the multimeter i inthe Caliration mode (AVG/(CAL,) annunciator flashes), the (CAL DATE} ‘Bush button is used to enter six digits wnich either denote the date or identify the multimeter by ‘umber. These digits may be racallad at any time ‘The SCALING push button can be used to toggle into“out ofthe Scaling meda without affecting any scaling valve already stored. Either of the following two methods can be used to store anew scaling factor and enable the Sealing mode 1.) Use the following sequence to store the display as a scaling factor: STORE SCALING 2) Numeric entry scaling values may be programmed using the fellowing procedure STORE (numerics) SCALING ‘With either method, the Scaling mode is entered withthe inital use of the SCALING button, NOTE Verity that the displayed value is the desired scaling value. Any mathematic ‘operations (SCALING, EXT REF, OFFSET) alteady in effect must be cancelled if the actual measuroment is desired as the sealing valve, To cancel any of these modes. toggle SCALING, EXT REF, of OFFSET end vorty that the respective annuncistors are dark Figure 2-2. Front Panel Push Buttons (cont)With the muttineter in Calibration mede, calibration correction factors can be entered for each range in VDC, OHMS, and A OC functions. Correction factors can also bo siored ata frequency of interest inV AC functions, Correction factors are automatically applied the unoorrocted reading, {CAL COR) Uncorrected readings can be recalled when the Calibration mode is either enabled or disabled. Rotor to Galioration Mode later In this section 7 WELLL yee Si) sae aa Wt ty STORE is used as a frst sten in programming cortain measuremont parameters, mathematic, ‘operations, oF special operations, STORE is the only push button thet can actvate the numeric tentcy keys. The multimeter aompts the second step by cisplaying"?". Following salistofSTORE operations: Measurement Parameters (for V DC, OHMS, A DG only) o-17 SAMPLE STORE 0.1.23 oF ee Mathematic Operations: ‘To store the displayed value as an offset orscaling valu OFFSET SCALING STORE To store a qumeric entry as an offset oF scaling value and enter the respective mode: OFFSET TORE (ounes) ‘Special Operations: ‘To store the displayed value 8s a high or low limit and enter the Limits mods: HI srone fe To store & numeric entry aé high or fow limit and enter the Limits mode: Ht iS Figure 22, Front Panel Push Buttons (cont)‘Tho multimeter utiizes fourteen dual purpose push buttons as numeric entry keys. When programming sample ‘settings or filter modes, a one-or two-digit entry isnecessary. When programming limits, or scalfng andotfeatvalues, a longer entry may be required. Use the following sequence: OJ Mantissa Field: Enter up to seven digits, with decimal point. Toggle polarity (+) bution as requires, Exponent Field: Push EXP button, then enter a single digit exponent, Toggle the polarity button ‘again to set the exponent polarity Use the CE push button at anytime prior tothe terminator (last button inastore numeric sequence) to clear all numerics and revert to 2?" aisplay. Fresh numerics may then be entered immeciately, O ey) ‘The RECALL push button can be pressed to recall and display values stored in the Limits, Peak Scaling, Offset, Zero, External Reference, (V DC, OHMS, A DG functions only), Sample or Filter | ‘modes. For recall of uncorrected readings, or calibration dates, refer to Calibration Mode laterin this section. No stored value Is affected during the RECALL operation. The recalled value wil be displayed as long as the last push button in te sequence is held depressed, To recal measurement parameters SAMPLE RECALL FILTER ‘To recall mathematic operation values oreset SCALING EXT REF {not inv Ac) V DC/OHMS ZERO To recall a special operation value: HI units RECALL Lo PEAK 2-2. Front Panel Push Buttons (cont)“The ZERO push button can be used to store ade volts 2er0 (eny range) or ohms zero (any range), The zero value stored is also applied on all higher ranges in tha same function, For discrete ze/o values on each range, zara must be stored sequentially on aach range (trom lowest to highest), With ‘the initial button push, a new zero valueis stored and the mode is enabled (ZERO annunciator on) Pushing ZERO a second time disables the mode, but retains the previous value. Anewzero values, stored each time Zero mode Is enabled. Refer to text for use with Calibration mode, The AVG pusn button can be used to optimize sample and filter factors for each range in V OC, ‘OHMS, and A DC functions only. In V AC functions, Average mode isnot avalable, but the AVG button can be used to command an extra digit of resolution on most ranges. ‘The Hi end LO push buttons are used to store or recall imit values and for recall only of peakvalues, Reter to STORE and RECALL push button descriptions forthe applicable sequence, Figure 2-2. Front Panel Push Buttons (cont) If multiple programming steps are required, use the saquence presented nere as a generat guide, Use the push ‘outton(s) shown for the action describes. INITIALIZATION CONFIGURATION AT POWER-UP OR RESET (V 06, 1000. manual range, auto trigger, filter mode FO, zero mode on, no ‘other modes or values). Calibration mode must be off before power-up. ACTION PUSH BUTTONS FUNGTION selection V AC vac vac HIACCUR — ENH'D + ang ar ¥86 el , Push V AG HI ACOUR, V AC ENH, or VAC NORMAL and VDC simultaneously for de-coupled ac measurements. Figure 2-3. Programming HierarchyFUNCTION selection (Vv 00, (OHMS, A DC} €@.1f previous function was V AC, the following conditions aro eet ‘Autoranging Filter mode retained Sample factor 7 Al mathematic and special operations values retained, modes disabled bf previous function was V 06, OHMS, oF A DG, the following concitions are set autoranging Previous filter mode retains Previous sample factor retained {Ali mathematic and special operations values retaines, modes cist Previous tigger mode retaines MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS Measuremont parameters establish reading resolution, noise rejection, stability and accuracy. 3 TRIGGER selection ‘fn manual, change to auto O AUTO. b.If in AUTO, change to Manual tiggers MANUAL/ EXTERNAL RANGE selection 42. Toggle into/out of autoranging». Select manual ranging, sop to ‘next higher, (lower) range. ©, Continue stepping to avaliable higher, (lower) ranges. Tt Reading Rate Selection (V DC, OHMS, A DC only) ‘2 Toggle between sample SAMPLE sottings § (2 exp § = pats 32) and 7 (2 exp 7 = —— 128) — », Select any sample saiting trom 0 (2 exp |) t0 17 (exp 17 131.072) FILTER selection FILTER a. AG functions only toggle between fiter mode FO and F VOC, OHMS, A DG only toggle between slow flter(F) and fast fiter (FO), ©. V DO, OHMS, A DC only: select iter F, FO, FA, F2, or F8, V De, OHMS, A DC only toggio the Averaging mode (on or oft. In V AG, enables ‘extended resolution. V OGIOHMS Zero: toggle or off (V 00 or OHMS only). Now zor0 stored each time ‘mode is enabled. Refer to text for use with Calibration mode. Figure 2-3, Programming Hlerarchy (cont)MATHEMATIC OPERATIONS Stop here It only a direet measurement reading |e desired. Further steps yield ratio, deviation, percentage variation and other spacial readings. Foter to Applications in this Section for examples. NOTE Scaling (or External Reterence) is applied frstThe resultotthis operation is then offset SCALING selection (disables External Reference) 8, Store displayed vatue, ‘STORE SCALING enter Scaling move ». Store numeric value {eure SCALING (non-zero), enter Scaling mode, ©. Toggle intofout ot Scaling mode while retaining value. External Reference selection (disables Sealing) — toggle ‘onvolf, Not available In WAC functions, OFFSET selection 8 Store displayed value, ‘enter Offset mode », Store numeric valve ‘enter Offset mode ©. Toggte intovout of OFFSET Otset mode while retaining value. Figure 2.3. Programming Hlerarchy (cont)‘ovations, 12 LIMITS eatection 4 Store displayed valve, enter Limits mode b. Store numerle values, center Limits mode 6. Toggle into/out of Limits mode while retaining values: PEAK: toggle intovout ‘of Peak mode. Previous peak values are lost each lime the mode is reentered. ‘SPECIAL OPERATIONS. Use the reading, as moditieg by any math operations for comparison with satlimite, or record the reaging maximum STORE — (numeric) Cl te iPod ums. units a... 4 PEAK PEAK a Figure 2, Programming Hierarchy (cont) 253. Measurement Terminals and Controls 2-54, GUARDING 2-55, General 256. Guarding may be used to reduce noise and improve accuracy. Common mode voltages, resulting from currents and voltage drops between two points otherwise electrically common, may cause significant errors. Proper use of a floating, guarded multimeter minimizes these errors. 2.57. Generally, guarding should be employed where long signal leads are used, When signal source impedance is high, when making measurements near high-level radiated noise (particularly at the power line frequency), of when making floating measurements, NOTE Errors due to thermal emf's should be considered when making low level, high resolution measurements. Thermal en's (voltages produced by temperature differences beeween contacts of two dissimilar ‘metals or by temperature gradients along a Tength of material) may cause differences of several microvolts. Since the multimeter uuilizes copper input terminal, the use of low ‘emf, shielded cables with copper spade lugs ‘minimizes thermal emf errors 2:68. Guard Selector and Guard Terminal 2-59, Correct use of the multimeter GUARD terminal both protects the instrument and provides more accurate readings. The Guard Selector (EXT GD IN), when disengaged (out), connects the internal guard. In many ‘cases accurate measurements may be made with the selector i this position (shown as in Figure 2-4) Here, the difference in potential between multimeter ground ‘and device ground is very small, or the measurement is not critical. When pushed in, the selector disables the internal guard connection and allows for extemal guard connections as shown in B and C of Figure 2-4, The ‘connection shown in Bis better than thatin A, sincesome ‘common mode current (ICM) is shunted away from the soutee resistance. The connection shown in Cisnecessary when the source may not be eapable of driving the guard ‘The buffer amplifier shown in C prevents this source loading, Practical considerations usually dictate which of the three connections is use 22Fon ] ro ao — -:C =U Fem et (25D — Igyq FLOWS THROUGH ‘SHIELD INSTEAD OF THROUGH TEST LEADS DRIVING THE GUARD FOR A FLOATING MEASUREMENT WHIGH MAY BE LOADED BY DIRECT ‘CONNECTION OF THE GUARD Figure 2-4. Guard Connections 2-60, Guard terminal connectionsare shown in Figure2-4 Guard to chassis ground potential must not exceed SOOV., Guard to SENSE LO potential must not exceed 127V. 2:61, VOLTS INPUT/OHMS SENSE (HI and LO) TERMINALS 72462, Voltage and resistance measurements are made with the VOLTS INPUT/OHMS SENSE terminals, as shown in Figure 2-5. The input on the HI terminal with respect to the LO terminal must not exceed 1000V. The LO to GUARD potential must not exceed 127V. These terminals are internally shorted to the AMPS INPUT/OHMS SOURCE terminals (HI to HI, LO to LO) when the Ohms Selector is inthe disengaged (2-wire) position. NOTE In OHMS measurements, he voliage at the ‘SENSE INPUT terminals is sampled before the Ohms Converter(Option 02)is connected. No connection is made if excessive voliage (EIOV de) is present 202 2-63. AMPS INPUT/OHMS SOURCE (HI and LO) TERMINALS 2464, The AMPS INPUT/OHMS SOURCE terminals fare used when making current (A DC) or four-wire resistance (OHMS) measurements. The potential between SOURCE HI and SOURCE LO must not exceed 280V. The potential between SOURCE HI and SENSE HI, or between SOURCE LO and SENSE LO ‘must not exceed 127V, When the Ohms Selector isin the disengaged (ZT) position, these terminals are intemnally shorted to the VOLTS INPUT/OHMS SOURCE terminals (HI to HI, LO to LO). NOTE In A DC measurements, the voltage at the input terminals is sampled before the Current ‘Shunts module (Option 03) is connected. No ‘connection is made excessive volage(s45V de) is present. 2-65, OHMS SELECTOR 2-66, When engaged (in), the Ohms Selector control isolates SENSE HI from SOURCE HI and SENSE LO from SOURCE LO; four-wire resistance measurements can then be made. When disengaged (out), SENSE His, connected to SOURCE HI and SENSE LO is connected, to SOURCE LO for two-wite resistance measurements, ‘The Ohms Selector does not influence the rear inputs (which are preset in a four-wire configuration), Refer to Figure 2-5. The Ohms Selector may remain disengaged QM) for V DC or ADC nents. However, for VAC measurements, itis that the Ohms Selector be engaged (47) in order to minimize input capacitance. 2.67. REAR INPUT SELECTOR 2.68. When pushed in, the Rear Input Selector disconnects all front panel inputs and connects the reat input connector. Rear inputs are identical to those on the front panel (withthe addition of Ohms Guard), External reference inputs (HI and LO) are always applied through the rear connector (not switched), The Ohms Selector and Guard Selector have no effect when the rear inputs are enabled. The state of the Rear Input Selector can be determined remotely through any of the remote interface options, 2-69. Function 2.70. AC volts (HT ACCUR, NORMAL, or ENH'D), 4e volts, and de coupled ac volts are standard with the ‘multimeter. Optional functions include resistance (OHMS) and de current (A DC), Selection of @ new function automatically cancels any previously selected funetion and places the multimeterin the function change configuration (refer to Table 22). Ifthe same function is successively selected, the multimeter assumes the ‘Autoranging mode, but retains all other modes and values existing prior tothe reelection, One, two, or threeVac orv De iwout Figure 2-5, Measurement Connections85084, annunciators ight to verify a valid function selection. An ‘invalid function selection occurs whenever the necessary analog measurement module is not installed ois faulty; either ERROR 9 or ERROR 3 appears in the display in such cases. Once an invalid function has been selected, the multimeter ignores all other push buttons until a-valié function is selected. 2-71, ‘The Thermal True-RMS Converter uses three front panel function push buttons (V AC HI ACCUR, V ‘AC NORMAL, and V AC ENH'D). The high accuracy mode (V AC HI ACCUR) requires approximately six seconds per reading, but the resulting accuracies af up to 0.016% rival those of thermal transfer standards (at a fraction of the time). The normal mode (VAC NORMAL) displays an rms value ofthe input (updated every 0.5 second), but with reduced accuracies since no sensor linearization is performed. The enhanced mode(V AC ENH'D) takes one initial high accuracy ‘measurement. This measurement is then used to correct subsequent measurements, which are made at normal mode speed (0.5 second). The enhanced mode is specified as long as the following conditions are maintained: the input cannot vary more than +19 from that used forthe initial high accuracy reading, the temperature cannot ‘vary more than 21°C, and the time lapse cannot exceed ‘one hour. Ifthe input changes by more than 1% from that used in the intial high accuracy reading, another high accuracy reading is taken to automatically update the correction factor. 2-72, Measurement Parameters 2-73, SAMPLING 2-74, AC Volts Functions 275. One sample is taken for each V AC reading. ‘Reading time in NORMAL is approximately 05 seoond. HI ACCUR readings require six seconds, ENED requires an inital six second high accuracy reading, then reverts t0 0.5 second normal readings. Any of these reading times may be lengthened slightly when nuthematic operations are in effect. The SAMPLE push ‘button is inoperative when the multimeter is set for ac volts measurements (pushing SAMPLE causes an Error A). A new high accuracy measurement can be ‘commanded in the enhanced mode (ENH'D) by pushing the ENH'D button again, Similarly, when the de coupled enhanced mode is used, a new high-accuracy ‘measurement can be commanded by simultaneously pushing the ENH'D and V DC buttons. NOTE In the Enhanced mode, the Thermal True RMS Converter automatically takes a new reading 10 establish anew correction factor if the range changes (either manual or ‘autorange), the filter setting changes, or the difference between the reading and the present ‘correction factor is 1%, 2-78. DC Volts, Resistance, and DC Current Functions 2-77, The multimeter averages a selectable number of samples for each reading (display update) in V DC, OHMS, or A DC. Noise rejection is influenced by the ‘numberof samples-per-reading and by the filter selection, Bach sample-per-reading setting yields a specific processing time. Additional processing time is necessary ‘when mathematic operations (such as OFFSET or SCALING) are involved, Samples taken are synchronous to the line frequency for local (front panel) operation. Synchronous or asynchronous operation may be specified remotely. 2.78. Sample settings are specified as exponents oftwo. For example, the SAMPLE push button can be used individually to toggle between settings 5 (2 exponent 32 samples-perreading) and 7 (2 exponent 7 = 123 samples-per-reading). Further, any sample setting (exponent of 2) {rom 0 through 17 may be made using the STORE (numeric) SAMPLE sequence, Ifa setting of 0 through 6 is in effect when SAMPLE is toggled, the multimeter assumes setting 7. A previous setting of 7 through 17 is changed to setting 5 when SAMPLE is togaled, 2.9, The SAMPLE annunciator is controlled by both the sample setting and the trigger. At sample ettings from O through 7, SAMPLE flashes once for each triguered reading. The rapid reading rate at0 or | setting yields an apparent steady indication. At saraple settings 8 through 17, the flash rae is preset to that of setting 7. This feature insures a reliable reading-in-progress indication at these slower reading rates 2-80. TRIGGERING 281, Each new measurement is initiated with a trigger. ‘In AUTO triggering, the trigger is generated internally at the end of the required reading time, Triggers may also be applied locally (from the front panel) or remotely. 2-82. Auto trigger commands a continuously updated reading. The frequency ofthis updating is influenced by the number of samples-per-reading and by any extra processing time required by mathematic operations. The SAMPLE annunciator flashes to indicate the triggering ofa new reading. 2.83. Local triggers can be manvally commanded from the front panel. The, duration of each reading. is determined in the same manner a the auto triggers (samples, mathematics). Each use of the MANUAL/EXTERNAL push button commands an immediate response from the mukimerer; any reading already in progress is aborted and a new reading begun, During any manually triggered reading, use of any other push button halts the maltimeter; a new trigger must then. be entered. Conversely, between manually triggeredreadings, the multimeterisinhibited; no display update or ‘SAMPLE annunciation is evident. During this interval, ‘any measurement parameter, mathematic operation, of special operation may be entered, but isnot initiated until the next manual trigger is entered. 2-84. External triggers are applied through the rear panel TRIGGER jack. A local trigger manually applied from the front panel overrides a simultaneously applied external trigger, 2-05. FILTERING 2-06. AG Volts Functions 2.87. Two filter modes (off and on) are available when the multimeter is set for ac volts measurements (HI ACCUR, NORMAL, or ENH'D), The filter off mode (Fo) is set when changing into a V AC function from VDC, ADC, or OHMS. Most V AC measurements use the filter off mode, The filter on mode (F) isto be used only when theinput signa frequency is below 40 Hz. Degraded accuracies result if filter on mode is used at higher signal frequencies. The filter mode can be changed by togaling the FILTER button (FILTER annunciatoris on or filter ‘on mode and off for filter off mode). When any V AC function is selected while a V AC funetion is already in effect, no filter mode change is made 2-88, DC Volts, Resistance, DC Current Functions 2.89, Five filter modes are available. Either of two ‘analog filters (or filter bypass) may be selected. The slow fiker provides better normal mode rejection. The fast filter allows for faster instrument settling while still providing a degree of noise rejection. Whenever filter is used, a timeout (for settling delay) may also be inserted before each reading. No filtering is available for the external reference inputs. Table 2-6 defines the five ter modes, 2.50. Two methods of filter selection are available in VDC, A DC, ar OHMS. Selection of any mode (F,FO,Fl, 2, F2) is possible using the STORE (numerie) FILTER. sequence. The FILTER push button by itself toggles between modes F slow, no timeout, annunciator on) and Fo (fast, no timeout, annuneiator off). The mulkimeset uses preset selection pattern ifa mode other than F or FO Table 2-6, MODE FILTER numecr | riten | Timcour | Leo (bank) slow none on ° fast ‘none off 1 bypass | none ott 2 stow | $50 ms on 3 fest ‘50 ma oft (No Mode Number iS used for slow Titer without timeout, Push STORE FILTER, f Modes ( V DC, A DC, OHMS) 506A, is already selected when FILTER is toggled. The slow filter (F) is always selected when a toggle is performed with a fast filter (FO, FI, or F3) in effect. The fas filter (Fo) is always selected when a slow filter (F or F2) sin effect. Mode FO is preselected at power-up or reset, RECALL FILTER may be used at any time to verify the filter combination in use (without changing the filter mode) 2.01. AVERAGING 292, The Averaging mode presets the sample seting to 10.2 exponent 10 = 1024 sammpes-perreading) and the filter mode to (sow fer, no time out). Thee stings provide optimum stability and resolution throughout the Tange of inputs, Subsequent wse of the SAMPLE ot FILTER push button while in Averaging mode may Jeopardize tis intended optimization. Therefore, sample Settings less than 10 cause the multimeter to ext the Averaging mode. For example, a sample setting of 12, ‘hich specifies greater noise rejection than the sting of 10, is accepted and retained for ll anges within the same function. Conversely, a sample setting of 7, offering less stability, is accepted (out causes the mulimeteroexitthe ‘Averaging mode) 2.83. Filter mode F2 can also be selected in Averaging. ‘mode. Any iter selected other than F or F2is accepted by the multimeter, but causes deactivation of Averaging mode, 2.94, The Average mode can be used to improve display stability (reduce rattle) for measurements in V DC, OHMS, or A DC. Averaging modeisnotavailablein any of the ac volts functions (although the AVG pushbutton, ‘ean be used to command extended resolution in V AC functions). In V DC, OHMS, and A DC functions, the ‘Average mode provides increased display stability in all ranges and an increase in display resolution ia certain ranges. In V DC (10V range only), total of 7-1/2 digits is now available. Other V DC ranges still provide 6-1/2 digits of resolution. In A DC, 61/2 digits (instead ofthe standard 5-1/2) are now available in all ranges. In OHMS, a total of 6-1/2 digits is available on all ranges. ‘Preset resolutions used for standard operation and forthe ‘Average mode are summarized in Table 2-7. 2-95, RANGE 296. Ranges available ineach fanction aresummarized in Table 2-3. A powerup or reset condition sets the ‘multimeter in the 1000V range (V DC fonction), ‘Autoranging disabled. Any function selection enables ‘Autoranging (AUTO annunciator on). Autoranging begins on the highest range for each function (1O00V de, 00 ac, 100 Megohm, or LA). In V AC only, autoranging begins atthe previous range when selecting between V AC. functions. In Autoranging, the multimeter selects the range offering maximum resolution for the measured 228‘Toble 2-7. Resolution RANGE [STANDARD AVERAGING Digits | _pigits Tom’ | 6s o% iv 8% 8% tov &% ™% s00v e% 6% 6% Si % 8% om om e o% &% 6% eo 6% 5 6% 5% 6% si 8% sit o% 5% o% 8% 6% 5% 6% A 5% 6% value. The AUTO (range) push button toggles Autoranging mode on or off. When togeling off, no range change is effected. Fither of the up/down push buttons select manual ranging and step up/down one range when initially used. Each subsequent use steps to the next higher/lower range (available) A range identifiers also displayed with each rangechangein V AC functions. This identifier may also be used at any time in VAC to verify the range in use: just reselect the V AC funetion being used. 2.97. AC volts can be measured on the following eight ranges: 100 mV, 300 mY, 1V, 3V, 10V, 30V, 100V, and 500V, Resolutions vary respectively from 1 uVto 1 mVin Standard operation (or from 1 uV to 100 uV when the AVG button has been used to command extended resolution). Input impedance is 1 megohm/<180 pF. Resolution in each range is illustrated in Table 2-3. 298. DC volts can be measured on five successive ranges from 100 mV to 1000V, Respective resolutions vary from 100 nV to 1 mV. Refer to Table 2-3 for a presentation of display resolution in each range. Input impedance on the 100V and 1000V rangesis 10 Megobms. On the lower three ranges it is greater than 10,000 Megohrns. 2.89, Out of range indications are displayed whenever the reading does not fall within the specified rating in a particular range. When the multimeter isin autoranging, utoranging points cause an automatic new range selection, averting an out of range indication. An out of range indication cannot be averted if the reading is less than that allowed in thelowestrange(LLLLLL displayed in V AC functions only) or greater than that allowed in the highest range (HHHHHH displayed in all functions). 228 When the multimeter is in manual ranging, an out of range indication can be disabled by manually selecting a higher or lower range. Out of range values are presented in Table 2-4. 2-100, _V DC AND OHMS ZERO 2101. In VDC or OHMS, internal de drift can be corrected by zeroing. Good quality, low thermalshorting ‘bars (not shorted test leads) must De applied between INPUT HI and LO terminals during the 2er0 operation. nial use of tie ZERO V DC/ OHMS push button stores the zero correction value and activates the Zero mode (ZERO annunciator lights). Pushing ZERO VDC/OHMS a second time deactivates the Zero mode (ZERO annunciator goes off). A new zero value isentered each time the mode is enabled, Scaling and offset values are ignored in the stored correction value. Attempting (0 store 2er0 in an illegal funetion (A DCor V AC) resutsin, aan Error 0 indication. The ero value can be recalled for the selected range and function (VDC or OHMS). Exiting the zeroed function deactivates the Zero mode, but retains the stored values. Upon reentering the zeroed function, Zero mode and the old value are automatically restored. Applied zero values can becither those stored in ‘a temporary memory or those permanently stored in Calibration Memory. The method of entering ero values in temporary memory also differs from that used for Calibration Memory entries. The following descriptions define which valve is applied and which storing method is used: 1 If Calibration mode i off zero values stored in temporary memory are applied to the reading. ‘When the zero values stored, the same valueis used {or the soloced range and forall higher rangesin the same function. Separate zero values for each range can thereby be stored by starting with the lowest range and working up. This method does not affect Calibration Memory zero values, Calibration “Memory values are automaticaly loaded into the temporary memory when power-up or reset occurs (and Calibration mode is still off). 2. If Calibration mode ison, zero values stored in Calibration Memory are applied to the reading. ‘When the zero value is stored, each value does not affect values on any other range. 2-102, Mathematic Operations: 2-103. Mathematic operations can be specified to change the measured value (as influenced by ‘measurement parameters) before its actually displayed. Ratio, deviation, percentage variation and other mathematically manipulated displays are thereby possible, Scaling can be used to divide the measured value and display the ratio. An offset value can be subtracted from the measured value to display only the deviation Sealing and Offset can be used in combination to display percentage variation, Examples of such operations are siven in Applications later in this section.2104, Use of matheniatic operations is expressed inthe following formula: MEASURED VALUE DI : ISPLAY = eS ENG” OFFSET (OR EXTERNAL REFERENCE) ‘Measured value inthis formula refers tothe measurement as influenced by all selected measurement parameters. ‘This value is subject to the following function-dependeot ‘considerations. L. VDC or OHMS functions: any applied zero value is first subtracted, yielding the measured value, 2. VAC fonctions: Extemal Reference cannot be used. 2-108, SCALING NOTE Ifthe muttimeter isin bork Sealing and Offoet ‘modes, the scaling value is applied before the offset valu. 2106, The Sealing mode divides the measured value {after application of V DC or OHMS zero) by a known amount and displays the quotient. Ratios, percentage deviations, or input/ output relationships can thereby be displayed. The scaling divisor may be a previously displayed and stored value, or any non-zero namerie entry from +10? to +10° and from -10° to -10°. When compared to External Reference, Scaling offers a much Wider range, Only one scaling factor may be stored at a time, 2-107, Storing the displayed value as a scaling factor warrants » word of caution: ensure that the displayed value is the true original display by first toggling out of Sealing and Offset modes (respective annunciators off). No stored scaling or offset value i lost this manner, To store the desired display, push STORE SCALING. 2-108. EXTERNAL REFERENCE NOTE External Reference mode isnot available in ae voltage functions (NORMAL, ENF, or HI ACCUR). Attempting 10 enter Exiernal ‘Reference mode in any V AC function causes ‘an Error A condition. 2-109, Sealing and External Reference modes are mutually exclusive: selection of either mode automaticaly disables the other. The External Reference value (always measured as dc voltage) is applied as an unswitched input through the rear input connector. 25088, 2-110, Immediately aftera power-up orreset, RECALL EXT REF can be used to verify the multimeter’ssoftware ‘number. The fist subsequent use of EXT REF to activate External Reference mode disables this software identification feature, When enabling External Reference mode, the reference voltage is displayed as long as the EXT REF button is depressed. The EXT annunciator is lighted when the mode is enabled. 2-11. The external reference voltage may be a ‘maximum of +20V de on either high or low External Reference input with respect to VOLTS INPUT LO. The voltage between External Reference high and low may rnot exceed 40V de. The minimum acceptable External Reference voltage is the greater of +100 uV or a value found with the following formula: + Vin 1 2-112, Usually, the External Reference low terminal is ‘externally tied to VOLTS INPUT LO. In any event, the revistance between either Extemal Reference terminal and VOLTS INPUT LO should be less than 20 kilohms, ‘A reading rate of eight samples-per-eading and filter bypass are specified for the External Reference input. Vin = 2-118, OFFSET 2-114, In Offset mode, the display represents the deviation from a stored offset value. Measurements of ‘stability or analog variation are thereby possible. The multimeter automatically subtracts a programmed ‘numeric (or previously stored display value) from the measurement and displays the result. No increase in resolution is displayed while in the Offset mode, One value (whether a numeric or a previous display) may be stored at a time, Programmed numerics may range from, +10" to -10°, The stored offset value may be recalled at any time, 2-115. Special Operations 2-116. PEAK 2-117, The highest and lowest deviations in the displayed value may be recorded in the Peak mode. ‘Source stability may thereby be checked over a period of time. The PEAK push button togeles into/out of the Peak mode, High and low Peak values may be recalled at any time without exiting the Peak mode or interrupting further peak recording, The following sequence is used: RECALL HI PEAK RECALL LO PEAK ‘The high or low peak value's latched inthe display as long as the PEAK button is held depressed. 2118, Exiting the Peak mode (toggle PEAK once) halts further peak recording, but does not erase previously 22785080, recorded high and low values. A multimeter function change disables Peak mode and retains peak values, At any time, reentry into the Peak mode (toggle PEAK again) erases previously recorded values. Both Peak mode and peak values are lost during a Power-Up of Reset condition, 2-119, LIMITS. 2-120. The Limits mode may be employed to display a pass-fail indication of measurement values. The mode is entered when a single high ot low limit value is stored, or ‘when the LIMITS button is pushed. A second store sequence must be used if both high and low limits are desired. Either the regularly displayed value or programmed numerics may be used for the limit values, For example, high and low limits of 12.05 and 11.95 would be programmed as follows STORE 1 2.0 $ HI STORE 11.9 5 LO {In this example, the multimeter enters the Limits mode when either the HI or LO button is first pushed. Mode entcy is verified by a display of HI, LO, or PASS. In this case, readings higher than 12.08 yield a HI display, readings lower than 11,95 yield LO, andallotherreadings yield PASS. The limit value(s) are compared to the now Uuansparent display reading with al other parameters and. ‘operations stl in effect, 2121. A display reading can also be stored asa list, value. Use the following sequence STORE HI (or LO) 2-122, Use of Limits mode does notinterrupt other uses of the multimeter. No measurement parameter or ‘mathematic operation is changed: The other special ‘operation (Peak) may be used simultaneously with Limits ‘mode, Any ofthe measurement parameters or operations ‘may be enabled, changed, or recalled while in the Limits ‘mode: he display espondsinthe standard fashion during this process and automatically reverts to limits indications once the process is complete. Limits vahies may be recalled at any time (Limits mode enabled or slisabled). The recall sequence does nt change the state of the Limits mode, The following recall sequence is used: RECALL HI LIMITS RECALL LO LIMITS ‘The recalled value is latched in the display as long asthe LIMITS button is held depressed. 2-123. Pushing the LIMITS button toggles the multimeter into or out of the Limits mode whether or not Jimits values ave been entered. A function change disables the Limits mode, but retains any existing limit values. Once stored, limits values are retained during all Dut Power-Up and Reset sequences. 228 2-124. Remote Control 2125, The multimeter may be equipped with any of three remote interface modules, These modules are fully explained in Section 6. When the IEEE Remote Interface (Option 05) is installed, the front panel LCL/RMT push Dutton can be used to enable focal contro, but eannot be used to enable remote control, Remote control ean only ‘be commanded from the remote location with this interface 2-126. The LCL/RMT push button may be used to toggle into/ out of remote control when either the Bit Serial Remote Interface (Option 06) or the Parallel Remote Interface (Option 07) i installed. Whenever the multimeter is in remote control, whether commanded locally or from the remote, the REMOTE annunciator is lighted 2-127. When in remote, only the POWER push button remains operational in allcircurastances. The LCL/ RMT. push button may remain operational, but is disabled by a Jocal lockout or display off command from the remote (efertoSection6). A power interruption, whether caused by line failure or togeling of the power push button, returns the multimeter to local control, 2-128. Calibration Mode 2-129. DESCRIPTION 24130. The rear panel calibration switch is used t0 enable or disable the Calibration mode (remove calibration seal for access). The AVG)(CAL) annunciator flashes when the Calibration mode is enabled, or is lit steadily when the Averaging mode is, enabled. Regular multimeter operation is significantly altered while in the Calibration mode: 41, Power most not be cycled on or off when the Calibration mode is activated (rear pane! Calibration Switch on). 2. Overrange conditions no longer cause a special {lashing “HHH” indication, 3. Underrange conditions in V AC functions no longer cause a “flashing L” indication. 4. Averaging mode is locked out: the Calibration and Averaging modes are mutually exclusive However, pushing the AVG button when Calibration mode is on does enable or disable latching error indications. 5. All mathematic operations and special operations are disabled, 6, 71/2 digits are displayed on 10V de range and 6-1/2 digits are displayed on all other fanetions and ranges. A sign (+) is displayed forall functions to facilitate potentiometer adjustment, 7. Calibration correction factors (for each range in V DC, A DC, OHMS, and for VAC ranges at afrequency of interest) and the calibration date may be stored, 2131. Hardware calibration is facilitated while in Calibration mode, Enhanced resolution allows for more precise potentiometer adjustment during hardware ‘calibration. With no mathematic operations allowed, the display represents the teue input value 2-132, Troubleshooting is also aided by using the Calibration mode, Latching errors can be disabled to allow special module configurations. CAUTION Latching errore ar@ Intended for multimeter protection and must not be dleabled during normal operation or calibration. Refer 10 ‘Troubleshooting In Seetlon 4. 2-193. USE 2134, The multimeter uses three calibration control: the rear panel calibration switch, and the front panel (CAL DATE) and (CAL COR) push buttons, The rear panel calibration switch activates the Calibration mode and enables use of the (CAL COR) and (CAL DATE) push buttons, Store operations with these two push buttons are used for software calibration and are explained in Appendix 7B, Recall operations can be performed at any time and are explained in the following paragraphs. 2-135, The(CAL DATE) push button can be used in all functions (including the three V AC functions) to secall a six digit aumber. This number may signify the calibration date. For example, a recalled 0 2 1 8 8 3 would signify February 18, 1983, Alternately the six digits may be used. to identity the multimeter 2-136. To rocall th six digit date (or identifies) white in the Calibration mode, push RECALL (CAL DATE) If the multimeter isnot in the Calibration mode, the six digit date (or identifier) may be recalled using the following sequence: RECALL LO (CAL DATE) 2-137, The (CAL COR) push button may be used to recall the uncorrected reading when the multimeter isin the Calibration mode, use RECALL (CAL COR) ‘The uncorrected reading can also be recalled when the multimeter is not in the Calibration mode, Use the following sequence: RECALL LO 2-138, Sean Advance 2-139, The multimeter outputsasynesignal duringeach ‘measurement sequence. This signal occurs after the measurement is complete, but before a new trigger is (CAL COR) 508A, sccepted. The syne signal thereby allows for faster bus communications by advancing a scanner before @ new reading is triggered. The signal (positive going TTL, 3 rmierosecond pulse width, 50-ohm output impedance) is, available at a BNC connector on the multimeter rear panel 2-140. Systems Use 2141, The availability of optional interface modules makes the multimeter adaptable to a large variety of, digital systems. Operating and programming instructions related to remote operation are included with the appropriate optional module. 2-142. OPERATION 2-148. Initial Turn-On 2-144, Before inital trn-on, check that the line voltage specified on the rear panel sticker (near the line fase) ‘agrees with the line voltage actually being used. Ifthereis, ‘any doubt concerning the line voltage setting, refer 10 Line Voltage Selection in Section 4, Also verify thatthe Calibration Switch is off. Once these verifications have been made, connect the power cord and push the POWER button to ON. 2145, The multimeter identities its own software and hardware at initial turn-on. Software is identified with a display of “HI-Y,Y.Y", whereY" represents the software version in use, Hardware is then identified with a display of “CXXXXX,” where "X” signifies any installed options by number (or the Thermal True-RMS Converter as A. 2-146. The power-up (reset) configuration is now ‘established, The multimeter i et for the VDC function, the 1000V manual range, filter mode FO, sample factor 7, ‘auto trigger, zer0 mode on, and local operation. All other ‘modes and values are disabled, The multimeter may now be programmed as described in this Section. A two-hour ‘warm-up ensures rated accuracy. Beter accuracies can be obtained in the Averaging mode afterafour-bour warm- Xp). 2-147. Initial Set-Up 2-148. The three frost panel terminal control (Rear Input Selector, Ohms Selector, and Guard Selector) must be positioned correctly prior to taking measurements Use the following guidelines: I. The Rear Input Selector must be disengaged (out) for front panel inputs or engaged (in) for inputs applied through the rear panel connector, Ohms Guard is only available through the rear connection, External Reference HI and LO is always available through the rear input connector (not switehed). 2, The Ohms Selector must be disengaged (out) for twouwire resistance measurements or engaged (in) for four-wire resistance measurements. For all other functions, the Ohms Selector can be. left disengaged. However, itis recommended that the (Ohms Selector be engaged (in) whenever making 229506A VAC measurements, This setting minimizes input ‘capacitance. Nore The Ohms Selector has no affect on rear inputs, Rear inputs are dedicated in a four- wire configuration. 3,_ The Guard Selector is disengaged (out) for non: critical measurements. Refer to Measurement Terminals and Controls for a full description of guarding when this selector is engaged (in), The Guard Selector has no affect on the rear inputs, 2-149. Measurement parameters, mathemati ‘operations, and special operations can be specified prior to or during measurements. These parameters and ‘operations can be applied to measurements in any function, with the following exceptions: 1, External Reference mode snot available in any of the V AC functions (HI ACCUR, NORMAL, oF ENH'D). 2. Averaging is not available in any of the V AC functions (HI ACCUR, NORMAL, or ENH'D) The AVG pushbutton may be used in the V AC functions to enable an extended display resolution, 2-150. Front panel programming of the multimeter is best accomplished in a sequential manner. This sequence is fully explained in Figure 23. Often, only measurement parameters need be specified, Programming of any mathematic operation requires consideration of mathematics already in effet, 2151. Refer to Figure 2-5 for an outline of ‘measurement connections. Also refer to Measurement ‘Terminals and Controls carter in this Section 2-182. Messurement Instructions 2-153. AC VOLTS (THERMAL TRUE-RMS) * sore It is recommended that all ac volts ‘measurements be made with the the Ohms Selector in the engaged (in) position 10 ‘minimize input capacitance 2.154, ‘Thermal ac-ac transfer measurements can be made using the Thermal True-RMS Converter Module Select the mode of operation desied, as determined by the degree of accuracy and speed required, 2-155. AC Volts Normal Mode (V AG NORMAL) 2-156. Use the following procedure when measuring s¢ volts with the normal mode of the Thermal True-RMS Converter: 2-30 1. Push the V AC NORMAL button (NORMAL annunciator lights) 2. The multimeter assumes autoranging (eginning at the SO0V range) when a V AC function is selected. However, if a V AC function was previously in effect, the previous range is retained as the starting point for any possible autoranging, 3._ Select te filter by pushing the FILTER button ifthe frequency of the input signa is <80 Hz, (The accuracy of the instrument is degraded ifthe filters selected for higher input frequencies) 4. Connect the ac voltage to the HI and LO SENSE INPUT terminals) 2-187. AC Volts Enhanced Mode (V AC ENH'D) 2-158, Use the following procedure when measuring ae ‘Volts with the enhanced mode of the Thermal True-RMS. Converter 1. Push the VAC ENH'D button (ENH'D annunciators light) 2. The multimeter axsumes autoranging (beginning at the SO0V range) when a V AC function is selected. However, if a V AC function was previously in effect, the previous range is retained as the starting point for any possible autoranging, 3._ Selec te filter by pushing the FILTER button if the frequency of the input signa is <40 Hz, (The accuracy of the instrument is degraded ifthe filter's selected for higher input frequencies) 4. Connect the unknown ac voltage tothe HI and LO SENSE INPUT terminals, 5, The initial high accuracy measurement requires six seconds. The rms voltage should be displayed within 0.5 second of the completion of this initial high accuracy reading and updated every0.5 second thereafter, 6. A new high accuracy measurement can be commanded at any time by pushing the ENH'D button again, After six seconds, the SAMPLE annunciator flashes briefly and 0.5 second updates NOTE The Thermal True-RMS Converter automatically takes anew reading 0 establish 4 new correction factor ifthe range changes (either manual or autorange),thefilter setting changes, or the difference berween the reading ‘and the present correction factor is 21%2-159. AC Volts High Accuracy Mode 2-160. Use the following procedure when measuring ac volts with che high accuracy mode of the Thermal True- RMS Converter: 1, Push the V AC HI ACCUR button (HI ACCUR annunciator lights). 2. The multimeter assumes autoranging (etinning at the 500V range) when a V AC function is selected. However, if a V AC function was previously in effect, the previous range is retained as che starting point for any possible autoranging, 3, Seleotthe filter by pushing the FILTER button ifthe frequency of the input signal is <40 Hz. (The accuracy of the instrument is degraded ifthe fiteris selected for higher input frequencies) 4. Connect the unknown voltage to HI and LO SENSE INPUT terminals. 5, ‘The multimeter requires approximately six seconds for each high accuracy measurement. 2-161. AG VOLTS - DC COUPLED (THERMAL TRUE-AMS) 2-162, AG Volts Normal Mode on DG Voits 2-163. Use the following procedure when measuring ac volts (de coupled) with the normal mode of the Thermal True RMS Convert {_ Simulaneously push the V AC NORMAL and VDC buttons (NORMAL and V DC annunciators light). 2, The multimeter assumes eutoranging (eginning at the SOOV range) when a V AC function is seleoted. However, ifa V AC function ‘was previously in effect, the previous range is retained as the starting point for any possible autoranging. 3. Selectthe filter by pushing the FILTER button ifthe frequency of the input signal is<40 Hz, (The accuracy of the instrument is degraded ithe iteris selected for higher input frequencies). 4, Connect the unknown voltageto the HI and LO SENSE INPUT terminals, 5, The ac voltage display is updated every 0.5 second, @ ore. sovencnecrsiss 0 onan acne ae 808A, 1, Simultaneously push the V AC ENH’D and Y DC buttons (ENH'D and V DC annunciators light. 2, The multimeter assumes autoranging (beginning at the SOOV range) when a V AC funetion is selected. However, ifa V AC function ‘was previously in-effect, the previous range is retained as the starting’ point for any possible autoranging, 3, Select the fiter by pushing the FILTER button ifthe frequency of the input sigoal is 20V 38. Controtier Module Faulty 19 Function Module solocted not installed Range Codes ‘The third character of the status response contains the following range information: 100 mv de, 100 uA, 1082 W do, 1V ac, 1 ma, 100 10V ce, 10V ac, 10 mA, ThA YOOV dc, 100V a0, 100 mA, 10 kA 3O00V do, 1000V ae, 1A, 100 Ket 1a soma 100 May Sample Codes “The fourth status response character containe semple information identitied by the following codes: 01 Sample por Reading 1 2.Sampies per Reading 2 4 Samples per Reading 3 8 Sampies per Reading 416 Samples per Reading 5 92 Samples per Reading 6 64 Samples per Reading 7 128 Sampies per Reading or Greator Function Codes “The filth response character identities function: 06 volts AG Volts DC Amps AG Amps onms DC Couples Ac vonts Function Not DetinedTable 24-1, Programming Instructions (cont) Recall Offset and Send on Next Trigger ‘Recall External Ref or Scaling Factor and Send on Next Trigger (8500A) Recall Scaling Factor (85024) Recall External Reference Factor and Send on Next Trigger (85024) Recall Upper and Send on Next Trigger Recall Lower Limit and Send on Next Trigger NOTE The instrument will replay to "GNU" or “GNL" by transmitting she stored limit value. Recall Lowest (Peak) Value Found and Send on Next Trigger Recall Highest (Peak) Value Found and Send on Next Trager5054/8508A, ‘Table 24-2. Programming Instructions (BS05A, 85064) “The following discussion relates remote operation features available withthe 8505A and the 8S08A to existing documentation for remote operation of the 8500 series multimeters, The additional features forthe 850A and the 85064 are presented in this discussion in the same sequence as they would appear in the "Programming Instruotions” table (Table 24-1). Most of the items documented in this table supplement features available with the 802A and asoZ\VAT. Incompatibilities have been Kept to a minimum. Therefore, programs designed for the 8502A are generally ‘competibie withthe 8505A andthe 850A, and BSC2A/AT programsare generally compatiblawith tho 850BA. Thefew ‘areas that ere not compatible are brelly described below. Refer to appropriata areas in ths table for amore detailed description 1, High Speed Mode (1): Some High Speed mode scaling factors have been changed. Also, use ofthe reset ‘command (*) causes the multimeter to both exit High Speed mode and perform a normal reset Range Gommands: Ful scala points and autoranging points have been chenged in several instances. ‘Store Zero Commands (KO, K1)-Zero values are stored in Calibration Mamory whan Calibration modes ‘on, but saparato zero values can be stored in a temporary memory wher Calibration mode is otf. The temporary values are always replaced with the values stored in Calibration Momory whon a power-up or reget occurs with Calibration modo oft INITIALIZATION CAUTION Interruption of input power could affect Callbration Memory entries when the multimeter isn Calibration mode. Do not cycle input power to the multimeter when Calibration mode Ie activated. It power is ON, verity that the AVG/(CAL) annunciator isnot flashing before cycling power to OFF. From the remote, Calibration mode status can be verfled with the GS command (response of = mode of, response of1=mode on). If power OFF, verity thatthe rear panel Calbration switch Is off before cycling power to ON. Both the 8506A and the 8506A assume the same configuration at power up as that described for A502A, with the following exceptions: 1, The Average mode is disabled (00) 2, Calibration Memory factors are retained at al times, These factors include zero corrections for each Fenge In de volts and ohms functions, gain corrections for each range in each function, and the calibration dete (or instrument identtication) number. External Reference at power up or resets used as temporary storage for the multimater softwere version number. The GNA command can then be used to recall this number. Any uso of the X command subsequent to power-up or reset replaces this number with the value applied at the extemal reference inputs. Zero mode is enabled withthe zero values stored in Calibration Memory HIGH SPEED MODE Selaction of the High Speed mode sets the following conditions: 1. The ** command both enters the High Space mode and triggers @ reading 2. Use of any character (orbit patton) other than "?" causes the multimeter to xitthe High Speed mods, Use ot "*” causes the multimeter to both exit the High Speed mode and perform a normal roset. ‘Selection of Hign Speed mode specifies the binary output format. Any previously selected output format Is restored once High Speed mode is exited ‘The muitimetertront pene! display isbienk whileHigh Speed mode is on. The previously selected display ‘moda is restored once High Speed mode is exited.‘Tablo 24-2. Programming Instructions (850A, 8506A) (con!) High Speed mode specifies ssynehronaus, single trigger mode (72). The previously selected trigger ‘ode is restored once High Speed mode is exited, ‘The high speed reading mode ("") cannot be used for any ac vals function (normal, enhanced, orhighaccureey) with the 85064. Voltage and Current Reading in “” ‘The following ecale tactore are used FUNCTION | UNITS DC volts (%) v oc Amps () | mA AG Vots v {@508A only) AC Amps ma (85084 only) *Ditfers trom @02A FUNCTION COMMAND CHARACTERS. “The 505A uses the same funetion command characters as those listed. Tho"C" command (decoupled acvlts) can only be used when the True-RMS Converter (Option -09A) is intalled. When an €S0SA function is chenged, the multimeter fs configured as follows: 1. ifthe same function is re-selected, the multimeter assumes autoranging and retains all other existing ‘odes and stored values. Ita new function fs selected, the folowing configuration is sat & Autoranging (A) is set 'b. The existing trigger mode, samplo, and iter are retained. However, ifAverage mode was previously on, itis turned off, sample is set to SY and filter is set to FO. Offset, External Reference, Sealing, Limits, nd Peaks aro turned off (PO, x0, U0 respectively), with al respective valuos retained. Zero mode is set off if a function other than de volts (V) or ohms (Z) is selected. If do vots () oF ‘ohms (Z) is selected, the zero mode state (on or off is restored to that in effect the last time either function was selected, Zero mode Is always set on when a power-up oF reset occurs. Values stored in temporary memory ae retained and are defined as those loaded from Calibration Memory atthe Ist power-up or reset, of subsequent values stored with Calibration mode ott €. Callbration mode ie on or of (as determined by the Calibration Switch setting) and gain correction factors are enabled (MO). |Whea an 8506A function is changod, the multimeter asgumas a configuration defined by the variety of both olé and rhew functions, One variety includes de volts (V), ohms (Z), and de amps (I), The second variety includes al ac volts functions (VA, VA1, VA2, ©, C1. and C2). Four typos of configuration change are therefore possible, Each of these changes resembles that éetailed above for the 8506A, with the following excoptions: 4. Inti function was V, Z, or — New function is, Z, or I ‘The 850A configuration is used,Initial function was V, Z, oF | ~ New function is ae oF ac+de votts 12. Filter mode off (FO) is set No sample setting is allowed. ©. Zero mode is oft, Initial function was ac or acdc volts — New function is V, Z, ort 1 Filter made on (F) or off (FO) is retained. Sample $7 is set {itil function was ac volts — New function is ae volts Ifthe inital and new functions are both ac volts (or both acide voit}, manual ranging mode I retained at the same range, or autoranging is retained (starting at the same range), the change is betwoen an ac volts function (VA, VAt, VA2) and an acdc volts function (C, C1 C2), autoranging is automatically enabled. For ail types of change (ac to ac, sc-tdo to ac, ac to acide, oF aoe to acdc), Averaging mode (extended resolution) and all other modes and values are retained. No sample changeis allowed in ‘any BEOBA ac volts function, ‘The following commands are used when intially selecting an @S06A ac volts function: 4. VA: VAG Normal 2 VA4: VAG Enhanced 3. VA2: VAC High Accuracy ©: VAG Normal (06 Coupled) ©1:VAC Enhanced (OC Coupled) ©2:VACHigh Accursey (D¢ Coupled) NOTE AC volts function commands used with the 8$024V/AT are compatible with the 8506A. However, the six function commands mentioned above alow tor faster, drat entry ito the desirod 8506A ao volts mode, 1th @506A is already in anac volts function, an abbreviated command can be uted when selecting either ofthe other ‘wo a0 volts functions, When selecting between ac or de coupling for ac volts, the full eammand string montioned ‘above must be used. The abbreviated commands are as follows: 1. $0: VAC Normal 2 $1: VAC Enhanced 3. $2: VAC High Accuracy‘Table 28-2. Programming Instructions (8805A, 8508A) (con!) RANGE COMMAND CHARACTERS: “Th nine range commands used with the 8505A or 8508A speci the fll scale values by function 2s follows: BEVOLTS | ACVOLTS | ACVOLTS | DC AMPS | ACAUPS ‘OHNE o o oy orz1y 3505, 25054 "auto ‘Auto Auto ‘Auto "Auto 200 mv Auto 3126 yA | 200nme 2 25v 28ma | 200.chms 2ov 20v 20.mA 2 kohms nav teov 160m | 20kohme 1200v xo00v 128A 200 kohms ‘Avto ‘Auto ‘Auto 441 Mohms Auto Auto ‘Auto 35 Mohms Auto. Auto Auto 265 Mohs Resolution available for remote readings is 2s follows: ‘ASHI DIGITS* FUNCTION RANGE "AVERAGING OR STANDARD MODE | "CALIBRATION MODE DG votts (¥) +100 miv (RO) 6 (6%) on aviR) eK oh 109 (R2) oe ™% ‘100v (F3) 6% BH 1000V (RA) 6% 6 (Ohms (2) 10 ohne (RO) o om 100 ohms (R1) 6 6% 1 kohm (22) ox a 10 kohms (F3) em 8% 100 kohms (R4) o% 11 Mohm (RS) ee 10 Mohs (RB) ex 100 Mohms (R7) A Bc Amps (1) 100 ya (RO) 6% (6) ma (Rt) o% 10 mA (R2) 6 109 ma (RB) ou 1A (4) ee 100 A (RO) 54 4 ma (1) 6% 301ma (R2) o% 100 ma (R3) eu 1A (RA) eu ‘AC Volts (VA) wey ou er ov (Ra) on AC +06 (6) 300v (F3) 4 (85064 only) 1000 (4) en8505488088, ‘Table 24.2. Programming Instructions (8505A, 8506A) (cont) ‘ASCH DIGITS™ FUNCTION RANGE ‘AVERAGING OR STANDARD MODE | caLiBRATION MODE TE Volts TO eV RO) oH (5m) oH (WA, VAT, VA2) 300 mv ¢R1) 6 (6%) ou or AC + DC. + (RR) oe on (€,C1, 2) 3v (a9) en ee (8506A only) tov (Ra) eA oH 30V (RO) on on 100 (Fé) os ox 500V (7) on ee “Rlosolution in binary mode is generally the same asin ASCII mode. Differing resolution binary modeis shown in parentheses. ‘SAMPLES PER READING COMMAND CHARACTERS Use of the sample commands is modified as follows: 1. With the 85054, samples-per reading can be sat with command S, followed by one or two digits (0-17) Digita greator than 17 causo a command string ercor (08). The H command can still be Used, but the ‘multimeter recognizes only one following digit (0-9, corresponding to $8 through S17 respectively). With the 85068 (do volts, ohms, de amps only) samples: per-reading can be commanded in the manner described above, With the 8506A set foracvols, no sample changes are allowed. Therefore, commands $0through S17 (or Ho through H) cannot be usad for sample settings when the 850A is set for ac volts normal, enhanced, Drhigh accuracy. However, the frst three commands (SO, St, $2) are used when commanding ac volts functions as follows: SO commands ac volts normal. When initially commanding an a6 volts function, only VA (for ac coupling) or C (tor de coupling) need be usod. When tho multimeter is already sat for either of he ‘ther two ae volte functions, ae volta normal can be eelected by using SO only 81 commands ac volts enhanced. When intially commanding an ac volts function, VA (for ac ‘eovpling) oF C1 (for de coupling) must be used. when the multimeter Ie already get for elthor of the cother two ac volts functions, ac volts enhanced can be selected by using St ony. 'S2 commands ac volts high accuracy. When intially commanding an ac volts function, VA2 (for ac ‘coupiing) oF C2 (for de coupling} must be used, when the multimeter is airaady set fr aither of the ‘other two ac volts functions, ac volts high accuracy can be selected by using 52 only. FILTER COMMAND CHARACTERS ‘Any fitter command Is acceptable forthe 8505A or tha BS06A (in V, Z, oF I only). However, when Average mode Is ‘enabled, titer Fis intially salacted ang can only be changed toF2.orre-selected. Any otha iter solection (FO,F1,0r F), while accepted by the multimeter, sts tne Average mode disabled and tho sample at S7. When the 8506 is in an ae volts function, only filter FO (setat new function selection) or F (subsequently soloctod for Inputs less than 40 Ha) is allowed TRIGGER COMMAND CHARACTERS 9 (8S0SA oF 8506A) i in a continuous tigger mode (T or T1), the reget command (*) casos a rormal multimetor ret, All other commands are buttered and examined only wher the halt command (3) is sont“Table 24-2, Programming Instructions (9505A, 8506A) (cont) With any tigger mode, no command string ie examined unt the oxisting reading or recalied value is returned. Any reading or recall value commanded (but not yet retumed) can be discarded by sending the halt (8) command. Ha Continuous trigger mode (T oF T1) isin effect when (3) is sent, the multimeter contiguration is changed to single triggor mode (T0 or T2), and any butfered commands (with a terminating character) are executed AVERAGING COMMAND CHARACTERS. With the 86084 (at functions) and the 8S08A (de votts, ohms, dc amps only), the “0” character Is usodto commanda preset sample and fer combination for each function and range to optimize accuracy and stabilty. Averaging also provides an extra digit of rosolution in soveral ranges (as defined under RANGE COMMAND CHARACTERS). The following commands are available: 1.0: Averaging mode enabled. 2. 00: Average mode disabled. Enabling of Average mode in the situations defined above sets the multimeter to sample $10 and titer F. With ‘average mode enebled, samplos St1-S17 or titer F2 can also be selected. Disabling ot Average mode changes the ‘semple and fitor agein and accure under any of the following circumstances: 4. Command 00 is sont, Averaging mode Is dlsablad. The sample is set to 87 and tho fier Is sat to FO. 2, _Thefunction is changed. Tho sample i sat to $7 and the titer is setto FO, fan ac voit function sintially aloctod withthe B506A, only filer FO is et. If change is mado between BS0GA acvolts functions (VA, VAI, VA2, G, C1, C2), Averaging (extended resolution) is retained. ‘Azample orfiter nat allowed in Average mode is commandad. if S0-S@ is commanded, Average modes disabled, the new sample setting is accepted and the filter is set to FO. Ifa fiter other than F or F2 ‘olected, Average mode is disable, the new filter's accepted and the sample is set to S7. ‘With the 8506A set for any ofthe ac volts functions, Average modo is not available, However, the 0 oF 00 command ‘can sil be used to enable or disable extendiod resolution (as defined under RANGE COMMAND CHARACTERS). In this situation, only tho sample and filter restrictions defined by the €506A ac volts functions are applicable. No ‘sample change can be mado. Oniy iter FO ar F (orinput signals less than 40Hz) can beselectod.ifasample change Ts attempted or an unallowed fiter ie commandad, a momentary error Is set and extended resolution Is retained. Extonded resolution in 8506A ac volts functions is claabledifthe O0 commands sent. Ita changes made betwean ac volts functions, extended resolution is retained withthe existing filter mode. Ifde volts, ohms.ordcampsis selected, fextonded resolution (Average mode) is disabled, the filter is net changed, and the sample is set to $7. Whenever the “0” character is used (850A oF BSOGA - any function), the multimeter responds with the following output format: INARY OUTPUT FORMAT 16-81t Format (81): eves | avreq| it Format (8) favre 1] favre] pyre prte ¢| Example: ‘90000011 , 10000000 9000.0000 000.0000 900.0000 9000 0001 | impliog Binary Point Sign Bit Exponent Sign Bit——— ee eee le‘Table 24-2. Programming instructions (@505A, 8506A) (cont) ASCII OUTPUT FORMAT Digits 4, 5, 6, 7.8 Digits 1, 2, 3 and decimal point Digit 8 is used only on the 10V de range to yield 714 digit resolution. On all other ranges anc functions, 6% digt resolution is used and digit @ is set to 0, ‘OFFSET COMMAND CHARACTERS \wmnan storing the previous ceading as an offset, both the BS05A and the BSO6A use the displayed value inthe same manner 28 does the 8502A, LIMITS AND PEAKS COMMAND CHARACTERS When Limits testing is enabled (U), an error is identifies by either of the following responses: 1, The standard error response message (programmad withthe K3 command) is normally returned. no such standard error responee message has been programmed since thelast power-up or eset, "2" 's caturned to identify an ecror occurring uring limits testing, CONTROL COMMAND CHARACTERS ASCII Data Output Format Digit 7 is used with the 8505 and 8506A whenever 6 digits of resolution areavailable. 5% dighteareavalablo, digit 7's not needed and is consequently set to 0, CALIBRATION CONSTANT ‘Tho Calibration Memory isa standerd festurewith the S0SA andthe B506A. Therefore, the" M"and°MO” commands may be used at any time to inhibit or enable Calibration Memory gain correction factors. Zero correction values, although applied in do volts (V) or ohms (2), can be controled when the muitimeter sin any function, The following commands are avaiable: 1. M1 inhibit zero correction valves. 2 M2: enabie zero correction values, Calibration Memory allows for software calibration of al functions and is flly described in Appendix 7B. Although ‘Software calipration procedures are not discussed here, the following considerations must be made i Calibration mode is activated Calibration gain correction factors are applied tothe reading when Calibration modeis on orf andthe command {inhibit Calibration Momory factors) has not been sent. Resolution available fo each range and function isthe same {or Calibration modo as for Averaging mode (refer to RANGE COMMAND CHARACTERS). Calibration mods can be ‘enabled or disabled (only when the multimeter isin local control) by positioning of he rear panel Calibration Swite. Zero correction values are applied in dc volts (V) or ohms (Z} whanever the M2 commend is inetfect. The zeromode is always turned on atpower-upor reset. The actual zero values arethoae storedin Calibration Memory (enteredwith the multimeter in Calibration mode) or separate values entared into temporary memory {when the multimeter is not in Calibration mode). Temporary zero memory is always loaded with Calibration Momory zero values when a power: Up ar raset occurs.‘Table 24-2. Programming Instructions (8505A, 8506A) (cont) MEMORY COMMAND CHARACTERS. STORE ‘Cormmands KO (store de volts zero} and 1 (store chme 2er0) can be used with elther the B505A or the B508A, However, the zere value is stored in the following new fashion: 1. HtCalibration mode is on (GS responce = 1), any zero value entored with the KOor Kt commande stored | yov--] Figure 3-5. Controller Block Diagram Auorean on AONANO ALE 3NIT t F Nouwuarvo5064 3-17. An interrupt may be externally requested by pullingthe EXTINT line low. When the microprocessors ready to accept the interrupt, the interrupt acknowledge (INA) signal is generated. The requesting module must respond with an ACK and a data bit (on IDI-ID3) which, is used as a priority vector by interrupt control. 3-18. Software or hardware resets may occur. Software resets resull from front pane! requests or remote requests. Hardware resets are generated from the reset logic by ‘monitoring line frequency on RTS. On power-up, or for line disturbances, the reset logic initializes the rieroprocessor and other logic. At power down, the reset signal prevents erroneous operation 3-19. The contro! logic can be divided into two areas: control of the microprocessor and control ofthe external logic. The microprocessor control logic is used when the ‘microprocessor enters and exits wait slates. The external control logic is responsible for latching status information from the microprocessor atthe beginning of each instruction cycle. The status information controls and synchronizes the activities of the externa logic 3-20. Front Panel 3.21. The front panel serves as an interface between the ‘operator and the controller. The display is multiplexed by the coatroller by means of addressing the front pane! for cach digit, One direct address, two indirect addresses, and the accompanying data determine which digit or annunciator wil light and which segments will light. An indirect address requires @ previous, valid direct address to set up the indirect response. Another direct address enables the switch matrix to be read to determine if any function changes are desired. The eycle of updating each digit and annunciator and reading the switch matrix requites approximately 28 ms and is continuous. Input terminals, 1-35, ae physically located on the front panel ‘but have no electrical interaction with the front panel, 3-22. DC Signal Conditioner 3.23. DC signals from the input terminals (direct in VDC), from the Thermal True RMS Converter (V AC), ‘¢ fzom optional signal conditioners (OHMS or A DO) are routed through the DC Signal Conditioner to be ‘brought within the range of the A/D Converter (20). Figure 3-6 isa block diagram of the DC Signal Condi- tioner. Gain or attenuation factors are selected by the microprocessor addressing the module. Data from the data bus is latched into the control circuitry and used to select relays in the attenuator and switches in the amplifier feedback circuit. The combination of the attenuator and feedback-controlled amplifier give gain factors of 1,10, oF 100 and attenuation factors of 1 or 64 3-24, Active Filter 425. The purpose of the-Active Filter module is to ‘multiplex de signals to the A) D Converter and to switch ‘analog filters into the signal path. Figure 3-7 isa block diagram of the Filter) External Reference module. Five filter modes may be selected from the front panel. For external reference measurements, the signal conditioner input, the External Reference HI input and the External Reference LO input are multiplexed to the A/D Converter. Samples are taken of each input and arithmetielly manipulated by the Controller to arrive at a reading. 3-26, Fast Rt A/D Converter 3:27, The Fast R? A/D Converter employs Fluke’s patented recirculating remainder (R2) technique for converting a de input signal into a binary, bitserial data stream. The R? technique has been modified for microprocessor control. Obtaining a sample is five-step process. Each step consists of a decision period of five decisions and a subtraction period. Set-up of the fonverter, decisions, and reset are initialized by the Controller addressing the A/D Converter, Figure 38 isa block diagram of the R? A/D Converter. INPUT HI ATTENUATOR, Bus INPUT Lo HIGH QUALITY ACh 4 100, 3, 4 ‘CONTROL GUARDED BUS FEEDBACK NETWORK Figure 3-6. DC Signal Conditioner Block Diagramjp SIGNAL CONDITIONER MULTIPLEXER, FAST FILTER: stow FILTER Figure 3-7. Active iter Block Diagram 3-28, During the frst step, the input signal is applied to the Summing Node, The polarity of the imput is devected and the resulting bt of information is transmitted to the Controller. On the basis ofthe returned polarity, the A/D. module selects which reference polarity is required: positive for negative inputs, negative for positive inputs ‘The first of five precision currents is switched into the ‘Summing Node and a polarity bit returned. Ifthe polarity ischanged, the first current is switched off. Ifthe polarity is not changed, the current is left on. Then the next current is switched into the Summing Node and another polarity bit returned. Another decision is made and soon ‘until all five currents have been switched into the ‘Summing Node and five decisions have been made. This ‘completes the first decision period. The five precision currents are related by powers of two. The fifth eurrent has a resolution of thirty two. 3.29. Following the decision petiod is a subtraction period, Feedback through the Remainder Storage nulls a pe REFERENCE POLARITY SWITCH PRECISION VOLTAGE, REFERENCE, PRECISION Divi ea TS ‘ANO MULTIPLEXER, DER 4D) is CONTROLLER INTERFACE AND. DECISION Logic ad ATS oe SUMMING. REMAINDER STORAGE AND. NODE MULTIPLEXER REMAINDER AMP. FROM FILTER MODULE POLARITY DETECTOR Figure 3-8. R* A/D Converter Block Diagram5064 whatever remainder was left after the five currents have been switched into the Summing Node. The remainder is, amplified by 16 in the Remainder Amp and is stored ona capacitor in Remainder Storage. This completes the frst step, The input is now switched out af the Summing Node and the amplified remainder switched in forthe next step. ‘There are two remainder channels in Remainder Storage land they are alternated ia the four subsequent steps. Since the fifth current bas resolution of thirty two and the Remainder Amp has a gain of 16, the first bit of astep has the same significance as the last bit ofthe previous step. 3.30. OF the five steps required to complete a sample, the frst uses the input signal for decision and subtraction periods. The four subsequent steps alternate remainder ‘channels to use the amplified remainder ofthe preceding Step for decision and subtraction periods. Polarity bits, returned at each decision are accumulated by the Controller and assembled into a 24-bit word describing the polarity and magnitude of the input 3-31. Thermal True AMS Converter 3.32, This deseription is divided into two parts. The first, is a theoretical description of the rms converter. The second is the operation of the rms converter within the multimeter 3:33. THEORETICAL DESCRIPTION 334, Previously AC/DC transfer measurements were ‘made by sequentially applying an unknown ac voltage and 2 varable de voltage to an rms sensor until the ‘outputs were equal, The rms voltage was then assumed to bbe equal to the value of the de voltage applied atthe time the two inputs were equal, The Thermal True RMS Converter module differs in that it uses the de equivalent value of the rms sensor’ first output to serve asthe first, approximation for the comparison. Therefore, if a computation capability is available, and the transfer curve of the sensor is reasonably smooth, the first iteration is the only one necessary to obtain a high Accuracy measurement. 3:35, Figure 3-9 shows an ideal curve where the rms input (X) equals the de output (Y), an example of an factual curve, and the positions on the curves for two separate readings. X1 represents the value ofthe original ‘unknown rms input and Y1 represents the de value of the sensor output. The difference, or error, between the two values is represented by El. A second de voltage (X2) equal to YI is applied to the sensor which produces an ‘output Y2. From these it can be seen that: YI=X1-FEL Y2=X2+E2, and X2=V1. Substituting these values into the formula (Y 1}-(¥2) the rms value ofthe original input ‘ean be computed from the following derived formula 24-(¥2) 2XIFEN)-(X2+E2) 2X14 EI) (XI+EI+ED) XIHEI-E2) X (computed) % UL, Figure 9-9 Ideal Curve 3.36, Solution of the example formula shows that by doubling the first sensor output and subtracting the second sensor output, the original input ean becomputed to an accuracy determined by how much the error ‘changes between the two readings. The loser together the two poiats and thesmoother the error curve, the lower the resultant error (E1-E2). 3:37, SYSTEM OPERATION 3:38. Figure 310 is a block diagram of the Thermal True RMS Converter in relation to the multimeter when used in the thermal true rms function, The unknown ac signal is applied through the input attenuators, ranging amplifier, and sensor switching circuits to the Fluke thermal Sensor. The sensor output is simultaneously measured by the multimeter and routed through the sensor switching circuits for storage by the sample/ hole circuit. The measured value is doubled and the result, stored in memory (part of the controler). The controller ‘module then commands the logie contro circuit to alter the sensor switching circuits to open the path from the ranging amplifier output and to close the path from the sample) hold output (the stored sensor measurement) to the thermal sensor input. The sensor output is then measured again by the multimeter and the result subtracted from the stored value (twice the first measurement), The difference is displayed as the rms value of the original input sign 3.39, The unknown input signal must be within the ‘dynamic range of the measuring circuit to use this technique. The input attenuator circuit and ranging amplifier, as directed by the controller (system software) through the logic circuit, bring the input signal within thegod walannainy Bod YOLYNNaLLY ouncauns l Figure 3-10. Thermal True RMS Functional Block Diagram85088 range required. AC accuracy limitations at full scale for this technique are primarily due to the flatness of the input attenuator and the ranging amplifier. At one tenth ‘of full scale the limitation is 1/f noise in the sensor. DC tations are primarily due to the input diftof the ranging amplifier. The 6-second response time is determined by the thermal sensor time constants and the associated circuitry, 3-40. Front/Rear Switch Assembly 341. Analog inputs are applied either at front panel terminals or through a rear pane! connector, The Front/Rear Switch Assembly is controlled by the Rear Input Selectoron the front panel. When disengaged (out), this selector routes front panel INPUT HI and LO, SOURCE Hi and LO, and GUARD connections to the multimeter analog bus. The front panel Ohms Selector ‘and Guard Selector influence only the front panel inputs these two selectors have no effect on the rear inputs ‘When engaged (in), the Rear Input Selector routes INPUT HI and LO, SOURCE Hand LO, GUARD, and, ‘OHMS GUARD from the rear input connector to the analog bus. External Reference Hl and LO inputs are also applied through the rear input connector but are not switched, Separate fuse protection i used for front panel (SOURCE HI) and rear (SOURCE HI) inputs Front/Rear Switch position is sensed by the Controller via _a photocoupler, This arrangement allows for interrogation of the Front/ Rear Switch position through 4 remote interface while maintaining guard integcty. 3-42. CIRCUIT ANALYSIS. 3-43, Introduction 3.44, Detailed cireuit description of each module in the standard mainframe is presented in the following paragraphs. Optional modules are covered in Section 6. ‘The block diagram description should be read first to get an understanding of the overall functioning of the ‘instrument. Schematic diagrams are located in Section 8 (Geetion 6 for optional modules), Table 3-1 is a list of rnemonie definitions used in the Controller schemat 3-45, Controller 3:46. TIMING 3-47. Refer to Figuce 3-11. Timing for the ‘microprocessor is derived from a 12V, two-phase clock (01 and 02). The two-phase clock is generated by clock generator U4, which is designed to meet the timing requirements of the microprocessor. The clock generator also uses internal logic and a SYNC pulse from the microprocessor to generate an STSTB signal (which clocks microprocessor status information). The period of the OL clock ($85 ns) governs the duration of a machine cycle; there are three to five states in a machine eycle and one fo five machine cyeles in an instruction cycle 3.48, Shaped line frequency pulses ar applied to phase- locked loop U26 which runs at eight times the line frequency (480 He for 60 Hz line, 400 He for $0 Hz line). 10 ‘Table 3-1. Mnemonics AD-AIS ACK ACKINT cPuINT CPUREADY CPURESET 0-07 p3in OLOAGK EXTCOM EXTINT FLINE BxFLINE FRONT/REAR Ico1c7 ICENABLE 1oo-107 INA INP INTA INTCLR LINEREF MARKINT a se our READY RESET RUN SCANADV stop ststa SYNC SYNCDEXTINT vob ‘Address bus on controller Acknowledge signal from module Interrupt generated wien module does not respone Interrupt signal tor uP Ready signal for uP Reset signal Data bus on coatrolior Data bus input signal (fom 1) Delayed vorsion of ACK Module communication signal Interrupt from module ‘Shaped line frequency signal 8 times tine froquancy Front or rear input signal Module adcress/conteol bus Enable module address signal Module data bus Interrupt acknowledge signal In sponse to EXTINT 10 stats signal Interrupt acknowledge status signal Clear intercuptsignat Line reference signal, bus input on RTS Interrupt to aynchronize to Hino frequency (One phase of uP clock Other pase of uP clock VO status signal Signal to generate CPUREADY Reset signal Exot wait state signal ‘Scan advance signal, A/D ‘conversion complete Enter wait state signal Clock signat to lateh ui? status ‘Signal from uP, used to ‘generate STSTB Synchronized interrupt from module 8V supply +45V supply +H2V supply -12V supply Logic common LP in wait state signal Write data signal from 4= at [oto ye = 2, TO pe | 15.06 M2 [SYNC cnom uP STSTB_to status LATCH x LINE FREQUENCY DELAYED Ver $ NTA INTA our. Figure 311, Timing Ciroults 9-49, ADDRESS AND DATA BUSES 3-50. ROM locations are decoded from Ald and A13, as chip seleets and from A0 through A12. RAM locations are decoded from Al4 and AI, as chip selects, and from ‘AO through A10. External roodules are selected by setting AAIS high, Inverted forms of AB through Ald are sent out as ICO through 1C6 on the unguarded bus. The data bus lines (DO through D7) are connected directly to internal ‘memory and through tristate buffers tothe extemal data bus (IDO through ID?) 351. RESET 3.52, Refer to Figure 3-12. Shaped line frequency pulses are applied to U2 and U3, providing @ hardware reset on power down, power up, orfor missing linecyele pulses. In Any ofthese three rset conditions, retriggerable one shot U2 (T=40 ms) generates a reset pulse for up counter U3. Alter the reset 10 U3 is removed (delayed Ver high ora line frequency pulse), U3 must be clocked by eight line frequency pulses to raise Q4 high and remove the reset, signal. The reset pulse is held for eight line cycles to allow time for the power supplies and microprocessor oscillator to stabilize 3-63, STATUS LATCH 43-54, Referto Figure 3-13. Duringthe firs state ofevery ‘machine cycle, the microprocessor sends out a status ‘our pour we. |_syncoegTINT bp SYNGDERTINT word on the data bus, This status word contains the information for estesnal logic to synchronize with microprocessor activity (e.g, memory read, interrupt acknowledge). Clock signal STSTB (from U19) clocks this information into quad D-type flip-flop U12 for use during the machine cycle. External interrupts are also Tatched into the status latch for syachronization to the microprocessor. 3-55. WAIT LOGIC 356. Refer to Figure 3-14. When the microprocessor addresses an external module, the wait sate logic forees the microprocessor to enter a wait state and allow the module time to respond. When the microprocessor acknowledges an interrupt, the wait stale is similarly forced to allow time for the interrupt vector to be ‘generated, A wait state is entered when a rising edge on STOP (the clock input Ul) sets READY low. Clock anCPUREADY Tow ~—} ADIN} ue exTcoM ROKINT DLDACK ESET Figure 3-14. Wail Logie generator UI9 then synchronizes READY to the timing fequirements of the microprocessor and pulls CPUREADY low, 3.57. To exit the wait state, RUN (the learinputto UI) must be pulled low. Two events cause this o happen, ACKINT is asserted by the interrupt circuitry if the addressed module does not return an ACK in a specific time period, Alternately, DLDACK is asserted DLDACK is asserted by a module returning an ACK or by response to 8 MARKINT 3-58. ACK LOGIC 3.59. Refer to Figure 3-15. When a moduleisaddressed by the controller or is enabled for interrupt identification by INA, st must return an ACK (high) to complete the handshake. ACK is delayed about 16 us to produce DLDACK. DLDACK isalso generated in s MARKINT interrupt response eyele 3-60. INTERRUPTS 341. Two possible intemal intercupts(MARKINT and ACKINT) and three possible external interrupts, (EXTINT) are able to drive CPUINT high and interrupt the microprocessor. The microprocessor samples the interrupt line at the end of each machine eycle, If an interrupt exists, the microprocessor asserts INTA in the slatus Word of the next instruction feteh machine cycle, External logic is thereby enabled to place an interrupt vector (and not the next instruction) on the data bus. Refer to Figure 3-16 NTA. CPUREADY. SYNCOEXINT DLDAGKINTCLR MARKINT SAINT Bx FLINE wNTeLA al ACKINT exTooW AOKINT. 8 2 CPUINT TO uP i Figure 2-16. Interrupt Generation Logic 3-62, Internal interrupts are ACKINT and MARKINT (Figure 3-16). The ACKINT logic consists of a retriggerable one-shot (U2) and a D-type fip-lop (U7) EXTCOM (AIS und STSTB) triggers U2. If DLDACK does not occur in the time constant of U2, U2 clocks UT fand asserts ACKINT. This action takes the ‘mieropracessor out of the wait state 3-63. The MARKINT logic consists of wo D-type fi Hops. The first (U9-1) ean be written to enable or disable MARKINTS. The second (U9-12) is locked by the eight times line frequency signal from the phase-locked loop. 3-64, Interrupts are prioritized by U-2I (refer to the Controlier schematic in Section 8). ACKINT intercupts have the highest prioity,and MARKINT interrupts have the lowest priory. External modules must drive IDI, ‘or 3 high in response to INA, to generate the correct veetor for that module. 3-65. Front Panel 3466. Refer to Figure 3-17, Annunciator segment datais ‘locked into register one by the direct address, ICO, 1,5 high, Data output from the switch matrix is also a direct 33Figure 3-17. Front Paneladdress-I00, 1, 6, high, For either direct address, the condition of IDT (high for disable) is latched into U23 to ‘enable an indirect address, Digit segment address-ICI, $ high, and digitannunciator select address-ICO, Sare both indirect addresses. Data is clocked into the registers upon, termination of the address. An update sequence is as follows: 1. Register| is addressed with all data lines low to blank the annunciator display and enable indirect addressing. 2. Register 2is addressed indirectly with data lines low to blank the digit display. 3. Register 3 is addressed indirectly with all data lines high to turn off all LEDs, disable the switch matrix, and disable indirect addcessing 4. Register| is addressed with ID7 low to enable indirect addressing and with either annunciator segment data or digit 7SD data on 1D0-6. The data is latched and applied to the annunciator LEDs (or 1 digit 78D). 5. Repister2is addressed with digit segment dasa ‘on IDO-7 (U.23 is not clocked by this address so ID? may be high without disabling indirect addressing) ‘The data is latched and applied to the digit LEDs. 6. Register 3 is addressed with ID7 high (disable indirect addressing) and one ofthe data ines, 1D0-6 tow to enable one digit LED and one annunciator LED, One bank of theswitch matrix is also enabled 7. The output buffer is addressed enabling the data from the previously enabled switch bank to be placed on the data bus. One or more lines being low indicates a change is desired. This address also keeps the kill circuit charged. a 3-67. The seven steps just outlined are required for one igitannunciator-switch bank update. The process is repeated seven times for a complete update, The kill circuit is used to blank the display if the Controller discontinues addressing the front panel. 3:68. DC Signal Conditioner 3469. Relays K1 and K2 control the input to the DC Signal Conditioner and the attenuation of the input (Figure 3-18). If both relays are energized, the input is from the Volt/M input sense terminals with + 64 attenuation. [fjust KI is energized, the input is from the Volt) £1 input terminals with no atfenuation If ust K2 is ‘energized, the input is from RTI with no attenuation, (Q10,Q11; CR3, and CRA provide overvoltage protection. 3-10. A differential amplifier (Q18, Q19) drives U3. FET switched (Q14, Q15, Q16) control the gain of QI. 506A, and Q37. An output voltage swing of 20V is achieved through bootstrapping; Us provides a bootstrap for Q38 and Q37, and US and U6 provide a bootstrap for U3 and Ud, Current sink and source for QI8 and QI9 are provided by Q38 and Q37 respectively 3-1. The DC Signal Conditioner is addressed by 1CO, 3, 4 high. Data on IDO-3 is latched up and decoded to determine which switches and relays will be energized Figure 3-18 includes an example of the relay driver used ‘to minimize thermal changes inthe relays between the on and off states. RC coupling between the decoder and the relay driver provide voltage swings up to 4V or down to OV toensure postiverelay action Steady state voltages of 145V (off) and 2.75V (on) minimize current difference between the on and off states while maintaining the relay state under all conditions. 3-72. Filler/External Reference 3.73, All inputs to the A/D Converter are routed ‘through the Filter/External Reference module. Refer to Figure 3-19, External measurements are made by roultiplexing the three filter module inputs to the A/D Converter. Q18, QI9, and Q20 switch the signal conditioner input, the external reference LO input, and the external reference Hi input respectively. Data controlling the switches is latched into UI upon termination of the address (ICI, 3, 4 high). 3-74, Threespole, active Bessel filters (U3 and U4) have different setting times and cut-off points. Either filter may be selected from the front input pane for application 10 the signal conditioner input. Bypass is automatically selected for external reference inputs and may be selected for signal conditioner inputs. The combination of Q32, 225, Q23, Q24, oF Q21, Q22 is turned on to select a filter mode, 375, A dual, superbeta transistor in a differential ‘configuration (QU7) drives US, A current source (Q26) and sink (Q30) bias Q27. Enough current is drawn through R19 by Q26 to bootstrap the input amplifier, Q27, 5V above the output. Gain ofthe amplifier is set at fone by the combination of R21 and the input resistors ‘The external reference inputs have additional series resistors located on the Front/Rear Input Assembly. 3-76, Fast R? A/D Converter 4477. The Fast R? A/D Converter may be separated for ‘analysis into wo component groups: analog and digital. Analog circuitry is responsible for producing & voltage reference, for summations, and for remainder amplification and storage. Digital citcuitry interfaces the ‘analog circuitry to the Contoller and is responsible for reference selection, decision in the summation process, remainder channel control, and autozeroing Since functions within the A/D Converter are either directly controlled by the Controller module via the data bus or are clocked through their operations by the Controller a5Figure 3-18. DC Signal Conditioner508A, addressing the A/D module, the A/D conversion ‘program could be considered a functional part of the A/D Converter. 9-78. ANALOG 3-19, Figure 3.20 is simplified schematic of the analog portion of the A/D Converter. For clarity, switches are shown as a circle enclosing a leter designator. Ul is 2 reference and reference amplifier controlling U2, a ‘current source, The -7V reference is set by R9 and Rd, U3 serves as highly regulated collector and zener supply for Ul, Operation of the A/D Converter requires both a positive and negative reference (for negative and positive inputs, respectively). Q9 and Us area precision unity gain amplifier whose input is controlled by switches Al and ‘AZ With Al closed and A2 open, Q9 and U4 are a noninverting amplifier. 3-80. Aninput signalisapplied to the Summing Node of the remainder amplifier (Q27, U7) through switch I. Q27 and U7 are an inverting amplifier with two gain configurations. During the decision period, switch G is closed, applying the output of U7 to polarity detector Q28, and forming a feedback path through CRS and CRS. Q28, sends a polarity bit to the digital portion ofthe circuitry (On the basis ofthis first polarity bit, areference polarity is selected, 3-81. Switches B, C, D, E, and F are closed, one at a time, to switch a precise amount of current into the ‘Summing Node. When a switch is closed, the opposite siteh ig opened and vice versa. For example, when D is closed, B is opened. After a switch s closed, a polarity bit, is returned. If the polarity changed with respect to the original polarity selected fora step, the switch is opened; otherwise itis left closed. The next switch is closed, a polarity bit retumed and a decision made, and so on unt all five switehes have been closed (and possibly opened ‘again). This constitutes a decision period 3-82, Following the decision period is the subtraction period. Switch G is opened and switches X and SX are losed to form a feedback path for the remainder amplifier through the X channel, A 400K resistor, R35, seis the gain of Q27 and U7 at sixteen. The feedback current completes the summation process and the ‘amplified remainder istored on the C10 inthe X channel 3.83. For the next decision period switches SX and X are opened and switches RX and Gare closed. Since Q27 ‘and U7 form an inverting amplifier the opposite polarity reference from the original selection is automatically selected, The amplified remainder is applied to the ‘Surmming Node through U6 and R34. Five decisions are made, followed by a subtraction period using channel Y for feedback and remainder storage, The first decision- subtraction period applies the input signal to the ‘Summing Node, The four following steps apply an amplified remainder, alternating between channel X and channel Y, oe 3-84 When a sample is complete, the circuits are fautozeroed, US zeros the remainder amplifier through channel X, Any offsetisstored on C13 atthe noninverting input of Q27. The switching reference, Q9 and U4, is, zeroed by first closing Al and opening A2 to decrease tettling time. Then Al and A2 are both opened and the 21 and Z2 ewitches are closed, storing any offeeterror on C5, 85. DIGITAL 3+86._ For the following discussion, refer to the Digital Fast R? A/D schematic in Section &, Dect address 1C2, 3, 4 latches data into U34 and U3S controlling input ‘witeh I, remainder channel witches (RX, RY, SX, SY), ‘aulozero (21), and reset (digital). U31, a ring counter, is locked to the Cl state enabling the indirect address decoder (U33) and the polarity detector (switch G). A. polarity bit is returned and applied to US. 3.87. Indirect address IC] and IC2 latches the polarity Dit in U6, enables the ristate transmitter, US, and clocks ‘USI to the C2state. The transition of U3i from Cl to. C2 clocks the polarity into Ul (the uppermost section) whose output determines whetherswitch Al or A2 will be closed (reference polarity). At the same time, UI (uppermost section) is clocked to set the other section of UI, closing the frst reference switeh, B, of the A/D Converter, The next indirect address clocks a new polarity bit a result of closing the first reference switch B) into U6, Ifthe polarity changed, the output of US will ‘cause a reset of the previous switch latch, opening the previous switch. At termination of the address the next witch is closed. One direct address and six indirect, addresses are required to complete a step. The last indireet address resets the control logic to the CO state 3-88. Switch selections are made through switeh drivers ‘which rely on Vee and Vss being a -1SV and -20 with respect to analog common. This allows simple transition from TTL levels to FET off voltages. D/A Converter switches are selected on transition of U31 from one state to the next. The transition clocks the fist of two D-type flip-flops which sets the second. The output of hesecond. lateh resets the fist and selects the switch. Ifthe polarity does not change after closing a switch, the output of US plus the output of UII (reference select) will place two highs on the input of one section of AND gate U25. ‘Through OR gate, U16, 2 one will be applied to the D input of that switch latch. The next transition of U31 will clock the latch, Keeping the switch closed. Ifthe polarity Jnad changed, a zero would be applied to the D input, ‘opening the switch, 389. After the last step, at completion ofa sample, the ‘Controller addresses the A/D Converter for autozero. USE is clocked to the C7 state causing a digital reset. When U6, storage capacitor disable, is reset, autozero is enabled. RC coupled gates delay the zero switch controls s0 that switch Al may be closed and A2 opened in the reference switching circuit. This provides a faster setlingREFERENCE swITcH -1v nerenence Figure 9-20. Fast R* A/D Converter (Analog)35064, time for the reference switching amplifier. Both AI and AZ are opened during the autozero time 3-90, Thermal True AMS Converter Module 3.91. The following description of the Thermal True RMS Converter module explains a full operating eyele of ‘the high accuracy mode including both a sample mode and hold mode in succession. If the normal mode is selected, the module performs only an abbreviated sample mode and displays the direct output of the ‘Thermal Sensor Circuit, which is updated every 0.5 seconds, If the enhanced mode is selected, one high accuracy measurement is made, and a correction factor ‘computed and stored. The instrument then reverts to & ‘measurement mode similar to that used during normal mode operations, but with the software correction, applied to the sensor output, Enhanced is therefore a hybrid mode, using the speed of the normal mode and nearly the same accuracy a8 found in the high accuracy mode. Due to the hybrid nature of the enhanced mode, the following conditions must be maintained to preserve accuracy: the high accuracy measurement must be made within one hour at a temperature within :E1°C of the ‘workingmeasurement and the deviation of the input from the level of the high accuracy measurement must be less than 14, If the latter condition is not maintained, the instrument automaticaly re-initiates a new high accuracy measurement. 3.92, The description of the Thermal True RMS ‘Converter module is divided into four sections. The first explains the mode timing. The second covers the decoding of the logic t0 control the module operation, ‘The third and fourth sections deal with the two basic ‘modes of operation, the sample mode and the hold mode. Refer to the block diagram of the module in Figure 3-10, and the diagram of the module in the multimeter operation in Figure 3-21 as required during the explanation. 3-93, MODE TIMING 3.94. A high accuracy measurement with the Thermal True RMS Converter module requires a full cycle of ‘operation, i.e. one sample mode (3.5 seconds) and one hold mode (2.5 seconds). The instrument constantly cycles between sample and hold modes during high accuracy measurements; however, if the input is not present at the beginning ofthe cycle, the accuracy of the measurement cannot be guaranteed. To ensure full settling time and complete accuracy for the frst reading, either trigger the instrument from the front panel or wait until the second reading is displayed (a maximum of 12 seconds), 3.95. The measurement takes a total of 6 seconds to ‘complete. Three seconds are required for the thermal sensor to settle, and half a second is required for the de measurement to be made. Then, while the multimeter processes the sensor output via the normal designal path, 320 ‘the stored sensor output is applied to the sensor which requires an additional 2 seconds to settle and another half second for the second de measurement to be made, 3-96, LOGIC CONTROL 3-97. Controlling instructions enter the module on the IC and ID Bus lines from the controller module. The instructions may originate at the front panel or on the IEEE Bus from a remote source. Address lines ICD, ICL and IC4 must be high for the module to be addressed. If the proper addressis decoded in the Logic Gates) Latches, an ACK is returned to the bus and the data onthe ID Bus is latched into flip-flops. The daia is then decoded in the Logie Controls block and used to control gain, switehes, relays and attenuators in the circuit. Thedata required on TD& through ID7 to select the mode of operation Sample of Hold), select the filter IN or OUT, select AC oF AC#DC coupling, and to activate or deactivate the ‘module is shown in Table 3-2. The data required on IDO through [D3 tocontrolthe Attenuation, Gain, and Range selected is given in Table 3-3, 3-08. SAMPLE MODE 3.99, The unknown rms signal is applied to the Input Circuit where itis coupled tothe Input Relays. Either AC (through a capacitor) or AC+DC (bypassing the capacitor) coupling is selected by the Logie Controls. One of the Input Relays is energized by the Logie Controls to route the signal othe Attenuator Circuits for attenuation by either 0.00167, 0.008, 0.08, oF 08 according to the selected range. The attenuation brings the signal to within, 0.1 to L-volt span before itis applied to the Ranging Amplifier. When the signal leaves the Attenuator PCB ‘Assembly it passes through acable witha driven Guard en, route to the Ranging Amplifier, whichis on the Amplifier PCB Assembiy. 3-100. The gain of the Ranging Amplifier is either 2, 6.25, or 20, as determined by the ID Bus inputs to the Logic Controls. The Ranging Amplifier output is applied to the Amplifier Switching cireuit and to the Attenuator Cireuits on the Attenuator PCB Assembly through @ coaxial cable as feedback for compensation at high frequencies. The Amplifier Switching cireuit is enabled during the sample mode to allow the input rms signal 10 be applied to the Thermal Sensor Circuit. 3-101. The Thermal Sensor Circuit consists ofa Fluke theemal sensor, a sensor amplifier, and a square root amplifier. Combined they produce a de output that is equivalent to the rms signal input, plus the error of the sensor. The thermal sensor senses the difference between, the de on the output and the ac on the input, the sensor amplifier provides feedback to bring the output dc to the ‘value equal tothe ac input, and the square root amplifier cnhanoes transient response. The output is applied firstto the Output Amplifier (X1) and then the Output Switching. circuit for routing, under software logic control, to the instrument main bus for action by the DC Signalavuasia waTIOULNOD 7ouLNoo ASSY HOLVONALLY ASS¥ uBlanany ‘SBNIT IOMINOSPAWTSH ® HOAIMS vais Snow 10H mawes SLO mS \ Hosnas I eagine 90 yosnas WAUSHL unig MALIN OISvE aincow vouynnauiv inant Figure 2-21, Thermal True RMS ConversionTable 2-2. Module Command Logie 5 107 ‘SAMPLE/HOLD Furen | coupuna | mooULE HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD. HOU SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE ‘SAMPLE ‘SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE paxrgrrrerrcereee |g Ipceezeerrreraizer our our our our 1 N IN iN our our our out IN N IN ae cS ac+ Do AG +0C ON OFF ON OFF ‘ON OFF ON OFF ON orr ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF, Table 3.3. Decoded 10 us Logie 3 wary "ATTENUATOR 06 08 08 0.008 0.008 Izraexrres| ‘ooate7 NOTE: Logie High = ~18V 0G, Logie Low Conditioner, The Protection Circuit monitors the temperature ofthe Thermal Sensor Circuit the internal temperature of the Fluke thermal sensor reaches approximately 100°C, the Protection Circuit limits the output of the Ranging Amplifier. 3-102. The signal from the Output Amplifier is also routed to the S/H Input Switching circuit for application to the sample/ hold circuit. When the sample mode is in progress the S/H Input Switching is enabled while S) H Sense Switching and S/H Output Switching are disabled, ‘The sample/hold cireuit muttiplies the signal from the Output Amplifier by five. The resultant signalis stored on a capacitor (C3), The signal is multiplied to reduce the effect of leakage current in the storage capacitor. The sample mode is complete when the signatis stored in the capacitor. 3-108, HOLD MODE 3-104. When the module goes into the hold mode the ‘Amplifier Switching and S/H Input Switching circuits are disabled and the $/H Sense Switching and $/H 222 Output Switching eucuits are enabled. The unknown ms signal is still applied to the mput circuits bur itis blocked at the Amplifier Switching cizeut from going into the ‘Thermal Sensor Circuit. Instead, the value stored in the sample hold cieuit is withdraw from the capacitor and divided by five to return the stored value to the original magnitude. The result is then applied to the Thermal Sensor Circuit through the S/H Output Switching circuit. The value applied is sensed atthe Thermal Sensor input and returned through the S/H Sense Switching cieuit to the sample) hold circuit. The signal from the sample/ hold circuit is processed by the Thermal Sensor circuit in exactly the same manner as the unknown signal from input circuit. The output is directed through the Output Amplifier and Output Switching circuits to the DC Signal Conditioner. 3.108. The hold mode result and the sample mode result are processed in the Controller Module to obtainthe true rms value of the input signal. The result of the ‘computation is then sent to the Front Panel for display ‘until another eyee is performed,® () static awareness A Message From John Fluke Mfg. Co., In Some semiconductors and custom IC's can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during handling. This notice explains how you can minimize the chances of destroying such devices Knowing that there is a problem Learning the guidelines for handling them. Using the procedures, and packaging and bench techniques that are recommended. ‘The Static Sensitive (S.S.) devices are dentifiedin the Fluke technical manual parts listwith the symbol ® The following practices should be followed to minimize damage to S.S. devices, D We 3. DISCHARGE PERSONAL STATIC BEFORE HANDLING DEVICES 1, MINIMIZE HANDLING 2, KEEP PARTS IN ORIGINAL CONTAINERS UNTIL READY FOR USE. 4, HANDLE 8.8, DEVICES BY THE BODY Page 5 of 25. USE ANTI-STATIC CONTAINERS FOR HANDLING AND TRANSPORT 6. DO NOT SLIDE SS. DEVICES OVER ANY SURFACE [vai} 7. AVOID PLASTIC, VINYL AND STYROFOAM? IN WORK AREA PORTIONS REPRINTED WITH PERMISSION FROM TEKTROND AND GENERAL DYNAMICS, POMONA Pago 2 of 2 WHEN REMOVING PLUG-IN ASSEMBLIES, HANDLE ONLY BY NON-CONDUCTIVE EDGES AND NEVER TOUCH OPEN EDGE CONNECTOR EXCEPT AT STATIC-FREE WORK STATION. PLACING SHORTING STRIPS ON EDGE CONNECTOR USUALLY PROVIDES COMPLETE PROTECTION TO INSTALLED SS DEVICES. HANDLE 8.5. DEVICES ONLY ATA STATIC-FREE WORK STATION ONLY ANTI-STATIC TYPE SOLDER- ‘SUCKERS SHOULD BE USED. ONLY GROUNDED TIP SOLDERING IRONS SHOULD BE USED. Anti-static bags, for storing S.S. devices or pebs with these devices on them, can be ordered from the John Fluke Mig. Co,, Inc.. Seesection Sin any Fluke: technical manual for ordering instructions. Use the following part numbers when ordering these special bags. John Fluke Part No, Description 459622 6" X3" B29 452520 8" X12" Bag 453548 16" X 24" Bog 454025 12" X15" Bag Pink Poty Sheet rat Strap 320°x60"x60 Mi PIN TLe6o PIN RC-AS-1200 $7.00 $20.00 J00898-07U7810/SE EN Linon USASection 4 Maintenance ‘WARNING! ‘THESE SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS ARE FOR USE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY. TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT PERFORM ANY SERVICING OTHER THAN THAT CONTAINED IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS UNLESS YOU ARE QUALIFIED TO D0 SO. 4-4, INTRODUCTION 42. This section of the manual contains maintenance information, performance tests, hardware calibration procedures, and troubleshooting procedures. Hardware calibration intervals may be determined by the user according tothe accuracy desired (specificationsare listed 1m Section 1). Software calibration may be performed at any time and s described in Appendix 7B. Recommended test equipment is listed in Table 41. 4-3, SERVICE INFORMATION 4-4 Each instrument manufactured by the John Fluke Mig. Co, Inc. is warranted for a period of I year upon delivery to the original purchaser. The warranty termsare located at the front of the manual. £5. Factory authorized calibration and service foreach Fluke product are available at vanous worldwide Tocstions. A complete list of domestic service ocnters is, located in Seetion 7 ofthe manual, Shipping information ve given in Section 2. When requested, an estimate is, provided before any work begins on instruments that are beyond the warranty period 4-6. GENERAL MAINTENANCE 4-7, Top and Bottom Cover Removal and Installation WARNING LINE VOLTAGE IS PRESENT ON THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD WHENEVER THE POWER CORD IS CONNECTED. TO AVOID ‘SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT TOUCH POWER. ‘SUPPLY COMPONENTS. 48. Each cover is secured with six screws. When replacing a cover install the rear center (pivot) screw fits. 49. Line Voltage Selection 410, Input line voliage can be set for 100V ac, 120V ac, 220V ac or 240V ac. This selection must be made, or verified, before the multimeter is initially turned on. Proceed as follows: ‘CAUTION 1 Callbration mode Is on, Input power must not be cycled on or of. Btore cyeilng power ‘oft, vertly that the AVG/(CAL) annunciator Ie not fling. Before cycling power on, check that the rear panel Cellbration Switeh Is off 1, Push the POWER control to OFF, disconnect the lie cord and remove the multimeter top cover. 2. The Line Voltage Selection switchesarelocated in the left front of the instrament, just behind the ‘main power control. Referring to Figure 4-1, set these (wo switches to indicate the desired ine voltage (dot/switch pattern), 3. Verify installation of the line power fuse required by the selected line voltage. Refer to Fuse Replacement 4-11. Fuse Replacement £12, The line fuse can be replaced using the following procedure 1. On the multimeter front panel, push the POWER switch to OFF (ou). 2, Disconnect the line power cord.Table 4-1. Test Equipment NOMENCLATURE, MINIMUM USE SPECIFICATIONS | RECOMMENDED EQUIPMENT ‘AG Calibration System Voltage Range: 0-1000V ac Fluke Mode! 5200 with Frequency Range: 20 H2-1 MHz Fluke Model 815A or Accuracy: Refer to Table 44 ‘with Fluke Model 52058 Thermal Teanster Standard eter to Accuracy Fluke Model 5408 Table 4-8 ‘TruseAMS Ditfereniat within 99 Day Fluke Model 9918 Voltmeter alioration Aatio Transformer 1 ppm or better ESI OT/28 De Source High Short-Term Stability Fluke Model 3350 Range 6-1100v | Nun Detector 10 pV Full-Scale Resolution Fluke Model $250 Reference Divider 101% Division Accuracy Fluke Model 750A KelunVarley Owviger Linearity: = 1 pom of Input Fluke Mode! 720A, Standara Cell Enclosure Guilaine 91 Guilatine 9152 (R Oscilloscope General Purpose with 10 MA Probe| Tektronix 465 Digital Multimeter Voltage Accuracy 01% Fluke Model 88008 Input Impedance: 1000 mn Low EMF, Shielded Connector Cables | Copper Spade Lug Connectors: ‘Terminating Load BNC 50-0hm Fluke Yo103 Feed Through Adapter BNC to Double Fluke ¥9106 Banana Plugs Attenuator BNC, 50-0hm, Fluke vor02 2 Watt 20.48 TAdapter ancT Fluke YT06 Extender Car Fluke Model MIS-701tk Fluke Modal 8502A-7001 Bus Monitor Fluke Model MIS-7019% Static Controller Fluke Model MiS-7190K Test Module Fluke Mode! Mis-7101« AS REQUIRED BY INSTALLED OPTIONS Current Calibrator Accuracy: = 029% Fluke Model 3828, with 200 kA Resistor one ‘Standere Resistors 108 at 30 ppm; 1000, 1.9 KA, 10 KA, ESI-SR-1010 100 KA, 250 KA, 1 MC, 4 MO at ESI SR-1050 10 ppm: 10 MA at 50 ppm: 100 MA at 100 ppm Torminating Load 1 MO 10% 1.22 uF Nonpolarized Load,2eovac 220Vec 120Vae 100VeC fo ° @ FED O ware Figure 4-1. Power Supply Settings508A, 3. Locate the line fuse on the rear panel heat sink 4. Identify the selected line voltage and replace the fuse with one having the appropriate ratings: MDL 1/2 (for 100 or 120V ac line) MDE 1/4 (for 220 or 240V ac line) 5. Reconnect the line power cord, 6. Push the POWER switch to ON. 4-12. Module Installation CAUTION Instllotion or removal ot a module with the POWER switch ON can cause damage to senalve clrultry. To avold this kind of ‘damage, push the POWER switch to oft betore Intalling or removing 2 mod 414, Use the following procedure for module installation 1, Push the POWER Control to OFF ané disconnect the line cord. 2. Remove the top cover. NOTE The first four module slots (A, B, C, D) are reserved jor signal condltioning modules. The ‘Thermal True-RMS Converter requires slots Cand D. The DC Signal Conditioner can be Installed tn slot A. The remaining slot (B) can be used for either the Ohms Converter (Option 62) or the Current Shunts (Option 03). The Isolator must be installed m slot K. Refer to Section 8 for a complete listing of preferred and permissible slots for all modules. 3. With the correct slot chosen, slide the module down between the module guides. 4, Press the module firmly into place. 'S. Open the hinged module top. Verify that the leaf spring (attached to one half of the module shield) is resting firmly over the flange of the opposite half of the module shield 6. For the Thermal True-RMS Converter, attach the cable connector to the jack on the Front/Rear ‘Switch Assembly. This jack is accessible through a hole in the center of the right side chassis. 7. Close the module top and secure the module in position by engaging the two sliding clips. 8 Install the top cover. 4-18, Module Removal 416, Use the following procedure for module removal 1. Push the POWER contro) to OFF and isconnect the Line cond from the multimeter 2. Remove the multimeter top cover. 3. Disengage the two sliding clips securing the ‘module to be removed 4. If the Thermal True-RMS Converter is being removed, disconnect the cable connector at the right side chassis. 5. Grasp the module at both ends and pull up. Use an end-torend rocking motion to help free the ‘module from the connector. 4-17, Module Disassembly and Reassembly 418, Avoid using excessive force with the following provedure. 1. Pop open the lid on the module by using the indentations at either end and lifting up. Hinge the lid back. 2. Orient the module with one of the guides up. 3. Press down on theend ofthe case halfabove the words OPEN while pulling up lightly on the lip of the module guide, Slightly separate this end. Repeat this step for the other end. 4. Open the top of the module, The bottom catch automatically comes apart, 5. Press down on the top ofthe peb while pulling ‘out to free the peb from the case half 6. To reassemble the module, insert the peb in the bottom half of the cate and lightly press down on the top to snap it in place. 7. Ensuring that the spring shield connection is ‘not caught Behind the peb, align the bottom center catch of the case halves and verify thatthe shield at cither end fit together properly. 8, Close the two halves together, snapping the module guides closed. 9. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, lft land postion the leaf spring, attached to one half of the module shield, so that it rests firmly over the flange of the opposite half of the module shield 4-18. Calibration Memory Replacement 420. Use the following procedure when replacing the Calibration Memory chi1, First ensure that the rear panel Calibration Switch is off, then push the POWER button to OFF land remove the line power cord. 2, Remove the top cover, then remove and disassemble the Controller module. 3. Install (or replace) the Calibration Meniory chip (U20 on the Controller PCB) 4, Reassembly and install the Controller module, then replace the top cover. 5. Verify again thatthe Calibration Switch is off, then reconnect the line power cord and push the POWER button to ON. 6. Referto Appendix 7B for Calibration Memory programming instructions, 4-21. Front Panel PCB Removal 4.22. Use the following procedure to remove the Front Panel PCB: 1, Note the position of any LEDs needing replacement. Push the POWER control to OFF fand remove the line cord. 2. Remove the multimeter top cover (six setews), 3. Remove the front panel bezel. Press down on the bezel center top and pull out 4, Remove the five screws securing the Front Panel PCB. Unplug this pcb by alternately pulling up gently on its upper corners. Once disconnected, work the pcb forward to clear the power push button, then retract it through the front opening 5. If necessary, replace any defective LEDs 6. Replace the Front Panel PCB and the bezel in the reverse order. 4-23, Power Supply PCB Assembly Removal 424, Remove the Power Supply PCB Assembly using the following procedure: 1. Push the POWER button to OFF and remove the line power cord from the multimeter. 2, Remove the three buttonhead serews attaching. the Power Supply to the rear panel, As seen from the rear, one of these screws is found along the Power Supply left edge; the other two secure both the feet and the Power Supply right edge. 35068, 3, Pulling from the rear, retract the Power Supply PCB with a gentle rocking motion, Once disconnected from the card edge connector at the front, the peb slides straight back, 4. Replace the Power Supply PCB by reversing the steps above, The left center buttonhead screw algo serves as a ground connection between the Power Supply and the multimeter chassis. Tighten this screw securely 4-25, Power Supply Interconnect Assembly Removal 4-26. Remove the Power Supply Interconnect Assembly using the following procedure: 1. Remove the Front Panel and Power Supply 2, Remove the three sevews securing the Power ‘Supply Interconnect Assembly to the framework, 3. Disoonnect the card edge connector ofthe ped from the Motherboard conneetor. Lift the peb out ‘through the front framework. 4, Reassemble in the reverse order. 4-27, Front/Rear Switch Assembly 4-28. REMOVAL 429, Use the following procedure to remove the Front/Rear Switch Assembly: |, Push the POWER control to OFF and remove the line cord from the multimeter 2, Remove the multimeter top cover. NOTE ‘As seen from the front, the Front/Rear Switch Assembly is housed in the right side ‘chassis. Although the Front/Rear Sitch ‘Assembly. is mechanically secured to the Serscally aligned rear panel. electrically conneced 0 the horteontally aligned Motherboard PCB. Removal and replacement of the Front/Rear Switch “Assembly each require wogue procedures 3. At the front panel right side, pull on the three selector buttons until they disconnect from the Front) Rear Switch Assembly. 4. Remove the three buttonhead screws securing the Front/ Rear Switch Assembly to the rear panel. Identify two ofthese screws asalso attaching two of ‘the rear panel feet 5. Next, remove the three screws securing the assembly front-to-back along the nght side “as508A, 6. The assembly must now be disengaged from the Motherboard PCB edge connector, Viewing the ‘multimeter from the front, locate a slot in the chassis behind the Front Panel PCB (upper right side). A tab on the Front) Rear Switch PCB extends trough this slot. Pry upward on this peb tab to Gisengage the Front/Rear Switch Assembly from its Motherboard connector 7. Once disconnected, the Front/Rear Switch Assembly cen be withdrasin straight back 4-30, INSTALLATION 431, Use the following procedure to install the Front/Rear Switch Assembly: Installation requires that the assembly be Positioned in the rear panel slot aud slid forward ‘The peb tab mentioned above must be inserted far enough into the front chassis slot so that the assembly rests lush against the rear panel 2. The Front/Rear Switch Assembly 1s now aligned with the Motherboard edge connector. Push the assembly into this coanector by simultaneously pressing on the center of the Front, Rear Switch PCB (through an access hole in the middle of the right side chassis) and on the peb ab, 3. Replace the three nde serews and the three rear panel buttonhead serews (with feet 4. Onthe Front Panel right side, insert each ofthe three selector buttons through slots in the front panel and in the right side chassis. Align each Dutton with the appropnate switch and press into place. The three selector buttons must be configured as follows: a. EXT GD IN: top b. ST OHMS IN: middle ©. REAR INPUT IN: bottom 4-92. Motherboard PCB Removal 433. Remove the Motherboard PCB using the following procedure. 1 Push the POWER button to OFF and isconnect the line cord from the multimeter 2. Remove the top and bottom covers, 3. Remove alt modules, the Front Panel PCB, the Power Supply PCB, the Front/Rear Sustch Assembly, and the Power Supply Interconnect ‘Assembly 4. Remove the shield covering the bottom of the Motherboard. Remove the eight securing screws (accessed from the bottom) and the two top screws (accessed through holes in the center partstion). The Shield then sips off 5. As seen from the top, unplug the SCAN ADV and TRIGGER connectors from the right rear corner of the Motherboard 6. Remove the eight serews securing the Motherboard PCB (four each accessed from top and bottom), 7. Remove the front handlerame assembly. Remove the three serews attaching each handle Note thatthe longest screws must occupy the center holes during reassembly 8 Pull off the front handle-trame assembly 9. The Motherboard PCB is now disconnected ‘and can be removed, 10. Replace the Motherboard PCB and reassemble the mukimeter n reverse order. 4-34, Cleaning Instructions £35. Peciodically (at least every 90 days) clean the ‘multimeter using the following procedure 1, Push the POWER button to OFF and disconnect the line cord from the multimeter 2 Remove the top and bottom covers from the 3. Disconnect the modules from the Motherboard land remove them from the instrument. 4. Clean the interior using low pressure clean, dry air of a vacuum cleaner 5. Clean the Front Panel and exterior surfaces with anhydrous ethyl sleohol or a soft cloth dampened with a mild soluuon of detergent and {6 Replace the modules and covers if access to the instrument interior is no longer required 4-38. PERFORMANCE TEST 4-37. Introduction 438 The following paragraphs contain a performance verification test which compares the operation of the Instrument to the specifications in Section 1 of this manual. The test may be used to verify calibration of the ‘equipment beweea scheduled calibration periods oras an aid in troubleshooting. The multimeter is referred to as eunit under test (UUT). The test equipment required for the Performance Test 1s listed in Table 4-1. If the recommended equipment is not available, replacements, with equivalent specifications may be substiruted 439. Ifthe instrument does not meet the specifications listed in the Performance Test, either software or hardware calibration or corrective maintenance should be performed, as determined by the symptoms. The test, should be performed when the ambient temperatuze is between 18° and 28° Celsius and the relative humidity is, less than 73% 4-40. DG Performance Test 4-41. LOW RANGE DG VOLTAGE TESTS 4-42, Perform the Low Range Tests as follows: L._Connect the equipment shown with solid lines in Figure 4-2. Do not connect the UT at this time, Verify that test equipment used in Figure 4.2 is ‘operating properly and that respective warmup periods have been observed, ‘aaa bcos coo ge Te Figure 4-2. Connections for Low Range DC Voltage Tests 506A, 3. Onthe UUT, verify thatthe specified two-hour warm-up period has elapsed, 4. On the UUT, ensure that the V DC and AUTO annuneiators are on, and thet the SAMPLE ‘annunciator flashes at approximately eight times per second (32 samples per reading). All other annunciators should be dark 5. Set the Voltage Divider controls for one-tenth the standard cell certified value. Adjust the DC Voltage Standard output for a null on the null meter 6. At the Voltage Divider output terminals, disconnect the existing leads and connect the UT as shown with the broken lines in Figure 42, 7. Refer to Table 4-2. Without changing the DC Voltage Standard output setting, perform the six checks listed. For each check, set the specified Voltage Divider output, select the listed UT range manvally, and verify a UT reading with the tolerances listed 8 At the DC Voltage Standard, reverse the output leads. Now repeat step 7, and check for negative UUT readings with the listed tolerances Table 4-2. Low Range DC Voltage Tests DIVIDER |_UUT READING SETTING | LOW HIGH RANGE 100 mv | 0010000 | +9:9087 (-s) | +10.0048 (-3) 10100000 |+89.9986 (-3}] +1000065 3) 098800 100 mv w_—_| 100000 +100010 tv | 1000000] +990077 | +1.000023 tov | 1000000) 28081 | +1.00000 tov }10000000] +2908 | _+10.00018 4-43, HIGH RANGE DC VOLTAGE TESTS 4-44, Perform the High Range Test as follows: 1. Connect test equipment and the UUTasshown in Figure 43, 2. On the WUT, verity thatthe specified two-hour ‘warm-up period has expired. Also verify hat the test equipment is operating properly and that required warm-up periods have expired 3.‘The UUT must be set for de volis(V DC), 100 ‘manual range, and SAMPLE setting 5 (SAMPLE a7Figure 4-3. Connections for High Range DC Voltage Tests annunciator flashes approximately eight times per second). All other features on the UUT must be i the power-up configuration, 4. On the Reference Divider, set the Standard Cell voltage controls to the standard cell certified value Set both the input and output controls to 10 volts. 5. On the DC Voltage Standard, set the output controls for 10 volts Next adjust this output for a ‘ull reading on the null meter 6. Onthe UT, verify a reading between +9.9990 and +10,0010. 7. On the Reference Divider, set the input and output controls to 100 volts, 8, On the DC Voltage Standard, set the output controls for 100 vols. Next, adjust this output fora ull reading on the null mater 9, On the UUT, verify a reading between “#99,9974 and +100,0028. 10, On the UUT, manually select 1000¥ range. 11, On the UUY, verify @ reading between +99.990 and +100.010 12. On the Reference Divider, set the input and output controls to 1000 volts. 13. Onthe DC Voltage Standard, set the ourputto approximately 1000V. Next adjust this output fora full reading on the mull meter. 14, On the UUT, verify a reading between +999,974 and +1000.026. 15, Set the DC Voltage Standard to standby 16, Reverse the leads at the DC Voltage Standard sand atthe Standard Cell terminals. In sequence, set the DC Voltage Standard output to 10 volts, and return this instrument to operate 17. On the UUT, manually select the 1OV range. 18, Now repeat steps 4 through 15, verifying negative readings on the UUT. 4-48, AUTORANGING TEST 446, Test the UUT autoranging feature using the following procedure: 1. On che UUT, seleet V DC function and AUTO range 2. Connect the DC Voltage Standard output irectly to the UUT input 3. Vary the DC Voltage Standard output, checking that the UUT autoranges up and down at the points listed in Table 4-3, These points are approximate and are determined without ‘application of software calibration factors. Table 4-3. Autoranging UPRANGE POINT De voLTs ‘200 mv NA 20v Ww 20v 1. rev tv NA 120 ‘AG VOLTS 125.000 mv 400.000 mv 1.25000 4.000 +2.60000v 40.0000 125.000 NA DOWNRANGE POINT 4-47, DC EXTERNAL REFERENCE TEST 448, Test the DC fourwire tue ratio, using the following procedure 1. Connect test equipment and the UUT as illustrated in Figure 4-4 2. On the UUT, select V DC function and AUTO rangewerd a eee ose Sere Fes Figure 4-4. DC External Reference Test 3. On the DC Voltage Standard, set the output controls for +10,0000 vols 4. On the Voltage Divider. set the controls for 1.000000. 5. On the UUT, push and hold the EXT REF button, Verify @ reading of +9.99980 to +10.00028 while this button is held depressed! ¥ is 6,_ Release the EXT REF push button on the UUT (EXT annuneiator on). The UUT now computes and displays the ratio (Vin) Vref). Verify that this reading is between 0.999960-and 1.000049. 4 Sh 2. On the Voltage Divider. set the controls to 0.1000000. 8. Verify thatthe UUT reads between 99,99$0(-3) sd 100.0099 (3), a 9, Pushand release the EXT REF buttontotoggle the UUT out of External Reference mode (EXT annuneiator goes off. 10. Remove the test equipment connections. This step completes the Performance Test procedures. 4-49, Thermal True-RMS Converter Performance Tost 450. ‘The following test equipment is required for the Performance Test of the Thermal True-RMS Converter: 85064 1. A S40B Thermal Transfer Standard with corrections data 2 A 82008 AC Standard and a 33D DC Standard (both on 90 day calibration cycles). 3. A flatness verified 20 dB attenuator with proper $0 ohm load. 4, Al ppm Ratio Transformer. 451. Before starting the Performance Test, verify that the ambient temperature is 23 42°C, the relative hhumidity is <70%, and the instrument has completed the warm-up period of two hours. Remember that the characterized voltage test must be readjusted whenever the frequency is changed. 452. Perform the test with the high accuracy mode selected. Ifthe voltage or frequency output of the source is ‘changed, allow the source to settle before takinga reading for record. This can be accomplished by waiting for the first update of the UUT display 453. Complete the UUT Performance Test using the following procedure: 1. Connect the 5200A, 335D, and the S40B for DC to AC Transfer Measurements as shown in Figure 45. 2, Set the DC Standard for the output listed in Table 4-4 3. Setthe S40B to the range listed in Table 4-4 and inthe DC Transfer mode, Adjust the S40Bto obuain, 1 null indication on the meter. 4. Reverse the DC input leads to the S40B and adjust the null to compensate for positive and negative turnover, Select the $200 output listed in Table 44 6. Switch the S40B to the AC Transfer mode and ‘adjust the 5200A output to obtain a null indication ‘on the S408, 7. Record the output setting on the $200A for future usage. 8. Repeat steps | through 7 forall points listed in Table 44 9. Connect the 5200A output terminals to the input of the Ratio Transformer and connect the ‘output of the Ratio Transformer to the input terminals of the UUT as shown in Figure 46. 495408 THERMAL 52008 AG STANDARD 3360 DC VOLTAGE TRANSFER STANDARD eeEoae SEE ceecce SS aes, of o ° ° - 0 000 o9 Ip 22000 Ge ° 5200A SELECT: VOLTAGE: Per Procedure VOLTAGE RANGE: Par Procedure FREQUENCY: Per Procedure ‘SENSE: Extornal (straps removed) PHASE LOCK: off INPUT POWER: Connect to same source as other equipment ‘5408 SELECT: MODE: Per Procedure RANGE: Per Procedure POWER: On SENSITIVITY: Adjust for null per procedure REFERENCE ADJUST: Use for null adjustment in conjunction with sensitivity SENSITIVITY TEST: OPR GALV: Lock and Momentary during null adjustment and Oper when changing Ranges or Modes 3950 SELECT: VOLTAGE: Per Procedure VOLTAGE RANGE: Per Procedure ‘TRIP: 1000 (CURRENT LIMIT: Fully clockwise SENSITIVITY: | output monitor INPUT MODE: TVMt INPUT POWER: Connect to same source as other equipment Figure 45, Equipment Set-Up A‘Table 44, Characterization Points x '5200A FREQUENCY (Hz) 20 1k 10% 50% 300 mv. 01% 300 mV" 0.005%" tomy o.0086"* w 0.005% ave 0.005%" roy" 0.005%" 38v ons too" 0.0068%"* soov 0.006%" sav | 40mv ores w w coi sev o.t%r* 10v oor 38v oor 100v orm s00v oor 30v 1 sov av 10ov s00v soov | tocov | soov 300 mv 0.006%" 110 mv" ons wv 0.006%" seve 0.006% tov" 0.008%6"* 35v o.0088"* t00v ‘o.00et"* ov o.006%0"* ‘Al accuracy tolerances are plus or minus (2). The 6408 must be characterized by a standards lab to support these ‘accuracy tolerances, “Characterized points also used in the Calibration Procedure. “*Acouracy requirement for voltage at frequency points. 10, Using the 5200A settings recorded in step 7 above, check the first two voltage/ frequency ‘combinations (20 Hz and ! kHz)in Table4-S for the stated tolerances. Record the displayed reading on the UUT for 1 kHz 11. Complete the Low Frequency Attenuator ‘Accuracy Test (deseribed under Calibration). 12. Connect the 5200A, 540B, and the flatness verified 20 dB attenuator as shown in Figure 47, 13, Adjust the 5200A output (at 1 kH2) for the reading recorded on the UT display in step 10nd adjust the S40B for a nul indication. Note the 200A output setting, Do not adjust the S40B ‘controls until steps 14 and 15 have been completed. 14, While maintaining a null on the S40B by adjusting the 5200A output, check the last three voltage/ frequency combinations in Table 4-5 for ‘the stated tolerances. 15. Return the 5200A output level (at 1 kHz) 10 the setting noted in step 13 and check for repeatability. Verify that the $40B is within 0.002% of null. If this verification cannot be made, repeat steps 13 through IS. 16. Connect the 5200A to the UUT input ‘terminals as shown in Figure 48, 17, Using the 5200A settings recorded in step 7 ‘above, check the voltage/frequency combinations in Tables 4-6 through 4-14 forthe stated tolerances 18 Connect the 52004/5205A (5215A) ‘combination to the UUT input terminals as shown in Figure 49, 19. Using the 5200A/520SA (5215) settings recorded in step 7 above, check the ‘oltage/frequency combinations in Table 4-15 for the stated tolerances. 4-54. CALIBRATION ADJUSTMENTS NOTE The standards called out in the following procedure are required 10 meet the published ‘accuracy specficaions. If published accuracy is not required for a particular function (eg. resisiance, de current, etc), standards with a lower rated accuracy may be used.‘AG STANDARD RATIO TRANSFORMER 0: 5200A SELECT: VOLTAGE: Per Procedure VOLTAGE RANGE: Per Procedure FREQUENCY: Per Procedure ‘SENSE: External (straps installed) PHASE LOCK: Ott INPUT POWER: Connect to same source es UT RATIO TRANSFORMER SELECT: DIAL SETTINGS: Per Procedure UT SELECT: VOLTAGE RANGE: Per Procedure SENSE: Two terminal (selector out) MODE: Per Procedure INPUT POWER: Connoct to same source as the §200A CONNECTIONS: All other Instruments or IEEE cable connections must be removed Figure 4-6. Equipment Set-Up Table 4-5. 110 mV Tests RANGE: 100 mV FREQUENCY (He) MiNIMUN NOMINAL MAXIMUM a 109.912 (-3) 1101000 (-3) 110.088 (3) tk 108.972 (-3) 110.000 (-8) 110.028 (-3) 20K 108.972 (-2) 110.000 (-3) 110028 (-3), ‘0k 108.884 (3) 110.000 (-3) 110.06 (-3) ™ 106.180 (3) 110.000 (-3) 119.850 (-8)coca o 8 lg es000 5200f SELECT: VOLTAGE: Por Procedure VOLTAGE RANGE: Por Procedure FREQUENCY: Por Procedure ‘SENSE: External (straps installed) INPUT POWER: Connect to same source as UUT PHASE LOCK; Off CONNECTIONS: All other instruments or IEEE cable connections must be removed 5408 SELECT: MODE: AC Transtor RANGE: Por Procedure POWER: On SENSITIVITY: Adjust for null per procedure REFERENCE ADJUST: Use for null adjustment in conjunction with sensitivity SENSITIVITY TEST: OPA GALV: Lock and Momentary during null aglustment end Oper when changing Ranges or Modes UT SELECT: VOLTAGE RANGE: Por Procedure SENSE: Ohms Selector in (47) MODE: Por Procedure INPUT POWER: Connect to same source as the 5200A CONNECTIONS: All other instruments or IEEE cable connections must be removed ‘20db ATTENUATOR: Requires Flatness Verification Figure 47. Equipment Set-Up ©52004 SELECT: VOLTAGE: Per Procedure VOLTAGE RANGE: Per Procedure FREQUENCY: Per Procedure ‘SENSE: Extornal (rape installed) PHASE LOCK: Off INPUT POWER: Connect to same source as UT, not through 52058 CONNECTIONS: Ail othor instrument or IEEE cable connectors must be removed UT SELECT: VOLTAGE RANGE: Per Procedure ‘SENSE: Ohms Selector in (47) MODE: Per Procedure INPUT POWER: Connect to same source as $2000 CONNECTIONS: All other instrument or IEEE cable connections must be removed GUARD: Intornal Figure 4-8. Equipment Set-Up Range: 300 mv FREQUENCY cr) MINIMUM NOMINAL, MAXIMUM, 2 369.688 (-3) 380.000 (3) ‘300312 (-3) 1k 389.059 (-3) 390.000 (-3) 390.047 (-3) 20k 389.088 (-3) 390.000 (-3) 390.047 (3) 50k 380.848 (-3) 390.000 (-3) 360.158 (-3) 1M 386.700 (3), 330.0 (-3) 383.300 (-3)‘Table 4-7. 390 mV on the 3V Range Tests FREQUENCY (2) RANGE: Vv INIA NOMINAL, MAXIMUM 20 1K 20k ‘50k 1M. e069 ‘38004 ‘38004 3807 36670 39081 ‘30008 99008 “30028 30830 ‘Table 4-8. 1V on the 1V Range Tests FREQUENCY 2) RANGE: 1V INIMUM NOMINAL, MAXIMUM 20 1k 20k 50k ™ avo 99884 9084 99040 198500 1.00000 1.00000 3.00000 1.00000 1.00000 1.00080 1.00018 1.00018 00060 +0350 ‘Table 4-9, 3.99 oF n the 3V Range Teste FREQUENCY He) RANGE: 3, MINIMUM, NOMINAL, MAXIMUM 20 1k 20k 50k 1M 3.09688 3.80008 3.89008 3.80768 3.66700 3.90000 3.90000 3.90000 3.90000 3.80000 ‘90812 3.90082 3.90082 soz 3.89900 ‘Table 4-10. 3.9 on the 30V Range Tests FREQUENCY 2) RANGE: 20¥ MiNIUM NOMINAL, MAXIMUM 20 1k 20k 50k 1M ‘3.8000 3.8000 3.8000 3.8000 3.8000 3.9031 3.9008 3.8008 3.9023 4.3680 ‘Table 4-11. 10V on the 10V Range Tests FREQUENCY (He) RANGE: 30v MINIMUM, NOMINAL MAXIMUM 20 tk 20k 50k ™ 10.0000 10.0000 10.0000 10.0000 10.0000 10,0080 10.0016, 40.0018 10.0060 10.360064 S80 sense source] '5200A/S205A (6215A) SELECT: VOLTAGE: Por Procedure VOLTAGE RANGE: 1000 FREQUENCY: Por Procedure SENSE: Internal (straps removed) PHASE LOCK: Off INPUT POWER: Connect 52054 (5215A) and UUT to same source. Connect S200A through S205A CONNECTIONS: IEEE cable may be connected provided controller chassis connected to §200A chassis All other instrument connections must be removed UUT SELECT: VOLTAGE RANGE: Per Procedure SENSE: Ohms Selector in (47) MODE: Per Procedure INPUT POWER: Connect 10 same source as 52054, CONNECTIONS: IEEE cable may be connected provided controller chassis 8 connected to S200A chassis. Allother instrument connections must be removed GUARD: Internal Figure 49. Equipment Set-Up E ‘Table 4-12. 35V on the 20V Range Tests FREQUENCY RANGE: 30¥ (He) ‘MiNiMuM NOMINAL MAXIMUM, 20 349720 35.0000 135.0280 1k 3aooee 35.0000 35.0088 20k Based 36.0000 35.0056, 50k 349790 36.0000 35.0210 200k 349825 35.0000 35.0175 ‘Table 4-18. 100V on the 100V Range Tests FREQUENCY RANGE: 1000, (2) ‘MINIMUM NOMINAL, MAXIMUM. 20 (99.982 100.000 100.080 1k 90.984 100.000 r00016 20k 90988 100.000 1009016 50k 98.940 +100:000 100.060 100% 98.200 100.000 100.200‘Table 4-14, 100V on the SOOV Range Tests FREQUENCY RANGE: 500V (2) Mui NOMINAL MAXIMUM 2 99095 ik 90989 20% sa.9s9 504 9915 100% 98.750 100.000 100.105 100.000 100.001 100.000 100.044 100.000 100005 100.000 100.260 ‘Table 4-18, 300V on the S0OV Range Toste FREQUENCY RANGE: 500¥ (He) MINTMUAE NOMINAL MAXIMUM 2 290.760 tk 290952 299 952 300.000 900.240 300.000, 00.048 ‘200.000 00,068 4-55. Introduction £56. Calibration of the UUT is carried out on three levels, The first level consists ofan accuracy check using the Performance Test. The Performance Test should be used to cheek the UUT for calibration every 90 days of year, as required to meet the applicable accuracy specifications. The Performance Test should also be used to check the UUT for calibration after any repairs are ‘made to the instrument. The second level involves software calibration and can be performed at any time. ‘Applicable proceduresare described in Appendix7B. The third level involves hardware calibration and is described in the following paragraphs. Power supply adjustments are shown in Figure 4-1. Adjustments and test points are accessible on the top edge of the peb by opening the hinged module top. For any level of calibration, the ambient temperature should be 23°C + 2°C and the relative humidity should be less than 75%. Refer to Table 41 for the recommended test equipment. 4-57. Initial Procedure 458. With the power switch set to OFF, replace the Isolator with the Bus Interconnect and Monitor Board, MIS-7013K. Set the power switch to ON and allow the instrument to warmup for at least two hours before ‘continuing with the calibration adjustment procedures, 4-58, Power Supply 460. Perform the following Power Supply checks and adjustments. All required test points are available on the Bus Interconnect and Monitor Board. All adjustments are found on the Power Supply Board, as illustrated in Figure 4-1 ‘CAUTION The mulimeter can be damaged it used to cheek its own supply voltage. To avoid this possibilty, do not use the UUT to check UUT voltages. Connect the test DMM HI input to Veo on the Bus Interconnect and Monitor Board and the LO input to Vss. 2. Adjust R6 fora seading of OSV det 0Stoset the logie supply 3. Transfer the HI DMM input lead to VA2. 4. Adjust RS fora reading of 5.05V de-+ 05 toset the analog supply. 5. Verify thatthe voltages in Table 4-16 are within the preseribed limits Table 4-16, Power Supply Verticalions TEST POINTS | VOLTAGE RANGE (voc) SUPPLY WigH [Low | FROM | TO voo | Vee Logie Veo | Vee Logie var | AR Analog vaz | ar ‘Analog vaa | aR ‘Analog vad | AR ‘Analog85064, 6. Prepare the test DMM to read ac volts, Connect the HI DMM input lead to LINE oa the Bus Interconnect end Monitor Board (LO to AR). If the UUT is set for 100V ac or 120V ac operation, verify a voltage reading of 13 to 17V ac. With 220¥ ac or 240V ac operation, venfy a voltage between 63V ac and 8.5V 7. Onthc UUT, posh the POWER button to OFF, remove all test leads and the Bus Interconnect and Monitor Board, and replace the Iyolator. 8. Reapply power to the UUT. 4-61. DC Calibration Procedure 4-62. There are two methods of performing de calibration on the UUT. The first method uses the Calibration Memory to store separate correttion actors for each range and function and is explained later i this ‘manual The second method does not use the Calibration Memory and is dealt within this ection. The following preliminary steps are required to ensure that no vero of calibration correction factors are in effect during de calibration: 1 Seleet V DE funetion and 100 mV range 2. Toggle the ZERO V DC/OHMS buttonso that the ZFRO annunciator goes dark. 3._ Slide the rear panet Calibration Switeh to the ‘ON position and verify that the AVG/(CAL) anquaciator is Mashing 4. For each range, push STORE (CAL COR). ‘This operation disables the software calibration ‘correction factors for VDC function, 4-63. Ensure thatthe selectors on the front panel( ight) are positioned as follows: | Guard Selector - disengaged (out ~ internal guard) 2, Ohms Selector - engaged (n - 41) 3. Rear Input Selector - disengaged (out - front input) 4-64. _DC SIGNAL CONDITIONER ADJUST- MENTS 4465. All adjustments in the following procedure are on the DC Signal Conditioner. 1. Select de volts, 100 mV range, slow ier (toggle FILTER until the FILTER annunciator lights), 48 sample 7 (toggle SAMPLE untt| the SAMPLE annunciator flashes slowly), Calibration switch ON (AVG/CAL annunciator flashes), and ¥DC/Ohms Zero off (ZERO annunciator off) 2. Place a short across the VOLTS INPUT/OHMS SENSE HI and LO terminals 3._Agjust RS3 for a UUT reading of 0.0000 0002 (3). 4. Remove the short {rom the input terminals. Place a! megobm resistor in parallel with 20.22 uF ‘capacitor across VOLTS INPUT) OHMS SENSE HI and LO terminals 5. Adjust RS2 for # UUT reading of 0.0000 (0030 (3). 6. Repeat steps? through until both readingsare ‘within range without further adjustment 4-66. A/D CONVERTER CALIBRATION PROGEDURES 4-67. Use the following procedure to calibrate the Aj D Converter module. All adjustments and test points ‘mentioned in this procedure are found on the A/D Converter module. References are found at the top of the AjD Converter PCB or on the inside of the hinged ‘module top. Only the hinged module top need be opened 10 access these test points and adjustments 4-68, This paragraph contains the adjustment procedure for R64. This esistor requires adjustment nly if RSA in che tens bit ladder bas becn replaced during repair-Ifno such replacement has been made, procced 19 the next paragraph. 1. Connect a test DMM HI input to TP?, LO Input to TPO. 2. Adjust RI Tora test DMM reading of 7 00007 0002V. 3. Remove the test DMM connections 4. Set the UY for the 10V range 5. Using the test connections in Figuee 42. apply 10 100000¥ de to the UUT imput terminals 6. On the UT, adjust R64 for # reading of ++10.100000 +: 006050, 7. Remove the test connections end proceed with the following adjustments4-69. A/D Zero Adjustment 4-70, Use the following steps to adjust auto zero on the A/D Conserter module 1. Verify that the 10V range is set on the UUT. 2. Short the UUT input terminals. 3. On the UUT, adjust RB for reading of 0.00000 £ 00001 4-71. Control Setting A 4-72, To prepare the DC Voltage Standard for subsequent tests and adjustments, use the following procedure: 1, Connect test equipment as shown in Figure 4-2. Make only the connections shown as old lines the UUT is not connected at this time 2. Set the Voltage Divider controls at one-tenth the standard cell certified value (standard cell value XO.) 3. Adjust the DC Voltage Standard output for a pull on the ull meter. 4. Record the dial setting of the DC Voltage ‘Standard as Control Setting A. This value is used later in the A/D Converter Calibration Procedures, 5, Disconnect the two leadsat the Voltage Divider ‘output terminals. Connect the UUT as shown in Figuce 4-2 (broken lines) 4-73. MD Ladder Adjustments, 4.74, Use the following procedure when adjusting the AID Ladder: 1. Verify that the UUT is set for the 10V range. 2. Set the Voltage Divider controls fora ratio of 000000. 3. On the UUT, adjust RI (POS. CAL) for a reading of +10.10000V +: 00001 4. On the DC Voltage Standard, reverse the de voltage polarity 5. On the UUT, adjust R2 (NEG. CAL) for “10, 10000V =.00001. Ifthe RI and R2 adjustments cannot be made, perform the A/D Convercer Calibration Procedures 6. On the DC Voltage Standard, restore the positive de voltage output polarity. 85064, 7. Set the Voltage Divider controls for a ratio of 6.050000. 8. On the UT, adjust R7 (REMAINDER) fora iront panel display of +0.50000 + 00001 9, Repeat steps 2 through § until all readings are within tolerance without making further adjustment. 10, Set the Voltage Divider controls fora rato of 05100000, 11, On the UUT, adjust R6 (SV LADDER) for a reading of +5.10000 + 00001. 12, Set the Voltage Divider controts for a ratio of 0.260000 13, On the UUT, adjust R5(25V LADDER) fora reading of +2,60000 00001 14, Set the Voltage Divider controls for a ratio of 0.1400000. 15. Onthe UUT, adjust R4(125V LADDER) for a reading of +1.40000 + ,00001 16,_ Set the Voltage Divider conteols for a ratio of 0.780000. 17. Onthe UUT, adjust R3 (.625V LADDER) for a reading of 0.75000 00001 18, Repeat stops 2 through 17 until all steps are within the stated tolerance. 4-75. Linearity Verification 4276, Use the following procedure to check linearity for the UUT: 1. Verify that the UUT is set for the 10V range (manual) and sample setting 7. 2. Set the Voltage Diniéer controls for a ratio of 0.200000. 3. Set the DC Voltage Standard for an output of approximately 100V. Adjust this output for a reading on the UUT of +20,00000 + .00001, 4. Set the Voltage Divider controls for a ratio of 0.000000 and verify that the UUT reading is 0.00000 = 00001, 5, Reverse the polarity of the de output voltage at the DC Voltage Standard, +9aS06A, 6. On the UUF, verify a readin ‘00001 of 0.00000 7._At the DC Voltage Standard, restore the de ‘output voltage positive polarity 8. Refer to Table 4-17. For each of the Voltage Divider settings hsted, venty a UT reading within the listed tolerances ‘Table 4-17. Linearity Cheeks READINGS ‘NOMINAL DIVIDER SETTING MINIMUM MAXIMUM, 00000, 2.00000 3.00000 +0000 5.00000 6.00000 7.00000 ‘800000 ‘9.00000 +10.00000 +1 00000 12.0000, 13.0000 14.09000 4500000 6.00000, 1700000 +8 00000 +9.00000 2000000 + 0005 2.00005 3.00005 “4.00005 5 00008 6 00005 7 90005 #8 00005 9 00005 10 00008, 11.0006 1200006 13.0008 16 00007 15 00007 +6 00007 +7-00008 18.00008 +9 00008 0.00008 100000 200000 19300000 ‘0400000 19800000 ‘o¢00an 9700000 ‘9800000 ‘9800000 1000000 1190000 200000 11300000 1400000 1590000 4600000 1700000 11800000 1900000 2000000 0.99905 3 90095 2 99905 3 99005 4.99905 5.99905 6 90905 7.99986 99905, 9.99005 10 29094 11 99904 12.9900 +9 99883 14 99989 15 99095 16 90902 17 e022 18.90092 19 00002 9. At the DC Voltage Standard, reverse the polanty of the de ourput voltage. For each of the Voltage Disider settings in Table 4-17, verify a negative UUT reading within the listed tolerances 10. Atthe DC Voltage Standard, restore positive polarity and adjust for Control Setting A, 11. Set the Voltage Divider cootrols for a ratio of 900000. 12. On the UF, venfya reading of +10,00000 + 0001 4-77. RANGE ADJUSTMENTS 4.78, All adjustments and test points in the following procedure are found on the DC Signal Conditioner. References mentioned in this procedure can be typically 420 found on the top edge of the DC Signal Conditioner PCB land on the inside of the hinged module top. Only the hinged module top need be opened to accest all adjustments and test points. 4-79. Use the following steps to adjust the 100 mv range: Verify that the UUT issetfor devolts, FILTER. ‘annuneiator off, sample setting 7, and ZFRO aanunciator off 2. Verily that the DC Voltage Standard i set for Contzol Setting A. 3. Set the Voltage Divider controls for @ ratio of ‘9000000, 4, On the UUT, manually select the 100 mV range. If required, adjust RS3 for 0 + 0002 (3). 5._ Set the Voltage Divider controls fora ratio of 10200000 6, On the UUT, adjust R49 for a front panel display of +200.0000 (-3) + 000s. 4-80. Use the following procedure to ugjust the 1V range: 1. On the UT, select the IV range, 2. Set the Voltage Divider controls for ratio of "20000000, 3. On the UUT, adjust R48 for a front panel display of +2.000000 = 000001 481. Use the following procedure to check the 10V range: 1. On the UT, select the 10V range. 2. Connect the UUT directly to the DC Voltage Standard as shown in Figure 4-2 3. On the DC Voltage Standard, et the output to Control Setting A. 4. On the UUT, verify a front panel display of +10.00000 + 00002 482. Use the following procedure to adjust the 100V range: 1. Connect the equipment as showa m Figure 43, 2. On the UUT, select the JO0V range.3. On the Reference Divider, set the standard cell voltage controls to the standard cell certified value and both the input and output controls to 100V. 4, On the DC Voltage Standard, se the output to ‘approximately 100.0000V and adjust for a null on the null meter. 5. On the UUT, adjust R47 for a front panel display of +100.0000 + 0001. 4-83, Use the following procedure to check the 1000V range 1. On the UUT, select the 1000V range and slide the rear pane! Calibration switch to OFF, Verify ‘hat the CAL annunciator is off. 2, Verify that the 100 volt setting onthe Reference Divider is stil null. 3. Verify a UUT reading of 100.000 + 005. 4. Set the Reference Divider input and output controls to $00 volts. 5. Setthe DC Voltage Standard to approximately 500 volts, then adjust its output fora null on the null 6, The UUT should read 500.000 + 010. 7. Set the Reference Divider input and output controls to 1000 volts. 8, Setthe DC Voltage Standard toapproximately 1000 volts, then adjust its output for a null on the null meter 9, The UUT should read 1000.000 + .014 4.84. If no further hardware calibration is necessary, disable the Calibration mode by sliding the rear pane! switch to off. Refer to Appendix 7B for software ‘calibration procedures. 4:85, AC Calibration Procedure (Thermal True- RMS Converter) 4-86. REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT 487 Thefollowingitems of test equipment aresequired to calibrate the Thermal True-RMS Converter: 1. A S40B Thermal Transfer Standard (with ‘corrections data), 2. AS200A AC Standard (on a 90 day calibration yee). 3, _A335D DC Standard (on a 90 day calibration cycle). 508A, 4. A flatness verified 20 dB attenuator with # proper 50 ob load, 5, A ratio transformer (I ppm or better). 488. Before starting the Calibration Procedure, verify that the ambient temperature is 23 /~/-1°C, the relative Tnumidity is <70%, and the instrament has completed the ‘warmup period of 2 hours. Ifthe frequency is changed during the test, the characterized volage must be readjusted to conform to the new frequency. 489. Perform the Calibration Procedure with the High ‘Accuracy mode and the Calibration mode selected. Any software calibration entries for ac volts must fist be Cleared with procedures described in Appendix 7B, When. the voliage of frequency ovtput of the source is changed, allow the source to settle before taking a reading for record. This can be accomplished by waiting forthe first update of the UUT display. If an adjustment s required, select the Enhanced mode while making the adjustment, then return to the High Accuracy mode to verity the reading before proceeding with the procedure. 4-90. GROUND EQUALIZER ADJUSTMENT 491. Perform the Ground Equalizer Adjustment using the following procedure, 1. Select the DC Volts funetion, 100 mV range, 2. Connect the HI input terminal to the metal bar jn the center of the Thermal True RMS Converter Module Case. Leave the LO input terminal open, 3, Adjust R50 (Amplifier PCB) for a display reading of 0 2 uV de. 4-92. AMPLIFIER ZERO ADJUSTMENT 493 Perform the Amplifier Zero Adjustment usingthe following procedure: 1. Select he AC-+DCNORMAL function, 500V ge 2, Connect the HI input terminal to the metal bat in the center of the Thermal True-RMS Converter Module Case, Leave the LO input terminal open. 3. Connect a tet DVM HI lead to TPS (the left side of R70) through a 10 kilohm resistor. I TP3is not accessible the lead may be placed on the metal adjustment portion of C12, Connest LO to TPI on the Attenuator PCB, 4,_ Adjust RLS for a reading on the test DVM of 0 £20V de, 4-94, SENSOR ADJUSTMENT 495, Perform the Sensor Adjustment using the following procedure: 4085064, 1. Connect the $200A to the UUTT input terminals as shown in Figure +8 2. Select the HI ACCUR function on the UUT. 3. Manually selec the IV range on the UT, 4. Select a L25V (at 1 KH») output from the 52004. 5. Adjust R35 (Amplifier PCB) vata the reading Sisplayed in the NORMAL madeis within +0065 of the reading obtained in the HI ACCUR mode 6, Select « 0.125V (at I kHz) output from the 5200, 7. Adjust R26 (Amplifier PCB) unt the reading displayed in the NOR MAL mode is within 00013 ‘ofthe reading obtained in the HI ACCUR mode 8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 until no further adjustments are required. 4-96. ATTENUATOR AND AMPLIFIER ADJUST- MENTS 497. DC to AC Transfer Measurement Procedure 4:98. Pecform the de to ac transfer measurement procedure as follows 1 Connect the 5200A,335D, and the $408 for DC to AC Transfer Measurements as shown in Figure 45. 2. Set the DC Standard for the frst characterized Point required to complete the calibration procedure listed in Table 4-4 3. Set the S408 tothe rangelisted in Table4-4 and to the DC Transfer mode. Adjust to obtain a null andieation, 4. Reverse the DC input leads to the S40B and adjust null to compensate for postive and negative 5. Select the 5200 output listed in Table 44 6. Switch the SA0B to the AC Transfer mode and adjust the 5200A output to abtain a null indication fon the 5408, 7. Record the output setting on the S200A in a characterization points table for future usage, 4. Perform the above procedure for all characterized points required for calibration (listed in Table 4-4) 4-09. Adjustment Procedure 4-100. Perform the attenuator and amplifier adjustments using the following procedure, 1. Connect the 5200 output to the UUT input terminals as shown in Figure 48, 2 Perform the test and adjustments for steps 1 through 4 listed in Table 4-18 using the characterized points table recorded above 3. Repeat step I of Table 4-18 and verify the ‘displayed reading is within the stated tolerance. If fan adjustment is required, perform the four steps ‘unt all four readings are within tolerance without any further adjustments 4. Perform the test and adjustments for steps $ and 6 in Table 4-18 using the characterized points lable recorded above. 5. Perform the test and adjustments for steps 7 and 8 in Table 418. Repeat the test uatl both steps fare within tolerance without further adjustments, 6. Perform the test and adjustments for steps 9 and 10 in Table 418, 7. Perform the test and adjustments for steps 11 and !2 in Table 4-18 using the characterized points lable recorded above. Repeat the tests until both steps are within tolerance without further adjustment 8. Verify that the readings for steps 9 and 10 sn ‘Table 418 are still within tolerance. Repeat steps 9 through 12 in Table 4-18 unt) all four steps are Within tolevance without further adjustment 9. Perform the test and adjustments for steps 13 and 14 in Table 4-18, 10. Perform the test and adjustments for steps 1S and 16 in Table 4-18 using the characterzed points table recorded above. UL. Connect the $200 output terminals to the input of the Ratio Transformer and connect the output of the Ratio Transformer to the input terminals of the UT as shown in Figure 4-4. 12. Perform the test and adjustment for step 17 in ‘Table 4-18 using the characterized points table recorded above. Record the displayed reading on the UT. 13. Connect the 5200, $408, und the flatness verified 20 dB attenuator as shown in Figure 4-7 (Before performing this step complete the Low Frequency Attenvator Accuracy Test) a.Table 4-18. Amplifier and Attenuator Adjustments REQUIRED CHARACTERIZED uur READING BETWEEN. ADJUSTMENT POINTS TO BE USED| RANGE Minimum | _MAXIMOM 7 aK wv 0008 10002, rraneny 1K | 30 ow 38 995 -3)__[ “60.005 (-3] | —AsAAmp) 3m | 1K W. 3.80005, 3.90005, Rotator) 70 1K 70v 9.9896) 70.0002. RseiAmp 700 aK oa 98996 100.002 Balaton) 700 cs S00 39984 700006. atten EN soo ‘e9.905 (3) | “980.008 a —[—Carattem 7 BK WV KIS/SIsisis is]. = 95808 00002 CinAmp 3 39_[ wv. ‘See Note T | See Note b 515] 30 a Tov. ‘See Note 1—| See Note 1 |_RigjATen) TF iv [0K aa Ix ‘3.9884 70.0006, Crscanten) 7 | ao 30K W. 3.8084d 3.00158. CraAmy 73 Tov [i Toa See Notea | See NoteZ 12 zZ tov_[_™ Sv ‘See Note? | See Note 2_| _ RieiAtton) 5 io] 3 Toov I<] 98996 100 002 Ga0iAtion) 16 100 [50K 30 IS 399% 100 004 CariAten) 17 nav | 1K} 760 mr oa 9e7 (3) | T0008 (3) — Ase Amp 18 [8010 709997 (3) | “110008 (3) | A7A,Amo') Note First. compute RAI using tho following formula RAT = 10-+ (AT 5) -(R2* 1.25) = 0160 ‘where: Second, adjust R13 for RAY Note2 where 1120- A <= RB, then no adjustment of R16 Is required RI = recorded reading at 10V. 1 MHz, 10V range Ro = recorded reading at 39V. 1 MHz, SV range 3 = recorded reading at 10V, 1 MHz, 30V range Fé = recorded reading at 10V, 1 Mz, 100V range 1120-R4> RA, then adjust R16 so thatthe eeaing at TOV, 1 MHz on the JOV range is equal to 10 + 1/2(R3-R4) O85 14 Adjust the S200A output for the reading recorded on the UUT. display in step 17 of Table 418 and adjust the $40B- for a null indication. Record the 52004 setting. 15, While maintaining a null on the S40B by ‘adjusting the $200 output, perform the test and adjustment for step 18 in Table 418, 16, Repeat step 14 with the recorded S200A soting and check for repeatability within 002% of ull indication om the 540B, 4-101. LOW FREQUENCY ATTENUATOR ACCURACY TEST 4-102, Perform this test immediately prior to usage of the attenuator. 1, Connect the $2004, 931B, and the 20 4B attenuator as showa in Figure 4-10, 2. Select a 1V (at 1 KHz) output on the IV range from the 52004. 3, Record the reading on the 931B. Save this reading for future reference 4, Verify that the 9318 reading is within the attenuator manufacturer's specification for de attenuation accuracy. NOTE The Attenuator Flaness Verification Test ‘need only be performed every five years, or if the attenuator fails the Low Frequency Attenuator Accuracy Test52008 SELECT: VOLTAGE: Per Procedure VOLTAGE RANGE: Per Procedure FREQUENCY: Per Procedure SENSE: External (straps installed) PHASE LOCK: Ott INPUT POWER: Connect to same source as other equipment CONNECTIONS: All other instrument or IEEE cablo connections must be removed 9918 SELECT: POWER: BAT OPR RANGE: Per Procedure MODE: 1% Nall for tasting and XI TVM when changing Ranges or Setting DIALS: Per Procedure: Figure 410. Equipment Set-Up F 4-103. ATTENUATOR FLATNESS VERIFICA- TION TEST, 4-104. 9318 Charactertzation Procedure 4-10. Characterize attenuation versus frequency 188 for the 931B using the following procedure. 1. Conneet the 5200A, $40B, and the 9318 as shown in Figure 4-11 2. Select a 250 mV (at $00 Hz) output on the IV range from the 52008. 3. With the IV range and the AC Transfer mode set on the 540B, adjust the 5200A output to obtain a null indication on the 9312, 4. While still maintaining a mull on the 931B, adjust the S40B for a null indication on the alvanometer Select a frequency of 20 kH2 from the 52004, Record the reading on the 931B. Repeat steps 5 and 6 above for 50 kHz. Repeat steps 5 and 6 above for 100 kHz 9. Repeat steps $ and 6 above for $00 Hz and ‘check for repestabilty within 002% of aul 4-106. Attenuator Flatness Verification Test Procedure 4-107. Perform the fatness verification test on the 2048 attenvator using the following procedure 1. Connect the $2004, $408, 9318, and the 20 4B aitenuator as shown in Figure 412. 2. Select a 2.8V (at $00 Hz) ovtput on the OV range from the S200. 3, With the931Bonthe IV range adjust the 52008 ‘output to obtain a null indication on the 9318, 4. With the S40B on the 2V range an the AC Transfer mode adjust for a null indication on the 5408 while still maintaining a null on the 931B, 5. Increase the fequeney output of the S200A to 20 kHz 6, Adjust che 5200A output level to obtain a null Indication on the S403 meter. 7. Record the reading on the 931B,52004 SELECT: VOLTAGE: Per Procedure VOLTAGE RANGE: Por Procedure FREQUENCY: Por Procedure SENSE: External (straps installed) PHASE LOCK: Off INPUT POWER: Connact to same source as other equipment CONNECTIONS: Ail otner instrument or IEEE cable connections must be removed 5408 SELECT: MODE: AC Transfor RANGE: Per Procedure POWER: On ‘SENSITIVITY: Adjust for null por procedure REFERENCE ADJUST: Use for null agjustment in conjunction with sensitivity SENSITIVITY TEST: OPR GALV: Lock or Momentary during null adjustment and Open when changing Ranges or Modes 9918 SELecT: POWER: Bat OPA RANGE: Per Proceduro MODE: .1% Nul for testing and X1 TVM when changing Ranges or Settings DIALS: Per Procedure Figure 4-11, Equipment Set-Up G918 ATTENUATOR SoM LL] o ‘52008 SELECT: VOLTAGE: Per Procedure VOLTAGE RANGE: Par Procedure FREQUENCY: Por Procedure ‘SENSE: External (straps instllea) INPUT POWER: Connect to same source as other equipment PHASE LOCK: Off CONNECTIONS: All other instrument or IEEE cable connections must be removed 5408 SELECT: MODE: AC Transter RANGE: Per Procedure POWER: On SENSITIVITY: Adjust for null per procedure REFERENCE ADJUST: Use for ull agjustment in conjunction with sensitivity ‘SENSITIVITY TEST: OPA GALV: Lock or Momentary during null adjustment and Open when changing Renges or Modes 931B SELECT: POWER: BAT OPR RANGE: Per Procedure MODE: 1% Null for testing and Xt TVM when changing Ranges or Settings DIALS: Per Procedure Figure 4-12 Equipment Set-Up H8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for $0 kHz, 9, Repeat steps 6 and 7 for 100 kHz, 10. Compare the 9318 readings at each frequency with the characterized readings obsained in the 9318 Characterization Procedure. Verify that any Gifferences between these readings are within the tolerances listed below 8. At20 kH2: #.006% correction factor. b, At 90 kHz: 015% correction factor. c. At 100 kHz: +0309 correction factor, 4-108. TROUBLESHOOTING 4-109. Troubleshootmg the multimeter may require module configurations that normally generate latching terror conditions, If this situation does occur, the following procedure can be used to override latching 1, Enable the Calibration mode bysliding the rear panel Calibration Switch to on. 2. Push the AVG button and verify a display of Err. oFF. This operation disables latching errors. ‘The Averaging mode, which is mutually exclusive with the Calibration mode, is not enabled 3. To enable latching errors once again, push the ‘AVG button a second time. If no latching error conditions exist at this time, the display responds with Err, on and normal Calibration mode conditions are restored. Ifa latchingerrorcondition does exist, that condition is identified in the display. sand must be corrected prior to the resumption of normal Calibration mode conditions 4, If the Calibration mode is no longer required, slide the rear panel Calibration Switch (0 off Latching ¢rrors are automatically enabled whenever this switch is cycled on o off 4110. A procedure for isolating faulty modules is contained in Table 4-19. Itis important that the theory of ‘operation given in Secton 3 be read before attempting to troubleshoot the UUT. The module isolation procedure involves making observation of the UUT behavior, then removing oF replacing modules to establish cause-effect relationships, Do not remove or replace modules withthe power on, Follow the procedure step-by-step all the way {rough to assure thatthe fault is isolated to the correct ‘module, Faults in some modules may cause apparent faults in other modules. WARNING AHAZARDOUS COMMON MODE VOLTAGE MAY APPEAR ON THE OUTPUT CON- NECTOR OF THE BIT SERIAL REMOTE INTERFACE (OPTION -06) IF THE BUS INTERCONNECT MONITOR BOARD 1S 506A, INSTALLED AS A REPLACEMENT FOR THE ISOLATOR. TO AVOID THIS SHOCK HAZARD, REMOVE THE BIT SERIAL REMOTE INTERFACE BEFORE INSTALLING THE BUS INTERCONNECT MONITOR BOARD. 44111, Symptom analysis troubleshooting is provided for standard modules in this seotion. Possible failures are listed in order of probability. Troubleshooting {information for optional modules is contained in Section, 6. The following tables and figures provide troubleshooting provedures for standard modules L Controller - Table 420 2. Pront Panel - Table 4-21 3. DC Signal Conditioner - Table 4-22 4. Active Filter - Table 4.23 5. A/D Converter - Table 4-24 6. Power Supply ~ Figure 4-13, 7._ Thermal True-RMS Converter Module - Table 405 a. RMS Sensor Troubleshooting and Replacement - Table 426 b, Thermal True-RMS Converter Typical Test Voltages - Table 4-27 & Thermal True-RMS Converter Attenuator Logie - Table 428, 4-112, Static discharge can damage components ‘contained in the UT. The following precautions should be observed during troubleshooting, repair, or module replacement 1. Never conneet or disconnect modules or components without first pushing the UUT Power switch to OFF. 2. Perform all repairs ata statiofree workstation, 3, Minimize handling of ICs and peb's; do not hhandle them by their connectors 4. Keep repair parts in thei original containers until ready for ws. 5. Use static ground straps to discharge repair personnel 6. Use conductive foam or anti-static containers to store replacement or removed ICs and peb’s 7. Remove all plastic, vinyl, and styrofoam produets from the work area 8. Do not slide static-sensitive devices over any surface 9. Use only anti-static type solder removal tools 10, Use grounded tip soldering irons. 427NOTE If a component ts replaced during troubleshooting, reselection of a selected component, adjusiment of @ non-recurring ‘adjustment, orsume other specific component replacement procedure may become necessary. Refer applicable instructions later inthis ection 4113. If troubleshooting requires opening the Thermal ‘Tme-RMS Conveiter while power is applied to the istrument, proceed as follows Push the POWER button to OFF. 2. Remove the Thermal Trve-RMS Converter 3. Attach the Thermal Teue-RMS Converter toa special extender pcb (Fluke Order Number 85024 7001K). 4. Insta the converter-estender in the original position 5. Push the POWER button te ON. 4-114. Troubleshooting Notes 4115. Latching error conditions are disabled in the Calibration mode Momentary error conditions are not disabled Nore The ground integrity of the multimeter es ‘mamtained via one of the Poner Supply weeuring serens. If ahis seren is loose or ‘mussing. notse problems can be encountered. Viewing the multimeter fom the rear, locate the three buttonhead screws along the eft side of the heat sink Ver that the middle serew is highly secured. 4-116. If interaction between modules in @ problem during troubleshooting, us of eitherthe Static Controller or the Test Module could be helpful. Using the Static Controller, bus 1C, 1D, and handshake signals may be applied separately to most analog and digital modules The Test Module may be used to either check or troubleshoot the Controller module. Complete use information and troubleshooting techniques are provided with these test modules, 4117, Use the Bus Interconnect and Monitor Board (MIS-7013K) to access lines on either the digital (unguarded) or analog (guarded) interbus. In using the Bus Interconnect Monitor Board, note thet RTI physically does not extend to the Isolator-Intereonnect slot. RTI saceessible with the Monitor Board installed in any of the first four slots (JITA, B, C, or D). The outputs of the optional Ohms Converter and Current Shunts modules are on RTL 4-28 cauTION Do not apply an input directly to the A/D Converter module. Damage to the A/D. Converter may result. The DC Signal Conditioner may be bypatsed by applying 2 Signal directly to the Active Filer module, a3, bullied in the module isolation procedure. 4118, Care should be exercised when soldering on ‘multlayer ponted circuit boards. Excsssive heat can De ‘expecially ruinous. Note the following considerations: |. Excessive heat ean cause unseen damage to board laminations and through-hole plating. 2. Soldenng up temperaturesubove 700°F should be avouded imal cases 3. Whenever possible, allemate soldering tool usage betwecn divergent areas on a board Concentration of heat in any one area i thereby sinieiced. 4-119. Non-Recurring Adjustments 4120. POWER SUPPLY 44121. Variable resistor R9 in the U3 Regulator exevit of the Power Supply Assembly is set atthe factory and should not require addwonal adjestment. f any other Power Supply components are replaced, use the following procedure 1. Connect test DMM between 15 (VA2) and ANALOG RETURN (AR) at TPS and TPS respective, 2 Record the value ofthe ceading 3. Connect the test DMM betmoen +15V (VAI) and AR at TP3 and TPo respectively. 4._ Adjust R9 until the test DMM reads within .25V of the reading recorded in step 2 above 5. Recheck the -15V and +HSV supplies at the Points given in steps I and 3 above reepectvely and ‘enfy that thoy read ~18 + 0.78V and +15 0.75V either is outside the stated tolerance repeatsteps | through 4 unt both values are within tolerance 4-122, THERMAL TRUE-RMS CONVERTER 4-123, Thermal True-RMS Amplifier Assembly 4124. Vanable resistor R34 1n the Square Root Amplifier cireuit controls the Sensor cireuit transient response, Itisset atthe factory and should not require any additional advustment. ff any components in the circuit, are replaced during troubleshooting, adjust or verify the R34 setting as follows: 1. Manually select the AC +DC Normal function and the IV range, 2. Apply aa input of 0.628V de to the DUT input terminals3. Connect a test DVM between TPS (HI) and TPI (LO). 4, Adjust R34 for a test DVM reading of 25 £003V de, 4125, Variable resistor R6L in the Sensor Protect circuit controls the maximum voltage applied tothe rms sensor. It is set atthe factory and should not require any Additional adjustment. If any components in the circuit are replaced during troubleshooting the circuit can be adjusted or verified using the following procedure: 1 Adjust R61 fully clockwise (CW). 2, Manually elect the AC + DC function and the 1V range, 3. Apply @ 2V de input to the UUT input terminals 4, Connect a test DYM between TP6 (HI) and TPI (LO), 5, Adjust R61 for a test DVM reading of 22 FO01V de. 4-126, Variable resistor R78 in the Ranging Aroplificris the coarse adjustment for the zero adjustment R15. Ii set at the factory and docs not require calibration adjustment. However, ifany components inthe eireit are replaced during troubleshooting, or if RIS is at one extreme without bringing the citcuit into tolerance, R78 can be adjusted using the following procedure: 1. Adjust RIS to the center of its adjustment range, 2. Connect @ test DVM between TP3 (HI) through a 10 kilohm resistor and TPI (LO). 3. Adjust R7B fora test DVM reading of 042 uV de. 4, Perform the Thermal True Converter Adjustments to verify the calibration of the UUT. 4127, Variable capacitor C8 compensates the ranging amplifier in the X20 setting and requires adjustment only if repair or replacement of components takes place in the ranging amplifier. Use the following procedure to adjust C8 if required 1. Short the center wiee of P2to ground, The shell ‘of the P2 connector is not at ground 2. Select the 100 mY range on the UUT. 3. Conneet an oscilloscope probe to TP3 with the ‘ground clip in TPI. Select oscilloscope settings of 50 mV/div and 0.5 ms dv 85064, 4, Adjust C8 for minimum noise on the scope display. 5. Select an oscilloscope sweep speed of 0.01 us/div. 6. Verify that the amplifier is stable, ie., not oscillating, 7. the amplifier is unstable readjust C8 until the ‘minimum noise is obtained without causing the amplifier to oscillate, 4128, Variable capacitor C9 compensates the ranging amplifier in the X6.25 setting and requires adjustment only if repair or replacement of components takes place in the ranging amplifier. Use the following procedure to adjust C9 if required, 1. Short the center wire of P2to ground, The shell of the P2 connector is not at ground. 2. Select the 300 mV range on the UUT. 3. Connect an oscilloscope probe to TP3 withthe ‘ground clip in TPI. Nominal scope settings are 50 mV /div and 001 us dv. 4. Adjust C9 for minimum capacitance, i. with the center adjustment screw all the way out. 5. Adjust C9 in toward maximum capacitance ‘until the oscillations stop. Adjust C9 in atleast two 4-129, Thermal True-RMS Attenuator Assembly 4130, Variable capacitor C13 in the X.08 Attenuator ficult is the coarse adjustment for the 10V range adjustment CIS, It is set at the factory and does not require calibration adjustment. However, if any components in the circuit are replaced during troubleshooting, or if CIS is at one extreme without bringing the cieuit into tolerance, C13 can be adjusted using the following procedure: 1, Adjust C1S to the center of its adjustment range. 2. Manually select the AC HI ACCUR function ‘and the 1OV range. 3. Apply an input of 10V at $0 kHz to the UUT input terminals. 4, Adjust C13 for a UUT reading between 9.9850 and 10.0850V ac. 5, Perform the Thermal True RMS Converter ‘Adjustments to verify the calibration of the UT, 429‘Table 419, Faulty Module Isolation ACTION Goto the step umber given tor correct, response ves [NO Push POWER ON. The following should be displayed HI-Y VY (Y= Software Number) (CxOEXXXA (X= Option Number) 0.000 {DC Volts, 1000V range, sample 7, titer FO) ls the aigplay blank? Is the initial display other than HI—Y.V.¥? Is the reading other than 0.000 +006? ‘Ave tho fist three displays normal? DISPLAY BLANK AT POWER ON Remove Bus Interconnect (or isolator it installed. ‘Turn power ON. is HI—YYY dlaplayed? ‘Was the isolator inetaliod? Install interconnect-monitor inthe isolator slat. Is HI—Y.Y.Y displayed? Bad Isolator. Go to Seetion 6 under Isolator ts the power indicator on? (Check the fuse. Is it bad (replace)? Remove Cal Memory chip and remote interacas if installed Ie HI—V.Y.¥ displayed? Replace Cal Memory ehip. Is HIXY.V.Y displayed? ‘Bad Cal Memory chip. Replace EEROM Bad Remote Interface. Go to Section 6 under the appropnite interface. Intall the interconnect-Monitor PCB in the Isolator slot. Check power supply voltages as follows. Test DMM Common to VSS. VDD =H14t0+126 VOC = 45.15 10 5.25 VGG 2-114 t0-126 LINE = 13V ac to 17V ac (100 oF 120V AC), or 6.5V ac to 8.5V ac (220 oF 240V AC) ‘Are the power supplies within tolerance? Remove all modules except the Front Panel Recheck power supplios Within tolerance? eoiace modules one ata time (start with Controller, rechecking supplies after replacing feach module. The last one put in when the supplies go bad is the problem. Go to the appropriate figure or table for that module Remove the front panel. Recheck suppliee. Within tolerance? Problem an power supply, motherboard, or power supply interconnect, Bad Front Panel. Go to Table 4-21 Remove Cal Memory chip and the remote interface i installed ‘Check IC 6,5, 1,0 on interbus. All moving?‘Table 4-19, Faulty Module teotation (cont) Go to the step ‘number given for correct ves ‘Check AOK tine. Mowing? {Check 100-7. All moving? ‘Cheek Controlier SYNC PULSE AT TPT. Moving? ad Controlir. Go to Table 4-20. {Bad Front Panel. Go to Table 4-21 Remove analog modules, leaving only Controller, Front Panel, and interconnect Js the aispiay normal? Faulty Analog Module. Replace one ata time — last one in isthe problem. Go to the appropriate table for that module Remove Front Panel, replace DC Signal Conditioner, Filter, A/D Converter. CCheok IC tings, ACK line, 1D lines. Al moving? ae Controller. Go to Table 4-20. ‘Bad Front Panel. Go to Table 4-21 28 2 2 INITIAL DISPLAY OTHER THAN HI—V.¥.Y Remove interconnect PCB (or Isolator if installed) ‘Apply power. Is the display as follows? HIV (GXXXXXA Error ® Was the isolator installed? Install Interconnect-Monitor PCB in isolator slot Is display normal? Bad Isolator. Go to Section 6 ‘Ate Cal Memory chip or remote intorface installed? Remove Cal Memory chip and remot. Display normal? Replace one ata time. Go to eppropriate figure. Install Interconnact-Monitor PCB. Check for shorts between the IC and the ID lines. Shorts? Remove all modules except Front Panel. Removed short? Reinstall modules one at a time (start wth Controller), checking for shorts between ‘modules. Last one in ls the probiem. Go to the figure forthe appropriate module, ‘Are any ofthe IC, ID, oF ACK tines always high or always tow? Remove all modules except Front Panel and Controller IC and ID moving? Remove Front Panel. Reinstall de analog modules if removed, ‘Aro the 1G, ID, and AGK tines moving? Bad Controller Go to Table 4-20.“Table 4-19, Faulty Module Isolation (cont) ACTION Go to the step number given for correct response ves [NO Is the display normal? Front Pane! bad. Go to Table 4-21 Faulty Analog module. Replace one at time until symptoms recur. Last one in is faulty Go to the table for the appropriate module sa | 7 READING NOT ZERO AT TURN ON Remove all optional modules (except isolator i installed) leaving Controller, (Isolaton, DC Signs! Conditioner, Filter, A/D. Front Panel Apply power Is the reading zara? Replace modules one at atime until reading snot zero. Last one in isthe problem Go to Section 6 Is the Isolatorinstaled? Replace Isolator with Interconneet-Manitor PCB. Is the reading zero? Bad Isolator. Go to Section 6 Install intarconnect Monitor if not already installed. Check supply voltages 2s follows. ‘Test DMM LO on AR (analog return). VAI = +1425 to +1875V_ VAG = -29 to -32V VA2 = -14.25 to -1575V_ VCC = -15V Different must equal VAS = +2910 +32V VSS=-20V 4910 52v Supply voltages intolerance? Remove all modules except Front Panel Supplies in tolerance? Ropair power supply Go to Figure 4-13 Replace modules one a time, checking supplies between modules, Last one in is fully. Go to the appropriate tiqure or table Remove Filter module CAL switch on, Select DG Volts. 1600V range. Is the reading zero? Replace Filler module, yamove OC Signal Conditioner lace a jumper (short) between AT? and RTE Is the reading zaro? (DC Signal Conditioner bad. Go to Teble 4-22 Filter module bad. Go to Table 423 [AID converter bad. Go to Table 4-26 Do the Pertormance Tests earlier inthis section, ls the unit within the tolerances given? Is tho Cal Memory chip instlleg? Remove the Cal Memory chip Is the unit now within tolerance? Faulty Cal Memory chip.“Table 4-19, Faulty Module leolatlon (cont) ACTION Goto the siep ‘number given for correct response YES |_NO Ts tho eolator inetalog? Replace Isotator with Interconnect-Monitor PCB. | unit within tolerance? ‘Bad tsolator. Go to Section 6. Is the failure in OC Volts Performance Test? Go to Section 6 for te appropriate fauity function Rernove all optional modules. leaving Front Panel, Controller, DC Signal Conditioner, ‘ative Fiter, and A/D Converter Do the DG Volts Performance Test. I the unit within tolerance? Reinstall options one at a timo, rechecking DC Volts tolerance. Last module installed ‘when unit Becomes out of tolerance is faulty. Go to Section 6. Check supply voltages according tothe following chart VAI = +1426 to +1575V VAG = -20 to -32V VA2=-1428 to -15.75V_ VCC =-18V Diflerent = 4.9 10 5:2 VAS = #20 to +2V. VSS = -20V ‘Are the supplies within tolerance? Remove all modules except Controller and Front Panel, Are the voltages correct? Replace modules one at a time until the voltages go bad. Last one in is the problem Go to the appropriate figure, Ropair power supply. Go to Figure 413. Connect the test DMM LO to RT? and HI to ATS. Apply known voltages tothe inputtotest the DC Signal Conditioner. The following veltages are suggested inputs: GAINRANGE _OCSIG.COND TEST OMMINPUT READING ow ER ‘20.0 xi00 ao mw ov w x10 125 my 125 w mo ey av ww x w sv 1 ” wv racv ov x10-96 1260 200. ‘ow pies) 8 2a 2001 vost oy sow +0001 xed om 180 ‘Ace the readings correct (noise oF dit in the DC Signal Conditioner will show upon the Test DMM readings)? DC Signal Conditioner faulty. Go to Table 4-22 Connect Test DMM HI to RTE. Repost table in stop 87. The test DMM readings should be the same. ‘Aco the Tost DMM roadings the same? Faulty Active Fiter modulo, Go to Table 4-23, Faulty A/D Converter. Go to Tabla 4-24. | oF 6Table 4-20. Controller Troubleshooting Note ‘Que to the speed end complexity of the Controller, it is recommended that, when a problem is isolated to the Controier the unit be sent to the nearest Service Center fr repair. The following information wil assist in veriying Controller operation Many problems require the use of an in-ciruit tester ‘Troubleshoot the Centraiter with only the Controller Front Panel and Power Supply installed The most common symptom of Controlar failure is blank display. Otner symptoms include an improper display, a failure to read ‘switches or respondito external interrupts, or an initialization dieplay (°CKXXXXX) improperly indicating all optional modules present The following checks verity basic Controller operation 1 Check power supply voltages at the Controller. Tost Points are located on the circuit board top edge and are denttied on the inside of the hinged module top ‘Test OMM LO TP1 (VSS) ‘Yost DMM HI: TP3 (VEC +5¥) Ps (vBB -8V) TP6 (vO0 +12¥) any of theoe voltages are more than 5% out of tolerance. proceed to "Power Supply Troubleshooting’ inthis section, '1the power supply checks good, verity tne prasonce of te following signalsin sequence Ifa signalis present. {9900n to the next check #t a signal isnot present, the Controller may be faulty. Although probable faultcausing components or circuits may be mentioned, the Controller wil probably require repair ata Service Center SYNC pulse at TP7 Hf no SYNC pulse, check 01 at U1S-22; 02 at U18-15. (tes fallure suggests U19) RESET signal at U10-2 on power-up: check for 0.1 sec low-going pulse. (Test falure suggests reset iroun) CPUINT at TP4 DLOAGK at TPE ‘Table 4-21. Front Pane! Troubleshooting SYMPTOM POSSIBLE FAILURE No ACK Pulse 28, UI9 (Address Decoders) U22 (Inelroct FF) U9. 17, O10 (ACK Ciroury No Display (ACK Pulse Preset) Ut0 UKill Circuit) [No Response to Switch Pushes (Display Good) ‘Switch Associated with Function U32, CR2-CRE Open Segment Bad in all LED's Check path trom Latch to Transistor dnvers to LED Cathode One LED doesnt lignt Check path from Latch to Inverter to Transistor Drivers fe LED Anoae ‘Segmont oF Decimal missing on only one LED Bad LED Dispiay gives wrong numbers one LED brighter | U1 (Reset to Indirect Addross F/F U23) Address Decoder (Problem isincicativeof front pane! responding to an Invalid accress)‘Table 4-22. DC Signal Conditioner Troubleshooting SYMPTOM POSSIBLE FAILURE DC Inoperative ali Ranges Display Blanks Locks in Overrange Reading Drits Won't Zero 100 mv Range Bad 1V and 100V Range Bad 100V and 1000V Range Bad Random Readings Nonlinear Readings 018, 19, Us Baa ur oru2 us Us: G14, 215, 16 Leaky US or Us, at, 082. a14 238, 024, a15 k2, 03, 08 1 Open, K2 Shorted 016, 015, O14 Leaky DC SIGNAL CONDITIONER ADDRESS: IC, 1C3, ICO GAIN CONTROL. ios 102 GAIN 0 1 x09 1 0 xto + 4M INPUT CONFIGURATION CONTROL “Used for ohms and de current moasurements ADDRESS AND DATA FIELD INPUT FROM ATTENUATION External eT External 64 are NOTE: I54-R67. 018,019.01 022 are eplaced it willbe necessary toreturnthemoduletotnefectory (atin. PARTS) to.be temperature compensated anew‘Table 4-29. Active Filter Troubleshooting ‘SYMPTOM POSSIBLE FAILURE High Zero Ortset (282, 025, 019, 420 Shorted DC inoperative ‘018 Open - 021, G22, G28, G24 Open O27, US Digital Logic Overrange US -@19, a20 Shorted Noisy Al Ranges Elther Fiter 225, 092 Leaky - 91, US Bae ‘Slow Filter (ON) 21, 022 Leaky - Ut Bad Fast Filter (OFF) (223, 024 Leaky - Us Bag Nonlinear Readings us Display Blanks Ut ou ‘ADDRESS AND DATA FIELD ‘ADDRESS. fe4, 103, 8101 =1 Fier Bypass 1 Slow Filter 1 Fast Filter 1 Filter - Always on except in Ext. Ret 104 = 1 Ext Ref, Lo 10$ = 1 Ext Ret. Hi Adjustment of R14 1. Short the UUT input termingls, and select 10V de range 2, Short RT@ to AT2 on the Bus Interconnect Monitor. 3. Adjust Rt4 fora reading of #.000000 +2 «igi, (This requires thet the A/D Converter is working accurately.) Selection of R15 oF R18. 11027 or Us have been replaced, RIS and 16 will require reselection itajustmentof R14 doesnotzerothereading. 41. Only one of F15 and A16 will be installed. Replace whichovor is installed with a short. Connect the R16 shor to the R16 short. ‘Short RTE to RT2 on the Bus Interconnect Monitor. 2 8 4. Connect the test OMM Hi to TP3 and LO to TP1 on the Active Filter module, 8 Solect a cosistor trom the tablo below according to the measured offset. If the polarity Is postive install thy resistor as RIG; H negative as R15. (Meximum allowable oftset in tis step i8 5200 4W/) OFFSET WW) RESISTOR FLUKE PART NO. 6, After installing the resistor, adjust R14 436‘Table 4-24, RE A/D Converter Troubleshooting DIGITAL BOARD Display Blanks Improper Readings, Inoperative A/D, Noriinesr Readings Flickering Display Diteet Aaaross 14,3, & 2 High Inairact Adcress 1c2 & 1 High (end Ring Counter not in C0 time period, CO = 0) POSSIBLE FAILURE 1U39, U34, USS (Atfecting ID Lines) check Transistor Array Outputs to Jt and J2— ‘The rise anc fal times of these Switching Pulses Must be <2 psec. Autozero Control — U28, U24 100 eset Counter ot \uto Z9°0 102 = 0= Butter Input 102 =1 = Remander Input 103 = 1 = Channel x (Auto Zere and remainders 1 and 3) 103 hannel ¥ (Remainders 2 and 4) | This inact Address allows the ID7 enable to bring back Polarity Bits to the Controlier Module [ANALOG BOARD First Check TPS — Should be switehing between + and -7V. Typical failures in ths cicult result in a portion of the switching slope having a slew rate less than 1Visee. A glteh SYMPTOM Noisy Reaaings Nonlinear Ladder Ladder out of Tolorance: AL Digits Wrong Reading Locked (Doeen't Respond to Input Change) or Always Overrange ‘Bad Remainders (Lesser Dights) No Polarity Bit Returned Shitty Readings (Most or all Digits) NOTE IU1, RQ, RI4-R16, AB4, R96, RSO-55, ROT, O1-Q3, 011 ‘at the 2019 point is normal, POSSIBLE FAILURE us, U2, U3 Us, a9, a10 (027), FETS 011-016 or 017-021 7, a81, 82 Us, 9, Ut, U2, U3, 02, 08 22, U4, US 29, 026 ‘Autozero Sattling Time Problems UB, 030-08, ar .016, 025, 0F 226 are replaced it wil be necessary 10 return the module tothe factory {attr PARTS) to be \emperature compensates anew.GUARDED SUPPLY SYMPTOM POSSIBLE FAILURE vat — BAD U3 BRE or Transformer (018y) Noisy 03 vaz— BaD U4BR2 oF Transformer (180) Notsy cs VAS — BAD. UI.0R3 881, Transtormer (130V) Noisy er vas — BAD, U2.CRS.BR1, Transtormer [-30¥) Nowy ca Veo (Guarded) US\AS RS C5,CRT,CRZ Transformer VAI and VA2 are used asa reference for VAG and VAd VAS and VA¢ could load down VAt and VA2 Check by lting the reference diodes CRS and CRA UNGUARDED SUPPLY cry) U8.C8.C9.012.BAS, Transformer Yoo 121 U7.C13,C10 67.89. Transformer Yeo (48¥) UBRGRAC8 C14. C11.8R4. Transtormer The drawing below identifies test points an the Power Supply pcb. Input voltages to the regulators should be approximately 8V ragher than thenormal output voltages the output is higher or lower than speciied and noise is not the problem. the regulator is baa TPT (112 Yoo) TP9(+5 Ves) NGUARDED TP -12vee9 [—~ TPO LOGIC RETURN Vee ——— = 8G 5 ele “TP6 ANALOG RETURN (aR) —] Pt +30V (vag) TPS -20V Logic Retutn (Vee) Tea 16 (vA2) ! TPs +15V (VAN) Figure 4-13. Power Supply TroubleshootingTable 4-25, Thermal True RMS Converter Module Troubleshooting ACTION Goto the slep ‘number given for correct rompons Ves |_NO- Perform the OC Volts Performance Test Is the DC Volts Performance Test within the listed tolerances? ‘Troubleshoot the DC portion ofthe instrument using the procedure in Table 4-18. Repair fas required then resume at stop 1 Perform the Thermal True RMS Performance Test Js the Thermal True RMS Performance Test within the listed tolerances? Romove modules not required for Thermal True RMS option, Le, the Ohms Converter Inolator, and IEEE Interface, then repeat the Thermal True RMS Performance Test. the Thermal True RMS Performance Test now within the listed tolerances? place the modules one ata time unti the fale reading returns. Repair or replace the last module reinserted inthe instrument then resume at step 4. CCheck the Supply voltages. Place the test DMM LO on AR (P11-9/80). VA (PH1-28) +1425 to +16.75 Vde VA2 (PI1-8) 14.25 to 18.75 Ve VAs (P11-7) (Ampl POB only) -29 to -82 Vde Vee (P11-12/89) (Aten PCB only) = -15 Vdc Ves (P11-11/51) =-20 Ve Vee (OMM Hi) to Vss (MM LO) +49 to +5.2 Vee ‘Are the supply voltages within the listed tolerances? ‘Check the power supply and instrument bus using the procedures previously given. Repair (r replace as required then resume at step 4. |e the voltage between TP1 (OMM Hl) and Input Low (OMM LO) equal to 0 +80 uv? With the DMM LO on TP! Is the signal at US-7 (Amol) 6 Vee and at UE-1 (Ampl) <- Vo? ‘Check U13, 82, 033, and their associated components on the Amplifier PCB. Repair 16 required then resume at step 4 ‘With the DMM LO on TP1 Is the signal at US-6 (Ampl) >0.7 Vado? Check US and its sssociated components on the Amplifier PCB. Repair as required then resume at step 4 Remove and disconnect power trom the UUT, Measure the resistance between TPY and “TP? and betwsen TP1 and TPS of the Amplifier PCB using a test multimeter whose ohms function output is less than 5 mA,‘Table 4-26. Thermal True RMS Converter Module Troubleshooting (cont) ACTION Go to the step number given for correct response ves | NO {s the resistance roading 294 ohms 7% between TP! and TPS, and 288 ohms +8% between TP1 and TPS? CCheok In sequence the following items on the Amplifier PCB: «a, Switching transistors 026, 212, 14, 16, and thelr assoclated components b. G28 and ite associated components. 3. Q19, 18, 031, and their associated components 4. 010, 08, and their associated components. (The gate voltages on O8 and Q10 normally vary approximately 1V from off toon.) ©. Amplifier U1 and its associated components. Repair as required then resume at stop 4 ‘Check the RMS Sensor using the procedure in Table 4-26, Repair or replace then resume at stop 4 Does the fault occur only Ifthe high accuracy and/or the fast enhanced modes are selected? Connect atest ONM between TP8 (HI) and TP1 (LO) on the Amplifier PCB, then apply & {ull scale voltage input to the UUT terminals. (Apply an Input equalto the fullscalereading rather than the range title of the defective range) With the high accuracy mode selected, doss the reading at TPS remain stable +60 WV) after the intial setting period of approximately 0.5 second (the settling period repeats every 3 seconds) (Check the sonsor adjustment portion of the Calibration Procedure. Adjust or repair @s. requited then resume at stop 4 (Check U1 1, U12, 19, 218, 031, and their associated components. Repair as requirodthen resume at step 4 ‘Select the AC Normal + DC Volts function and Autorange. Apply a 1V de signal to the UUT input terminals With the instrument still in Autorange and the input unchanged, select the AG Volts Normal function {s the instrument reading within the required tolerance with the AC Normal + DC Volts function selected and approximately zero with the AG Volts Normal function selected? {Check the following items in the sequence listed untl the faut is located, repair as required, then resume at stop 4, If the faults not located in one ofthese areas, procaed to the next step in the table. ‘8. K2 and K3 on the Attenuator PCS for the proper switching action C1 through C4 on the Attenuator PCB. ©. US and its associated components on the Amplifier PCB. 4, Voltagos at Q1-7 using the typical voltages in Tabie 4-27, «9. Attenuator circuits on the Attenuator POA. 19 | 20‘Table 4-26, Thermal True RMS Converter Module Troubleshooting (cont) Go to the stop number given for correct response YES [NO Check the voltages present st TPS against the typical voltages in Table 427, ‘Are the readings at TPS comparable to the typical voltages in the Table? ‘Check the voltages present at TP3 against the typical voltages in Table 4-27 ‘Are the readings at TPS comparable to the typical voltages in the Table? Chock the voltages present st TPE against the typical voltages in Table 4-27. ‘Ave the readings at TPS comparable to the typical voltages in the Table? ‘Check U9 and 022 (tor correct auitching) on the Amplifier PCB, Repair as required then resume at stop 4 ‘Select the AC Volts Normal function and Autorange. Apply a 1V ac at 1 KHz signal to the UUT input terminals. |e the displayed reading approximataly 1V7 ‘Are all of the RMS tests at frequanciee et 20 kHz or loss within tolerance? ‘Check the attenuator logic levels using the information in Table 4-28. Repair as required then resume at stop 4. ‘Aro all of the RMS tests at frequencies greater than 20 kHz within tolerance? “Test the switching hybrids on the Attenustor PCB using the following tests (unless other Wise noted al! test points are on the Attenuator PCB and TP1 is L ‘8, Apply @ 12.5 mV ac input and take a reading in the high eccuracy mode for AC and ‘AC DC. The difference in the two readings should be les than 10 uV. »b, With the instrument in the normal mode and no input, the difference in the readings between TPS and TP1 on the Amplifier POB In the 1V range and the SOOV range ‘should be less than 400 uV. ©, UB to TI reads +74:1V de for all ranges. 1, U8-9 0 TP1 reads -71V de forall ranges. ‘¢, UB-1 To TPH reads -0:740.4V de forall ranges except S00V. {.U7-1 to TPI reads -:1.8V de forall ranges except GOV and 100V, 9. U6+1 to TPI reads -821V de forall ranges except 4V and 10V. 1. US+1 to TP1 reads -821V de forall ranges except 1V, ‘Are the switching hybrids within the stated tolerances? Replace any components indicated. I replacement does not cure the trouble, resume with the test in stop 29, Pertorm the Calibration Procedure and Performance Tests for the UUT.. Does the UUT pass al tests? ‘Troubleshooting of the Thermal True RMS Converter is complete‘Table 4-26, RMS Sensor Troubleshooting and Replacement ACTION Goto the step number given Unsolder the suspect AMS Sensor (U6) from the Amplifier PCB using a grounded soldering Iron. Remove R24 oF R28, It either is installed, and replace the reistor inthe circuit with bus wire. Install the Attenuator PCB and the Amplifier PCB on the special Thermal True AMS ‘Converter extender board in the opon configuration, Insure the ground jumperon the back of the Amplifir PCB is installed. ‘Apply power tothe instrument and compare the voltages at Q1-7 forthe 100 mv, 300 mV 1V ranges against the typical voltages in Table 4-27 ‘Are the readings comparable? Check the following itoms in the sequence listed until the faut is located: 1 K2 and K3 on the Attenuator PCB for the proper switching action, », Ct through C4 on the Attenuator PCB, 1. US and ts associated components on the Amplfior PCB. 4, Voltages at 21-7 using the typical voltages in Table 427. «2. Attenuator circuits on the Attenuator PCB. Repair as required, then resume at step 4 Compare the voltages at TP3 on the Amplitier PCB for the 100 mV, 900 mV, and 1V ranges against the typical voltages in Table 4-27, ‘Are the readings comparable? ‘Check in sequence the following items on the Amplifier PCB: 4. Switching transistors Q28, Q12, Q14, 016, and theit associated components '. 028 and its associated components. €. Q19, 018, 031, and their associated components 44. 210, 28 and their associated components, (The gate voltages on Q8 and 10 normally vary approximately 1V from off to on.) «. Amplifier U1 and its associated components, Repair as required, then resume at stop 7 ‘Selact the V AC Normal Function and set the UUT for the 1V range. Apply +42V de to the UUT input terminals, ‘Does the test OMM connected between TPS (Hl!) and TPt (LO) readl-+3.2V de? Connect a jumper from the cathode of CAI to TPI.ACTION Goto the sep ‘Rumber given «for correct response ves [_NO) Dove the test OMM connected between TPS (HI) and TP1 (LO) now read <#25V do? Check US, G24, 025, and their associated components on the Amplifir POB. Repair as required, then resume at step 10. ‘Apply -2V de to the UUT Input terminals. ‘Does the test DMM connected between TPS (HI) and TPt (LO) read!I3.2V de? Connect a jumper trom the cathode of CRt to TPt. Does the test DMM connected between TPS (Hl) and TP1 (LO) now read <-2.5V 6c? Check US, 224, 225, and thelr associated components on the Amplifier PCB. Repair as required, then resume at stop 15. Remove power from the Instrument and replace the RMS Sensor, Perform the Sensor Adjustment portion ofthe Calbration Procedure. Can the Sensor Adjustment procedure be successtuly completed? ‘Does R26 run out of adustment in the clockwise direction? Replace R24 on the Ampliier PCB with 2 20-kilohm, 1% metal film resistor, then resume at otop 21 Does R26 run out of adjustment in the counterclockwise direction? Replace R28 on the Amplifier PCB with a 20-kilohm, 1%, metal flim resistor, then resume at stop 21, Remove the ground jumper on the back of the Amplifier PCB, then close and reinsert the module In the UUT. Perform the Calibration Procedure and Performance Test Boas the UUT Calibrate and pass the Performance Test? ‘Troubleshoot the instrument using the procedur Troubleshooting of the UUT is complete‘Table 4-27. Thermal True RMS Converter Typical Test Voltages Rance | ary | res | res | res | tes ALL w w 300 mv 300 mv ov ov 100v 1o0v s00v 500V 00 | oo | oo | oo | 000 oa | 160 | 640 180 008 | oso | os | 050 | 050 coos | 160 | 640 160 | 160 oe | oso | om | oso 008 | ox | 006 | or os | 190 | 640 160 coos | ors | 006 | ox oa | 160 | 640 160 ors | 039 | oz 033 100 | 200 tooo | 200 ‘All measurements are mace on the Amplifier POB with reference 10 TP ‘Value at TP4 = 250°" (Ay"VIN" ATH? (See Table 3-3 for Ay and Ar values) 8 Thermal True RMS Converter Attenuator Logle Table ‘SAMPLE: F OUT HOLD: F OUT ‘SAMPLE: FIN HOLD: F IN. RANGE: 500V RANGE: 100V RANGE: 3ov RANGE: 10 RANGE 3V RANGE: 1V RANGE: 300 mv RANGE: 100 mv MODE: AC MODE: AC + DC xMEECIe Teer REM XMEEPEPErr EXE xxaeEraraEEKax xMPEEEEEIEENIX RR RRR EMEP OPE MMMM NRKMMP OED MM EETEETETIeXXX™ xX EEEEIPrIXKER X= Dont Gare H z4-131, Factory Selected Component Replacement Procedures 4-132, The values of some components in the Thermal ‘True-RMS Converter are selected at the factory. These components do not normally need reselection unlessthere is a failure and subsequent replacement of some component in the circuit. For those cases the selection procedure is given in the following paragraphs. 4-193. AMPLIFIER OFFSET SELECTION 4-134. If certain components are replaced, the Anplifier Offset Adjustment RIS may not bring the reading within the accepted tolerance. These components include the amplifier Ul, components associated with Ut (especially in the Ul input circuit), and components in the attenuator circuit, If RIS cannot be properly adjusted, use the following proveduire to reselect R10 ot R13. 1, Set RIS to approximately the mechanical center of its range. 2. Connect the test DMM between TP3 (HID and ‘TPI (LO), Insert a 10 kilohm, 5% resistor in line with the test DMM connection to TP3 (HD, This resistor must be connected within one foot of TP3, 3. -Onthe UUT, select the 100 mV range and apply «high quality, low-thermalshort across the SENSE HI and LO inputs, 4. Note the test DMM reading, Match this reading (positive or negative) to the appropriate voltage range shown in Table 4-29. 5. For a postive test DMM reading, compute a new value for R10 by adding the respective resistance shown in Table 4-29 to the original R10 value, Then replace RIO with a 19% resistor nearest this new value, 6. For a negative test DMM reading, compute a new value for R13 by adding the respective resistance shown in Table 4-29 to the original R13 value. Then replace R13 with a 1% resistor nearest this new value. 7. Adjust RIS for test DMM reading of 0.000000 +.000002. 8, If the RIS adjustment does not yield the required test DMM reading, select a 1% resistor next closest to the newly computed value for R10 or RIB. 9, Replace R10 (or RI3) and repeat step 7 10. Once RIS is satisfactorily adjusted, remove the test DMM leads and the UUT shor. 85068 Table 4-29. Amplifier Offset Reslator Selection VOLTAGE VOLTAGE | OHMS ) cy 0.050882 o.ot8s6 0.04762 0.017608 0.045763, o.016260 0.043088. o.osiea 0.040031 0.038116 0.036208 0.034572 032643 0.031233 029574 oozre0 1026308 oozaess, 0.023311 oozt864 0.020411 ores | 10:1 o.o14901 ‘oorsra7 0.012467 ‘.ors301 .oirss 0.008066 0.007788 0.006728 c.006864 0.004583, 9.008507 0.002888 o.001468 ‘.000480 9.000000 4-195. RMS SENSOR GAIN SELECTION 4-136, If the RMS Sensor U6 or any of its associated ‘components are replaced, the RMS Sensor Gain ‘Adjustment R26 may not be able to bring the reading ‘within the accepted tolerance. If this occurs, use the following procedure to reselect R24 or R28 so that R26 ‘can adjust the RMS Sensor Gain. 1. Remove R24 or R28, ifeither is installed, and replace the resistor in the circuit with a bus wire. 2. Perform the Sensor Adjustment portion of the Calibration Procedure. 3. Ifthe Sensor Adjustment procedure cannot be ruccessfully completed, check the direction of rotation of R26, If R26 runs out of adjustment in the clockwise direction replace the bus wire in the R24 position on the Amplifier PCB with a 20 kKilobm, 1%, metal film resistor, R26 runs out of adjustment in the counterclockwise direction, replace the bus wire in-the R28 position on the Amplifier PCB with a 20 kilohim, 1%, metal film resistor. 4, Perform the Sensor Adjustment portion of the Calibration Procedure if a resistor was inserted in either the R24 or R28 position. 4-187, LOW VOLTAGE 50 kHz CAPACITOR SELECTION 4138, Capacitor C7 is selected depending upon the value of the components installed in C5 and C6. Use the following procedure to select the value of C7. 44;506A, 1. On the Attenuator PCB set the variable capacitor C8 forthe minimum capacitance, and the variable capacitors C20 and C27 for the maximum capacitance; insure that the C7 position is vacant. 2, Select the-V AC function, high accuracy mode, and the 1V range on the UT. 3. Apply a 1V, $0 kHz input to the UUT input terminals 4, Select the column in the Table 4-30 that corresponds to the values of the components installed in the C5 and C6 positions. Find the reading in that column nearest the instrument reading and install in the C7 position the capacitance value for that line. 5. After C7 has been installed take a new reading and verify that it is within the instrument tolerance for that voltage and frequency. Iti not, decrease the value of C7 to lower the voltage, or increase the value C7 to increase the voltage until the reading is within tolerance. Irthe reading is >1.03640 installa 6.2 pF capacitor in the C6 position and repeat the ‘est using the appropriate column, 6. Perform the Calibration Procedure and Performance Test to reset C9, C20, and C27. 4-189._ HIGH VOLTAGE 60 kHz CAPACITOR SELECTION 4-140, Select the value of C18 on the Attenuator PCB using the following procedure: 1, Ensure that no component is installed in the C18 position. 2. Select the V AC function, HI ACCUR mode, and the 100V range on the UUT. 3. Apply a 100V, $0 kH2 input to the UUT input terminals, 4. Compare the UUT displayed reading to the values in Table 4-31. Install the value of capacitor ‘on the line including the displayed voltage. 5, Perform the Performance Test to verify that the UUT meets its specifications requirements 4141. Select the value of C25 on the Attenuator PCB using the following procedure: 1. Ensure that no component is installed in the ©25 position 2. Select the V AC function, HI ACCUR mode, and the SOOV range on the UUT. ‘Table 4-90. C7 Selection Values (C5 = 96 pF 5 = OPEN CS = 27 pF 5 = OPEN ce cs = a7 pF 62 oF < 1.00600 1100600 to 1.00840 4100847 to 1.01160 10116 to 107480, 1.01461 10 1.01670 101877 to 1.02190 1102191 to 1.02010 1.02911 to 1.03160, 1.00600 103021 01261 1.01361 +0208 1.02491 1106334 1.00600 < 1.00550 1.00860 to 1.00960, 1.00961 to 1.01390 101181 to 1.01590 1.01601 to 101870, 1.01871 t0 1.02280, 102281 10 1.03030, 11902091 to 1.03000 to 1.91020 to 1.01260 to 101960 to 1.02040 te 1.924e0 to 1.03940 1 to 1.03640 ‘Table 4-31. C18 Selection Values, C18 VALUE VOLTAGE READING oer 15 oF 2 pF 39 pF 47 pF 58 pF 68 BF = 10015 100.18 to 100.90 100.81 to 10158 10150 to 10225 10226 to 10280, 10281 to 10356 30.87 10 104523. Apply a 100¥, 50 kHz input to the UUT input terminals. 4. Compare the UUT displayed readiig to the values in Table 4-32. Install the value of capacitor fon the line including the displayed voltage. 5, Perform the Performance Test to verify that the ‘WUT meets its specifications requirements. 4-142, Select the value of C26 on the Attenuator PCB using the following procedure: 1, Ensure that no component is installed in the C26 position (85064, 2. Select the V AC function, HI ACCUR mode, ‘nd the 600V range on the UUT. 3, Apply a 100V, SO KHz input to the UUT input terminals, 4. Compare the UUT displayed reading to the values in Table 4-33, Use the column of Table 4-33 that corresponds to the value selected for C25 and instal in C26 the value of capacitor on the line including the voltage nearest to the displayed reading. 5. Perform the Performance Test to verify that the ‘UUT meets its specifications requirements ‘Table 4-32. C25 Selection Values. (625 VALUE VOLTAGE READING 0 pF 700820 4100 pF 100.821 to 100.990 180 oF 100.901 to 101.850 220 pF 101.551 to 102400 270 pF 102401 to 103:100, 330 pF 103.101 to 104030, ‘Table 4-33, C26 Selection Values oa c2s=100 | c2s=150 c2s=20 | cas=2r0 | c2s=s00 aoce, Ace i380 1-583698-1 ‘couuacroR, BD EUCE, Ae 417850 125636581 counscror, up ence, a 4x7550 oOrT9 1=583694-1 conmecroR, 0 EDGE, aly 7550 12583698-1 CONNECTOR, 0 EDGE, RBCPT, 8-714 351951 O0779 S83407-5 couwecton, 50 EOGE, ace 54951 00779 383407-5, coNNEcTOR, 5D EDGE, o-Ps Reass0 2-583107-0 ‘commector, 5p goce, oven 422550 2-583807-0 couNcToR, 50 ence, uocemn 22550, 2=583407-0, ‘ComNECTOR, =D EDGE, aces 422550 2-583407-0 CONNECTOR, =D EDGE, SocPIN 22550 2-563407-0 ‘CONNECTOR, =D E008, so-PiN 22550 22503407-0 comscror, ece, owenn 22560 2-583407-0 comscroR, =D E0GE, aocin 22550 2=583807-0 ouNECEOR’F2H 267500 Sroze-1 KEY INSERT, COMECTOR POLARIZING 293498 293498 INSULATOR," MYLAR «005 560923, 580823 SPACER, HAGE, 4-80 Xx .020 343996 33996 SPACER, SAGE, 6-32 X “187 sie isiaie TRANSISTOR, ‘Si, #4070, L1OKD seecron 271151 ern RES, DBF. CAR," 1K 4/55, 1/98 5tsia6 nasi. suTTCH, SIDE brass 6o7as6MP1 - q MP2(14)Typical MP4) MP5(a) Figure 6-3. A2 Mother Board PCB Assembly,‘Table 5-4, Ad Bus Interconnect PCB Assembly DESCRIPTION Luxe sTock No Fe sry ane Mes PART nD. BUS INTERCONNECT PCH ASSEHOLY FIOURE 5-4 (HiS-H081) CAP, TA, 220 UF +/-208, 6 CAP, TA, 220 UF 47-20%, 6Y prove, Si, Rect, 1 AMP 359636 08652 808682 suas: 5856 36289 56289 01295 59636 sgovzzrxocosre4 19602270006 764 sone Figure 5-4. A3 Bus Interconnect PCB Assembly‘Table 5-5. Ad Power Supply PCB Assembly ‘une | wre escuPTIOn stock | spur | moran uo, a. | cone POER SUPPLY POD ASSEMBLY e926 easae 639526 FFIGUEE 5-5 (85054-80517) RCTIFLER BRIDGE 296809 Fuz00 RECTIFIER BRIDGE 1296509 F200 RECTLFLER BRIDGE 296509 Fuz00. RUCTIFLER BRIDGE 286115, i005 CAP, ELECT, 330 UF +/-258, 50¥ aenige 25036 CAP, ELECT, 330 UF +/-258, 50V sense neue CAP, ELECt, 470 UF “10/4608, 50¥ rer arora car, 870 UP ~1074508,, S0¥ arena ayers cr, 3,300 UF, 16/200 sose72 6ogu7 ca, 370 ur ~i0/+504, sov srerge arorse car 870 UF ~10/2508, SOY erate sretge car, 15,000 UF, 16/20¥ 603800 603860 5.6 UF +/-208, 25¥ 368969 296056 5x0025KA1 5.6 UF +/-208) 250 358969, 3960565x0025KA TH, 5.6 UF 4/208, 25¥ 358969, 1960565x0005KA1 eh, G.22 UP 9/204, 50v 309843 cwscocezc CER, 0.22 UF /-20%, 50V 309849 cugcoczzax CER, 0.22 UF +/-208, Sov 309889 crscocezax DISC, 5000 #F +/-208, 30007 aas5039 Ea5839 DISC, 5000 FF +/-208, 30007 535039, 285839 TH, 5.6 UF +/-208, 258 358969 ‘ses65x0025Ka1 My 1 urs/"205, 350 ieisi9 1960010100356 Th, 1 UF +/-205, 350 ieig19 1360010200350, TA, 1 UP 4/208, 350 161919 3960010100356 ek, 0.22 UF +/ "208, Sov 303849 crscocezax Si, BCT. 24, 507 37559 18500 DIODE, SI, RECT. 24, 50V 387559 115100 rons, St, RECT, 1A 3uguat 002 DIODE, St, RECT, 1A 33891 ‘002 rows, St, RECT: 24, Sov 3a7s59 115400 FUSE, S.O-BLO, 1/2 AMP ‘09322 woui-2 NUT," HEX, DOUSLE GHAMPER, 4-10 1Bhoat re wT, HER, 8-32 105 11058 SCR, RAE, =to x 17% srereo S778 SCRBE, FUP, 4-0 X 3/8 93932 Roasse ‘Sem, CAP, Ano X 1/2 528307 26307 ‘SCR, FHF, 6-32 X VA 152140 152180 ‘ORB, FHF, 8032 x V8 runize a2 ‘SCRA, CAP, 8032 1 3/8 BH 658565 558583 SCAB, BAP, 4-80 X 1/2 soree0 01880 WASHER, “LOCK, 6% 170803 110803 WASHER, LOCK, IT Toom #@ 110320 110320 wsHeR, SHOULDER 36386 436386 CoMMECTOR, LIVE, W/LINE FILTER 685998 649998 BRACKET 166328 1352 wear SINK mnize 0305-71 HEAT SINK, FowER suPrLY 639889 639819‘Table 5-5. A4 Power Supply PCB Assembly (cont) rune | we escaprion svock | spy | wre Paar uo, el MEAT SINK, Re. 630864 69536 639868 x RISULATOR, SHM-coNmucTOR toxTiNG 508630 $5085 7403-09-R-51 MP6 —TUSULATOR, CASKET Osun? b9536 SHG yey INSULATOR, SvaTcH 385158 89535 363158 mee LABEL, wale 86250 89535 346250 tro Lu, soubeR, 4 202588 9536 102558 wrio wut’ pLage 639607 89536 639607 Nel SHIELD, FowER suFeLy 839856 69536 630856 kee suproRt, KEAT SINK 6i6208 69536 6i6208 Ey ES, DEP. CAR, 3.3K +/-54, 1/38 34681360031. CR251~4-5P3K3 Bs AES, DEP. CAR, 390 +/-58, 1/4 yrsig e031 cR251-a-5P3908 H 4S, DEP. CAR, 3909/58) 1/4 BNieA3 B003t cRaSi-AA5P3H08 35 ns, Via, Cen, 50 o/20g, 17K 20861 Gait! 62-1-1-500 i BS, VAR, CEaMET! 50 2/2204 e061 Gait 2-1-1500 a RES, DEP. caR, 2lo +/=55, 1/4 376624 90031 Ca251-¥-SPOWOE i ES, DEP. CAR, 2.0K 4/-58, 1/88 auragg am031 cRest—a-sreKa ® ES, VAR, 500" «/-208, 1/24 226066 O2111 62e1~1-504 a suites, S.1De, “peor 234276 89536 e3teT® & ‘SITTGK, FORER, DPDT 291826 89536 291526 53 SITCH, Lune, DeDr 25uers 09536 251278 1 POWER TRASFORNER, W/HEADER 630815 ay5gs 639815 YeteTP10 CONMECTOR, TEST FOINT 512869 02660 62395. a IC, VOLTAGE REGULATOR, +15¥ aster ncrerscr @ ic, vouTace macoLaroR, “isv aig org 5sce B IC, LINEAR, AD) VOLTAGE RBGULATOR agouie Lagt7? w 3c, VOLTIGE REGULATOR, 151 siai9 Norstscr 05 Ic, vouTagE REGULATOR, 50 355107 12040 Lw3toT-5 ic) valTioe REGULATOR, stv aes Nojerzcr iC) VOLTAGE REGULATOR, 7124 sei66s norei2er IC, YONGE REGULATOR, SV feseu7 ncréoscr ismo.teR, BoDv 15188 89536 375168 FUSGIOLIER, CAP. 0236 89536 W058 SooKET, astR/zC 02968 10-16-2031fed ot this end 12, MPS, Ho, Ht mp2 —t See Detail I we 12 —— See Detail and lt H12, MPS, H3 Figure 6-5, Ad Power Supply PCB AssemblyDetail 1 Jt, H4(2), 102), HT XPT, FI, XPIA, Figure 6-5. A4 Power Supply PCB Assembly (cont)“Table 5-6, AS Power Supply Interconnect Assembly wuuKe | bescnrion srock | spy | Fo PART WO, no. | cone POWER SUPPLY INTERCONNECT ASSEGLY buss60 o1s960 FIGURE 5=6 (85054-4004) comiscroR, ED 2DGE, ROCFT, 14H 352682 Ses6gi-2 ‘SOWNECTOR, ED DCE, RACPT, 6-PxH 251625 553650-1 HEY, CONRECTOR POLARIZING 2onae 23498 "AS Power Supply Interconnect Assembly‘Table 6-7. AB Controller PCB Assembly DescaiPrion FLUKE rock no we su one (NF PART ScowTROLLEK Pcs assHBLY FIGURE 5-7 (8505464177) car, cur, oar, car, ce, cae, car, ar, cae, cary car, cor, cor, car, owe, cae, car, car, cr, car, car, cen, 0.22 cee, 1800 ‘eR, 0.22 FLL, 6.8 ER, 0.22 ek, 0.22 eR, 0122 Th, 39 UF ek, 0.03 ER, O.22 cen, 0.2 cen, 0.22 35v Sov 47-205, 501 s/-205, 500 204, 6Y +/=208, 100¥ ue 27-208) Sov UP 47-203, 50¥ We 47-208, 50¥ Nach, 33 PF +/=56, s00¥ cee, "2700 ER, 0.22 sect, “87 eR, 3.22 cen, 0.22 eR, 0.22 eR, 0.22 Lect, 47 oak, 0.22 cen, 0.22 CER, 0.22 eR, 0.22 mer, 47 cen, 0.22 ‘cn, 0.22 scr, 47 ER, 3.22 PP, Gla, 6007 Ue s/-08, 50¥ Ue S75/-20, 250 we 2/208, $04 4/205, 50 te-203, Sov 47-205, 500 $75/-208, 251 +5208, 500 +/-208, 50¥ ur $7204) $0 UP 472208) SOW UF 75/~208,, 259 uF +/-208, 50¥ UE +/-208, 50v ur 275/208, 250 UF 2/208, So¥ drobs, Si, it SPEED swxzCHING DXODE, 21, UHOOMP, 5.1 Ve screw, PUP, boo x 8 CASE ASSEMBLY (INCLUDES MPc-Me6) CASE HALF case COVER SHIELD, Deca, DecaL, ‘aro, carp, Case coven oONTROLLER” eauTiox| CASE REAR CASE FRavT SPRING, COIL, 6 ~ 3/4 Gesth Hi) ‘SPACER, STANDOFF, 1-80 (not shown) RBS, TEP. CAR, 100K +/-56, 1/24 es, DEP. CAR, 620K 4/-54) 1/40 coves soseig Sensi so9es eevee 309089 scabs 509849, 63615 301361 30989 509849 500849 160317 106211 309849 bssiat 300889 309889 509889 509849 55191 30989 309889 500889 300819 és5191 3098s 309849 éssiat 30989 23323 basis 256168 38510 492990 oes eszit2 510359 pio 383368 353356 seks, 335600 388920 taz509 9536 159% 9536 1159 35289 71580, 11550 11590 reve 1159 11500 71590 02799 51406 11590 69536 71590 19590 11590 71590 59536 71390 11590 1159 111590 89536 71550, 11590 89535 73590 on9t0 ors 59536 89536 09536 59536 09536 89536 89536 89536 89536 83553 3536 0031 031 e584 exgocveaw 28st yoceztn Taneerx00ss czsoczenn cxgoczaur ezzoceeut 960 396x000 6721- a1 00-468 103k exsoczeun czsocza i se3308 DDSOH Gasuer2P IR cusoceeam 655191 czgacecu czsoczeun ezgocz2un casoceatn e5srat cusoceem czgoczaun cezoczaux Ceg0czz4n 655191 cexgocz24 czsoceeam 655191 (egoczeun nase 2316 256168 636510 42590 wo2gra esate euoass ssi508 383354 583356 Gov02-014-0300n 335608 crap1-t-sPr008 cn251—AsP620K‘Table §-7. AS Control oor = 53 RES, DBP. CAR, 10K #/-55, 1/40 snaes9 cre51-te5PI0K i RES, DEP. CAR, 1.5K +/=58, 1/08 5a38i8 cresi-ioSPuS % ES, DEP. CAR, 1.5K 4/=58) 1/88 sags cee 1—I-5P IS Fd HES, DEP. CAR, 10K +/-55,° 1/4 ‘bso cre5ta1-5P 10K 38 HS, DEP. CAR, 33K 2/-54, 174 nasa crest ISP % ES, DEP. CAR, 1.5K ¥/-55, 78 sasui8 cat -t5PIKS Ro HES, DEP. CAR, 100K +/-55, 1/3 3Rag20 80031 cRast-t-5Pr008 RI ES, DEP. CAR, 10K +/-58, 1/4 580839 cR251 NASP 10K my MERMORK, RESISTOR, STP, 6.2K, 10-em 501536 wsProaoi6226 2 —“NEINORK, RESISTOR, SIP, 6.2,'10-FIN 501536 sP101016226 3 MEDWORE, RESISTOR, SIP, 2K, 10-21 auogo sg8a0 a MEIWORK, RESISTOR, STP, 6.2K, 10-PIN 501536 wsProvot6z2e TPI-TPy TERMIVAL, COANECTOR 512689 62395, tr Orc, TM Les, DUAL Jer PvE iiz999 SH ALS OS BIC, Gis, MONOSTIBLE apc NCIu5380CF 03 @rc, CWOS, DUAL. uP covirER ors2080 IC, Gos/mes, AL 35 couONGAE «ie, LST, ad ImmnevT ann care SHTALSION «OIG, LST, TIME 3nNPUT « GATE 3 TALst PC Ur OTC, CWOS," DUAL D FF W/SET & RESET b3ee33 no4oigEce ve @ze, los, TmIRLE 3-DUFUT Nor GATE 596853 HcrwozsuscP 0) BIC) Glos, DUAL D F/F/ W/SeT «RESET 536833, owongecP vio @rC, CMOS, HEX INVERTER gereke cotoweae, uit @ic, wos, TAT 3-1NFUT mann cares asia coto23uBE 012 QTC, LSTHL, QUAD A EDGE TAG D P/F LR 395215 SHTALSIT5U v3 @rc, LsTm, oom WW DAVE W/suAB wor 29860 sirutszton tik @re, wos," quaD a-sPUT MAND GATE 355198 ctwo11u8cF bis ic, ms, 800A, E-BIT MrcoPRocessoR Bossi cavaDa 01 © — BIC, Hs, TRIALE 3-707 NOR GATE 586853, ici vozsusce vir @Te, Hos, GuAD 2-muPUT NoR GATE 355172 couoot ae, os orc, TM mLTLEME 393165 Se7aLsizgH Dig <@ic, STM, 8228/0080 cLocK cHERATOR 586230, 585230, wo rc, 512x8 BIT EEPROM 695585 x02808A wi era, 8-BIP PRIORITY BuCODER mess ‘ooas328 we re, 2EX8 BIT STATIC ROW pty sexray oie, PROGRAMIED, 65052-1502 esos Beouus ws re, FROGRANED, 95054-4503 660158 650856 ws @xe, (ocr BUS TRiscvR #g TO 132I5 535906 HoTucausac Ww ere, (QUAD 2=2070T HOR GATE 385172 02735 co4o0T AE er, (aD 2=m1FUT MAND GATE foae3e cot03e3e SOCKET, ic, 80-FIN aasete 3¥0-A0390 SOCKET, IC, 16-FIN 216535, 316-0390 Socks?, 1c, 2i-rIN 378236 3ekcacaaD Socket, 1c, 24-PIN 376236 91506 52¥-ac300 SOCKET, ic) 26-FmN anecit 428-6390 SOCKET, IC, 26-71N anees7 4328-00390 cersta, quae e728 ouare8 1 USE P/M 638510 10 ORDER COMPLETE MOULE CASE ASSY., WITHOUT #8 ASS.‘Table 5-8, Fronun Switch PCB Assembly Desonrnan FLUKE rock m0. ‘wre ay ‘one NF Paar no. [FRONT/REAR SUITCH PoB ASSENBLY 'FIOURE 5-8 (85064-80057) DIODE, INFRARED VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTOR Fuse, 34, 3007 FUSE, 34, 300¥ Fuse, AST acTING, 1-1/2 AMP WIRE, MONET, 436, SLEEVED FUSE, 34, 3007 FUSE, 34, 3007 SCRE,” FAP, 2-56 X 5/8 (wit) WASHER, STAR, EXTERNAL (w/P) mr, PRESS, 2-56 ‘SOmA, FAM, 2056 X 3/8 REAR INPUT’ CABLE ASSENBY CONNECTOR, HV, 2-CONTACT, (SOCKET, FIX) commecron B60 RESISTOR COIL GOK, coMDS soDE PLATE, PEAR THPUT FUSE HOLDER (wF3) CABLE TIE (e/Pt, £2, PS, 76) wourt, isp (went) cab, FUSE HOLDER (we) CCoMNECTOR, AMP POST SPLOER, SAGE, 6032 X .265 DECAL, REAR DWPUT (not shown) ES, TEP. CAR, 330 4/-58, 174 ‘TuEheEsTOR, 1k 47-10 RES, MOL. FILM, 30.9% +/-15, 1/28) HES, MIL, FILM, 30.9% 4/-14, 1/28 RES, DEP, CAR, 270 4/-5%, 1/3 SHITCH, PUSHBUTTON, 10 POLE [SHITCH, PUSHBUTTON, 2 OLE SWITCH, PUSHBUTTON, 2 POLE WIRE, TEFLON, RED,” #22 (wie) oso168 303238 ser} suse 613833 109330 360978 683633 orse33 310270 15983 503688 Srise8 638609 6osri2 603720 30325 (656629 651760 375188 172080 658161 60238 267500 50192 60751 368120 igura0 2h 368 21559 54878 sern9 67131 697131 115576 89536 13936 25088 11400 100 100 89536 roo T1¥00 159536 89536 09536 89535 89536 9t63t 91637 89536 89536 89536 89536 89536 69536 09536 ors 89536 89536 0031 50157 91637 91637 0031 89536 89536 89536 89536 652164 wero28 BIACTRS 803 503 weer 2 60878 sea 83 srozr0 75983 503688 618368 1539609 Crea 16H ages2s 656629 51760 37188 72080 658161 e003 sraze-t 550192 6eo751 cr251—t-53308 80000215 cMF653092" CHP653092F cR251-eSeeT OE eeriag 87131 67131 115576paca) —— M713) ee [| MPs(2 MP4 v2 85084-1605 Figure 5-8, A7 Front/Rear Switch PCB AssemblyTable 5-9. A8 DC Signal Conditioner PCB Assembly (cont) Descaprion LUKE ‘rook 0. wee amy Fo PART nO. (© 0G SIONAL CONDITIONER FC asses FIGURE 5-9 (505i-41001) CRP, Th, 5.6 UF +/-208, 257 ear, TH) 516 UP 27-208, 259 CAP, CBR, 0.22 UF +/-208, Sov CAP, GBR, O22 UF 2/205, 50 CAP, Thy '30 UF +/-208, 67 CAP, POLY, 0.0047 UF +/-108, 2007 CAP, ELECT, 6.8 UP -107050%, 63V CAR, ELECT, 6.8 UF ~10/4508,, 630 Re, Mich, 100 PF +758, S00" CAP, CER, 0.01 UF 4/=208, 100V ke, MICA, 100 PF 477585 500" he, Mich, 47 PF +/-58, 5007 bach, 87 BF +/=58, 500 CER, 33 PF 4-28, 1000 CAP, CER, 33 PF o/-25, 1000 Diobe, Hi-SPEED SWITCHING DIODE, Hi-SPEED SWITCHING prope, EVER ZENER SE, LOW-CAP, LOW LEAKAGE SL, LOW-CAP, LOW LEAKAGE mab, Roto x 3/8 sguccruRe ARMATURE, CASE ASSINDLY (INCLUDES MP2~109) CASE hALP CASE HAL coven, case SHIELD, covER DECAL," Dc SIGNAL CoWDITIONER Deca, cavTioN GUARD, REAR ouano, FRowT TERNAL, FEED-THRCOGH, (not. shown) SOCKET, “SPRING THRE (aot chown) SPACER, TRANSTPAD oot’ chown, use 4/37) srING, coz aot’ enewa) DECAL, D¢ STOMA CONDITIONER (aot shown) Tunsisto, um, 1 TRAISISTOR, PHP, St TRMNSISTOR, HPL, ST TRAUSISTOR, PAP, ST ere36r 368969 368568 sovaus 309849 163915 512630 218966 218966 Tagtat 9053 1aausi 188536 188536 35le52 35852 203328, 203328, 181075 ve1073 34erT7 34877 256168 sisiar 515137 ‘56092 302990 302990 aoegra angie wi3ar7 asaso8 383364 305356 251865 383285 152207 anes 651980 30803, gsr 330803, 1g5s7i orsto o7910 oro org10 07263 01263 69536 69538 89536 89535 89535 89536 69536 89536 09536 89536 89536 09536 12815, 00179 rou errs 69536 or2s3 oun or283 owns 646307 gens6sxcozseat 196DS6SKO02SRAt 1 91-050-651-220801 133-0502651-220001 609610006 siz830 TP6x06385 ETGF0X063A3 mmrseiote 0238018 1038 Inge t0i8 a5 09 x gerd 222-638-1033 2292-638 10339 nai anne 19698 109598, ro1223 Por 256168 515837 515831 ‘isto92 02990 402990 wozs7a angie wast 5508 303368 303556 a-080-777 eag27e6 0125-paP 120-018-0380 61950 56560 213506 36560 245806Table 5-9. AB DC Signal Conditioner PCB Assembly (cont) DescRPTON LUKE sTock m. Fa sy ane MED PART nO. mausrstoR, me, st Tmallsis708, Pie, st TRAISISTOR, Pk, 31 TRANSISTOR, FET, CHANNEL ‘TRANSISTOR, NPQ, SI ‘TRANSISTOR, MPH, St SMNSISTOR, NPL, SL THANSISION, APU, St THaISISTOR, TRALSISTOR, mmaszsro8, Fer, . N-CHANNEL FET, NCHANEL FE, NeCHANNEL, TRMsISTOR, ¥PK, ST musistoa, WAU, St Tmsiston, sPu, St TRAVSISTOR, PL) 51 ‘easist0R, mur, St TRANSISTOR, Ui, Si TRANSISTOR, TRANSISTOR, NIK, SE ‘TmaLsISTOR, TRavsisToR, ‘TeaNsisTOR, PF, 81 nm, st Pur, Sr TRANSISTOR, WK, SE HES, DEP. CAR, 530 0/55, 1/4 ES, es, es, Hes, ses, Es, Bs, es, mas, is, Es, es, Es, ES, ws, ES, es, Bs, ML, FLL, IL. FILM, aL Lt, DEP. CAR, Dep. CAR, 20.08 9/18, 1/88 28.08 /a18, 1/86 21K 9/18, 76H 118k /ni8, 1768 W710 6/58, t/a 10K 47055, 174m COMP, 150K +/-54, 26 COMP, 150K 6/-108, 12K EP. ca, Der. CAR, DEP. chr, Dep. ca, Te. CAR, Der. CAR, yL. FIL, mL. Pau, 150 +/-85, 1/8 wie C758 17a 15 a/e58. 1h 15 9753, 1748 hays, 7a ook +/235, 1748 rooK 4/75$) 1/88 Pak 4/18) 178 M18 6/18, 78H DLViDER sé (PART OF R21 SET) (PART OF R21 SET) BC RANGE SET PART OF R24 SET) Cant OF R24 SET) TEP. CAR, 15K 4/58, 178K BS, DEP. CAR, 10K +/=55. 1/44 RBS, DEF. CAR, 10K 2/=56" 1/4 226290 igs 218396 boa3r 218396 218396 218396 216396, 393314 39334 393318 Si5i09 asst 218396, 218396 95s74 218396 195978 216396 t9sg7 218596 21asie 218396 a6sr20 esis asses amare 389185 3ag83a 548839 roster 33m 51bes6 34ar55 34ers jusser 3x8020, 338320 innzie sugtes St605 eveere e858 348839 348639 rs3640 23906 23908 495338 ausgon 2904 Beaso8 213908 33318 jog 393314 Sesi09 foes 00/17 213908 213908 20506 233908 23908 2ugn08 213006 2n3508 Puseus 2x3go4 cresi-¥-sPs308 enrss2a0ge cness2802F CHFEs2102F cMPs517 825 cHa5i-tesru70r cRa51-isPT0K ceeat SPIE cresinbgrise cnasi-a-SPte 63251-8521 008 Re5z—8-5e100K curss2v03F carssira2r apteas: oueare cne51-4-5e15K cR251-4-5P10K 8253-4 SP1OK‘Table 5-8, AB DC Signal Conditioner PCB Assembly owe [we esonieTion stock | seuy FG PART HO. wo. | cane BS, DEP. CAR, 10K +/-58, 1/40 3uae39 80031 cReST-4-5PI0K ES, DEP. CAR, 10K +/-5. 1/4 5uge39 60031 Chest =4-5PI0K RES, MEL. FLL, 18 0/212, 1/88 Zeerst 91637 cHPeSioONP RES, CERIET, 100M +/~108, 1% Mivrse 89536 841758 RES, VAR, CERKET, 200 +/7208, 1/28 2enrit 71AG0 160 FC201U RES, VAR, CERMET, 50 +/-208. 1/20 267615 11¥50 190 RCS008 RES, VAR, CERMET, 50 5/-20g. 1/eW 267615 71450 340RC5008 RES, DEP. CAR, 2.2 +/-55., 1/4 suoua boat CRESYcu-srzEz RES, TEP. CAR, 20 +/—56, 1/28 Aizz02 e051 cResi-t-SreOE ES, VAR, CERES. 100k «/-208. 1/2 26856171850 1G0RCIONL RES, VAR, CERMET. 10K 4/208, 1/2 2676G0 71850 190RCIORE gs, SmboreD, DURING Test 4S, SRLECTED, DUNIMG TBST ES, SELECTED, DURING Test ES, SELECTED, DORGKG TEST RES, S87, MATCHED 290320 290320 (Pak OF 858 SED) es, MIL. FILM, 86.6K #/-1, 1/80 eens curssase2r eS, MOL. FILM, 1 +/-18) 1/84 265151 cnr351008F RES, MOL. FILM, 1.7K -721%, 1/8 251229 oMre5 187 RES, MOL. FLLM 1K 4/18, 1/88 168229 cure 1001 Ris, MOL. FILM, 52.3K w/-13) 1/84 237288 cars5sz32 AES, MTL. FLL, 3.00K 47-18, 1784 312635 cars5sot1F ES, STL. FLW, 3.65K 47-11, 1/84 2un79 (MP853651F RES, MTL. FILM, 100K «7-15, 1/6W 2h8807 (P551003 RES, MEL. FLLM, 100K «/-14, 17841 288807 HPs 0038 ES, MPL. PLLM, 100K =/—1f) 1/84 248807 (F551 0038 eS, MIL. FILM, 4.02 2/-38, 1/8 235325 essa02iF ES, MEL. FILM, 200K #/-18, 1/8 2eiTot (uF9520038 ES, DEP. CAR, 100K 4/-58, 1788 348920 (kei -t5Pi00K RES, DEP. CAR, 100K +/-56, 174 388920 cra52--sP i008 RES, DEP. CAR, 100K +/—58" 1/40 348920 ‘ok251=4- 57 100K BES, KEP. CAR, 100K +/—58, 174M 348920 ‘R25 1-8-7 1008 ABS, DBP. CAR, 100K +/—58, 174M 3usazo cha51-a5e 100% ES, DBP. CAR, 100K +/-58, 10M 3uss20 cmO51-A-SPIOOK RES, DER. CAR, TN 47-585 1/4 380987 crapi—a-seik RES, DEP. CAR, IN 9/58, 1/4 348927 ces }-icsPik ES, DEP. CAR, Ti /—58) 1/8K 34a9e ccRestaicsPIK ES, MOL. FILM, 3.65K 4/18, 1/88) 293779 (CHF 953651F BS, MOL, FILM, 2.15K 2/=12, 1/8W assrie CHPDs2151 RES, MTL. FLLM, 100K 4/18, 1/88 28807 ohPs51 0038 ere," cos/ios, GUA CLOCKRD B LATCH 5149 cpuoizes. @iC, Cos, TRIFLE 3 INPUT NAND GATES 375187 pkoaguBe C, OP AMP, J-PET ‘Se0h39 taricke Te, OP ANP, FET 690839 nies 4c, oP ANP. 27102 gore ic) oP a 2102 gona 1 USE P/N 458992 TO ORDER COMPLETE WODULE CASE ASSY., WITHOUT PoB ASSY.Figure 5-8, AB DC Signal Conditioner PCB AssemblyTable 5-10, A9 Active Fitr PCB Assembly FLUKE escneTion STOCK Wo wee sry 00 nr PART HO. 19 19 19.1 ct @ <3 ch & 6 or ce 9 @ ACTIVE FILTER PCB ASSBIGLY 383976 ‘FIGURE cap, FILM, car, FILM, cap, FILM, car, rca, car, FILM, AP, PIL CAP, FILM, car, rca, car, ica, cap, Maca, 5-10 (wis=41307) ang220 413228 0.047 UF 4/-108, 50¥ x3228 33: PF 4/-58, 5000 160317 anu oar our uF +/-iof, 50v 353085 UF +/-108, 50¥ 353085, UF ¥/-108, 50¥ 363085, 33 PF +/-58, 5000 160317 433 PF +/-58, 5007 160317 433 BF +/-58! 5007 160337 09536 89536 89535 89536 02199 89536 89536 89536 ozt99 07199 07199 383976 aig228 mig228 anze28 ‘DHT 585300 363085 363085 363005 i 53300 si 583305 st 585300 CAP; LECT, 6.8 UF 10/4508, 63¥ 219966 T3645 ETSPOXO6343 cr2 CAR, LECT, 10 UP ~10/+508, 257 70266 73845 ETVooKo2542 CAR, LECT, 10. UF ~10/6508, 259 rrozss 13845 ETiooxo2512 CAP, ELECT, 6.8 UF ~10/450%, 630 218966 734N5.ETPBX06343 CAP, FILM,"0.0022 UF +/-10%, 200¥ Hzb32 09536 482632 LOBE, ZEN, UNCOMP, +/-504, 6.8¥, Hor 260695 07910 175A DIODE, ZEN, UNCOMP, 4/50, 9:1¥, oom 386557 08713. 18D60R a si ee swITCHANG 203323 SCRE, PAE, HO X 9/8 256164 = (not shoun) HOMILE CASE ASSEXBLY (HPo-MP9) 350576 = CASE BALE + CASE HALE coveR, case 1 SHIELD, ‘coven 02990 202990 4ozrse 411959 DECAL," ACRIVE FILTER ASSBBLY ging Dea) ckvTI0M 58508 usr, ean uARD, FRONT SPACER, STR (wees) Sexcer, Pos (not enon) ‘Seaume, omL (not! shown) ‘measistoR, TRANSISTOR, sRasisToR, TRANSISTOR, TRANSISTOR, TRANSISTOR, TRANSISTOR, TRansist0R, SRANSISTOR, TRANSISTOR, St, st st, s sh st, st, st, s, 383364 383356 152207 338608 suas sgsgi 283% sosgie 2839 95918 21839 135914 218396 ‘95914 210596 1s5g74 218596 orn 89536 09536 89536 89536 89536 89536 89536 69536 89536 89536 7087 9536 85593 ours ours ours out ow outs ours ourag owas on ows on vans 256164 5076 302990 02990 wozT9 a1959 13mg a5i508 383364 5385356 totzsparToble 5-10. A9 Active Filter PCB Assembly (cont) Desenierion LUKE STOCK No. wre sry cone FG PART WO. Tit we U5 w us uw HR 16 ‘TRMISISTOR, 31, UP ‘TRANSISTOM, K-CHAN, FIELD EFFECT (FET) ‘TEINSISTOR, SI, IP TRANSISTOR, SI, NPC TRANSISTOR, 51, NPN ‘meansist0R, ‘TRANSISTOR, SI, NPY THANSISTOR, FumLD kFRECT (FET) Ta es, es, es, es, es, as, es, os, Es, ES, es, Tes, is, ts, Es, 25, nis, ox, arc, ic, i, ic, ke ‘SISTOR, FIELD EFFECT (PET) (SESTOR, I-CHAN, FIELD EFFECT (FET) DEP. CAR, 6.2K 2/-58, 19K DEP. CAR, 150 4/-52,1/4 ML. FLLM, 51.1K «/258, 1/04 DEP, CAR, 8.2K 9/98, 74M DEP, CAR, 812K 2/-50) 374M ML. FILM, 85.34 4/=18, 1784 fac FILM, 2LdR /cn G78 Pre. FILM, Were /c16) 178M Van, CERMET, 20K 47-108, 1/2 we FLL (siz bcTED; mL FiLth (SELECTED; MIL. FILM, 3H 6/-18, 1/24 MIL. FILM, 1M 67-0, V2 MEL: FILM, 12.1K 4/211) 1/6 MEL: ELM, 249K «7-38, 1/8 MOL. FULM, 51-8 4/-14, 1/54 MTL. FILM, 12.18 3/718) 1/84 MOL PLM, 245K +/5ap, "1788 DBP. HR, 15 47-58, 1/4 DBP. CAR, 100"6/-5%, 1/38 DB. CAR, 100 4/55) 1/0 DEP. CAR, 15 47=58, 1/48 MTL. FILM, 26cik /=th, 1768 MILL FILM, 26-7 o/<18, 1760 ‘wal, TEST FONT cmos, exp FLAP FLOP ONS) TAIFLE 3-INPUT NaKD CATES I, OPERATIONAL MBL .PIER IK, OPERATIONAL AMPLIFLER LIK) OPERATIONAL aMPLAFLER CORK, 1008 +/58 V/AN, 16°F DUAL THRE (ORK, 100K 2/755 179K, 16-P THRCUGH ‘Socxe,” nESISTOR USE P/N 458976 TO ORDER CASE KIMOUT PCB ASSENBLI. m5 up R16 ARE sHLECrED ouRING TEST 226090 395318 218388 2euors 218396 218396 218396 395318 joss 595318 airs nai675 20911 23997 234650 251608 aereto 23899) 2eatos suas Baer err suers5 2u5 175, vrse83 aots09 srsik? 363515, 363515 ss2908 ronres 5e0sie 528 Mes3640 asst 2h645 781099 Prasoi prygol Pragol paste gait 5oa38 crast—usaK2 ree tas Pi50= curess1 12 ees tau seu? ROTA SPORE curssas32° CHESS1 212 CHFSSNBr Te 21609 cuees1 0018 cures 1008 cursscacae chesserézr curssietee emras2ig3 ches taapPi5e Rest -A-Ser00e cRe51-4-spr008 CHES 1=A-SPISE cupesce 72° cnrssce2P 119283 nayucrray epkoaeuss uIma368i 360618 EasieretA9, MP1Case Assombly eaten are tno MIs-1730 Figure 6-10. AQ Active Filter PCB AssemblyTable 5-11. A10 Fast R2 A/D Converter Assembly ruuxe | wre DESCRIPTION stock | spy ] wea paar wo no | cone b CONVERTER aSsHAGLY 258 19536 363988 PGais-4n 86 s/o ANALOG Pou ASsENBLY Dive DIGITAL 7Cu ASSEMELY CASE AS8¥ (INCLUDES Hee-109) CASE BALE CASE maLF, wOOUFLED aozaée COVER, A aoewia SHED, COVER aniger wi967 DECAL, FAST HR CORVERTE ASSY 815850 49536 e160 ecat, cautaow slsoa 69536 toasok Fear 364 E9536 8308 eRovr 69535 185315 P/M 456968 50 ORLER ooWs HOWE CASE WITHOUT THE PCB's. ‘AIO, Module Assembly ANOAT Fig. 5-12) \ nate (Fo 5-15) Ha) gaye Mis-s140 Figure 5-11. A10 Fast R2 A/D Converter Assembly‘Table 5-12. ATOA1 A/D Analog PCB Assembly Descairrion LUKE sToex 0 wre sy cone NFa PAA HO, 4/0 sxn.os Pou ascermLy FIOURE 5-12 (05-41 80) oe, ar, cae, ap, cae, cae, cae, car, car, ce, cae, or, ca, ar, cae, car, AP, car, car, cae, cae, a Th, 10 UF 4/208, 350 Th, 10 UF a/-205, 350 Mich, 33 PF +/-58, So0y bach) 30. PF 2/258! So0y FILM, 0.22 UP o/-t08,, €OV Th, 7 UF 4/208, 259 aca, "150 FP 4/~5f, 5000 rch, 150 PP +754, S00v POLIST, 0.047 UP «/-108, 1007 POLIS, O.0UT UF +/-103, 100¥ Maca, a7 BF +/-58, 5001 cn) 47°F 2/288) 500 LECT, 470 UF ~10/4504, 6.34 Nich, "47 PE +/—54, 3007 eR, 0.0047 UF +/<108, 500v ER, 0.22 UP +/-204, SOV CER, 0.22 UP 272204, SOY TA, 68 UF 4/-208, 250 Th, 0.22 UP a/=00, 350 MEGA, "1800 EF +/=5%, $00¥ BR, "0.22 UF +/-208, SOV CER, 0.22 UF 2/204, SOV Drone, u-SPRED, skaTOHN DIOUE, §1 LO-caP, LO-LEAK DIole, §1 CO-cAP, Lo-LeaR DIODE, 81, CONTROLLER FD VOL DIOBE, Si, CONTROLLER Fu VOU DIODE, Si LO-cAP, LO-LEAR DIOUE, SI LO-cAP, LOWLEAR DIODE, ¥I~SPEED, sw ITCHANG SCRE, FUP, H=AG X 1/8 ‘SORE, HAP, 4-80 X 3/8 socker, 1c ‘Socker, 1¢ SOCKET, COMP, Lex (ro 55, RST) sFRiNG, cout (not snowe) ‘spacer, ooxp (2ot' shown) spicen, oon (not’ shown) TRANSISTOR, FET (SELECTED) TRaVsISTOR, Fer (seecrED) TRANSISTOR, FET (SELECTED) TRANSISTOR, FET, CHANNEL {RANSISTOR, FET, N-CHANNEL ma (SUSTOR, FET, CHANNEL set arses w76s 160317 380570, 159392 161983 saat. 48876 260862 260562 146536 146536 errr 14536 106724 309849 309845 sxgus0 tet33t 146353 309849 308849 203823 saéir7 suer77 2gnu6e 23ese 38177 esr 203323 25665 256364 216535 276535, 315285 vanes avre81 335608 256867 256487 256487 583630 513630 343630 56269 56289 (2136 rue 56269 36289 72136 12136 aus ens 12138 12136 e003 12136 1590 11590 11590 36289 36289 72136 11590 71590 ore 07263 7263 oro orsio ores ores orsio 89536 09535 91506 91506 oorrs 03553 09536 69536 89536 29536 29536 89536 29536 99536 S878 ‘ev r06x0035K01 196LI06x0035R0 ir523308 IN I8E3000 isereanses 1608s sxouesias parse Isis aan F516 esau 581 sear 361 puisearo0 ey 1x60 06 babe Og crear Casoceene cusoczane ‘s6066640c25 TE igenozttoo3stat purge read cusocezi cgoce eux aan pores rote 09039 ‘9038 eorees rDI223 rane 256165, 256168 216-46390 36-0G390 203312126 c0120-018-0360 nr7a81 338608 2s64ar 256487 256487 313630 513630 533630‘Table 5-12. ATOAT A/D Analog PCB Assembly (cont) ‘aune | wee Descareion srock | sry Paar no no. | cane ‘TRASISTOR, FET, w-coaNNEL 4283830 69596 s43650 ‘TRALSISTOR, FET, W-CHANNL 383650 S9536 380 ‘RNSISTOR, FET, DUAL, YH CHaNNEL jroos; 89536 37608 ‘TRAYSISTOR, $3," NW 218396 08713 Zazg0l ‘TRAISISTOR, FET (SELECTED) 2eeaeT 89530 2546 ‘RMISISIOR, FET (SELECTED) 256487 89536 256467 TRALSISTOR, FET (SELECTED) 25648) 89536 256467 TRAISISTOR, FET (SELECTED) 25638) 29535 256467 ‘TRAISISTOR, FET (SILECT 25548) 89536 256407 TRAISISTOR, FET (SELECT=D) 255487 09536 56467 mausisTOR, FET, chan 261876 69536 261578 Tmasistox, FET, we GUANEL 261878 89536 ISTE ‘TuMSISTOR, FET, Ie CHANEL 261878 59536 15Te ‘THMISISTOR, FET, ICHAEL B16 89536 261578 TRANSISTOR, FET, IWCHANNEL BeIsT8 W536 201578 TmwISISTOR, FET, M-CUANNEL 261578 B9536 HeISTE TRANSISTOR, FET, NcHAINEL BIST ByS3E 281578 TRANSISTOR, FET, W-CHANIEL 21518 89536 mmuisiston, Fer’ (SiLECTeD) 2sgisy 89935 2568 THanSisTOK, FET (SELECTED; 25487 80536 256407 TUNSISTOR, FET, DUAL, HeCHANNEL s16087 85536 1608) TRANSISTOR, t, ANP. 1959/4 OMT33 213506 TRANSISTOR, FET, IeckNNE zorsTe 69536 2eis76 TRANSISTOR, 27, Wau. 2orsTe 69536 26176 TRANSISTOR, ET, CHANNEL 26is7e 69595 26757 TRANSISTOR, FET, MeCHANNEL 2ors7e $9536 26ST ES, VER, Bas =204, 1/28 2ovbus 75376 \gozcsoty as, Waa, 10 47-208," 1/28 3uings. 75376 1goeci00E eS, VAR, 300 ¢/=t05, 1724 agrizo 69836 29120 RES, VAR, CERIET, 200+/~108, 1/2" bape 93536 285188 BS, VAR, 50 +/-108, 1/28 2asice 69536 28e1ze RES, VAR, 20 1/208) 1/24 2orie0 {5378 1gcRczo0e Hes, YAR) CERMET, 50 4/—108) 1/24 2eeize 89536 2ipz2 MES, YAR) CEMEET, 50K ¢/-108, 1/28 286290 69536 288200 AREF. ANP’ SRT (U1,#9,818,815, 406) ysoau 89536 815034 RES, MIL. FILM, 3.8K =/-15, 1/64 260323 91631 mer I=sguo1e ES, MTL. FILM, 12.1 4/15) 1/00 2osc08 S13] NPE I=biZRIF aS, MLL FILM, 24.3 0/38) 1/8 bereie $1637 rr iosaur ES, MOLL FILM, 12.3 4/-18, 1760 295608 9163] MFF?=BizNIF EP. AvP SBT (br A9,818,m15,A16) isos a9s3e EE. aNe SET (U1 39,878,815, 816) argo o9536 AEE. AMP SET (U1,#9,804, R15, 16) aco 89536 MOL. FILM, OR" +/-15, 1/88 326120 91631 MPFI-01002F MEL. FILE, 108 3/=18) 1/54 feerzo gvéa1NEFI-61002F DER. CAR, 100K +755, 1/4 38520 50031 Chebi=t-5Fi00R MEL, FLLM 108 9/18, 1/88 eec60. 91631 REP. CAB, 100K +258, 174 3uss20 60031 ser (922,123) tosbs6 69556 set (Re2, 123) 209896 89556 BHP, CAA, TO +/-5%, 17 sagas sn034‘Table 5-12, ATA A/D Analog PCB Assembly (cont) besenerion FLUKE stock 0. MES PART NO. BES, Hs! Res Es, tS, ES, 35, 38s, 365, 5, HES, Hes, Pes, as, ES, 2, ES, Res Es, Es as, RES, ES, as, Eas, WEL) FILM, 22k 7218! 10k DEP, CAR, 62. 0/=58, 1/4, WEL) LLM, TOR 9/=15, 1/64 DEP. CAR, "33K «7-83, 1748 NOL. FILM, 10K 4/=18) 178K HEL, FILM, Teak /-4n, 178 EL. FILM, 209K +/-18, 175% DEP. CAR, XT 0/-S8y 1/4 SET (554,835, 560-58 156) SBT (R54, 835, 360-54, 756) WL. FILM, 26.78 +/=1hy 1/6 DEP. cam, 47 4/85, 1/48) WL! FILM, 15K 4/~i8, 1/68 MEL. FILM, 15K 4/-18, 16H TEP. CAR, 15K +/-52, 1/48 iL. FILM, 75K 47-13, 1/84 DEP. CAR, "3K «/=58, 1/80 DEP. CAR, 510 4/-5%, 1/40) DEP. CAR, 1.5K'+/-58, 18M DEP. CAR, ATOR #/=58, 1/24 MEL. FILH, 665 4/=18) 1/6 MTL. FILM tir +/-1n, 1/60 DEP. CAR," 15K 47-58, 1/84 DEP. CAR, 100K +/=55, 1/46 SED (R34, 35, 150-54, 956) SET (354, 535,950-54, 56) SEE (958,935, 850-54 156) SEE (834,135, 750-54 156) SET (534,735, 550-54 166) Yt, FILM 95.2 4-18, 1/08 SET (858)135, 750-51 150) WML. FILM 2573 +/-0.18, 1/08 DEF. CAR, 23 2/754, 1/40 MOL. ILM, 57.6K 4/218, 1/88 mL. FTLM, 6.5K 4/=1%, 1/88 MIL. ELM, 00K +/-13) 1/3 CBRNET, 10 5/208, 172K S caR, 8204/55) 1/8 SCAR, 5.1K 47-54, 1/4 FILM, 18.7 4/-18, 1/68 Cay 1H 0/58, 17M TERNAL, TEST POINT Ber. 10, 10, 1c, 15, x, 1c, 10, es RS ‘MP’ SET (D179, 814,R15, 816) ‘oP ANP oP ame (Ob-AMP, HONGLITEIO, J-PET INPUT Liv, VOL, FOLLOWER’ La vol, FOLLOWER p-AM?, MONOLITHIC, J-FeT NFU op ame NETWORK, 33H NETWORK, 100K Bavess Aare 168260 5868 168260 253639 21368 aise gai ogous 2usi7s arog aang eons nasa assis ‘insar x60 aes 382638 320028 268157 548054 548920, ao99ts un99us agg04s a09986 09946 305938 oggis 321863 348888 2es116 25908 248807 seis inzazt a6or12 aarie 30987 19283 ang034 arise 2ry502 229637 268365 268365 eset 225951 in 3186 380618 1837 Sie? 1631 moos) 59536 89536 631 0031 si63t 1631 0031 51837 0031 0031 0031 91637 5637 03: 031 69536 89536 69538 69536 09536 guest 89538 91637 0031 91637 91837 91637 15318 031 031 ones 0031 89536 09536 12080 1200 12000 2080 12000 12040 23355 89536 09536 ches te CRESTS 53K rE Io81 132 Wrriazlgar R251 =k SAUTE 509946 mo g9i6 NPFI-Bo672 crami-t- SPITE. Neri-e7502F NEPI-67S02P cas uset5k NeFi-a7s02e Resale sPak chasinisesi0n Cues TI-SPIKS, cre tateseuroK Pe = 866502 HPEI-B1001e cR257-4- 515K eR251-8-5P 100K ogens 409586 4oggas oggus oagus her 256 82 oasis MeP-82573" ee =t-SPS3K MPF=857622 wrr-a66s2 MFE1=81003F 1902C1008 R251 4-5 PE2OE R251 ASK Mer1-012578 cheb =A SPIM 179283 uis038 agora ugort Less6e Lagi08 magro# Lesser angoge nti 380618Figure 5-12 AT0A1 A/D Analog PCB Assembly‘Table 5-19, A10A2 Fast RY A/D Convertar Digital PCB Assembly esonieTion FLUKE srock 10. wee sry NFO PART WO. A102 © PAST Re 4/0 con DOT, Pow ASSEIOLY FIOURE 5-13 (MIS-8181) o e re) ci 2 a fn R i a 6 Ri u w us uw & rig wy “8 un car, TA, 2 20. UF +/20%, 6 CAP, MICA, 82 PF */-55, 500¥ CAP, HECK, 62 FF 2/-58, 5007 CAP, Thy 220 UP 4/208) 6Y cable Ads, 16° PIN COM CABLE ASSY, 16 PLN COME TRANSISTOR, SI, AIP es, 3, His, Hs, ES, 3s, es, wae. ee. nee, ee, mL, wm. EP, Tema, exc, a10, e10, es @1c, O16, ei, e1, ox, ai, nS ac, @1G, 1G, ie, ac, ec, ex, orc, ei, eu, ei, @ ic, es, es 1c, e08, cms, cows, aR, MIR 47-58, 17H CAR, 20K 4/254) 17 aR, 20K 4/256) 178 Cah, 150 9/258) 178 FILM, 100K 7-14, 1/6 FILM, 100K +/=18 1788 CR, 100K +758, 1/40 test ont DUAL TYPE D fap fOr DUAL TYPED FLAP FLOP ex mivenreR wervohe os, cms, cms, ows, cms, cau, LuneaR, ms, Linea ews, eis, Linea, cms, non, cots, cms, cms, cms, weve Linea, DUAL, COMPLEMENTARY DUAL" TYPE D FLIP FLOP ex 1NYENTER (quam, 2—umecT wane GATES DUAL" SEE D FLAP FLOP BAL TYPE D FLAP FLOP +5 XSTR ARRAY 5 STR ARKAY but, 2-INPUT On GATE 5 KSTH AREY ex SUVERTER UAL TYPED FLAP FLOP 5 STR ARRAY (Wud, 2-1NFUT anh GATE c-0S, Git, 2-mNF0T OF DIV BY ~8,” COUNTER/DIV OuiL TYPED FLIP FLOP wat, 2eameor wane cats Dua’ tee b RLIP FLOP DUAL TYPE b ELIP FLOP (UAE, z-aneuT MaKe CATES a 5 STR HAY 383760 e662 148502 148502 408682 300576 aoste 226290 340836 isan aaa? sugate 248807 23807 546920 19283 3hov? 3uont? oss 580616 ‘osors Sao outst 355198 Shot uot e051 3088 ae0188 obass st0188 foweer 3hani7 wire 40Bt07 408555, 4o3260 Shorty gsi MONIT Bout jenn 061 ure ozs 0213s 0278 o2n3s 07135 02138 59536 cas onnis ons 0135 383760 eep2z7200068 ow 200 a 8205 196p22740006 TE 5122-0035, 51z2-003:5 S680 onzp1-a-sBurE cn2si-acsP20k cHesi-aasee0r nap —acsPis0 NEFI-BIG03? neFi-Bi003 Cheb =a SPr00K 78283 cto 320 Esther orogens 300516 coroore eDOTERE conosoi conor nag COTSAE aoe 30061 Gagiase cages cotosore, colo sa write crate cong Lh cotoz2Ke CHOTA conezzae cone n3a, coors MONTE 30616 wereb ove CAUTION fe ae nais-r743 Figure 6-13, ATOA2 Fast R? A/D Converter Digital PCB Assembly‘Table 5-14, A11 Thermal True-AMS Converter PCB Assembly Descarrrion MFG PART WO. TTHERUAL TAUE-EHS CONVERTER MODULE ASSY FIGURE 5=1H (85064-81262) ATTRNTUATOR PCB ASSEMBLY AMPLIFIER PCE ASSEMBLY ‘SeReM, FAP, 6-32 X 17% SCREW, PAP, 6-32 X 1/2 nr, ALTERED SHIELD, AMPLIFIER CASE. ASSEMBLY (ire INCLUDES MP3 THRU MP11) Guanp, FRowt ‘GUARD, REAR SHIELD, cOvER DECAL," THERM THOS paca, cavrzou DECAL, ADsUST COVER, MoD cAse CASE HALF, HOD CASE HALP, EXT HOD 1 COMPLETE MODULE ASSEMBLY 2 © SELECT AT TEST 3 ORDER F/¥ 656298 FOR CASE OHLY, OBS NOT INCLODE PCB BOARDS. 65038 09596 68179 152180 115006 617989 513596 658298 essere 5764s S100? 6ho3e3 550 536011 aoagTa soa 56289 sse140 115006 s17944 613596 65298 656078 Sreust 577007 40383 sagos 536011 anzsra 66021 656249 | Swen ‘ities Figure 6-14. A11 Thermal True-RMS Converter PCB AssemblyTable 5-15, ATIA1 Attenuator PCB Assembly Desenienion FLUKE Tock M0. wre sry tone NES PART wo, ATTENUATOR pee ASSeROLY FIGURE 5-15 (85062-1024) car, roux, 0.22 UF +/-108 CAP, POLY, 0.22 UF 4/-108 CAP, POLY, 0.22 UF +/-108 CAP, CER,'0.05 UF ~20/480%, 500¥ CAP, PORC, 36 PF =/-t4, 1000 See’ FOOTNOTE 1 SEE FOOTNOTE 1 CAP, VAR, 0.8-10 FF 4/-158, 250 CAR, PORC, 3.9 BP +/-0.25 Fe, t000V CAP, PORC, 1.5 PF 47-0125 Pr, 1000¥ CAP, MICA, 330 PF 2/54, 5007 apy FoRC) 2°2 Pe 47-0185 FP, 10007 CAP, VAR, 1-20 PF +/-308, 2500 GAP, PORE, 1.0 PF 2/-3.25 PP, 10000 AP, AR, 0.6010. BF 0/154, 250", CRE, PORE, 6.5 PF 4/0125 BR, 10007 car) CER," 47 PP +/-2H, 100v, ses Foomore 1 SEE FOOTHOTE 1 CAP, VAR, 1-20 PF 4/304, 250¥ CAR, FORC, 0.5 PF 4720.25 FP, 1000V CAP, CER,'0.001 UF +/=208, 500V AP, CER, 220 FF 57-58, 1000 see’ eoonvoTe 1 SEE FOOTNOTE 1 ChE, VAR, 1-20 FF 4/H308, 250V CAP, TA,'39 UP +/-208, 67 cae, Ta, 22 UP 4/208, 150 CAP, TA, 22 UP 72208) 150 CAP, CER, 1.5 FF, 100 CAP, CEN, 56 FF ¢/-24, 100¥ ‘scnbu, PF, 4-0" x 3/8 SCRE, SENS, 6032 X 3/8 Socest, comiecror SocrET, coMMECTOR RELAY, "REED, 1 PORM & RELAY, DRY REED, AY SuaTcH RELAY, REED, 1 FOR PELAY, REED, 1 ORM RALAY, RY ABED, #7 SarTCH RELAY, DAY REED, a SUITCH RELAY, DRY AED, AW SHITCH SSITELD, caPicrTOR connector ‘SPRIKO coz, SUIELD, Pca Post, counscron 229930 603591 so3sa9 reas 603936 6osae 603571 229950 603518 512368 so3ueg 6o3st4 Ho2966 sratit so3eag 163915 nag012 23012 525009 51es10 256168 rr7022 252880 352850 Gossao anions 603340 603340 nui 949 asians anrou9 sear eee sous sreoie 267500 49536 89536 89836 89536 56285, 95278 oseere 273805 21498 ersiss 330588 ‘Werock3éore 5201 Wrtocasoce wrt0cat ASCE Dens33 10 rinckRace 5501 ‘ioe oce s201 WrtockoRsoe 592368 5501 vrtecaoRcce B121-8100=H5 1020 sia 5507 ‘s6n39axo020K41 19602263001 58a1 1960226X001 5A 529809 s12e70 256 168 11022 51051-0000 51051-0000 cr5131 urioog4 crs39 5131 uetco94 brroa9u urtoo9s sex 870221 fautss: Sroka 267500Table 5-15. AT1AI Atlonuator PCB Assembly (cont) DescHIPTON FLUKE TOK M0. we amy one FO PART no, ron SPACER, 0.187 SPACER, 1.138 ‘REBBOW’ CABLE, 10 coNbuctoR ‘muisrstoR, &1, PAP RS, VAR, 5K +/-208, 1/24 ES, VAR, 100 »/=208, 1/23 FES, VAR, 1K +/-208, 1/24 HES, MEL: FILM, 237K +/—16, 1/88 ES, VAR, SOK 4/-i08, 1728 DER. CAR, ATK +/-54, 1746) DEP. Chk, 150 3/258) 1/26 DEP. Cia, 1.5K 67-85, 1/4 DEP. cam, 115K 2/758) 4/4 MTL. FILM, 2.958 CMPSSRG9aF sooreeoas cwr5s1213F 190Po5038 20n036 is0Rc2s3 CHPSS68S2F gorcas3e cuessz052 (HPSS 103 curss2052. 309666‘Table 5-16, A11A2 Amplifier PCB Assembly (con!) besoin FLUKE STOCK No wre sry ane nF Paar Xo. ES, MTL. FILM, 169K +/=3f,. 1/88 DEP, CAR," 100K +/=58, 1/84 Com, TO 4/58, 1/4 COMP, Tok 2/58) 1780 COMP, TOK 2/58) 178 COMP, 10M 4/58 1748 ML." FILM, 0.4K +/=1f, 1/84 MIL. FILM, 108 +/=18, 478M MIL. FILM, 899 4/=18) 1/84 YAR, CERNET, 50° +/-20¢, 1/24 NOL. FILM, 10K 4/185 1/848 TEP. CAR, 15K +/-54) 1/48 DEP. CAR, B70 9/=58) 1/48 HTL. FILM, 499K w/in, 1/64 VaR, 100K" s/=10K, 1/20 MOL. FILM, 38.3K 4/18, 1/84 MIL. FILM, 2.9K 4/-16) 1/60 Cov. ajoh + /=t08, 178% COMP, ATOM 4/2108) 1/84 MIL. FRLM, TOR 4/218, 1/88 RES, UEP. CAR, 100K +/=58, 178% BES, DEP. CAR, 100K 2/-58, 1/88 ‘conkecroz, Test Pon CONNECTOR, TEST POINT CONNECTOR, TEST FOINT vena, aMeLiezeR coTHUT REStsTOR NETVORK 1c, LINEAR, VOLTIG? FOLLOWER 1c) HoH OUTAGE DISPLAY DAIVERS TC, LINEAR OPAMP BMS SENSOR To, LINFAR, ORAMP, METAL cay re, LIMean’ of-aMe 3c, LINEAR, OPAMP, METAL caN 50, Livy NPN, S-1STR, Sty ARRAY 3c, oF-ine, L-FeT, LO-n0isE 1c, OPAMP, S-FET, LO-NOTSE TC, LINEAR, OPAMP, METAL cht To, HIGH VOLTARE DISRLAY DRIVERS neSsav0n NEwoRE, 1008 RESISTOR NETKORK prope, DIODE, ZENER, 5.641 DIOLE, ZENER, 13.0¥, 4/5 caste’ assEiy CARLE ASSEMBLY socne2, 3-Prm, (W811, RAI) SocxE?, SPIN’ (W/RO, 33, Bl, FS) THESE RESISTORS ARE MATCHED ITEMS 2egust 4388920 igagee tase 193984 19¥gns aaitg 291633 289086 267815 2sreas Bes dasaae 2eaeia soss58 auare 226209 03830 6o3sae 2aieas 88920 38920 Sieg 512889 512689 ‘s30759 5953 288365 500795 tress s2t6a5 268928, esse 288528 248506 385450 381962 20028 Bouaau nas0e 603898 330829 areas 110726 srr03 571023 2958 annait grea ao031 ont one} ones ontz1 9161 91637 91637 11236 1637 e031 0031 31837 3297 ed s163t ona outer 91637 80031 80031 2660 02660 02660 89536 89536 vole 56289 r20t0 09536 12020 12010 12080 02735 2086 12040 12000 56289 89536 89536 orsi0 orate or 89536 89536 onsze 30035 curssi6o3e (252--5P1008 eB1055 cer0ss extoss cxt06s, cMPSséotze cHP55 1002 (CHESS3990" 1s07C5008 crssto02F crest-t-sPise Cras taanspuroE (cuPSsu9s3F 3299 CR2-108 cursssesar CHPSS2NOTE can? cot? cHFSB10007 cne51—8-5P1008 re51-8-5PI008 52395 62395, 62395, s3srs9 51053 aston e260 Lgs8n se1625 Engosie LNgsan Lso8a ca30%6 S967 61980 Lagoa pasar 1908 6o3t98 ast uTs2k p68 377023 577023 so2958 S5-109-1-08Figure 5-16. A11A2 Amplller PCB Assembly‘OPTION! MODEL No. Section 6 Option & Accessory Information ‘TABLE OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION ACCESSORIES Rack Ear Mounting Assembly High Voltage Probe High Voltage Probe High Frequency Probe High Frequency Probe OPTIONS ‘Ohms Converter Curcent Shunts IEEE Standard 488-1975 Interface Bit Serial Asynchronous Interface Parallel Interface Isolator (Standard)25068, 6-1. INTRODUCTION 6-2. This section of the manual contains information concerning options and accessories available for use with the multimeter. Subsections are included for accessories and for each option, The Table of Contents identifies each item by name, number, and appropriate page number. 63. ACCESSORIES 6-4. Several accessories are documented in the first subsection. Additional accessories are listed in Section 1 of this manval, Complete documentation is provided for any accessory ordered for the multimeter. 6-5. OPTIONS 6-6. Documentation for all currently available ‘options is also included in this section. A subsection is devoted to each option. Applicable pages arc identified by section, option number, and page ‘number within the subsection. For example, page 3 for the -02A option is identified as 6024-3. 6-7. Programming instructions for any of the Femote interfaec options (-05, -06, or -07) are included in Section 2A of this manual. The Isolator, which is a standard module with the 8503A and 856A, is documented in subsection 608A. 6-8. Each subsection includes all information to install, operate, and maintain the option Specifications, a list of replaceable parts, and a schematic diagram are also provided600-1. RACK EAR MOUNTING ASSEMBLY 600-2. Figure 600-1 illustrates installation of the Rack Ear Mounting Assembly. Use the following procedure: 1. Remove the nameplate decals from the handles, 2. Remove the serews from the handles, 3. Attach the rack ears with #8-32 x 5/8 PHP serews (included with the kit) 4. Note the hole pattern in the top and bottom trim items. Remove the corresponding screws from the multimeter's top and bottom 5, Attach the top and bottom trim items with 46-32 x 3/8 PHP screws and lock washers (included with the kit) 600-3. HIGH VOLTAGE PROBE (80K-6) 600-4, ‘The 80K-6 extends the voltage measuring capability of an ac/ de voltmeter up to 6000 volts. A 1000:1 voltage divider provides a high input impedance. High accuracy is provided when the divider is used with a voltmeter having a [0 Mohm input impedance. A molded plastic body houses the divider and protects the user from the voltage being measured, 600-5. HIGH VOLTAGE PROBE (80K-40) 600-6. ‘The 8OK-40 is a high voltage accessory probe designed to extend the voltage measuring capability of an ac/dc voltmeter up to 40,000 volts, The probe is a precision 1000:1 voltage divider formed by two matched metal-ilm resistors. The unusually high input impedance offered by these resistors minimizes circuit loading and optimizes ‘measurement accuracy. A special plastic body Accessories houses the divider and provides the user with isolation from the voltage being measured, 600-7. HIGH FREQUENCY PROBE (83RF) 600-8. The 83RF converts a de voltmeter into a high frequency, 100 kHz. to 100 MHz ac voltmeter. Conversion from ac to de is on a one-to-one basis over a range of 0.25 to 30V rms. The probe's de ‘output is calibrated to be equivalent to the rms value of @ sinewave input, 600-9. HIGH FREQUENCY PROBE (85RF) 600-10. ‘The 8SRF is designed to convert a de voltmeter into a high frequency, 100 kHz co 500 MHz ac voltmeter. Acto de conversion ratio is one- to-one over a range of 0.25 10 30V rms. The probe's de output is calibrated to be equivalent to the rms value of a sinewave output, Figure 600-1. Rack Ear Mounting Installation .600-1/600-2802A-1. INTRODUCTION 602A-2.. Installation of the Ohms Converter provides precision resistance measurement capability. Both two- terminal and four-terminal measurements may be made. 6028-3. SPECIFICATIONS. GO2A-4, Table GO2A-I lists the specifications for the ‘Ohms Converter 602A-5. INSTALLATION 602A-6. Refer to Section 4 of this manual under Module Installation and Removal for instructions on installing and removing modules. Seetion8 provides alist of permissible and preferred installation slots. 6028-7. OPERATING NOTES: ‘602A-8. Operation ofthe front panel controls with the ‘Ohms Converter installed is described in Section 2 ofthis, ‘manual. Bight resistance ranges are available: 10,100, 1k, 10k, 100k, IM, 10M and 100M. Manual or auto ranging {s available, Figure 602A-1 shows possible connections for both twoewire and four-wire configurations, Four- wire measurements provide maximum accuracy and ean ‘be made on the 10,100, 1k, 10k, and 100k ranges when the Ohms Selector is pushed in (4T IN). Two-wire measurements (Ohms Selector out) can be made on the IM, 10M, and 100M ranges without affecting accuracy. 6024-9. During normal operation (Calibration mode ‘off), ohms zero can be made by shorting the input test, leads to compensate for both mukimeter internal drift ‘and lead resistance. The front panel Ohms Selector must, bbe pushed in (4 IN) for four terminal zero corrections or out for two-terminal zero corrections. When Calibration, mode is off, zero values are stored in temporary memory. Select the 100. range and push the ZERO VDC/OHMS, button. This zero value is then applied to the selected ange (100) and all higher ranges. Ifgreater measurement, accuracy is desired, discrete zero values can be stored by subsequently pushing ZERO VDC/OHMS twice in 664266 9/83 Option -02A Ohms Converter cach higher range lowest to highest). Zero values entered in this fashion do not affect other zero values already entered into Calibration Memory during software calibration. Ifa power-up or reset oceurs with Calibration mode off, the temporary values entered with the above procedure are replaced with the Calibration Memory values GO2A-10. Zero valves stored with Calibration mode on are permanently stored in Calibration Memory. This procedure differs in that corrections are made only for ‘uultimeter internal drift and the zero values entered for the selected range only, Refer to Software Calibration ‘(Appendix 7B) fora full description. The temporary value (Calibration mode off) or the permanent value (Calibration mode on) for the range selected can be recalled by pushing RECALL ZERO VDC/OHMS. 802A-11, GUARDING 602A-12._ The ohms guard connection is only available through the rear input connector, Figure 602A-I shows ‘optimal use of the guard. Basically, the ohms guard is used to minimize leakage resistance between HI and LO input leads. This leakage would appear as shunt resistance across high Rx values, In some high-resistance measurement set-ups, leakage resistance in or on the surface of insulating materials may provide enough shunt resistance to degrade the accuracy of the measurement. Figure 602A-1 illustrates one such case. Connecting the ‘ohms guard to the metal plate on which the standoffs are ‘mounted reduces the affect of leakage resistance through for on the standoffs. 602A-13, THEORY OF OPERATION 602A-14, The function of the Ohms Converter is to produce a current through an unknown resistance such ‘that the voltage across the unknowns proportional tothe value of resistance. This is accomplished by configuring ‘the unknown resistance, Rx, asthe feedback element of an ‘operational amplifier. A reference voltage, VREF, is 028‘8605A/8506A-020 Table 602A-1. Ohms Convarter Specitications Input Charactertstcs REGOLITION CORRE ance | FULSCALE Tenover Gore | _sworairs | _UnKNown! 108 "20.0000 Tone 100 ua 10 mA 1000 200.0000 100 02 10mAa 4K 2.00000 kA 1ma 6 ma 10 Ka 25.0000 ka, toma Digits 7auA 100 kn. 250.000 kA, 109 ma, ‘only 7248 10 4.10000 Maa 10 ton 4548 +00 36.0000 Maa tea. 000 0.48 uA 100M 266,000 MA 1000 1Ka 560A “In normal operating mode, 81 or 6% digits depending on range. in AVG operating mode, 6% digits ‘onall ranges. +£(% of Reading + Number of Counts)” RANGE 24-HOUR 25°C 1°C. SO-DAY 25°C 45°C. 100 0.008 + 20 0.005 + 20 100 0.002 + 14 0.003 + 1.4 1ko 0.002 + 0.8 0.003 + 0.8, soKn 0.002 +08 0.003 + 0.8, 100 ka. 0.002 +08 .008 + 0.8 1a 0002 +08 0.003 + 0.8, roma 0.0075 +08 0.02 +08 300 Ma. 0.026 + 08 0.08 +1 “With $% digit display, For 6% digit display, multiply Number of Counts by 10. 80 DAY: 23°C 8°C ADD TO THE 80 DAY SPECIFICATION PER MONTH THE FOLLOWING " OF READING. %& OF READING. 0.00086 ‘00033 0.0022 0.0066.Operating Characteristics ‘TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT “(fe OF READING + NUMBER OF COUNTS) /*C RANGE 0°C TO 18°C AND 28°C TO 50°C 100 1000 1a 10K 100 «2 1Ma soma 100m (0.0008 + 1.6 0.0007 + 02 0.0007 +02 0.0007 + 0.2 0.0007 + 0.5 0.001 +05, 0.005 + 05 0.02405 “With 8H digit display. For 6% digit cisplay, multiply Number of Counts by 10. MAXIMUM LEAD RESISTANCE RANGE LEAD RESISTANCE 100 = 1000 1K y0KA- 100M 00 1000 KO OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE RANGE VOLTAGE. 101- 100 ka 1a 100.Me 7 volts maximum 25 volts maximum MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION... MAXIMUM OVERLOAD VOLTAGE RESPONSE TIME ‘Analog Setting Time Dightaing Time ..-...s. ‘Two-wire and four-wire available on ail ranges. | 400V de oF pak ac continuous on any range with no damage. 80 ms with Fast Filter or 800 ms with Slow Filter to rated ecouracy. Depending on sample rate and fiter selection the digitizing timo will vary from 145 me to @ minutes 6 seconde-using @ 60 He ac line ‘with times increasing 20% using a 50 Hz ac lin.WwsuLaring STANOOFFS TWO TERMINAL OHMS MEASUREMENT CONNECTIONS TO (MAXIMIZE THE EFFECTIVENESS OF THE GUARDS FOUR TERMINAL OHMS MEASUREMENT CONNECTIONS TO, MAXIMI2E THe EFFECTIVENESS OF THE GUARDS 7 _ueakace Sp traee ONES GUARD IS AVAILABLE ONLY THROUGH THE REAR INPUT CONNECTOR eV Figure 6024-1, Ohms Measurement Connections And Guardingapplied through a reference resistor, RREF, to the summing node of the amplifier. By definition ofan ideal ‘operational amplifier, the curtent through Rx isthe same. current flowing through RREF (the summing node represents virtual ground). Figure 602A-2 isa simplified sehematic of the Ohms Converter and contains an illustration of the derivation of the formula for Rx. A ‘current lowing through RREF equals (Vi-V2)/RREF. Using the expression for currentto obtain the value of Rx: vo REF (VIVE) ‘The Ohms Converter multiplexes the voltages which, after being routed through the DC Signal Conditioner land Filter modules, are measured by the A/D Converter, 602A-15. The current reference for the Ohms Converter is derived from the -7V reference (RT4) from the A/D. Converter. Inverting amplifier U4 uses two possible feedback paths to produce either approximately +1.86V or +18,5V as Vi, Ud drives Q8. Q8 serves as a larger ‘current source than is available from U4. R41, R45, and. R56 are the reference resistors, each having an adjustment, GO2A-16. Rxis the feedback element for the operational amplifier composed of Q9 and US. US drives Q37 which serves asa higher current source. This arrangement also allows a larger output vottageswing. Note that Q9 and US are configured as an inverter yet the output of US is a postive voltage. Q37 draws its emitter current through a8 and R49 from the ~30V supply with CRIBand CRI3 ensuring that Q37 need not be in a state of saturation. ‘SOURCE voltages out are negative voltagesat SOURCE, ‘LO with respect to circuit common. In the 100M range, the voltage applied to Ral is divided by 8. However, the ‘unattenuated VREP is measured. The factor of 8 is preserved by assigning RREF the value of 8 x Rél in the ‘equation, As the Ohms Converter downranges, Rdl femains enabled so lower RREF values are actually parallel combinations. V2 is not measured in the three highest ranges (IM, 10M, 100M) since lead resistance is not large enough to affect accuracy. GO2A-I7. Extensive overvoliage protection has been. provided for the Ohms Converter. Refer to the full schematic, Voltages appearing on the SENSE or ‘SOURCE HI terminals in excess of +28V or -3V (with respect to circuit common) are clamped to ground by Qi4, CR7, Q10, and Q39. US is configured as.a voltage comparator biased by CRI9 and R14. The clamping action of QI or QI causesa voltage on the input Loline ‘which triggers comparator US through QU or QIS. In either case, the output at US pin 7 toggles toits maximum postive level, clocking U3 while placing. high on the ID3 line, This opens relay K1 and removes the input voltages from the module. The high from US also inhibits the ACK logic so an Error 4 is displayed. CR13 and CRI at the 505//8606A-028 ‘output of Q9, US are high voltage blocking diodes. Elisa spark gap preventing voltages in excess of 400V between the guard shield and circuit common. (6024-18. The Ohms Converter is addressed by 1C1,2,3 high, and aust be addressed for each sample voltage. Samples are multiplexed out atthe rate of one every four ‘msec. This requires the fastest response time in the DC Signal Conditioner of any measurement mode. 602A-19, MAINTENANCE 802A-20. Performance Test GO2A-21, Test the Ohms function using the following. procedure: 1. Connect tes leads tothe instrument inthe four wire configuration. Ensare that the front panel ‘Ohms Selector is pushed in (4T IN), 2, Select OHMS (function) and 100 manual (ange). 3. Short all leads together, then push ZERO VDC/OHMS. 4, Connect the standard resistor for the range selected. Check that the UUT reading falls within ‘the limits spevified in Table 602-2. 5, Select the next higher manual range. 6, Repeat steps 3, 4,and 5 forthe 100, 1k, 10k, and 100k ranges. 7. Connect test leads in the two-wire configuration (Ohms Selector out). 8, Repeat steps 3, 4, and $ for the IM, 10M, and TOOM ranges. “able 602-2, Performance Test ‘Standard na 10 9.9975 100 99.905 1k 99006 (+3) 10K 19,9996 (+3) 100k 99.996 (+3) ™ 96096 (+8), 10M 9.9979 (+6) oom 99.909 (+6) WUT Feeding Tew feponen | _ High Toxponent) 10,0025 100,005 1.00004 (+3) 10,0008 (+3) 100.004 (+3) 1.00004 (+6) 10,0021 (+6) 100.081 (+6) 6028-22. Calibration 602A-23. Use the following procedure for hardware calibration of the Ohms Converter. 1. Allow foratwo hour warm-up, then ensure that de volts accuracy is within tolerance, e02A-sFigure 6024-2. Ohme Converter2. With the Calibration Switch set to on (AVG/(CAL) annunciator flashes), disable software calibration gain factors by pushing STORE (CAL COR) once for each of the eight ‘ohms ranges. 3, Ensure that the Zero mode is off (ZERO lannunciator off, If necessary, toggle the ZERO YDC/OHMS button, 4. Ensure that the Ohms Selector and the Guard ‘Selector aze both pushed in. Then apply a high- ‘quality, low-thermal short to the inputs in a four terminal configuration, 5, Use manual range selection to prevent range changes while testing atthe range extremities. 6, Select the £00 range on the UUT. 7, Adjust R24 for a reading between -0.0003 and +0.0003, 8, Step through the other seven ranges, checking that the reading is 01 digit on all ranges. 9, Remove the four-terminal short and make four-terminal measurement connections. Select the 1M range and connect the input leads to a4 MQ. standard resistor. NOTE Refer to Table 4-1 of the Instruction Manual ‘for specifications on the Standard Resistors. 10. Adjust R40 for a reading between 3.99998 (+6) and 4.00002 (+6) 11, Select the 100 MQ. rangeand connect the input leads to a 100 MM standard resistor. 12, Adjust R37 for a reading between 9.995 (+6) and 100.005 (+6). 13, Seleet the 100 k0 range and connect the input leads to a 250 kM standard resistor. 14, Adjust R44 for a reading between 249.998 (43) and 250.002 (+3) ‘BS0SA/8506A-02A 15, Select the 1 KO range and connect the input leads to a 1.9 kA standard resistor. 16, Adjust R54 for a reading between 1.89998 (+3) and 1.90002 (+3). 17. Disable the Calibration mode (Calibration Switeh to off), “Table 602.3, Calibration Tests Readings ‘Nominal Resistance ‘Standard ‘Minieourn Maximum 10 Jee [10.0000 |r0.0011 roo 99.997 [100.000 __|100.008 tk [0.89987 (¥31]1.00000 ¢+3|1 00003 (+3) 10k 9.9997 (+2) |10.0000 (+3)|10.0003 (+3) 400% {99,997 (+3) |100.000 (+3 100.003 (+3) 1m. [0.90907 (+61, 1.00000 (+6i|1.00003 (+6) tom —_ }9.9989 (+6) |10.0000 (+6)|10.0011 (+6) 100m _|99.969 (+6) |100.000 (+6)]100.031 (+6) 18, Short all four test leads and perform the ohms ze10 procedure for each range (lowest to highest). Ensure that a reading of all zeros (1 digit) is obtained on each range. 19, With Zero mode on, perform the standard resistor teste in Table 6024-3. There are no adjustments for these readings. If any reading ‘exceeds the listed tolerance, the module is faulty 602A-24, TROUBLESHOOTING 602A-25. Troubleshooting procedures for the Ohms Converter follow the format used for the mainframe instrument, Table 602A-4, Failure Isolation, assures that the problem isin the Ohms Converter. Table 605A lists symptoms and possible failures in the order of probability. Figure 602A-3 shows timing relationships. Tables 602A-6 through 602A-8 give additional troubleshooting procedures. 602A-26, Always remove power before removing or installing a module 02A-27. PARTS LIST GO2A-28, Table 6024-9 is a parts breakdown for the ‘Ohms Converter, Refer to Section 5 of this manval for ordering and use code information.8505A/8506A-02A Table 6024-4, Fallure Isolation Goto the sep ‘number given Yor correct NO. Perform OC Volts test (Section 4). Is DG Volts within tolerance? Perform Ohms test fe Ohms within tolerance? Remove all optional modules except Isolator and Ohms converter. |s Ohms now within tolerance? Last one in is faulty ~ go to appropriate portion of Section 6. 1s Isoator instal? 24d eolator. Go to Subsection 608, ‘An optional medule is afecting Ohms, Replace one at 2 time until Ohms goes bad, Remove lsolatr. Insert Jumper/Monitor pcb. Is Ohms within tolerance: Section 3 3 Check power supply voltages as follows. Test DMM LO on AR (analog return, VAt = +14.26 to 15.75V VA2= —14.28 to -15.75V VA3 = #290 32V VAa= ~29 19 ~32v } Vee vss 15v ~20v Ditterens 1052 AT4* 6.993 10 ~7.007 ‘Are the supply voltages within tolerance? ‘The probiom is probably inthe Ohms board. However, the OC Signal contribute erors it the slow rates of the amplifies ae not fast enough. Go to Table 602°, Conditioner may ‘Table 6024-5. Symptom Analysis ‘SYMPTOM No Ohms Readings (Vp) w) ‘Ohms Zero Orit 10K — 100K Ranges Bad 10 100— 1K Ranges Bad 10M Full Seale Low No ACK All Ranges Out of Tolerance OOM Noisy, 30M High 1K, 100K, 10M, 1008 Rangoe Bac 100M ange Bed Display Error 4 with no voltage at input Noisy a 30M or Full Seale Full Scale 1M, 10M, 100M Ranges Out of Tolerance Slew Rates Bad factory (Attn: Parts for temperature compensation. D¢ SIGNAL CONDITIONER POSSIBLE FAILURE U5, 09, 035, Digital Loaic Us, 08, 229 Digital Logic & Drivers us, 09 032, 033, Digital 030, 021, Digital (020; 022 U5, a4, 011,038, 37,u5 O10, K3 Shortea (05, a4 020, 022, 019 Leaky aia R15, CRI7, CRS, CRE cris (037, 038, 019, U3, U5, US Note: If @9, 219, US, R19, R20, R21, R23, R25, or A26 are replaced i is necessary to return the module tothe 024-8Voltages shown are at RT6, (OC Signal Conditioner Output) ‘Vo is proportional to Rx, Vo for full sale xis shown, Sample Rate Fitter Tw, Tw" To Fast No 90ms 30ms 200 ms Fase ‘Yes 30ms 30m 650me Slew No 30ms 30m; _600ms Slow Yee 30me “These are approximate times "Except Tyg for ranges 1M, 10M, 100M Is zero, No gis measured for thee ranges, ‘The first reading after» range change or overrange is modified with longer V4 and V2 periods. Figure 6024-2, Timing Table 6024-6. Voltage Momuramente ¥ Ter vi Ve re Rret__| (Source Hi) | Range Value) (Ofset) BBV 2 esma | o0v <100 mv 250 +88v 2x @3ma sav <100 mv 000 sv 2 09am | .oav <100 mv 32k +rasv | 250K Taya 7 <100 mv 256K s.6v 250K 72ua my -<100 mv 4.001 aco | 45uA sy 2.728 oom | 0.45 wa sv 100m | 261.824M 56 nA ev “Approximate values (45%) TP1 is always -7.0V ‘TP9 Ref common (use for tow side of measurements) SCANNER: Voltages will appear on ‘TPs amplifier offset (<10 nV properly adjusted) RTT in order. ViVi — Vi Yo is proportional to RX Ve will vary some with range changa‘Table 602A-7, Range Sultch Closures O= Switch Oven ‘Chart applies for time the particular vatape Is SCANNED, = Switch Closed Al ochar times “0 apple. Vo | Va] Ve] VW fs aro | oo 29 | a31 | 33 | o36 wm] 1 1 ieee | eso eee 10 | 1 1 aia tka 10K. 100k ao Tome room onms ‘Table 6024-8. Addreas and Data Coding ‘ADDRESS ICH, 2, 3 HIGH 101 woz | 103 7 ° ° 0‘Table 602A-9. Ohms Converter PCB Assembly ‘B505A/8506A-028 esoneTion FLUKE ‘Tock m. wre ay ane MFG PART WO. CONVERTER PR ASSEIBLY FEOURE 602-4 (85058-1107) car, cP, cae, Le, car, car, ca, cae, cae, cue, a, ce, cae, cae, ae, ca, cae, car, car, cur, TA, 6.8 UF +/-208, 351 eh, 33 PF 47-24, 1007 CER, 1200 PF +/-208, 1000 (GER, 1200 PF +/-208, 1007 POLY, 100 FF 4/=10%, 5007 CRR,"0.01 UF +/-20%, 1007 CER, 0.01 UF +/-20%, 1007 1th, 22 UF 4/20) 150 GBR, 0.01 UF +/-208, 1007 EF, 0101 UP 2/208; 1007 CER, 0.01 UF 4/-204, 1007 (CER, 0.01 UF 4/-20%, 1007 TA, 5.6. UF 4/-208, 251 Bh, 0.22 UP 9/208, 50V A, 0.47 UP +/-208, 350 GRR, 0.01 UF 4/-20%,, 1007 CER, 050022 UF +/-10%, S00¥ aR, 0.22 UF 4/-204, 50V Th, 0.33 UP +/=20%, 357 Guh, 6.22 UF +/-204, 50¥ probe, Si, i-SPeED SITTeHING DIODE, SI, HI-SPRED SWITCHING prope, st, BI=sPeRD swrrcame DroDs, St, RECTIFIER, 14 DIODE, SX, RECTIFIER, 14 DIODE, Sx RECTIFIER, 14 2th, UNCOHE, 2/=10%, 10.00, 400% St, MOLTI-PELLET ‘St, MI-SPHED sWxTCHDIG ‘ST, MOLTE-PELLET ‘SI, RECTIFIER, 18 St, RECTIFIER, 1A ‘St, RDCTIFZER, 14 St, By-SReD SvTTcamG ‘St, RECTIPIER, 14 2B, ORCOMP, 6/10, 10.0¥, HOO 2-PELLET St, HI-srexD svzToHNNG YOLTGE SURGE PROTECTOR SRB, FHP, 80 X 5/8 RELAY, ARMATURE RELAY, ORY REED RELAY, DRY REED CHOKE, BP WODULE CASE (Includes MF2-¥09) CASE HALE, MODULE CASE HALF, MODULE nner 363113, 350852 358283 358283 ‘tkgs09 149153 189153 azote 149153 139153 139153 19153 368969 os689 161380 1agis3 25enes opens 408690 309889 203323 203323 203303 epiad aera aera 113328 375305 203323 315485 ieeraa Renn waeiue 203323, aabis risse8 35477 203823 aneres anges 519429 35750 351502 a1i5ue 51805 02990 02990 By orton -02 1 960685x0035KA1 81 21-4100=C00~-3306 2222-630-01~122 2322-630-01-122 Aug609" cozgBi01e 103m 2351017 103K 1960226100158 co23Br0TF 103m co2ge1017 1034 cozasio17 103M cn2aBio1F 103m 1 g60565x0025KA1 cugcocaas 496087 4x0035HAT coasat01? 1034 esr00075R222K coxgooce2 1960334K0035 cuscocezan rans ra rms ‘281008 18006 ‘1006 igs 1a 9300 mi rD300 18006 ‘10006 096 TaN, ‘moos 618 D-200 sana B-BITO ang062 515829 UriooTe ‘uri0070 1537276 651685 02990 02990@5054/8508A-028 ‘Table 602A-2, Ohms Converter PCB Assembly (con!) besenirTiOn uke rock so. a sur me Mra PART no. ECHL, CH ‘eavsrst0R, ‘TRANSISTOR, ‘mRaNszeT08, smASzS70%, ‘mmasiston, mavststoR, sRavsiszoR, TRANSISTOR, TRANSISTOR, ‘TRANSISTOR, sawszstoR, ‘saavsiston, ‘maNszsTOR, maiszstoR, ‘THASISTOR, maisxst0r, TRAISISTOR, TRANSISTOR, TRaIsISTOR, ‘TENISISTOR, ‘reavsxst0R, ‘TRAISTSTOR, ‘TmasTS70R, smatszs70R, uisrstoR, mansiszoR, ‘TRANSISTOR, ‘muvsrst0R, ‘TRANSISTOR, ‘HaNSISTOR, ‘maxsrstoR, ‘TmaUSISTOR, TBaIsIsTOR, mpaisistoR, TRANSISTOR, mauststor, TRaNSISTOR, ‘TamsTsTOR, ‘mavsistoR, ‘TmaNsZST0R, covER, woouLe case, ‘SHIELD, COVER DECAL, "cs cour eerER 2108 GUARD, REAR Guano, FRort seacer, xsTm (net! showe uo, soLDER ‘SPRG, COM ) St, PRP SU, 1PM su, IP ST, me er, HACHANNEL St, a St, NU Sr, 3B Fst, Dou, wcuann, Sr, "PN SI, PY St, IP St, EK St, UR St, mm St, um 5, me St, xP ret, oan, Fer, CHANNEL sr, mip Sr, Px 3t, 1% St, AP St, NAY st, Per car St, HEH Pet, cua, SI, NPR Et, weceaNNE SE," NB rt, mawwve, SE, Ni Pet, cua, Fer, teawanne, St," St, BI SE, Pe RET, CHAN, soog7s anion sost2 5tsoa 383368 382356 isz207 103531 aes 226290 218396 9sarh 218396 peter 168116 168716 218396 476309 2o3h8s 203405 195978 218396 203409 203889 zosne9 isss78 218396 251578 21578 sg5er 218396 218396 195978 218396 195978 218396 218396 303314 218396 393314 258396 393318 218396 393318 251878 218396 195978 166716 288524 89536 89536 89536 89536 89536 29536 orakr 17363 85553 ours ours our oun 859536 89535 89536 om 33 89536 an ose bins omnia oer sei ove ont 01733 89536 89536 ours ours ons 0713 073 ors 04713 04733 89536 ons 89536 ong 89536 ora 89536 09536 ours ours 89536 09536 aoa angle 650572 asso 383368 383356 yo123-paP 501 Corzo-o41-0380 Psz61o 2aagon 213906 213908 251578 160716 168716 213904 78309 1103322 a1e2322 213906 213008 tic23ze 1102322 niceaze 243906 2ingo4 251578 261578 213906 213908 2ug908 213006 213908 213906 2x3908 2908 jo3at4 2is908 393318 2r5908 393318 2x3908 393318 iste 2¥3908 213906 168715 286324“Table 6024-8. Ohms Converter PCB Assembly (cont) DescaIPTON LUKE rock 0 we sry cme Fa PART WO. mer. DEP. mee. DEP, cone, CAR, 20K +/-5, 1/3 CAR, 150 «/-58, 1/8 GR, 20K 2/258) 1780 Ry 150 2/258) 1728 220K 41-5, VN COMP, 1.8K 4/-54) 1 DEP. Der, chin 20K +158, 1/88 AR, 20K #/-58) 1788 COMP, 100K +/-108, 1H ber. wm. DEP. DEP: ‘okey 20K 6/-38, 171M FILM, 30.98 +/-18, 1/89 aR, 1H 97-54, 17 CAR, TH 4/54, 170 Ws, NOK 47-0.1% Wine, #228 vo. Wine, ua, FILM, 10 4/=18, 1/88 ee2iu 100 +/=208, 1/28 Wi, "40K 47-0.15 wa. wu. ber. Der, wm. wt: per. De wr: wt om. van, DEP. vaR, DEP. pep. un, FILM, 10.9/=18, 1/88 FILM, 20K 4/=18,, 1/88 CAR, 39K 47-58, 1720 AR, 39K 4/-585 178 FILM, B.O7K 4/218, 178M FILM, 80.64 +/-1H, 1/80 aR, 1 4/54, 7 CAR, 1808 9/-58, 1780 FILM, 316K 2/-0.1%, 1/89 FILM, 2.5K 4/—18, 1728 FILM, 100K +/-1%, 1/8 50K +/=10%, 1/2¥ can, 16k 97-58, 178 10K 4/205, 1/2 Wy, Mogi 4/-0018, 2 eat, 20k +/-83, 170 AR, 1M 47-5, 17 500'9/=208, 1/2) Way 272.8 +/-8.085, 1/2 Dee. co ve. Chi, 3-38 47-55) 1/8 any 120K 3/258) 1788 any W70 4/-58, 1788 CoMb, 1.8K 4/54) 1 mer. DEP. DEP. mee. wR, we hey 2-7K +758, 1/48 CAR, 2.7K 2/2585 1780 aR, 150/958, 1780 aR, 9H 4/58, 1/1 200K +/-208, 1/24 FILM, 932K 2/-16, 1/89 We, 2.078 4/-0.18, 1/2 mee. ean 1 97-58 170 axe? agua ier 3am 109025 100331 aan maar 100397 anti 28831 340987 348987 aritos 5869 268789 115869 267823 zr103 268788 2orere S280 ‘2400 398967 3iar10 348997 5uapas 30508 unto 2k8807 330588 3am 257880 ay2205 ant 340087 2raNg hia 38813 tare 3438 69331 386490 4386890 augue pusger 4351509 269508 axzige 38967 0031 50031 80031 80031 ona on12t 80031 20031 ona 0031 1637 0031 0031 89536 89536 onsx 89536 11236 89536 91637 91837 fo031 80031 sear 1637 0031 031 91637 91637 91637 11236 80031 11236 89536 60031, 0031 11235 89536 0031 03 0031 onray 031 0031 e031 20031 11236 91637 9538 0031 cRe5tm-BFeOK crag tatsPIs0e 22216 corees cRa5-4-5220K cRe5TAI5PeOK ‘051031 cR257-b5F20K cousss3012" cRa5i=H-5P crestcicsPim 271803 T1569 ‘curso 100 115k69 agorct01® 211403. P50 100 curssz0028 (C25 1-4-5 F39K (Res NSPE coMessaer ‘cMP550062° cwa5}—u-5Pim cna taicsPieoK coMr5551618 cwrsse1see cMrss1003? 190P05038 RRS NAS PRG sg0Pct038 Biz205 res 1-8-5 FLOR crap 1—tsemn 190705018 ataist crest cn25}—4SPTOE as1825 (R25t-4-5 PORT (Res t8-SPEKT (OR25 1-45 PISOE crap t—te5PIN g0Pc204B cmess3323" 2189 crast=4-5PiM one 5 aaa.8505A/8506A-024 ‘Table 6024-9. Ohms Converter PCB Assembly (con!) rune | wee esenrrion srock | seu | wre ranr no, na | cone DEP. CAR, 1K 4/-58, 178 33126 89031 cRast—t5PIE DEP. CAE, 20K +/-5%, 1/2 Aeia7T b0031 cx251-A-5 720K wm FILM, 1H 4/218, 1/88 268797 91637 CHPSsi¢0¥F DEP. CAR, "120% #/-58, 174M 841386 80031 CRa5t—-5P120K DEP. CAR, 120K 2/-58, 1/3 W136 80031 CRaSTAA-SPIZ0E MOL. FLLM, 15.8% +/-18, 780 253688 91637 curssister MEL. FILM, 13:2k =80 Ka 1 ma 9.02 +10 0.03 ~ 10 D=10 kA 10 mA 0.02 + 10 0.3 +10 =1.25 KO 400 mA 0.03 + 20 0.05 + 20 a 0.03 +20 0.05 +20 With Bi digit dleplay. For 6% digit Gisplay multiply Number of Counts by 10. a0 DAY 23°O 25° ADD TO THE 90 DAY SPECIFICATIONS PEA MONTH THE FOLLOWING % OF READING RANGE 4 OF READING 700 wa ‘0082 ma o.00z2 30mA 0.0022 100 ma 0.0086 rn 0.0086 [AC Current Accuracy =(% OF READING + NUMBER OF COUNTS) 2a HOUR 29°C S1°C" ‘AVERAGE RESPONDING TRUE RMS oa (OPTION -O1 OPTION -034, Tone 20 He 7+ 10 20 H2-60 He 0.56 +35 50 Ha-10 kez 0.28 + 35 40 kets 20 ke reso 20 ke2-60 KH 110+ 260 50 KH2-100 kHe 2.8 + 750 70 H2-20 Hz O7+ 110 20 H2-50 He 0.8 + 35 50 H-10 ki 008+ 35 10 kH-20 ke? 014+ 410 20 kHe-60 kis 6.2 + 260 50 KHz. 100 KHz 07 + 760 10 Hi-20 He = 07 + 180 20 H-50 He oats ss 0.35 + 80 50 H2-10 kHz — 018+ 80 50 H2-100 KH 016 +55 = TO He20 re = ory 160 "a 20 He-50 He 034 +65 0.35 + 90 50 H2-10 kHz 036+ 65 018 + 90 swith Sagi alspay, For 6% digit cisplay, muliply Number of Counts by 10. Same source resistance as do} current 60828600 Series-03 “Table 605-1. Current Shunts Specifications (cont) ‘AC Current Accuracy (cont)? (80 DAY 25°C 25°C" “AVERAGE RESPONDING TRUE RMS OPTION -o1 OPTION -094, 0 He20 He = To+ 110 20 Hz-60 He ost 08435 50 Hz-10 kHz 04+ 04 +35 10 keiz-20 kHz o7+e 40+ 110 20 ktHa-80 KH? 15+9 154280 50 kH2-100 kHz 30+9 40+ 760 To He20 He = 0+ 110 20 H-50 He 05+9 0s +35 50 He-10 kHz 006+ 9 on +35 30 KH2-20 ke ont+9 024110 20 klHz-50 Kile on2+9 0.3 +260 50 kH2-100 kHz. os +9 1.0 +760 10 H2-20 He = 10+ 180 20 H2-50 Hr os +65 0g +80 50 H2-10 Kez 0.26 + 80 FREQUENCY 50 Hz-100 kHz 0.24 +55 - TO HE2O FE = TO + 160 1” 20 H2-50 Hz os +65 08 +90 50 Ha-10 Ke 0.24 +65 0.28 + 00 With SH aight display. For 61 digit display, muliply Nomber of Counts by 10. Same source resistance as {96 current. 00 DAY 25°0 26°C* ADD TO THE 90 DAY SPECIFICATIONS PER MONTH THE FOLLOWING % OF READING. ‘AVERAGE RESPONDING "TRUE RMS, OPTION -01 OPTION -084 Tone 0 HE on 20 H2-50 He 0.089 50 H2-10 kHz oes 10 kHe-20 kH2 ont 20 kHr-80 kHz oa? 50 Kr2-100 KH. 0.44 10 Hz-20 He ont 20 H-50 Hz 0.056 50 H2-10 kHz oor 10 kH2-20 kez 0.022 20 kiHz-50 KH 0.033 50 kH42-100 KHZ om 10 H2-20 He on 20 H-50 Hz 0.058 50 H2-10 ke 0.028 50 Hz-100 KHe = Tone a0 HE og 20 Ha-50 He 0.088 50 Ha-10 KHZ 0.028 RANGE FREQUENCY18500 Series 03 ‘Table 608-1, Current Shunts Specifications (cont) Operating Characterition TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (4 OF READING + NUMBER OF COUNTS) /*C* (0°C TO 18°C AND 26°0 TO 50°C RANGE oct Lr 100 wa 0.0025 +06 0.006 + 35 006 + 18 mA 0.0025 +08 0.008 +35 0.004 + 1.5 toma 0.0025 +06 0.005 + 3 0.004 +4 300 mA 0.0086 +.0.6 0.005 +9 0.004 +7 1a 0.0085 +08 0.005 +9 0.008 +7 With 5% digits display, For 64 digits display, multiply Number of Counte by 10. (CREST FACTOR (AMS ac) 4S at full scale, increasing down scale by 45 x range /Tinput MAXIMUM OVERLOAD .. 1.5A maximum, +140 ¢¢ or peak ac to 60 Hz, or 200V peak ac above 80 Hz on any range with no damage. Protected by # 154 fuse, SETTLING AND DIGITIZING TIME ... Same as de volts (see Section 1), NoTEs: ‘For Source Resistance less than specified replace the Number of Counts in the de Accuracy specication with the folowing RANGE NUMBER OF COUNTS" 100 pA ‘Ox (T+ 8 KAUR) 1 mA 9x (1 +1 KEYAS) soma 9x (1+ 1280/Rs) “With 5% digit display. For 6% digits, multiply Number of Counts by 70, ‘For Source Resistance less than specified replace the Number of Counts per *C in the de Temperature Coefficient specication with the following: RANGE NUMBER OF COUNTS /°O" 100 nA 05 x (1+ 8 kO/RS) ma 05x (1-47 KOVR) 10.mA 05 x (1 + 1250/R5) “With 51 digit display. For 6% digits, multiply Number of Counts by 10, °AC Current cannot be measured with the BSO6AMODE A ~ 100 8,1 mA, 10 m8 x | oy | netavs Freeopack FULL SCALE Egut s0,nat | 030 WS a roanae | a7 | aw | Ksxe rasa | oo | os | KaKe av vov iasv MODE 100 ma, 1A RANGE Roaunr RELAYS | FET SWITCHES FULL SCALE Roy wae [a7.a7o.ar | xa.«a | a20,a32, 020,012 Rt [a7 awa, neo | K2iK3_ | 020,029, 028,012 20v (G11 and ether 03 oF O4 wil be condting Ina onaee Figure 603-1. Curent Shunt Configurations And Range Information£8500 Series-03, 603.12, Mode 8 configures the amplifier us difference arp measuring the voltage across ast, The ratio oF the ecdbackrentor, R661 Ry ses the gin of the am alter at approxinately 20 [R6O/R, = (RS + R73}/RO] 603.13. The amplifier consists of x dual FET (QI9). Ul, QL, and Q2. Refer tothe schematic, RIS biases Q19 from the ~7V reference (Irom the AJD Converter). RS7 and RB are selected to compensate for offset error (one of them will always be 1089), RSS and R56 are selected for temperature coefficient compensation, QL and Q2 are & complementary pai (For either polarity output) ro increase the current output eapabilty of the amplifier. 603-14, QUI and celay K3 are always closed for current ‘measurements. Q3 and Q4 cootol the ground reference selection for the amplifier. In the de mode, Q3 connects the noninverting input of the amplifier to reference com- ‘mon, In the ac mode the amplifier is referenced to the ac ‘module ground (RT3) through Q4. 603-18. The Curent Shunts module i addressed by CO, 1, 3 high. At the rg address, an ACK i cotuened and KS is energived to sample the input voltage. IF the voltage exceeds # 45V, one section of US will have s high output, depending on the input polarity, The output from U6 is stored on C10. At the next address the voltage on C10 wil prevent the tetum of the ACK sesponse and sill prevent vontrol data from belng latched into U2. An Error 4 will be displayed. In addition to overvoltage protection provided by U6, overcurrent protection is provided by RI and CRIO In the 100 HA, | mA, and 10 mA canges and by CRS and CR6 in the 100 mA and 1 A ranges. A fuse in series with che Source HI terminal is located on the front pune! for addtional overcurent protection 603.16. At the second addres, if the input voltage did not exceed + 48V, termination of the address clocks range and reference control data into U2. Since relay commen it Vee, relay drivers must go low to energize a vey, FET sltch drivers are configured to use a Tow from U2 to tum ‘on the FET (close the switch) by curning off the gate control transistor 60317. MAINTENANCE 603.18, Performance Test 603-19, Tost the ditect current function by using the following procedure. Selest ADC and AUTO, Connect the direct current source output HI to the instrument SOURCE HI and output LO to SOURCE LO. Using Table 603-2, sequentially apply the inputs shown, manually selecting the sange after the first rGading, The instrument must read within the limits specified Table 602-2. Performance Test ¢ input “Ta teen ioua | ase 250A Orme Soma | enmeea (3) 2oma | $8o9001—31 Toma | oases (aa Toma | S990 (=a 1Sma | 14.9945 (21 100ma | 99.990 (—2) ssoma_ | tasaog = ta_| csoas0 igh Tam 100,080 (=) 250.005 (8) Sro13 3) Sg0040 (2) 200070 (8) ‘0008 (3) $o.040 (a) 15.0058 (3) tear) 100.0703) 90.088 (3) ono0as Sooa7e 603.20. Calibration 603.21. Before calbeating any part of the instrument, the Calibration Memory module should be removed if installed. Apply power and allow two hour warmup period. All adjustments aze on the Curcent Shunts module DC calibration should be performed before calibrating curtent, Use the following procedure to calibrate the Current Shunts module 1, Verify that the instrument is in the LA range and the Cal mode (CAL indicator illuminated). Connect the test DVM HI input lead to TP3 and {he LO input to TPL ‘The test DVM must cead less than 200 mV. Remove the test DVM, Select the 100 mA range on the instrument, Adjost RIT for & roading between 0000-4 and ++0,00041 (0.000 +1 eal dt). Set the current course controls for an output cof 20.0000 a Connect the instrument HI input ¢o the everent source HI output inserting 4 200 KO 2 001% resistor in series with the instrument HI input lead. Connect the LO input terminal to the current source LO output Select the 100 uA range on the instrument and tdjast R31 for a reading between 499.999 and +100.001 Disconnect the instrument HI input led feom the current source, remove the inserted resistor and reconnect the Fi input lead, Selecta current source output of #1.00000 mA. Adjust R34 for a reading between +0.999990 and +1.09001 4. 316318500 Series-03, Seat a eutent soutee output of 10.0000 mA. 22, ERROR 4 is dplayed to show excesive voltage inthe corent furton. Adjust R37 for 4 eeading between #9.99990 aioe ol _ 603.22, Troubleshooting. 60323. Troubleshooting procedures for the Current Shunts module follow the format sed for the mainframe Adjust R71 fora eeadng between-999994 and lnsruent, Table GOB sues tht the problem ithe “100001-9. Cortent Shunts module, Figute 603-2, Symptom Analy Iss yrmptoms and potable fellures in the order of probe Select a current source output of 1.000004, ability. Table 603-4 contains adres and data information ‘ted fo st up the module Selecta current souree output of 100.000 ma. Adjust R68 for a reading between 10999990 meeel.00001 60324. Always remove power before emating oF ltl ling modules Saat te VBC fncionané Aone om 64375, PARTS LIST Select a SOV de output from the cucent source 603-26, Table 603-5 isa parts breakdown for the Current ‘Shunts module. Refer to Section 9 of this manual for Select the ADC function on the instrument, ‘ordering and use code information, ‘Table 609-3. Currant Shuntslsiation Gorotheven] number given Ter eorect response Yes Perform DC Voits test (Section 4), Is OC within tolerance? Perform Current test. le Cutrent within tolerance? Remove all optional modules except Ielator and Current Shuts, ts Curent now within Replace modules one a time, testing Current between modules. Last one in when Current goes bad is faulty. Go to appropriate subsection of Section 6. Remove Isolator. Install Interconnect/Monitor pcb ls Current within tolerance? Bed lsolator, Go to subsection 608, ‘Bed Current Shunte module, Go to figure 603-2£8800 Serias 03 ‘SYMPTOM POSSIBLE FAILURE Zero noisy oF out of tolerance No zer0 reading TOOWA, 1 mA, 10 mA ranges bad, others OK 100 mA, 1 A ranges bad, others OK High random ~ full-scale readings Nodisolay No ACK ~ Error 9.0" Ervor& nly 100 uA range bad Only 1 mA range bad Only 10 mA range bad ‘Oniy 100 ma range bad Only 1A cange bad (021, 020, 029, U1, 03, 04, leaky output FETS 3, Ka, 19, U1, 1, a2 K3.0r O11 o9en K4 open, 028, 020, leaky protection dioses (020, 029, leaky protection diodes, 12 019, U7, 01, 2 us, U2 Voltage mit clreuit, U6 oF leaky diode (CRIS, RTB), U5, 018, (030, 031, Digital Control G3, 010, Digta! Conteo! (08, 09, Digital Control K2, 032, Digital Control K2, 028, Digital Control (019 0 Readings with Zero Input Drains (10Stresistore) = ~0.8 V de Sources (40 KS resstors)= 8.0 V de Ut pin 6* OV de Differences between ADG and AAC TACTIC Ratarence WouRaT 2. Frequency response in AAC. Cnditionar bypassed) temperature compensation, 3. RTI outputs are aplied to DC Signal Conditioner for DC and to optional AC madule for AC (DC Signal TFGT9, R15, R16, RBS, oF ASB are replaced, itis necessary to return the module to the Factory (attni PARTS) for Figure 603-2. Symptom Analysis ‘able 603-4, addres and Data Field ‘Address — 160, 1, 3 High ‘Garren LO Input (KO) and Output FET (GH) 10C Reterence (03) AAG Reterence (8) 100KA Range 1 9A Range 10 ma Range 100 mA Range 14 Range Votage Check Reset‘Table 603-5, Current Shunts Assembly ure | we DescaiPrion stock | spy | mre paar wo. er bead wo. | cane +03 @ CURNET swuuTs Poe AsseRSLY ORDER BY OPTION -03, FIGURE 603-3, (HIS-4N04T) 1, C2 CAP, TA, WUT UF 4/-208, 357 ro1389 sg6pa7axo035H41 3 CAP, MICK, WT PF 47-13, 5000 2aneo2 parsmt7or o CAP, MICA, 150 PF 4/58, 500¥ rare pursersty ©5, 06 CAR, MICK; 100 FF +/-54) 5007 saul pansei012 cr ‘CRP, CER, "1200 PF 3/-20%, 100v as8263 2222-630-01-122 C8, 09 CAP, HEC, 39 FP 4/54, 5007 sui Dxt5E3909 cid CAP, TA, 4.7 UF 4/208, 257 161983 196047 5x0025KAt on CAP, TA, 220 UF «/-208, 6¥ aosee2 1960227000671 C12, C13 CP, CBR, 0.72 UF +/-208, 50y 03849 cwsocz2u cit’ ° ca, MICh, 390 PF 4/-52, ‘S00v 13837 DMISE3914 Cr5-c17 CAP, Th, to. UF +/-208, 150 193623 1960 106x001581, cRizceh robe, ii-sreep, SvrTcHDIG 203323, ean cagack10 prone, sx 60407 wz0518 oni DIODE, HI-speep, siTToHNG 203323 mas caz rors, MI-srEED, swrTCHNG 203323, aus CRIN DIODE, MIZSPEED, SITCHING 203823, nana CRS DIODE, MIZSPEED, STTCHING 203323 mana, crs prong, ur-sveep, surrommG 203328 aes, cR7 ‘Dobe, mI-sveep, swrrcumG 203323 manag, cme © DIODE, I-sreED, svrrowne 203323 ass, caig DoD, HI-srEED, SvrToHNIG 203323 mans om DONE, HI-SPEED, SVITCHING 203323 mans, cei prong, #r-sruaD, suzmouma 203323 rman, cree Drobe, ZENER 4325803 333408 SCRE, FIP, WAG x 3/8 256764 256168 n RELAY’ ASSy’ Co, REED RELAY 269019 o6-F ‘SerTcH, RY REED oar 18 vi01 RELAY ASS COIL, REED RELAY 269019 w6P RELAY assy ‘COT REED RELAY 269019 we Raay assy ‘OlL, REED RELAY 269019 wor RaLaY ASS ODL, REED RELAY 269019 B67 cast ASsBe@LY 53008 59008 CASE BALF, HODULE 202990 402990 CASE HALF, MODULE 202990 102990 coven, WobuLe, cise so2978 nozsra SHIELD, COVER bios an2015, Decal,” CURRENT sHUNTS Assy aahs aN ecal,, cavTroH 58508 asason GoanD, NEAR 383364 38336 GUARD, FRONT 33356, 303356 SOCKET, ‘COMP. LEAD 343285 2-08-2133 “not” shown)8500 Series 03 Table 603.5, ©, nt Shunts Assembly (cont Desowieion FLUKE sTock ¥0 we sry cone We Paar no. eba2 a3 Ri AD-RIa B15, Re me mg re kee ea, Rau Fes-29 30 731 Raz 733 co 5S R36 Bar Re seaceR, coMpowent (eot” noun) SPRING, On. (aot’ shown) SPACER, STANDOFF (not shown) XSTR, ST PNP DIODE, BI-SPEED, swrTCHMIG xsTR, "FET, tecHiNNe XSuR, Fer, -oHMuve. XSTR, FET, HCH XSth, FET, NCHA, xsTe, st," AP XSTR, 81 NP XSTR, SI, NP XSIR, FEE, DUAL, NCuMINEL (SELECTED) sim, FEE, HH X51) 1," nen xsT, SI, PH asm, FEE, cua Wi, Ont 4/-0.058, 1/04 Wr 0:7 s/-0ctt, 1748 PEP. CAR, 100K 4/-58,. 1/49 ML. ELH, 10 4/—18, 1/8 BEE, CAR, 100K 6/58, 1/49 vers TM 383 4/18) 1/80 We, 19 47-0.18 20 MIL. FILM, T.87K 7-14, 1780 DEP, CAR, 300K 4/54, 1/10 Wi, OK 4/-0.18 ak, CERET, "10 4/208, 1/20) FILM, 19.38 6/18, 1/8 Chey 1K +/-5, 1780 cn, 18K 47-58, 174M cum, te +/-58, 1788 CAR, 18K 4/=58, 1/40 CAR, 39 4/58, 1/10 CAR, 100K 47-58, 974M wy, 7915 Yen, CERVET, 50 4/-208, 1/24 ws, "1020 +/20.058, 0.2% ML. FILM, 87-5 ¢/=18, 1/80 YAR, CERIET, 10K +/-208, 1/24 We,"128-4/-0,058, 0228 MOL. FILM, 499K" 4/18, 1788 YAR, CERT, “IK +/-208, 1720 DEP. CAR, 150 4/28", 1/4 296319 aaunss 335608 218396 195974 203323, 261578 218396 261578 393314 2eise 218396 95078 226290 267963, 2ensT8 216306 218396 261578 95978 aries ouaa ao20 2eeres 348920 75609 ioaas 2gng3t 438520 zrik03 aamn35, 250063, 3uguas 5ube62 513426 3uabs2 30836 348520 inasos 267815 ‘osst 269546 267ee Su0ers 158252 267856 Seae 32589 83553 89536 org outa arsic 89536 ours 59536 89536 89536 otras ours our 89536 89536 ofr oar 89536 ont 89536 89536 e031 1637 e003 91637 9538 51637 0031 89536 1378 9637 t003 so031 fost soos s0031 t0031 89536 1318 89536 ner sare 80536 seat 38 0031 soan6 cco120~018-0380 335608 243908 2¥3906 tmuane 261578 2igoa 251578 393318 21578 2183904 213906 Psz6to 267963 261578 2xg908 2xz908 251878 203906 grieni itguon Res 1=4-5P100K Nee1-841008 ca251~8-57 100K MPP1-80300F 408s wer-87871F cR251~5P 1008 aris 12071008 MEPT=191 2F cnast—t-sPiK ona5tot5PI8e cresitasrie (Res -A5P18K (Res 18057396 ccae51—8-5P100K 0509 190Pc5008 s089 EP I=BeTS2F t90nc1038 ‘goers HEFI-8u991 190%e 1028 cnasisnsers0e£8500 Sorias03 ‘Table 603-5, Curront Shunts Assombly (cont) uke | we esomeriOn srook | sexy | mes ean uo, wo | cane DEP. CAR, 20K 4/958, 1/40 yatar7 90031 cR251=4-5P20K MEL. FILM, 89.9K ¢/-18, 1/80) 268821 91637 MPPI-84992" MEL, FILM, 100K +/-0.54, 1/84 291058 91637 MPFI-810030 COMP, TOM's/~108, 1728 vosrae 0121 EBIOeS DEP. CAR, TOOK +758, 1/46 348920, 82031 cR251-l-5Pra0K DEP. CAR, AIK 4/-58, 1/40 348896 e031 cR2SI-B-5PETE DEP. CAR, 100K 6/-58, 1/38 348520 80031 cRast=8-57100K MOL, FILM, 150K /—18, 1/88 2ytogs 91637 MPFI-615038 DEP. CAR," 20x +/-58,. 1/86 uata77 0031 cRasi-a-520R DEP. AR, 100K '*/=5H, 1/44 ‘388920 9031 cRASI-A-SPIOOR RES, MOL, FILM, 13K +/=18, 1/88 33883991637 MPPI-81302P mas, smbcrep 4s, SELECTED RES, MIL. FILM, 10 4/~18, 1/08 268789 91637 MFI~Bat00F FES, DEP. CAR, "5.6K +/=58, 1/4M 22350 0031 cH251-1-5I5KG ES, COMP, 10M 4/108, 1/24 soatne 01121 EB1061 HES, DEP."CAR, 100K 4/58, 1/4 348920 60031 cR251~3-5Pt00K FES, 7975 jinogo9 89536 t40309 RES, DEP. Ch, 100K 4/58, 1/38 348920 80031 cR251—2-5Pr00K RES, VAR, CERT, 5K +/-208, 1/2 26re12 75378 190705028 ES, MOL. FILM, 12.4 47-18, 1/88 261604 91637 MEFI=B1 ZRF ES, MIL. FILM, 13.3K 4/218, 1/88 256566 91637 MEFIAEN332F HES, VAR, CERET, SK +/-208, 1/24 267812 15378 190705028 RES, DEP. CAR, TOOK /-58, 1/4 4348920 80031 cRASI~H-5P100K ES, MIL. FILM, 100 4/-18, 1/88 168195 91637 MPFT-B1000r RES, DEP. CAR, 6.8K «/-58, 1/381 368761 $0031 CRast=BA5 PERE TERNAL, TURhET 179283 88285 201086 1, LIM, OP AMP 83495 12080 List OH 1c, ms, HEX "D" FLIP FLOP 408509 12080 wAT¥CITUN 6, CMOS, REX, INVERTER/ BUFFER 381848 02735. COHOROAE 4c, TMs HEX INVERTER, BUFFER/DRIVER 32775 01295 surAt6J Ic, cobs, TRIRLE, 2-DUFIT MAND GATES 375187 02735 CD4O2gAE 1c, um, OP AMP, DUA, ‘ire566 12080 Laa58 © 1c, coms, QUAD, 2-DiPUT HOR GATES 355172 02735 cDNOOTAE ORDER F/1 #59088 FOR COMPLETE MODULE CASE ASST. KITHOUT FCB Assy. AESISTORS ARE TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED AND MUST BE RETURNED FOR RESILECTION JF ANY REQUIRE RERLACEYENT. (755 AND 356)18500 Series 03 MP1, CASE ASSY, MPs pe acne) bss =] f | peieee _ Je7 se — 3 ——— eo >>Fie. G55 BHT 2 OFZ *nsalesoonos NOTES: (umess onanmer sPeciFit). Oa ene oa Oren pe Figure 6055, Ply Back SchematicFIG 605-5 S5OGNESOEADS §— ue 3 OF 3 MOTES: (\Msss orvermer sreciri). Barts oor setretes strescoune tis-1074 Figure 6055. Piggy Back Schematic606-1. INTRODUCTION (606-2, The Bit Serial Asynchronous Interface provides emote programming capability in applications where speed isnot critical factor. Switch selectable baud rates, op bits, and current requirements permit maximum Aexiblity 606-3. SPECIFICATIONS 606-4, The Bit Serial Asynchronous Interface meets or ‘éxoeeds the requirements for data transmission and reception of EIA Standard RS-232B or C, MIL-STD- 188B, CCITT V24 and 20 mA current loop. ‘Specifications are as follows: Input Format ‘Timing Format Output Format Baud Rates Byte Serial, $-bit parallel, “Asynchronous. Bit Serial 50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800 and 9600 Derived from the DMM. 0° t0 50°C, Operating Power Operating Temperature 606-5. INSTALLATION 606-6. The Bit Serial Interface is easily installed a8 a module in the 8500 series DMM. Use the following Installation procedure: 1, On the DMM, press power OFF and remove the line power cord. 2. Remove the DMM’s top cover. 3. The Interface module fits in the rear slot, bus connector and addcess switches facing to the rear. Slide the module vertically between the module ‘guides, and press firmly into place. PIN e530 3/83 2505A/B5004.06 Option -06 Bit Serial Interface NOTE Make sure the leaf spring, attached 10 one- half of the module shield, is resting firmly over the flange of the opposite hal of the module shield. 4, Ifinstlled, remove the Interconnect PCB from slot K. This slot ean be identified as the only slot with connectors on the analog and digital bus lines. ‘To remove the Interconnect PCB, grasp the board at both ends, and pull up. An end-to-end rocking ‘motion may be necessary to free the PCB from its ‘connectors 5, The Isolator module must be installed in stot K ‘whenever a remot interface (Option -05,-06 or-07) is used in the DMM. NOTE Use lsolator-08 with the 85004; Isolator-06A ‘must be used with the 85024. 6. Replace the DMM's top cover. 606-7. GENERAL 606-8, EIA Standard RS-232-C provides the elect industry with the ground rules necessary for independent manufacturers to design and produce both data terminal and data communication equipment teat conforms to & ‘common interface requirement. As a result, a data ‘communications system can be formed by connecting an 1RS-232-C data terminal (such as the 8502A) to an RS- 232-C data communications peripheral (uch as a TTY, MODEM, computer, etc). This works fine on paper However, in practice the user must be aware of the subtleties of serial binary data interchange to ensure that any two pieces of RS-232-C equipment will be compatible. Forexample, thetwo instruments must share 606-1{85054/0500A.06 at least one of the features from each of the following characteristics, 1, Timing Format - Synchronous or Asynchronous, 2. ‘Transmission Mode - Simplex, half-duplex, or full duplex. 3. Baud Rate (bits per second) - 50,75, 110, 134.5, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600, 4. Bits per character «5, 6, 7,8 5. Party Bit - Odd, even, high, low, not used 6. Data Interface Lovels - EIA oF 20 mA current loop, 606-9. Timing formats conforming to both synchronous and asynchronous operation are shown in Figure 617-1. In asynchronous operation each chacacter is bracketed by both start and stop bits. These bits separate the characters and synchronize both the transmission and receipt of data. When data is not being ‘sent the data line is held high, Insynchronous operation a syne character is sent prior to each data stream (a data stream usually consists of a block of characters). When the line is idle, a fill or syne character is continuously transmitted 606-10, Transmission mode is an overall system requirement. It defines the communication ability of both instruments ia the system configuration. Simplex indicates data transmission in one direction only. Half duplex permits two way communication, but not simultaneously. Simultaneous transmission of data in both directions defines the full duplex system. Obviously, fan instrument capable of full duplex operation can be downgraded to simplex operation. However, the reverse is not possible without degrading the system capability 606-11. Baud rate is usually selectable on the RS-232-C Interface. If itis not, the manufacturer usually offers a ‘choice when the instrument is purchased. 606-12, Character format (bits per character and parity) is somewhat flexible between instruments. Investigate the requirement of both instruments before committing tither to a system configuration, 606-13. Data interface levels can oocur as either ELA voltage levels or as a 20 mA current loop. At times an Interface offers both simultancously, The 20 mA current loop is used almost exclusively for teletypewriter, or paper tape punch/reader interface, EIA voltage levels ate: lor OFF = -15 to -3V de, 0 or ON= +3t0-+15V de. 606-14, OPERATING FEATURES 606-15, Attached to the PCB and accessible through port on the rear panel (Figure 606-1) are a standard specified connector and a switch module with eight microsswitches. The connector standard forthe RS-232 Interface and is specified by the standard document, The eight switches control the operating modes of the interface and the BAUD rate, The modes selected by the switches are shown in Table 606-1 and Table 606-2. The selection of Odd or Even parity wth switch 8 is applicable ‘only if the parity feature has been selected using the jumpers described below. 606-16. The interface is shipped configured for an eight Dit character without parity. Selection of parity and five, six or seven bit characters can be accomplished by installing jumpers into the PCB as shown in Table 606-3 INTERFACE CONNECTOR SWITCHES s1234 5678 D}O}O(0}0}0}0)0 Figure 6061. Reor Panel Access“Table 606-1, Mode Seletion ‘SELECTION ‘SHON ‘curent Loopinsze2 | Current ‘rsza2e/msz020 ‘Stop Bits oud Rate revaon Bead Rate ud Rate ud Rate in Tobe 5D ‘able 606-2, Baud Rate Seleétion a | ss | so | x on on on on oFF on on on “Table 606-3. Jumper Arrangements suween #1 WWSTALLED suwren de INGTALLED sumer 4 INSTALLED wits one aie? aie atey No Parity S05A635068.08 606-17, THEORY OF OPERATION 606-18, General 606-19, The bit serial interface altersand transmits data between the eight bit (byte) parallel format used om the instrament bus andthe bit serial format of the eystem bus. ‘As shown on the schematic, data inputs from either the system bus or the instrument bus are latched into ‘universal asynchronous receiver transmitter (UART) U9, which is driven by a progaramable clock (U3) set at the selected baud rate, Data inthe Instrument Bus (ID0-ID7) is latched into the UART on DBI through DBE and ‘output from the UART to the instrament bus on RDI through RDS, Four separate functions are decoded from the control lines, and the receipt of any one generates a ‘common acknowledgement signal (ACK). An interrupt function can be generated to notify the instrument controller the received data is availabe, allowing polled ‘or interrupt control of the interface 606-20. Functions 606-21, An address of ICO, IC4 and IC6 high with the remaining lines low genesates the STATIN function. This ‘generates ACK and enables the tri-state transmitters on the IDO-IDS lines so that DA (received data available at RDI-RD8), OR (overrun; ie., a new character received prior to final transmission of the previous character), RVMT (transmitter buffer empty and ready forthe next character) and/or FE (framing error; ie..n0 stop bit with received character) can be placed on the data liner. 606-22. The DATIN function (ICI, 1C4, 1C6 only high) strobes the RDE and RDA input to the UART. The UARTT is enabled to place data on the instrument bus by RDE and to restive another serial character from the systema bus by RDA. 606-23, With IC2, 1C4 and ICS high, COUT is devoded to reset the UART and clock US~3. if ID7 is high with COUT, the interrupt capability is disabled by enabling the reset at US-10, This action prevents an interrupt signal to the instrument controller until removed. If D8 is ow, the intexrupt circuitry is enabled. 606-2, DATOUT is decoded from IC3, IC4 and 166 high, to strobe the DS input to the UART. The risingedge cof DS initiates serial transmission ofthe character from ‘SO onto the system bus. It is available at both J1-2 for 1RS-232 and JI-II for the 20 mA. current loop, for the users selection. 606-25. Interrupt 606-26, When DA (received data available) goes high, an incerrupt is generated (onles it has been disabled by the COUT fanetion) for a low at INT, The instrument 606-38505A/8506A.06 controller responds with an INA, generatingan ACK and enabling US-15 to pass the output of the interrupt flip- flop to the instrument controller for interrupt vectoring The removal of INA by the instrument controller causes the Interrupt flip-flop to reset itself and prepare the circuit for the next interrupt, 606-27, MAINTENANCE 606.28. Refer to Section 4 ofthe Instruction Manual for information on module disassembly and cleaning. 606-29. PERFORMANCE TEST 1606-30. Operation of the Bit Serial Interface may be verified by programming changes in range, output and mode, and by observing response data 606-31. CALIBRATION 606-32, The Bit Serial Interface does not require calibration, 806-33, TROUBLESHOOTING 606-34, Troubleshooting for the -06 Bit Serial Asynchronous Remote Intesface Option consists of the tabular flow chart in Table 606-4, When astepin the low cchact is completed, check for @ decision transfer. If no devsion is required, perform the next step ofthe table in sequence. 606-35. PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS. 606-36. Programming commands and instrument responses are explained in Table 606-5. For the 85054 and 8506A, refer to Section 2A, 606-37. LIST OF REPLACEABLE PARTS 606-38. Table 606-5 isa list of replaceable parts for the Bit Serial Interface Option. Refer to Section $ for an explanation of the columnar entries‘Table 606-4, Bit Sora! interface Troubleshooting 8505A8506A.08 ACTION ‘Go tothe stop number given Tor correct response ves | wo NOTE ‘The instrument mast be connected through a bus network ‘toa system controller, eg, the Tektrontx 4051 or HP 9825, to.operete, “This troubleshooting procedure Is based on the assumption thatthe instrument has been checked in focal and found to be operational in ll aspects prior to installation of the Bit Serial Intartce Install the Bit Seria! Interface inthe instrument and goply power from the front panel switch. Is the dispay blank? (Chock the addres lines and address decoder. (Chock for ahhigh ACK line. Repsic as equited and resume at step 2, 1 the display is incorrect (garbled or wrongh, check the input ID lines and gets, Repalt st Foquired and resume at sap 2 Using the controler, instruct the instrament to go to remote (prageem the cheraeter J Does the instrument go into remote? Chock the input gates (TI), the UART (US), the baud rate at TP, the INT stazus output butter. Program several instuctions from the remote controle. Does the instrument respond correctly tothe programmed instructions? Chock the UART (U9), the output gees (UA), and the data input gate (U7). Repsir at required and resume at step 10. ‘Troubleshooting of the Bit Serial Ineerface, as apalicable a his level, is complet.505A/B508A.06 ‘Table 606-5, Bit Sorat Asynchronous Interface PCB Astembly OE) We vescnn ie | tee] arco. me | ome -06@ «BIT SERIAL ASYNCHRONOUS MITERFAGE ASSY ORDER BY OPTION -05 IQUEE 606-3 (HIS-9170T) CAP, TR, 5.6 UF 4/208, 251 368369 1 gg0ss5x0025uat Che, TA, 526 UF 4/208, 259 368565, 1960565002511 CAP, Thy 5.6 UP +/-208, 251 358969 1960555x0025KA1 GAP, Mra, "56 Pr 47-54, 500V nasa DINSFS6OS CAP, MICA, 56 PP 4/54, 500v 148528 Dw 5P560r CAP, CER, 0.20 UF #/-26%, 50¥ 309819 cowsaceene CaP, CER, 0.22 UF 2/208, S0¥ 30089 cousoceeme CAP, CER, 0.22 UF +/-204, 50¥ 309819 cusocozme AP, CER, 0.22 UF 2/208, 50¥ 3oa8i9 cowsccezmc DIODE, Si, HIGH-SRRED SHETCHING 203323 xan seta mb, w/e, 632 X ve 320093 320093 not shown) SCR, FEE, Mato x 172 129890 19022 ScaBI, HAP, nto x 3/6 256 168 256168 comistron, ', soB-minr inge93 Dees (CASE ASSY’ (DIGLUDES WP2-HE8) 358913 58913 CASE BALE, HODULE 302990 02990 CASE HALF, NODULE, MODTFTED 12031 i031 CovER MODULE case noagr8 0297 SHIELD, COVER 411983 11983 ECHL," SEP SERIAL TTERPACE angie igg2 ecu, cauTxoN asisoa sisal usm, mean 363364 303368 ‘SHIELD, FRONT 365372 385372 ‘SeRnvG, OTL Rabiss: eorz0m01 0380 ‘Seem’ LIP ass 117 330134 11-529 ‘STANDOFF 385608 385608, staxnorr siatar ai2kat TERNAL, 79283 79288 (not shown) TERMINAL 208363 208363 (not: shown) xs, Py, St 218396 aig904 xsTa, MIP, Sr 226250 P5360 xeTm, MIP, St 195978 213906 ES, "DEP. CAR, 150 «/-54, 17381 33H crest=t-s21508 Dep. aR, wrk 47258) 1788 34B896 crap smsPeTE DEP. CAR, 10K +/-58) 1748 388839 caest-b5PIOK DEP, OAR, 150 9/-585 1/4 juga CReStNSPISOE COMP, TOM +/-5%) 1/40 19kgae car065 DEP. CAR, 33K /=58, 1/801 38828 cre5 1-8-5 P92 DEP CAR, TH 47-55 1780 ages Cres tesPiE DEP. CAR, 2.2K +/-58, 1/8 ansuo0 cresib-sroxe Dep. CAR, AT 4/54, 1/30) anisse rest -k SATE DEP. CAR, 750"s/-5%, 1/0 ant659 (or2s1-A- PISO DEP. CAR, B.7K'#/=58, 1780 3ha821 (cr251-A-SOKT DEP, CAR, 87K 9/55, 174 3ugE2t CRRSTACSPORT8505A/8506A.06 ‘Table 606-5. Bit Sriel Arynchronous Interface PCB Assembly (cont) FLUKE ] FS escHTiON stack | sy Re wo | cone RES, DEP. CAR, 620 +/-52, 1/38 wn2319 80031 BES, DEP. CAR, 1K 4/—58,/1/1H 31gi26 80031 ES, DEP. CAR, Wark +/-54, 0716 4uBs21 doi cRasI—A-SPNT ‘SATOH, SPST, 8-705. saugo corra 4a5i66-5 10, TM, DUAL EXA/MiL LIME RECEIVER —-5NTON 1832H BTIGA XC, C-MOS, HEX BUFFER VENTER 381848 02735 coboNoUBE TC, O-W0S) PROMBLE BIT RATE OB Brera 07263 Faro2/38702 xc, tm, fst, bon, Exam 358696 18328 NOTISA 3C, C-¥0S, DAL "0 FLIF-FLOP ‘3ort7 02735 covoTgAB TC, O-MOS, AND GATES, TRIPLE, 3-P0T 3751AT 02735 CDIO23AE To, GS, MND GATES, TRIFLE, 3-UT 375147 02735 ct0zsAE XG, Gms, TRE, HBX, Nov DWV BUFFERS © ROT759 12080 maoCoTH XC, vay RocRIVER TRANSMIT 358753 05828 AY-5-1013 HC, CAMS, TRIPLE, 3~INFUT axD GATE NOBEOT. 02735 CHOTBE TO, 0-5, QUAD, 2-DNPUT AND GATE 355198 02735 COMOTIAE 1c, C-S, HEX, mW BUFFER 381830 02735 coADsOAE 1c, c-M0S,, HEX WV BUFFER Se1e30 o2r3s coNOSOAE cRistaL, QUART: 435370 89536 a35370 SOCKET,"10, 40-FI 2g2t2 09922 DILBtOP-108 ORDER P/4 U58043 FOR COMPLETE MODULE CASE ASSY., KITHOUT FOB ASST. 608-7/606-8* HG. 606-2 sir. Lor 39506/8506A.06 (wP13i2) H3,s4P10)MP12(REF) mis170 Figure 606-2. Bit Serial Asynchronous Interface PCB Assemblyou ve ff (ewe eens Gomnvee |eFIG. 606-24 teGeGeet PESTER EG A SFFG. G06-2a SSOEAREOEAS SOE G Feo llg ® panel 3 ms-1170 ‘Figure 606-2. Bit Serial Asynchronous Interface PCB Assembly (cont) 606-10607-1. INTRODUCTION 607-2. Installation of the Parallel Interface provides external programming capability in mini- and microcomputer systems. Program inputs must be in ASCIL code. Outputs are remotely selectable between ASCIL or binary (2's complement) and 8 of 16 bit characters, 607-3. Interfacing to a wide variety of devices is accomplished witha plug-in header termeda “personality card. By defining the pins, this card can be tailored to perform control of the LMM through the external 3805A/8506A-07 Option -07 Parallel Interface device, Table 607-1 lists pins and definitions for the personality card. The personality card plugs into J2, as, seen in Figure 607-1. Available personality cards are listed in Table 607-2. 607-4, Descriptions unique to the Parallel Interface will be provided separately from Programming Instructions in this manual. The Systems Multimeter Programming Card provided with the DMM lists condensed programming instructions. Fluke Application Bulletio, 425 contains useful information concerning the use of the Parallel Interface, ‘Table 607-1. Porsonalty Card Pin Definition INTERFACE MNEMONIC BOARD. PIN DEFINITION cose cose ‘cos onza onze RZ +OR20 cose COEN DOEN OSLE WAT SLAT ISLE 1s Control Ourput Strobe Butfored * Control Output Strobe Inverted Buffered = Control Outout Strobe = OR Gate 2 Input A )R Gate 2 Input & F Gite 2 Output Control Output Strobe Inverted Bufered ~ [88 Output Enable = MSB Output Enable = Ourput Strobe Latch Enabie = Data Input MS8 Latch trol Input LSB Lateh = Input Strobe Latch Enable = Data Input Latch Strobe PIN a84a32 3/8385054/8506A.07 ‘Table 607-1, Personality Card Pin Definition (cont) INTERFACE MNEMONIC BOARD-IN DEFINITION = Control Input Latch Strobe = Data Output Latch Reset = Control Output Latch Reset High Output Delay Pulse Ground #5V de = Interrupt Clock = Controt Input Strobe Clock Inverted Low Output Delay Pulse ' Control Input Strobe Inverted Butferod Data Input Ready Low Data Input Ready High Data Output Ready Low = Data Output Resdy High = TTL Pull Up OF Gate 1 Input A OR Gate 1 Input & Rta +ORI8 (OF Gate 1 Output asB Control Input Strobe Inverted Buffered cis = Control Input Strobe Butfered cis = Control Input Strobe Ne = No Connsction aT = High Trigger Delay Pulse con = Controt Output Ready Invertad ur = Low Trigger Delay Pulse oR ‘antral Input Ready Inverted ‘Table 607-2. Personality Cards sep spehsee [DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION Duplex Parallel interface for PDP-11, DRIIC, DRV-11 Duplex Parallel Interface for PDP-11, Pot Duplex Parallel Interface (wiring comp: leted by user Duplex Parallel Interfoce for HP1 25668, ‘98258 Similar to the O7A, but used olsen systems. Figure 607-7, Personality Card Location607-5. INSTALLATION 607-6, ‘The Parallel Interface is easily installed as a module in the 8500 series DMM. Use the following installation procedure L. On the DMM, press power OFF and remove the line power cord 2, Remove the DMM's tap cover. 3, Ensure that the desired personality card is installed on the Interface PCB, Ifnecessary, refer to “Module Disassembly” in Section 4 of the Instruction Manual when accessing the Interface PCB. NOTE If the -O7L, Personality Card is used remove Jumpers WI and W2 from the Interface PCB. 4, Plug the personality card into 12 on the Parallel Interface PCB, The location of J2is illustrated in Figure 607-1 5. Reassemble the module (PCB and shield covers) 16. The Interface module fits in the rearmost sot, bbus connector and address switches facing the rear. Slide the module vertically between the module auides, and press firmly into place. NOTE ‘Make sure the leaf spring, attached to one- half ofthe module shield, isresting firmly over the flange of the opposite hal of the module shield, 7. Remove the Interconnect PCB, if installed, from slot K. This slot can be identified as the only ‘one with connectors on the analog and digital bus lines. To remove the Interconnect PCB, grasp the board at both ends, and pull up. An end-to-end rocking motion may be necessary to free the PCB from its connectors. The Isolator module must be installed in slot K whenever remote interface (Option -05, 06 or -07) is used in the DMM. NOTE Use Isolator 06 with the 85004; Isolator-08A must be used with the 8502. 8, Replace the DMM’ top cover. 9, Energize the DMM. 8505A/8508A.07 607-7. OPERATING DIRECTIONS 607-8, The normal power-up condition of the Parallel Interfaces eight-bit ASCII input and output. Command ‘codes can change this to IGbit ASCH input (two chatacters per transfer), 16-bit ASCII output, bit Binary output, or 16-bit Binary output in character serial format. 607-9, When the fcont panel remote switchis pressed on the 85004, the DMM stops measurements and waits for stimulation from the external device. On the 85024, pressing the front panel remote switeh results in the Parallel Interface trying to output data (ASCII §-bi0 ina continuous talk only mode, 607-10. THEORY OF OPERATION 607-11, Block Diagram Analysis 607-12, Data transfer through the Parallel Interface involves handshake processes between the interface and either the system controller or the instrument controller, Refer to the Block Diagram, Figure 607-2, during the following descriptions. 607-13. At power on, a reset cireuit in the interface hhoids the control latches in the proper state until Vee stabilizes. The instrument controller sends a software reset and an interrupt enablesignalto the interface during its power on routine. This enables I/O operations to proceed 607-14. This paragraph describes typical two-wire hand: shake process for tatsTerring commands theough the intez- face to the DMM, Before the system controller attempsst0 send data to the instrument it verifies that the DMM is ready to accept the data. IFthe Control Input Ready (CIR) hhandshake signal indicates the DMM is ready, the system controller can strobe te Contra Input Strobe (CIS) hand- shake signal line. The CIS has three functions. One clocks the input data placed by system controller om the input lines into the data input latches of the 07 interface. The seoond generates an intezupt request to the instrument ‘controller. The last toggles the CIR handshake signal to indieate thatthe DMM is not ready and cannot accept addi: tional input data, The CIS intetrupts the DMM. which responds by accepting the input data from the 07 interface data input latches and togaling the CIR handshake signal to indicate that the -07 interface is now ready to accept add tional data from the system controller. This process is repeated for each input operation 07-88505A/8506A.076071S. A typical two-wire data output transaction from the DMM is handled in smilr manner to the command input operation described above. When a data output tans action 15 initate the fastrament loads the data into. the data output Intehes of the -07 interface and togles the Control Output Ready (COR) handshake signal. This ind cates that the 07 interfce contains data to be transferred tothe ceeiving device. The zecoiving device may azzapt the output data via the Data Out/Control Out Sign lines while enabling the Data Output Buffers. The receiving device strobes the Control Output Strobe (COS) handshake sigaal lin either while or after it accepts the dts. This toggles the COR handshake signal to indicate acceptance of the previously output data and to permit subsequent daca out ‘ut operations to obcur. This proces i repeated for each output operation. 607-16. Due to the wide variety of handshaking protocols, 4 petsonalty cardi used to match the logical an¢ electrical characteristics of the system interface handshake signal to the -07 interface eixeuitry. The personality card connects the handshake lines to interface control and states signals However, ifthe handshake protocol warrants additonal cir cuitry may be used in the personality card connection con figuration. The additonal circutzy may be from either logic and timing circuitry existing on the 07 iaterfuce PCB, or additional eireultry on the personality card. Typical personality card connections have LAT, S-LAT, INT, and SLS stimulated through the CIS handshake signal and CIR stimulated by 1Q for input operations. LLAT snd S-LAT ae used to store input data over the Dats In and Control In signal lines, INT is used to generate the interrupt request to the instrument controller. SLS togeles the CIR signal. For ‘output operations, COR js stimulated through DQ and COS stimulated by CLR. CLR toggles the COS signal 607-17. Circuit Analysis 607-18. The following circuit analysis Is-accurate for Parallel Interface with Personality Card DRIIC (4062) intalled;conttol signals COS, CIS, COR, and CIR ate there- fore positive true logic. Refer to the Schematic Diagram during the following circuit descriptions. Table 607-3 de- fines interface connections. 607-19, RESETS 607.20. Power up resets are controlled by the RC network connected to UI9-13. The reset signal is applied ‘through Ul-11 and U8-4to the control latches (U29-8 and U28-8 are reset, while U29-5 and U28-5 ae se). Address ICS, 3, 2, decoded by U25-10, provides software resets 60721. ADDRESSES 607-22. For all addresses, an ACK response is retumed to the instrument controller through U3I-10 and Ql Upon termination of the address, U30-I2 is clocked, If 8505A/8505A07 DT is high, the interface is reset through U23-10, U23-11 ‘and U19-12 and interrrupts are disabled, 1f1D7 is low at address 1C5, 3, and, interrupts are enabled, U30-12 goes high. Since U30-2 was reset, U19-6 ishigh; U19-4 places high on U30-5. When U30-2 is clocked, an interrupt will be generated from U20-1]. When triggered by U19-10, Uti-12 goes tow to clear U20-5 and U28-5. The signal from U28-S, routed through the personality card to ‘generate CIR, indicates to the system controller that the {instrument is ready to receive data, 607.23, DATA INPUTS 607-24. The system controller strobes the CIS line to make U22 fow and applies it through the personality card to LAT, SLLAT, and LT. U24 aso goes high and is applied to SLS through the personality card. FLAT and SLAT from the personality card clock the input data on the Dats Jn and Control In ine iato the data latches U3, U7, U13, and Ul4 at the termination of the CIS strobe. The termina tion of CIS also triggers a pulse (QP) at UI1-2 through the LT signal at ULL-} which connects through the personality cacd co INT. INT, through Ui9-10, clocks U302 which enables the {ristaie U20-I1 to interzupt the instrument controller. SL, through U18-8 and U27-4 clocks U28-S (IQ) high. 1Q, ‘through the personality card and U2, drives CIR to indicate tothe system controller that the -07 Interface isnot ready to accept additional data. The instru- ‘ment controller responds to INF with an TNA which drives UB.2 Jow to enable tristato U12-13 to place a high (from {U30-1) on ID2 for use asthe interrupt vector inthe instru ‘ment controller. INA is also applied dizectly to U23-2 ‘which drives U233 and UI9-10 low to cause en ACK response. Termination of INA clocks U30-1 low, ending ‘he interrupt signal. 607-25. The interrupt vector tells the instrument con- ‘roller to read data out of the interface, Address ICI, 4, 6 fs decoded by U24-10 to enable tistate buffers UI2, U1 and U22, The low from U24-10 is applied through U27-4 to the clock input of U2855, Termination of the address clocks 1Q (U28-4) low. This state, transferred through the peso ality card and U246, causes CIR to go high and signals the system controller that the instrument is resdy for more data 607-28. In the double charsoter mode, data of the most significant byte (DATA IN) is ead fist and the least signif cant byte (CONTROL IN) is tead second. In the dats out- ut mode the MSB is loaded frst. All termination and im- mediate command characters must use the CONTROL IN data lines 607-27. DATA OUTPUTS 607-28, Data bytes are loaded into data latches U1S, U16, UIT, and U26 by adéreses 100, 3,5 (decoded by U254} and TCL, 3, 5 (decoded by U25-6). Termination ofthe e0758505A/86068.07 addresses also clock DQ (U268) low. Applied through the personality card to U28, this low sets COR high. The Feceiving device now sees that data tcady to be read from the interface. 607-29. The COS strobe is used by the recelving device to complete the outpur handshake. Since data output buffers U4, US, and US are enabled by DOEN and COEN low through personality card connections, output date is val able on Data Out and Contsot Out lines. The COS strobe is generated, either while or after, the receiving device accepts the dats, A high on U2-10 from COS is applied through the personality card to the CLR tine (U18-4) and eventually to the clock input of DQ (U28-11). Termination of COS clocks DQ high which togsles COR and informs the instrument ‘controller that more data may be transferred to the receiv. ing device via the -07 interface. 607-30, One complete reading in the 16Dit mode con- Sists of seven transfers in ASCI (ix with line feed sup pression), of three transfers in binary eode. Each reading in the eight bit mode consists of fourteen transfers ia ASCIL (Ghireeen with line feed suppression) of five transfers in binary code, When a complete reading has been sent in either mode, the instrument controller resets the interface ‘and enables interrupts, CIR goes high to indicate that the instrument i ready to receive data. 6607-31. Detailed Input Processes Description (607-32, Fora graphical representation of the signal timing relatonships, refer to Figure 607-3 and Table 607-4, Before inputting any information to the DMM, the -07 interface rust indicate that iis ready to accept input date. This is “Tale 607-2, Paallel Interface Connections TITLE MNEMONIC SVPINNO, SIGNAL FLOW Ingut Strobe cis Output Strobe cos MSD Bic 16 Input 7 MSD Bit 14 Input 6 MSO Bit 12 input 6 MSO Bit 12 input 4 MSO Bit 11 Input 13 MSO Bit 10 Input 2 MSO Bit © Input n MSO Bit 8 Input 9 USO Bit 7 Input s? USD ait 6 Input S68 LSD Bit 5 Input 85 LSD Bit 4 Input sé USD git 3 Input 33 USO Bit 2 Input sz USD Bit 1 Input 3 Usp Bit O Input so ‘Ourput Ready con Input Ready cin MSO Bit 15 Output 7 MSD Bit 14 Qutout 06 MSO Bit 19 Outout 05 MSO Bit 12 Output os MSD Bit 11 Ourpur 3 MSO Bit 10 Output 02 MSD Bit_9 Output or MSD Bit. 8 Output 9 LSD Bit 7 Ourput cr LSD Bit 6 Output 6 ESD BK 5 Output 65 Lsp ir 4 Output oa USO Bit 3 Output os Usp sic 2 Output ce LSD Bit 1 Output ct LSD Bit OOurput co a From Control Device 7 From Control Device “4 From Control Device 16 From Control Device 16 From Conteol Device 7 From Contio! Device 8 From Control Device 9 From Control Deviee 20 From Control Device ar From Control Device 6 From Control Device 7 From Control Device 8 ram Control Device 9 From Control Device 10 From Control Device u From Control Device 2 From Control Device 1 From Control Device 1 To Conttol Device 29 ‘To Control Device 6 To Control Devioe 45 Fo Control Device 4 ‘To Control Device aa ‘To Control Device 2 To Control Device a To Gontrot Device 40 To Gontro! Device 30 To Control Device 2 To Control Device 2 To Control Device 4 To Gonteot Device 25 To Control Device 50 To Contre! Device 9 To Control Device 48 To Control Device a7 To Control Devicereflected by Data Input Ready Indicator, 1Q ot TO. The Data Ready Indicator, DQ, isat alow level when the DMM {s ready to accept data (prior to 79). (Conversely, DQ is at 4 high level to reflect this condition.) With this indicating ready, data on deta lines 1017 and $0.87 if appropriate, ean be strobed into the data latches. This is done by a low to high transition on ILAT and SLAT as appropriate (TS). (GOST and SLAT are only wed for 16 bit mode input operations.) 607.33, The Data Input Ready Indicator must be toggled to reflect that the interface is no longer able to accept data. ISLE and SLS are used to toggle Data Input Ready. ‘The logical NAND of ISLE and SLS is formed. This signal is termed CIS. With both ISLE and SLS in 2 high state, the high to Tow transition of SLS toggles the Indicator (T7). IS te low with both ISLE and SLS high. The high to iow transition of SLS causes a Tow t0 high transition on CIS (TS), toggling the Data Input Ready Indicator (19). CTS ‘must remain high unl the input eycle is complete. This means that both ISLE and SLS must not be high simul taneously again until the completion of the inpue cycle iD) "GIS = NOT (ISLE AND SLS) 8505A/9508A07 607.24, Toinitte processing ofthe data from the interface into the DMM, a low going pulse must be placed on INT. is ting edge nities the activity (113). INE mass not tain make a Tow fo high transition unl the subsequent input tenscion. 607-35, Following the INT signal, the DMM is processing the data from its interface, When it has completed this processing, it will toggle the Data Input Ready Inétestor (112), When this has occurred, the DMM input operation is ‘complete. Additional dats may now be transferred to the interface from the external device as necessary. 607-36, Detailed Output Processes Description 607-37. Fora graphical representation of the signal timing relationships, cefer to Figure 607-4 and Table 607-5. An ‘output eyele is started by the DMM indicating that its Interface contains data to be tranefrred to the external device, This is shown by the Data Output Ready Indicstor, DQ or BG. DO is at a Jow level and BO is at a high level ‘hen output data je avilable from the DMM (prior to T2), Figure 6073, Interface Input Control Signal Timing Diagrama605A/@505A-07 ‘Table 607-4. Input Timing Parametort Table 607-5. Output Timing Parameters TyT4 | Gre | Data setup time preceding SLAT Or ILAT low to high transition (Data hold time following SLAT or ILAT low to high transition Tete | ane Ons | Minion wait time following the ready transition of 10 TO betore re data cen be placed on data lines Minimum time SLAT o¢ ILAT ‘can be high Minimum time SLAT or (LAT can be Maximum time from when ISLE tnd SLS both become high to the high to low transition of CS 250 ns | Maximum time from when either ISLE or SLS become low to when TB becomes hinh 300 ns | Time for the faw to high transition of CIS to toate 10.0r TO) 18 ne. | Minimum time 2S may be low Ons | Minimum wait rime following the reody tantition of 1Q until CIS ‘may enter alow condition Minimum time for THT to semaia lowe preceding the low to high Typical time for 1Q.or TO to respond to INT transition (8 bit mode} ‘Typical time for IQ oF TO te respond to INT wansition (16 bit mode) Minimum time TNT must remain high Minimum vat time following the GIS transition before the TNT 607.38. AC this point, data is stored in latches on the 07 interface (T3), For this date to be on deta fines CO.C7 and DOD? if appropriate, che output diver clecultzy most be enabled. A low level on COEN enables the data line divers on COT. Similarly, « low lovel on DOEN onables data line drivers on DO-D7. DO-D? need only to be enabled when dats is transferred in the two byte, 16 bit format. A high level fon ether of these enable lines disables the tristate drive circuitry and presents a high impedance to the appropriate date lines from the interface. core Minimum enabling time for date Tine diving circuitry Ty73 | 40ns Minimum dlsabting time for data line driving crewtry TyoT1 | 30 ne TT | 1170 raf inimum time from date ready ransition unt vali data Minimum time following ready transition unt stat of ready rogsla puke TyT5 Maximum time from when both ICLA and OSLE become high until BOTT meskes a high to low Tey Maximum time for DOTEL +0 make 8 fow to high teantition foltowing either CLR or OSLE becoming high TT | Ons 151) Minimum ready toggle pute time 51% Tim to toggle the ready indicator folowing the toggle pulse eT Time following ready indicator togale before data is not valid 607-39. With the acceptance of the data from the tat face, the external device must toggle the Data Output Ready Indicator. This indicates that the output cycle is complete. Subsequent operations may then proceed (such as another output eyele, another mesturement, subsequent command processing, ete). To toggle the Data Output Roady Indicator, OSLE and CLR are used, OSLE and CLR ate NANDed together to generate the signal which togales the Data Output Ready Indicator. (This combined signal is termed DOTGL in the timing diagram.) A rising edge on this signal togales the indicator (T7). From the complction of the previous output eycle, OSLE and CLR cannot both ‘be at high level simultaneously. One or the other or both must be tow at all times, To togele the indicator, both OSLE and CLR should be ator change to high state (T4), and then CLR should make # high vo low transition (T6). The ueput Data Ready Indicator topples (TS) and completes the output cycle 607.40, TROUBLESHOOTING 607-41, Troubleshooting the Parallel Interface requires an ‘extemal control device with a parallel YO, such asa PDP 11 with the DRIIC Interface. When a problem i isolated to the Parallel Interface, iti recommended that the faulty unit be sent to the nearest service center for repair ‘Table 607.6 additionally provides a tabular ‘low chart approach to troubleshooting, When a step on the flow chartis completed, check for « decision transfer. If no decision {is roquited, perform the next step in sequence. 607-42, PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS. 607-44, PARTS LIST 607-45. Table 607-7 gives a parts breakdown for the Parallel Interface. Refer to Section $ of this manual for ordering information. caution @ Indicated davioes aro weet to damage by tite tacharge. 17 * BOFET = NOT (OLSE AND CLA) Figure 607-4, Inverface Output Control Signal Timing Diagram.95054/85060.07 ‘Table 607-8. Troubleshooting con] @ ee cd This troubleshooting procedure is besed on the assumption that the instrument has bees checked in local and found to be operational in all aspects prior to installation of the Parallel Interface, Install the Parallel Interface inthe instrument snd apply power from the front panel switch isthe ditplay blank? (heck for an adress (IC) line hele low. Cheek the address decoders Check for the ACK ling held high. Check the ACK circuitry. Repair es required and return to sap 2. |s the wrong option configuration displayed ax power on or reset? Check for an sddrest (10) line hal high, Check the acdrets decoder. Repair a required and return to step 2. le the display incorrect or garbled? (Check for an ID line helé high alow. Cheek the input late, cutout butter, and INT set flip-flop. Instruct the instrument to goto remote by inputting a valid program character, Does the instrument goto remote? Check the input strobe (CIS) 1224: check forthe INT cireuit not being et (U30,19); ‘check forthe INT from the input strobe (1221), Select a mede from remote ste right made selacted? {Check the input data latches or bute. Check the data strobe at J222, 12. ‘Cheek the response data. f there any ois it eoxret? (Check the ready (COR) line. Check the output strobe (COS). Check the output atches or buffer, 1a the response ony a single byte of data? check the status flipflops (U28, U29) for reset Is the ready ine bung? Check for incorrect data out or bad input date IH shere sno input, check fora bag input ready (CIR) “Troubleshooting af the Parallel Interface ss applicable a this level, is complete.506A /8506A.07 ‘Table 607-7, Parallel Interface PCB Assembly ‘esAPTION LORE Took Wo. We spur cone TNF PART HO. on TYPE PARALLEL TITRRFAGR POD ASSEIOLY Fu car, cn, car, car, car, SCORE 607-5. (WES-H175T) Th, 5.6 OF +/-20f, 251 eh, 6.22 uF /=20s, SOV Yea, 100 FF 4/-18, 5000 MIC, 390 PF 4/=52, 5007 Gah, S60 PP +/—105, 6007 CBR, 0.01 Ue 6/m204, 100¥ SOR, FIP, AAO 178 SCR, FAP, B80 X 9/8 ism Bh, mate SCRE, FHP, 6-32 2/8 ( 9%, shown) ‘coMMECrOR, “Socren, 20 FIM case. ch cx re Si Assy (INCLUDES MP2-H8) SE, HALF {SE HALF, MODULE, VER, MODULE CASE ELD, COVER DEC, PARALLEL DITERPACE DECAL, caU2I0" GUARD, REAR ware SPRING, COT (a ot shown) ‘SEEING, “coWniRcrOR ‘SHIELD, FRONT (not shown) sphceR, SHiCED ‘spaceR, g7ineD CONNECTOR, CABLE, 50-PIN, MODIFIED 137, 28s, es, ms, ms, 81, PNP DEP. CAR, 10K 4/54, 1/4 DER, CAR, TK 47655, 1/8) DER. CAR, 10K 4/58, 1740 DEP. CAR, 150 0/53, 1/44 DEP. OAR) 1 47-58, 178 DEP. CAR, 2K 4/58) 1/40 DEP AR, "100K 4/-58, 170M RESISTOR NETWORK, 4.7K, B-FINS 3, x, 1c, 1, 10, 1, x, 1, 4 ‘TRL, 2-INPUT 70S Oh GATE ‘MMe, POS su GATES mL, Lo-piR scloTmeY TM, TRISTATE, HBX BUFFERS ‘rm, Lo-pyR scHormey GehOs, HEX DIVERTER/ BorFER CMOS, REX IAVERTER/BUPPER Lo-PmR ScuOTIRY 0S, TRISTATE HEX BUFFER one, 360969 309689 22616 vee37 106203, 139153 129890 256168 110803 320093 anrit0 46950 402990 21625 uaa antgst 13500 asiso8 383364 12700 aan anzr18 383372 312821 335608 aasi38 226280 318839 5ag826 38839 gage 513426 agg 38920 mapi6 393108 2eea79 393215, iobrss 393215 ete 381830 owes 01759 BY ortioN -07 ggpsepxo02sKat crsoceake pmsr101F Dense39td 51-00-X5R0-56 16 cozgrorF103H 9022) 256168 99n02 320093 werni0 58950 492990 nar62s oosr ant981 args00 asisou 363368 5r-1001 corz0-010380 436-99-22-205, 303372 ar2ket 339608 '-20500-31 wrs36io (ores 1-b-SPIOK crest-e-5PIK rep t=-5PI00K anesi6 SeTALS3aH SrTAO8H SHTRSITSN SH36r sryasr si cokoapae ‘cBROSDAE, SHTALSI234 woeocs7®185054/8506A.07 ‘Table 607-8, Parallel Interfoce PCB Assembly (cont) Tie | a = vescanon fos | ser] rattan. me | cae ma Tc, TL, W0-WR scHormey 393215 07295. simust75W oid Te, TL, Lo-PR scHOTTEY 393215 01295 siyasi7sn UIS-UITD IC, COS/mOS, QUAD, CLOCKED D LaTCH 355149 02725 COMONZAE UIB@ XC, TMhy CURD, 2WINFUT FOS RAID GATE 493033 012% SHTBLSOCH U19@ 1G, CoHs, CHAD, 2-INPUT, AND GATE aobNO1 02735 COHOET BE we0~t22@ 10, WS, TRISTATE HEX BUFFER 207759 12080 weoceTH 130 Te, Cems, aD, 2-MUPOT MAND GarES 355198 2795 COROITAE el, cese@ iC, CAs, THR. 3-DUFUT MAND GATE avoir o2Ta5 cowOzaKE 126d TC, OOS/HDS, GtaD, LOCKED D LATCH 355189 02735 CoMOAZAE Var® 3G, C-MOS, UAD, 2-TIFUT, AND GATE Aoanot 02735 CMOET BE vee, 9 xc, Lo-mWR scuorteY 393128 01295 swyunsyaM 130” Tc, O-N0S, DUAL TPE "D* FLIP-FLOP 3ori7 02735 CROTSAE TBI@ TC, CWS, TRIE 3-mreuT, ‘NID CATE HOBHOT_ 02735 CHAOTSE DEVY=Cy LNT FERSOWALTIY CARD PCD ASSY 523003, e303 (a-4o62) (lor S86) DIODE, SI, HIGH-SPEED s¥rTOHDNC 2oa3e3 mans. DIODE, SX, HIGHSPEED SHITCHING 203323, aang, DIODE, SE, HIGH-SPEED SITCHIN 203323 Bans DIODE, St, HIOH-SPEED SUITCHING 203323 amas. ‘counscroe, Fost 287500 Broz21 RES, COMP) ATK +/-58) 17 RW 1a8072 corres DRII-0; HO PERSOUALITY CARD POE ASSY 523066 ‘7022-1 (nis-063) (HOT SHORN) P11 PERSOUALZITY CARD PCB ASSY sage anger (78-4069) (HOT SHON) ‘SHI FERSOWLITY CARD Poa ABS sa9i5a sagas (uxs-R0T0) (HOT SHOW) (OP PERSONALITY CARD PCD ASSY sagase gus (uxset071) Hor sta) DrODe, SI, HI-SPRED surTCHNG 209323 o7910 tne DIODE, SI, HI-SPRED SWITCHING 2oasas rae DIODE, SY, MI-SPEED SizTcHDIG 203323, rag DrODe, Sr, BI-SPRED SyITCHING 208825 rma couvectoa, ost 287500 erozea HP PERSCHALITY CARD POD ASSEMOLY are218 ar6218 (Qcs-1067E) (oT SHON) CAP, CER, 0.01 UF /~204, 1008 507361 a1z1-at00-usR- 103m AP, MICA, 100 FF 47=5% 5007 abo pursFio1s HES, DEP. CAR, 330 4/=58, 1/80 360720 cresiaten73308 TES, DEP. CAR, 220 4/-58, 1/4 312826 cRe5iainsr2008 DEP. CAR, 330 4/54, 1/10 568720 ch251-4-573308 DEP. CAR, 220 4/254, 1/40 342525 cmagy- 4572208 Dep! GAR, TOK 4/958, 1/4 3uak39 cRaB Inds PI0K 4c, TM, QUAD, 2-DITUT, POS MD GATES 393066 ST L08 TC, TH Lo-Phe ScHTKY miSTe MOLIVERS 108186 SwraLsi238 IME DRI crm, POI, sty, aD GP renstwaLity’ cage’ wave’ HE SKE COMPONENT FARTS, 1 oRbeR 2/11 58950 FOR COMPLETE MODULE CASE ASSY., WITHOUT FOB ASST.Fig. 607-5 suri 1 oF 3 MP14(3) == Spay oo HaMPt0,MP141REF) 7 MISAITI CASE ar CASE ASSEMBLYEG. Gots sin Zor 2 HoqMP20,NP14(REFDFlé. OOF ser, BOF S. 50518506807 misa77sFIG. GO7F4 Ser OFSFig. @07-5a Si 20F 3 8505A/R505A.07#76. GOT-5 8 ser. 30F 5608A-1. INTRODUCTION 608A-2. The Isolator module maintains the guarded nature of the analog bus by isolating the analog signal processing and converting circuitry from the digital Processing, control, display, and input/output circuits. ‘Aa Isolator module must be installed whenever a remote interface (option -05,-06, o 7) is used in an 8500 series DMM. The following description pertains to the Isolator -08A only. This module provides the capability for ‘external triggering of the DMM, The 8500A DMM does not have provision for external triggering and consequently must use the -08 Isolator or the -8A without external triggering. 608A-3, INSTALLATION 608A-4. Refer 10 Section 4 of the Instruction Manual for general module instalation procedures. The Isolator ‘module uses slot K (which can be identified as the only ‘module slot with connectors on both the analog and digital bus lines), Section 8 contains further information ‘on module slot locations, 608A-5. SPECIFICATIONS 608A-6. Input 6084-7. The trigger input is factory-wired for a high level of 4,3V (minimum) and a low level of 0.7V (maxi- mum); pulse width should be greater than 10 ps, ‘Common will be the same as interface logic common. GOBA-8. The outer connector for external triggering is at interface common. There should be no more than WV between the outer connector and earth ground. PIN 486357 Rev. 2 9/03 Isolator -08A (External Trigger) 608A-9, Trigger Processing Time ‘608-10. The time between trigger edge and first Aj D conversion (not including filter timeouts or programmed delays is 1. Non-line synchronous mode, 8 to .9 ms 2. Line synchronous mode, 1-10 6 ms 3. High speed mode (Option -05 or -07 installed), 184 +5 ys 608A-11, OPERATING NOTES 608A-12, Installation ofthe solator (Option 08) will not affect standard operation of the instrument. The External Triggering: mode may, however, be activated lecally from the front panel or through remote interfac: ing commands. 608A-13. Local Operation 60BA-14, The External Triggering mode may be enabled from the DMM’s front panel (Option -O8 must, be installed). To activate this mode, press TRIGGER. ‘The SAMPLE LED will now stop lashing to denote that both External Triggering and Manual Triggering modes, are in effect. Apply a negative going TTL level pulse to the external trigger input connector located on the rear panel. The SAMPLE LED will now flash once for each trigger received 608A-15, The following considerations apply when External Triggering mode is in use 1 ‘A manual trigger attempted from the front panel will take precedence over an external trigger. If mana] TRIGGER is pressed while 2 reading is in progress, the reading will be aborted and a new one started All other front panel switch applications will abort the reading in progress. A new reading 088.1£2500 Series 8A ‘will not start until another trigger is received; the numeric display will not update until the new reading is comple 608A-16. Remote Operation GOBA-I7. External Triggering can be enabled and ‘controlled remotely when a zemote interface (Option-05, 06, 07) and the Isolator (Option -08A) are installed The command characters in Table 608A-I can be used from the remote 608A-' Trigger Polarity 0BA-19. Either positive or negative going external triggers may be uccepted by the Isolator (Option 8A); factory settings will be for negative triggers. Separate jumper wire arrangements are employed for negative and, ‘positive triggers, Refer to Figure 608-1 forthe location ff jumper terminals on the fsolator PCB. To change the jumper arrangement, use the following procedure: t On the Digital Multimeter (8500 series), press POWER OFF and disconnect the line cord, Table 6084-1, Remote Commands Ext. Trianer Commands xt. Trigger—interrupt when ready Ext. Trigger and Transmit Reading Disable Ext. Trigger External Trigger Delay Commands No Delay 2.063 ms 4.186 9 8.332 me 16.68 ms 33.33 me 66.88 ms 133.3.m6 266.6 ms 593.2 ms 1.088 2.1938 4.2665 2.5325 17.08 24.138 68.265 Remove the Isolator module. Observe Static Sensitive deviee precautions listed in Section 4 of the Instruction Manval ‘Avoid touching connector terminals on the lolator PCB, Remove the Guard Covers from the Isolator PCB using techniques outlined in Section of the Instruction Manval (Module Assembly ‘and Disassembly). For negative going triggers, there will be a jumper between pin I and pin 4 on Schmitt ‘Trigger U38. For positive going triggers, remove the jumper between pin | and 4 and juroper pin Vt 2 and 3 to4 on U3S, Reassemble module, replace in Digital Multimeter 608A-20, THEORY OF OPERATION 608A-21, The Isolator accepts parallel data and address bytes, shifts them to serial format for transfer across isolation transformers, and converts them back 10 parallel format. Seven address (1D) and eight data (ID) lines are used, Lines ICS and 1C6 are always low. The Figure 608A-1. Triggar Polarity ConnectionsController can send data to any addressed module; the A/D Converter willbe the only analog module that sends data back to the Controller (bit serial data stream on. IDT). Refer to the Isolator Schematic (Figure 608A-3) and the Functional Block Diagram (Figure 6084-2) for the following cireut descriptions. NOTE When the Iolator is installed, Vee and Vssin the unguarded digital bus are isolated from ‘analog common. 608A-22. ‘The description given in this paragraph will dail how data (ID0-1D7) and address (1C0-IC4) levels fon the unguarded digital bus are loaded into shift registers (U3 and U7) in the Isolator. Inputs on address lines IC0-4 for either direct or indirect addresses are Applied through inverters to shift register U7. Inputs on data lines (1D0-7) are applied to U7 (1D0, IDI) and U3 (12-7). A low on Ul4-12 will elock both address and dat levels into the shift registers; the relaxation oseilla- tor made up of U9-6 and 9-8 will be disabled by this same low during the load time. Monostable multivibra- tor Ul4-12 js clocked by a low going signal on U 10-12. Two inputs to U10-12 will always be high (ICS, 1C6 will “always be low and are inverted). The third input will bea high from UI0-8, which is enabled with any direct address on 1C0-4 (ICO, 3, or 4 will have at least one high) The length of the load time will be determined by R2and 2. 1500 Series 08 6084-23, Attheend ofthe load time, relaxation osclla~ tor U96 and U9-8 will be enabled, and data will be serially shifted out of registers U3 and U7, across isolation transformers T1 and T2, and into registers U20 and U6, Oscillator pulses from UII-10 and UlI-13 clock serial data out of U3 and U?, and into U20 and UI6. When this data transfer is complete, U16-11 wil go high to enable address gates U2 and’ U26-4 and disable Toading clock pulses to U20 and U16, Parallel data will then be applied through output buffers to 120-7 on the guarded anaiog bus, Parallel address levels will be applied through the enabled address gates to address Fines 100-4 on the guarded analog bus. 60BA-24, The clock pulse for U9-6 and U9 is disabled during the load period (U14-12 low), When clock pulses cease from 24-4, retciggerable monostable multivibra- tor U23-13 places'a low on U20-9 and U16-9 to clear any previously latched data 608A-25. An acknowledge (ACK) signal is transferred from the guarded analog bus to the unguarded digital bus by way of an isolation transformer. A low at U23-12 will ‘enable UI9-1 whenever an ACK is returned. With U19-t high, @ clock pulse from U24-4 and U2412 is applied through UIS-2, U1S-6, TRand T7. This pulse then clocks U8-2, resulting in an ACK signal out on UB-13. 608A-26, In order to obtain a data bit return on 1D7, the indirect address is used in three ways. First, the address (ICI, IC2 high) is sent to the A/D Converter | Figure 6084-2. lsolator Block Diagram£8500 Series 084, through the Isolators shift register system, The address willalso beused oenable U9-1 on the unguarded side of the Isolator. Thirdly, on the Isolator's guarded side, ICL and {C2 high will enable address decoders UI8-4 and 28.9. With UI8-3 consequently high, tri-state device [U2I-13 is placed in the high impedance mode. A path is now enabled for ID7 levels from the guarded analog bus to be transferred hack to the unguarded digital bus. For instance, witha high on U19-5, 1D7 high will enable U19- 4, Clock pulses from U24-4 and U19-4 high enable U1S- 1H and UIS-8, While U9-11 enables U13-9, UB-S clocked high places ID7 high on the unguaeded digital bus, 608A-27. The following sequence of events takes place in the [solator during external triggering. Dual D fip- op U3! will beenabled by low on [DOand high at U33 9, Address lines IC4, 1CS, and ICo must all be high for U33.9 w go low. With Vec applied to U3I-S,a positive going external tigger from U35-10 willelock U3I-1 high, The network of R24 and Cé will detect Vee at power on, and disable the module's interrupt capability, The high at U3I-L sets INT low and placesa high at pin 12 of tri-state bulfer UI. A returned high on INA then gates UI3-11 high onto IDI. The controller will react to this high on IDI by taking a reading. When data from the reading is accepted, IDO will again go fow, resetting USI ready for the next external criguer. Triggers received prior to 1D going low will be ignored 608A-28. TROUBLESHOOTING 6O8A-29. Table 608A.2 gives a symptom analysis routine for troubleshooting the Iselator module, 6084-20. PARTS LIST 608A-31. Table 608A-3 gives @ detailed parts breakdown of the Isolator (Option -O¥A). Refer to Section 5 of the Instruction Manual for ordering information, Table 6084.2. Isolator Troubleshooting ‘SYMPTOM POSSIBLE FAILURE No display at Power On Display Bad {Cine hele tow US, U22, U3 {Cine eld high US, U12, U3S 1D Hine held high or low U1, U2, UTS Error 9 at Power On Ontion Configuration Wrong (Can't Call Proper Ranges, Constant Bad Reading Displayed UNGUARDED SECTION Oscilator check UI1-10 Shift Register U3t-1, U7 Not transferring pulses US, core windings ACK bad U9, U12, 01, UB, U7, U2, UB Adress lines hung Dara ines hung U1, U2, U3 107 not returned UB, U13, care winding U12, U10, UB, U36, U6. Error 8 or Configuration Wrong Can't Cal Proper Ranges Constant Bad Reading Displayed ‘GUARDED SECTION U19-10, U16-1, U23-13 (Address, Data} 26, UIB, U15, U28 (ACK) 24, U23 (Addtess) ute, 21, ur8 18, U26, U25, UI9, U15 (107)Table 608A-3, Isolator PCB Assembly £8500 Series 8A, ‘escniPTiON FLUKE stock 10 we say one wre PART no. TSOLATOR FOB ASSBIOLY FIGURE 6088-3 (85028-41817) car, car, cae, cary cary cary cary car, cP, cP, cney cae, + 220 PF 4/—5%, 5000 118 FF 47-56, S00¥ Mica, 180. FF 4/54, 5007 MICA, 220 PF 4/54, S00¥ Mica, 68 FP «/-58, '500¥ Ty 39 Ue +/-208, "60 ALbc, 150° UF 10/4508, 160 ER, or, cer, ce, 127 FE 4/258, 5007 0.22 UF 6/-20%, SOY 0:0087 UF 4/=108, 5000 0122 UF «/=208, $0v 0122 UF /=208, SOV SCRBI, TIP, 4oA0 X 5/8 inuctor, con, 51a CASE MODULE ASSY (INCLUDES MP2-MP11) CASE HALF, MODULE CASE HALE, MODULE coven, SHIELD, PECaL, DECAL, cunkD usr, ‘ouaeD, uano, ‘SrRING, com. (not! ehown) ronuLe, ctse ISOLATOR/EXT TRIGGER caution REAR LEFT ean. RIGHT ROUT LEFT PROUT BIGHT TRAVSISTOR, SI, PHP ‘TRAISISTOR, Sr) XP ES, Es, BE, BES, es, Es, DEP. TEP, Dept ver. Dee. DEP. Dee. EP. pee. Dees per. DEP, DEP, pep. DEP ByDvCTOR ayDoctoR CAR, 220 +/-58, 1/08 CAR, 10K 2/58) 1/48 CAR) ATR 47-585 1788 CAR, ATR 4/—58, 1780 AR, 108 4/58, 1/4 aR, th 4/-$4,"1740 CAR, 8.7K 9/8, 1/1 CAR, 108 9/658 1/4 aR, 150 47-58, 174 CAR, ATO 4/758, 1738 aR, 10K 3/258) 1/4 CR, 300K 47-58, 1/8 150 4/958, 1/4 ATE 0/54, 7 tor 7-58, 1740 ‘oRDER 170823 256585 ase ‘70823 188510 163915, 106296 177998 509889 0672 30989 309889 145813 320911 assor c29e0 02990 66340 437959 sso paso Agree 363349 ier298 asr2e0 2hi65 226200 218396 32626 34889 348696 3uaeet 338839 susaee beet 318839 agua gage 51sae6 38920 puget 388096 5u8es9 itgr608 437590 437608 or 12136 T2136 12136 12136 12136 55289 73h 121% 11590 11590 11590 71590 T3134 Baas 89536 89536 89536 89536 89536 £9536, 89536 89536 89536 89536 89536 53553, oar 0173 20031 80031 0031 80031 0031 b0031 0031 031 20031 80031 0031 0031 031 0031 0031 89536 59536 89536 orrron -084 pursraate par gc3803 pars 16t0 DxIse2ty DETS680 1960 396x0006KA1 TTB HOTEAS beise270r cwsoce2ak cpat72 cwgoczeue crsoczauK 1027 320911 Aséio7 402990 302990 ase 340 aar939 wr7570 apas08 a3T9a7 e339 asra98 e720 (00120-01%0300 es36%0 213908 R25 1-1-5? 22087 (cre5t=t-5P10er (ores to8-BPNTET croptbese act crapt—t-SPi0KT cnebt—t-SP IT cnet SP AKTT oR251-A-SPIOKT (257-45 P 1508 cRa51-tSP a70Er onastaA-SPIT (or2s1=4-5P 100% (CROSIALBPISOE crap 1—nesearT craptat-sPioKt 437608 137590 3376082500 Series 8A, ‘Table G08A.2. leolator PCB Assembly (cont) Descwerion UKE stock 0 Fa sry cone FG PART NO. ero, ere, 10, It, ere, x, 3, x, 16, ere, exc, 1c, 1G, I ies ex, 1, arc, x, 1c) miovcron supucron usucron moucroR sipveroR comps, Hex suEmER/nwveRTER ips) HEX BUPRER/THVERTER ‘Ta, MSL 8 ST? SHIFT REDISTER PML) QUAD, 2IKPUT BY INTRE HAND CMDs, HEX BUFFER/THVERTER TL, 70S wi GATES, BEX TIVERTERS TH, MST 8-81 SHIFT REGISTER MHL, U0 PR, SMGL/DUAL RETHIG ‘PMy QUAD 2-mUPUT MAND GATE os’ mato CATES, TAIHLE 3 PUT Pos HOR GATES, TOTEM POLE OUTPUTS coves, QUAD 200iP07 WOR GATES GomMS, TATHSTATE HEX HCA BUFFERS ‘rity Lo BWR, SIGL/DUAL, RETRIE TTL, QUAD, 2IUPUT BV DETRF naND SHIPD REOISTER, 8 DIT PARALLEL UT NENMORK, 10K «7-54, 1/8 Cows, QuaD 2-mNPUT AND GATES 70S NOR GATES, TOTEM POLE OUTPUTS SHIFT RALISTER, 8 BIT PARALLEL OU? Coins, TRIASTaTE HE NoNDIY BUFFERS (CLIMs, CUAD 2-1¥PUT NOR GATES ma, Lo PR, SNGL/DUAL nETAIG ‘TH, TOs NMUD GATES, HEX TVERTERS Cbs, TRIFLE 3-007 HOR GATES mms, cua 2-mveor won cares Cwps, wal *D" FLIP FLOP Cimbs, FAST QUAP 2-DeOT NaND CATE Ws, TRIFLE 3-DI70T WAND OA mos) Hex ScuMNTT TRIGGER P/N 86407 FOR COMPLETE CASE ASSY., WITHOUT PCB ASSY. 37590 ag1590 437608 37590 37608 astase 381830 aogiie aogo21 381830 393058 29318 ona 36358 4aos0r4 aggomt a5i72 aorise W106 08021 272138 355305, ioator 393081 are38 uor759 aost72 iota 393058, 355160 sonra 3h0117 ingant 351 inre10 69536 89536 89535 89535 89536 02135 02735 01295 19328 02135 01295 01295 01295 01295 ore 01295 02735 32040 01295 18328 01295 89536 02735 03295 01295 12080 02735 01295 01295 02735, 02735 obras 12040 oir s3 12080 137590 237890 137608 137590 337608 ‘cplos0aE ‘eDl0508E SHTAIEBN yeas (cDROSOAE sur a.sonN ‘HT T65H SHTALSI 23" THO [SHTALSTON sy eso2 ceptoo1 a we€0c97 SSSTALSt 230 wriaea swraesn 355305 eoioater SHTALSD2K SUTate twsoce7 oko ke smraLsiz30 SETALSDIN coho2s4e coroo aE weworsce ko rPC/uoT TPC weioasce rasrcoi an~~ MP1, CASE ASSY. 2502A-4181-CASE.Fie. GOSA-3 Sun Zor 3 |FIG. GO8A-3 bir: Bors 8500 Seis 088 ‘85028-1781 Figure 6084-3, lsolator PCB AssamblyFG. GO8A-Sa Bis segassFie. @O8A-3 & ST: 2 oF 3 B00 NOTES: ues omenwise ALL RESISTANCE ms 2 ALL RESISTORS Cc Figure 60843. tolator PCB Assembly (cont) 608A 8FIG. 608A~S a aan sin on Seer, 3 Op & NOTES: ueess ormenwise srscimiep: 1k ALL RESISTANCE my oMMAS. 2. ALL RESISTORS CC mW. aie] Sse tite 8502A.1181 Figure 608-3, (slator PCB Asrembly (cont) cosasSection 7 General Information Tel, This section of the manual contains generalized user information as well s supplemental information to the List of Replaceable Parts contained in Section 5.ATTENUATOR cinewiTS, are enyem 20 HocD sete geeeeo Ae eelsSerie Cone croup in Becnetr Now Yerk Won tntaretionsl ne. Worthen Serer cor, eos Sor erase ne ora St eacwonio Som. Senconauroy Spaations csi Cltora om otra Conmunintons & Bron ne Fresicn Pak ino ones Rot eesti Manchest, New ampancs ‘Replaced by 75805 re se seas Soreque Bese Co, DBenrgom fiscrone Os Esato Fon Ferrxeabe Corp Stipe No ork tere nsi on czas son lg, co, Broo New York Sram. CR Co, Us Few Berea at Federal Supply Codes for Manufacturers sso Sint name carp. Gana Oe Becme cory n°? Brendon ne cor, fico Capacitors ne hats, Cao anata! Bove Co Somrensuctot Peau Space, hi Yor Ropaces by 7400 Faces bytes Genin Teemoiogy Carp Sinan Enns Trsreaon Becvenis Cor. Waters Messechsets| coase KE Pyrtn Cor. Vpn New fey coats Siarex Rectonie Dw. Six Gor, Munim Now Jersey ose Pepiena ny 72198 Spine Beach Eastin ons Motori in. Somicondvtr oan Stange wire & cane Cog angel Cems Peotone wy 1968 299 ewan Calor sas Cerone Cor. now ercom ne She, Rives oar Wextngroue Eecve Co, ‘Semisonsaar Om ‘Feonawood,Pennsyvania epee oy e8ses Seamwget eerie § Binteso ‘tendo Castoia Nowvon Hew ort cess o S020 Stagn BstaC ore nous hat Caos placed by 16258 one20 ‘Maketelg engineering ne ‘area, asensens Sowa wee c Repices oy 67 ee sess Bene Sect! nme Co ‘etn, Gelade Sia cor, Sinatand Bio Sromic ators goo Seat automate Di iy sna, Gotoie Formerly Cite Corp. Piao Ege bw Seder, Oe xs00 Eiae Om. are Aasoaitan San Cat attomia ‘Te Bos ion Ce, one asiagroyse Eerie Cor. Seexant eB Geen Ges Sty of nde, caer ors Scenario Ore. Bc sao Geer ne ‘histor, Masten om on Parone Soncontucer hot Eneenis Camo instumert Cor. Hovnain ine Caitoris Breer Coe Burey con rao {me ngnonnng Corp NScrempton asacturts gree ‘Tonsyne somicontuctor Fema Serer Sehcencucor Ok. mo Nouns iow Gaia cas thse TymFeders! Supply Codes for Manufacture Siatva sue C0, Borden Sore. Corie ces Frotance nica Cor. rca Naw Yor gone romeo ‘Sevaona, Ono SE So, ym:-conovror Sorte components ne sees Bomdy corm ‘nie eles ine. anton Soca Former Reeves Asaace Bake va GaSteecronc om Best Proaess co 18 a fit Bron 728 Qunseyre Cx, Sere Sen, Cnimin ou Ene tts naeie oo Sieiey Cowocna ‘AME Canada LTD. oe Onto, Cama m8 Thee oo, Pye Products Pasi Prayers On Brcpeco, Pemayania Gasca, on seer icons wtp co. Bae tinal 12090 fide corp Fraley Co. an Tones ‘eonena ae Ov oe Gates, Cooma ye placed by 25782 Seren Co Eien citron Ov He Gesyauen a or] SRine oman Sito tanstor Com Stns vanes esl eriean Comes. sins Go Sorcshosken, Penney Senet Fer Pose Bectne Go’ Gow Cora! Oop. Ser Guodel Calioma epacns vy Sse as (Severs narnia Crp Serr ondurorSrocuts Group 08 eet Snigus Catiomle Feu eco ‘se tee yma ne Use Ov VenNUys attra Ene uncon Vermont Fepaces by 140 28 Space Lot ne, Bete Cora ong Gass Scraie Sangeet Ov ssa Fepacns oy 26473 Gerteage seaman BX et choad Comortion Canbtege Montene cindy 7888 Seen caitoms 288 Sion. ne Sete lah Coleria pions ny 40 Mand wigs. sour oes Servi or ern Macnineny Suzy Co. Erechs ieneFederal Supply Codes for Manutacturers (con!) Ber aing Sams Sins Cowumbus, Ome ‘lve Beach, Fin Free como cap ve Stan heat caging ante Gare Cavtore For, Yn Pty ae Aoptced by oz ess fog Onis ne Norwu oazochsens enon Fugi Eleni ine Sou Pele, Now Sey 08 inion New J Reperx Beever. Sceeenscer tort Sanicenduter Corp. ‘Sa Cure Sino Mmeste Mining & Mg Co, Sonora resoes BAe ‘SUB wnnesie eucs, Eu trmany Beret Contos on. Bett Coperaton mates acon 0 owes Packard Co oor Ha Pao, Cater feman tty. Co Kenbeoth ew Jere soe Morea, 00. ne Sara Sas Sato 2008 Stsapo Compones Paty Norm Gane ec erage iin so01 Soaring tara Co, ‘ron Nh New Yr sere ‘Gee Pats Cop Burengene: Gallons devas ee Semone Siege Catone Es Tacmotyn Producten Carlie Poway Fvride Csiforia Siento, Kentucky sss ‘Sion General Westin Callomia PR ator § 62. ne ‘eaianapor, eae Nate, Masset 25 Sear, ew Yor 108 Sake tito em sos Tekngon Wasetchusens ewek cor rotons sar Giporina atoms Fi p02 Steno Ear o, ‘Sots ine tmany ‘Scot & tere Ca. mee 20 Sereue Eleric Co. Nore Aor Masons SoperioeEette Co Bata Comet Sencar. ‘Poulton Ceonerteat Seneca, Caloris eo ete arom ns 180 itn Gy, Nw Joey Btn cor ene ras 2400 Bearman Mig Serotec easen co Erste Fr Gannon Bact ne ‘Sania Ara, Castors Bete Cot Ca ne rane {TR Eicronies Component, neh Connector Operas Dv Exgiove Vig Enicago: mins Nwan Hew Josey rose Fepices by o580 98 Broo ave io. 0 Wrenes ne ne anti New Jersey ‘npar acuonie Cap. ‘rym New Yor BE tiecvonice Biot Rraromea ne, Brot, how Yort epics oy 9000 Fete ‘Chicogo, nosFederal Supply Codes for Manufacturers (cont) Tre Toe Potucs ne 25, Renan uno allornia Mabe een ce Caring Electra tne ps0 ite Fedurtie ‘rte, Rew sasey ripe Fader seein tg Co Chena Ono 300 BPD Econ co. Zompononis Core Broce Now Yor Fo owen Co. Feta, Nw Sey Soe enralnaumant Cro. Pasa Ct co Cari Pemayeaia POM eet nate Work [Fav cuonce Componante iRerhes tion Dayton, Ono Sores, 2082 EE seca Seach Pats mts Dic roe Rodowoirt Corp of CA. LTO. Force, Caboms Bittle To! Werk gin no ie iment. ne Sou eran nansnosens roe Bickool Carson Ca ‘Sintiays Pomorie e589 Een Corp. Enineres ng and iy Naw Yor Betsey, Cor. eos Beste uct cor Infterts American Pips Co cos EF Cer, Process conto! Om ‘ey A nto Gratofana Ono Sprague oducts Femmarine Mg Co: Ie ‘ou Sono, arsacnonets 079 Stes Soon ana ona 90 Kory te Co. Enlego Lack oo aun as Caoons as ‘sand Tox $e Gare Co, Unies Can Ow Geroridge, Masacnasents Sere con Ferman sve ‘ronan ie Yore Fuererat Cor Showin Burovans Gop Elecrorte Cononets Ov on cyte cor. Seal Nena Rt indeat Com. Peabody. Massachuserts oss? Pichon Meta! Prodan Faso corp. tamer Etewonic Cononets Di. Sout. Go, e ‘inna, Caigma Marre Preet e Sebati of Oak isis re ashi cabo Van suye Cottoria Soeur Etswonie Dv femal rite on ‘ate Wir & Cable Repacoo by O17 Sir Ftute ma co. neFederal Supply Codes for Manufacturers (cont) sot Biro ktary Go, ie Inaanapl Inna ores Gre exes ‘Seer 0 o>. Shee: ire Bont Sta & Mi. Co avast Oy. MOO a seer cae 004 ‘Beet nteratona Ie Stgexiw Bl eter ew Mampi Pptene oy stars sca Sereises Meee Serie are Gaxora soe Be Becton in. (Camo Neos Seo coo io Grove, Poonyinaia cars Cégonater Now deney 008 Koytone Bacronice Com, Nee Yon Now Wort 28 cronence 100 ro Semen Freep inal gras ‘ion Wire Cor, Sltantn Now Say Stitanstor brsues Dy Poin wy e086 geese Co Nena Now erty oe Sexton. ferme Sout Grater Cor, Ctr Pera eas ret loco beg tar iy, Mew Yor Bdpanoe Conneset Beato Ascari Tube Gc, Ovo ose ‘Gore's Cor. Bic Row drony ass Wethode ae erp Rosin Meadors loss Bena Ettet Cemaens Ov Hcy Opes Pet Wechoaer Coe ‘Ghee eis re ‘Sin orange Eaton ‘ion nd ie Aauaureert ene Comoe Oi {ermeny Runa Iatramens Co. ‘meen nang. ‘Whaanal Eleotonies Cor. eases or nae ma. 5S vine chr Product Ov acm, New sone Fopiced by 158 soe Repay 068 Raboe-ree, Mice A Meroaot Coy ine Beane exo Passer, Casoran sso Hameconnes, Raw Yor 8 rogues ‘Sn Beg, Salteia err Ber natin lc. ‘ormory Soutnem Elec. OW, Streant Calta Sinan. cater a ort dennnge oman) arsed naan Capuron i Mowoms Calter core se aaser Bint Rane com race Prosiin nats ine Belen Doan Boo ure, Row Yone one Eonles Senioontcter ‘Sera Biaromes Dot ‘Sito eae ime Csitra katenal Connector tnnapoi MiesU.S. SALES AREAS for all Fluke products A, Anchor ary tang Assis 1871 ert ve 488 ancora, AK 5808 com neste Fra, AL 25001 (ay ex sz20 “it Pe Ml. Coe 258 teh Stet Tempe, Az 65282 (wom sorrae [ety Teo. (Aton Angus etn Puke Ml. Ca ne {at sie or ah raze ‘en ago Sonn Fe. Co ne San loge. CA 62128 (Pe ase em Beo veo vo, ag ent lara, CABS" @ aon mas Salis Rod wave F (a 8 a863 60, dane ohn Puke Mig. Con ne ‘eo cour Qutbee 2a ‘arwo CO 634 (oan ose Harton ahr Phe Mig Ce, ne ‘Sion Lockon Est SSE New congen Trike ‘tonto. er om Yann Plots Mig Co. Bon Fern Cae ave rnea FL son (eos one “hn Fluke Mtg. Co, Ie 200 baer, Se 20, (dow os Mi Monon ‘ie Coerion 2299 Une 8, (aon ene 98 1, owe iy ‘aro ooze ‘cleago “hm hae. Co ne Rotng Mancow ie 0008 (ara seasons IW tndanaptie ann Fluke Mig. Co, ne Sue sot lacoste, eae iS, Kanaan Cy “abn Pte Mg. Co, ne {550 Yoo Ss Et 00 (gr eam 1A, ew Oren Cove Ma, suring Mon Fle tt. Ca, ne 22° eet, rn mer MD, Batinore (oo 7-780 ecsvite oan tat. . ne oc, o 20882 (99 711870 1m, oat dann Fike Mp. Co. ne ena ae rm aan 1, Biosmington Met Fluke lg. Co, Ine Sore roms, Sui (era eoe sees ‘Sohn Fluke Mi. Co, ne. Boze Woocand Perey Sot a8 Selous, Mo cates (33a on anes NC, crwmbore Sion Pei. Cane Sreanvore MO 208 (ero aro Pore ao Wen 9 Senter Road Parnas Na oO? (aa) 2.0 i, Ataquegu stn Fake hg Co, ae (05 ot ass0 Ny, nochener Monn uke Maco. {St Gator os Poshesar NY 4622 (Grey 28 600 ‘ote 63 ne Mab is, CF 4430 (ere) ants columbus (era ammsris Darton Sohn lke ig. Co, ne ‘en Fanourg he Denn ov ace (era io za (0n, Portana ‘Wodo 8, SorogtadLane ‘ona O7 27007 (ary eazroce PA, Poodetoie “ohn Fae Ml. Co ne “oto Wea tne. Su ing of Praia PA 1808, Prater (ara ans 1% Aun “ohn Flute Mlg Co. ‘rook Garena Soe S63 (pray aeane Dale Sonn Fate m2, Ine to iy Rood (ava) 0000 Sater, e777 (rs cores fan Ante ‘ha Flae i. Ca ne sat cate era set Ur, Salt Lake cy Mapa Fata ip Co. ne {E26 co 300 on ute v2 (aby ross! WA, sents tn Fae Mle, ne ‘ecrnond, WA Bg0s2 (aye coe Service Center Aroas (4 Duane (219) 8-889 A arte lr 4) Fre 0, Denver 5) 75-128 FL Orange te) 606 2206 1 Eneago (32) 30-800 Mi Burngton 67) 275-4578 MD, Reco (0) 7076 Ni, Peemos 20") 2-550| x Dae 14) 25-9005 WA, Bvt 206) 35-550 “The following low-cost instruments... ocd lanl an ald by ba wthavzed Dib tated ‘on he thr se his ee wl ao By ha sie one shown, Portia out: Don, Yon, 602A, EOD, OUGK, EON ‘ig Coumer: 2008, 1910, 1974, 128 ‘igtal Tharmarinn: 210-2170 Sres 6. From Aleska, Hawall,or Washington, phone (208) 356-5400, From Cana ‘and other countries phone (206) 356-5500. John Fute Mig Co, ne 0, Box C8080 Ere, WA 98206 FEUIKE] Fite riotens oy #16, Box sos 3001 £0, Tir, The etherianc. Phone (18) 676972 fo. Line musa esINTERNATIONAL SALES OFFICES {Pot Rosa Oy Geman Dame pete 8 FLLIICES] 0h" Fluke Mig. Co, tne. / PO Sox C9000 / Everett, WA 98206 / (206) 256 5400 © Uno MUSA 189WORLD-WIDE SERVICE ORGANIZATION sumer a Seite Snetat Spee Cpenee tena rae Goto “John Fluke Mig, Co, Ie. P.O. Box C9090, Evra, WA 88205 EE] ike cHotten) By. P20. 80x 5055, 5008 €8, Thbure, The Nethertande, Phone (019) 679873 Litno in USA, 8/82ee sone Fone 8 canes sie Rew 1 Soma ae Spo oy — “John Fluke Mig, Co, ine. P.O. Box C8080, Everett, WA 86206 EEE] ke otane) ev. 0, Sox 509,500 £8, Tiburp, Te Netherlands, Phone (13) 679873 P Limon USA, a2INTRODUCTION ‘This section of the manual contains information necessary to backdate the manval to conform with earlier eb configurations. To identify the configuration ofthe Debs, refer tothe revision letter (marked in ink) on the component side ofeach pcb assembly. Table I definesthe revision levels €ocumentated inthis manual. NEWER INSTRUMENTS. ‘Changes and improvements made to the instrument are Section 7A Manual Change Information identified by incrementing the revision letter marked on the affected peb assembly. These changesare documented ‘on a supplemental change/errata sheet which, when applicable, is inserted atthe front of the manual. OLDER INSTRUMENTS ‘To backdate this manual to conform with earlier revision levels, perform the changes indicated in Table 1‘Table 7A-1. Manual Status and Backdating Information Fluke | _ "To sagt manval to sarr rev configurations perfor changes Assembly are._| in desending order (by no), ending with change under desired rev letter Name No._[-Talelefoletr[e[s]s [Tu] m]n] P| Front Panel Display POB Assy | 650419 | x Mother Bosrd PCB Assy | eas | ‘Bus Interconnect PCB Assy | 459636 Power Supply PCB Assy | 699626 Power Supply interconnect PCB Assy a Controller POB Assy Frontar Switch PCB Assy DG Signal Genditions PCB Assy Active Filter PCB Assy AID Analog PCB Assy AND Digital PCB Assy +X #-To9 #8 eavson las documnatdin this man. = Theo rein letters mere aver used nthe wrenAppendix 7B Software Calibration 78-1. INTRODUCTION The 8505A and 8506A use a nonvolatile, read/write memory for microprocessor- controlled calibration of each range in each function. The Calibration Memory is @ standard part of the Controller module with these multimeters, Extended intervals between hardware calibration are possible. The scale factor for each range can be calibrated using any reference input value from 60% of range to full scale. The following paragraphs first discuss the general procedure used in software calibration, then detail the procedure used for each function. CAUTION Interruption of Input power could affect Callbration Memory entries when the ‘multimeter ie In Callbration mode. Do not cycle Input power to the multimeter when Calibration mode Is activated. It power Is ON, locally verify that the AVG/(CAL) annunclator ls not flashing or remotely verity that Calibration ‘mode Is off (GS response = 0) betore cycling power to OFF. If power is OFF, verity that the rear panel Calibration switch Is off before cycling powerto ON. Software calibration entails a combination of zero offset and gain corrections. The Calibration mode must be activated when making calibration entries from either a local or temote location. This mode can only be entered by accessing the Calibration switch on the multimeter rear pane]. The calibration sticker must be removed and the slide switch positioned to ON when the multimeter is in local (front panel) control, The front pane! AAVG/(CAL) annunciator flashes to denote activation of Calibration mode, Zero ‘correction values can then be entered for each range in de voltage (VDC) and resistance (OHMS) functions only. Gain correction factors ean be stored for each range in each function by applying a reference input and entering a numeric string representing that reference value, The multimeter then computes the gain correction factor necessary tO read the reference value. Depending on the function being calibrated, gain corrections are made once or twice for each range. A number representing the calibration date or identifying the multimeter ean also be entered when the Calibration mode is activated. ‘The zero offset correction values are applied to the reading whenever the Zero modeis on (ZERO annunciator lighted). The gain correction factors are applied to the reading Immediately upon entry and continue to be applied whether Calibration mode is on or off. Locally, application of zero values can be interrupted by turning the Zero mode off. Remotely, both zero values and gain correction factors can be inhibited or enabled with the following commands:1. Mr inhibit gain correction factors M 0: enable gain correction factors 3. M1: inhibit zero values 4. M2: enable zero values ‘The multimeter may be interrogated from local or remote locations (Calibration mode on or off) for recall of zero values (VDC or OHMS) oF the calibration date (multimeter identification) number. The last uncorrected reading can also be recalled from the front panel at any time. Remotely, uncorrected readings can be verified by sending a calibration factor inhibit command (M) and commanding a new reading, Software calibration offers numerous benefits, Physical access to the multimeter is not necessary: no cover need be removed, Uncertainties due to internal temperature differentials and thermal equilibrium can thereby be eliminated, The procedure also roves convenient where the multimeter is stacked or mounted in arack. The multimeter does not need to be removed from the system during software calibration: the procedure can be accomplished from local (front panel) or remote locations. When the multimeter is in Calibration mode (AVG/(CAL) annunciator flashes) the following special conditions should be noted: 1. Locally, the multimeter display is altered to provide 7-1/2 digits on the 10V de volts range and 6-1 2 digits on all other ranges and functions, Overrange indications (flashing H’s) are not available, On the 8506A only, underrange indications (ashing L’s) are not available. CAUTION Donot aleabie atching errors uring multimotercaltbration.Thelatching error laable feature fs useful during troubleshooting (when rermally disallowed ‘module configurations may be necessary). Since latching errora may also Identity an over voltage condition (a8 with local Error 4 or remote error 14), discretion must be used. 2. Averaging mode is locked out (Calibration and Averaging modes are mutually exclusive). However, the AVG button can be pushed locally todisable latching error conditions. Pushing AVG a second time enables latching errors once again. 3. All mathematic operations (Offset, Scaling, External Reference) and special operations (Limits, Peaks) are disabled 78-2. DESCRIPTION ‘The function being calibrated determines the calibration corrections that ate available. Applicable correction points are summarized in Table 1. DC voltage(VDC) uses ll three possible correction points (zero, positive, negative) and is used as an example in the following discussion. Refer to Figure land Table L. Thede voltage function requires that 4 zero correction and negative and positive gain corrections be made. Software algorithms (Y=MX + C) are used to perform these corrections, The constant C represents the zero correction value. This value can be stored on any range in the de voltage (VDC) or resistance (OHMS) function. The constant M is computed by the ‘multimeter. This computation is made by dividing the actual reference input (entered asa numeric) by the measured reference input (the uncorrected reading), Separate computations are made for negative and positive inputs.‘Table 1. Calibration Points CALIBRATION POINTS lecablecal Zero Positive Negative Corrections Gain Gain 505A Software Calibrat DC Volts (VDC oF ¥) x DG Amps (ADC oF 1) ‘Ohms (OHMS or Z) AG Volts Averaging ‘Option -01, (WAC oF VA) Truo-RMS Option 0A (VAG or VA} (VACHVDC or 6) |AG Amps (AAG or IA) Software Calbrat 1G Volts (VOC oF V) DG Amps (ADC or 1) (Ohms (OHMS or 2) AC Volts (HI ACGUR or VA2) (Hi AgCUR+VDC. or C2) For example, assume that the 1V de range is being calibrated from the front panel. VDC zzro (point A in Figure 1) is fist performed with the multimeter input shorted to define the offset constant C, The positive gain correction constant M is then defined using any reference value from 600 mv (60% of range) to 2V (full scale). A value of 1.9V (point Bin Figure I) is selected in this ease to minimize percentage of reading error and avoid saturation of the A/D Converter. Without correction, the multimeter reads 1.987250V. ‘The correction constant M is therefore computed as lov 1,987250V This linear correction factor is now applied to any input between 0 and +2V. Errors due to polarity reversals can be eliminated by storing a separate correction factor using & negative voltage. A procedure identical to that used with a positive reference input yields 4 linear gain correction that is applied to all inputs between -2V and 0.Figure 1. DC Voltage Calibration Gain correction points for each function and range can be ascertained using Tables | and 2, For calibration of ac voltage, separate sets of correction points are used for the 8505A and the 8506A. A list of reference sources sufficiently accurate to calibrate the mukimeters is presented in Table 3. Reference source connections are described in Section 4 (standard functions) and Section 6 (optional functions). NOTE The accuracy of the calibration correction factor reflects the accuracy of the reference source. To maintain accuracy, use only the sources listed in Table 3 or calibrated sources of equal or better accuracy 7B-3. LOCAL (FRONT PANEL) CALIBRATION Locai calibration is carried out using several of the push buttons on the front panel. If necessary, refer to Section 2 of the appropriate Instruction Manwal for a review of push button operation. 78-4. Equipment Configurations Front panel calibration can be made using zero or reference value connections either at the front panel terminals or through the rear input connector. Connections are described in Section 2 of the appropriate Instruction Manual, The following general considerations should be noted: 1. When using the front panel terminals, the three input selectors must be positioned as follows: a, Guard Selector: in or out, as required.DG volts AG Amps (1) (85058) [AG Volts (2) (6505A) AG Volts (8) (808A) ‘Table 2. Gain Correction Parameters RANGE 700 mv w s0v 100v x000v 10 ohms 400 ohms 1 kohins 10 kohms 300 kohms 4 Mon 10 Mons 4100 Mots. 100A ma 10ma +100 mA, A 100 uA ma 10 mA +100 mA 1A w tov 00v +1000 100 mv 300 mv Ww wv x0 ov ‘o0v soov RECOMMENDED| _ MINIMUM 90 mv 19V 18 120 so00¥ 20 ohms 200 ohms 2 konme 20 kohms 200 kolms 2 Mohms 20 Mohms 109 Monms 190 uA 1.9 mA 10.ma 100 mA 108 200 A 20mA Oma 150'°mA 4.08 a wv ov 00 320 mv 300 mv 1 39v ev 35v 60 av csv ev ov 600V onms 60 ohms 600 ohms 8 kohms 60 kohms 600 kohens 6 Monms 60 Mohms 60 uA 600 yA mA 60 mA 600 ma 60 ya {600 A ma 60 ma 600 mA 600 mv wv ev 00v MAXIMUM 200 mv w 20v av +200v 20 ohms 200 ohms 2 kohms 25 kohms 280 kohms 4.1 Monms 36 Mohme 265 Motims. 280 uA ma 18 ma 128 mA 1208 3125 yA 25 mA 20 mA 160 mA 1208, 28v zo rev 1000 125 mV 400 mv 405 a r28v 4ov s25v cov Notes: 4. Gain correction entered at 1 kHz. Actual value must be veritied at source output 2, Gain correction entered at 1 kHz, checked at 10 kHz, 50 kH2, 100 KH (Averaging Converter Option -01) of at 100 kHz, 500 kH2, 094) ‘MHz (True-RMS Converter Option 3, Gain correction entered at 1 kHz, checked at 10 kHz and 100 kHz. ‘B505A/8S06ATable 3. Reference Sources MINIMUM USE RECOMMENDED SPECIFICATIONS. EQUIPMENT DC Voltage DG Source igh Shoa-Term Fluke Model 335A Stability (0-1100V) NOMENCLATURE Null Detector 10W Full-Scale Fluke Model 395A, Resolution KeWvin-ariey vider | Linearity 1 ppmot input Fluke Mode! 7508 Standard Cell Guilcine 91 Guilatine s1520R) Enclosure ‘AG Voltage (@505A) ‘AC Calibration 0-1000V ac Fluke Mode! 52008 System Accuracy: with Fluke Mogel 1 RHE: 02% S215A oF 52054 10 KHe: 02% 50 kt: 08% 100 kHa-1 M2 399% (eter to Section 4 for 8508A specifications, setup) ‘Ohme Standard 720 ohm: 30 ppm ESISR-T0T0 Resistors 200 ohn - 20 Moh: SI SR-1050 50 ppm 200 Mon: 100 ppm 06 Current DC Current Accuracy £ 02% Fluke Model 3824, Calibrator 200 kohm Resistor Accuracy 01% ‘AC Current ‘AG Current Verification Flyke Model 5100 Calibrator Dependent b. Ohms Selector: In (4T) for Ohms Zero and Ohms gain corrections (8505A and 8506A) and for VAC corrections (8506A only), The Guard Selector ean be in ‘or out for other calibration connections at the front panel terminals. ¢. Rear Input Selector: out 2. When the rear input connector is being used, the Guard Selector and the Ohms Selector have no affect. The Rear Input Selector must be pushed in, Rear inputs are dedicated to a four terminal configuration. Fourterminal connections must be used. for Ohms Zero and Ohms gain corrections (850A and 8506A) and for VAC corrections (8506A),7B-8. Zero Corrections Zero corrections require activation of the Calibration mode (side rear panel Calibration Switch to on), Zero corrections can then be made separately for each range (without affecting values for other ranges) n de volts and ohms functions. Each zero value stored is ‘applied to subsequent readings inthe selected range and function only. These values are Stored permanently in Calibration Memory and can only be changed by storing new entries when Calibration mode is on Whenever Calibration mode is off, separate zero values can be stored in a temporary memory. This procedure is not used for software calibration and does not affect any software calibration zero values stored inthe Calibration Memory. When this procedure is used, each stored zero value is applied in the existing range and in all higher ranges in the same function (dc volts or ohms). This process can be repeated for each range (from owest to highest) if separate zero values must be temporarily stored for each range. ‘The zero value applied to the reading is defined as follows: 1, If Calibration mode is on, the permanent values stored in Calibration Memory during software calibration are applied. 2. When Calibration mode is turned off, temporary memory is loaded with permanent (Calibration Memory) values. 3, While the Calibration mode is off, the following conditions apply: a, Temporary zero values are applied, b. If a power-up or reset occurs during the Calibration mode off state, temporary memory. zero values are re-initialized to the permanent (Calibration Memory) values. Zero values entered when Calibration modes off change these initialized (or ‘-initialized) temporary memory values. Remember that any zero value entered ‘with Calibration mode offi “read up" to all higher ranges in the same function. 78-6. Gain Corrections Corrections at reference input points reiuire activation of the Calibration mode (slide rear panel Calibration switch to on), A reference input can be made at any point from {60% of range to full scale, Reference input parameters for each function are defined in Table 2. It is recommended that reference inputs near the full scale point be used to minimize reading errors. Reference sources are defined in Table 3, Reference source connections for standard functions (devolts withthe 850SA, de volts and ae volts with the 4506A) are described in Section 4. Source connections for optional functions are described in Section 6. The following procedure is used for each range: 1. Manually select the range to be calibrated (push the up range or down range button). 2. Apply the reference value either to the front panel INPUT HI and LO terminals or through the rear panel input connector. 3. Allow the multimeter to take one reading, 4. Using the front panel push buttons, store the reference value defined by the source. For example, fora reference of 1 9V de on the IV derange, push STORE | 9 (CAL COR),S0SA/E506A, 5. The multimeter computes the gain correction factor necessary to display the stored source value. This factor is then automatically applied to all subsequent readings in this function and range. 6. Verify proper entry of the reference value by allowing the multimeter to take a reading. This reading should be the actual reference value (accuracy specifications for the multimeter function and range) 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each range. 78-7. Calibration Date (Multimeter Identification) Up to six integers signifying the calibration date or identifying the multimeter can also be ‘entered from the front panel. Ifthe calibration date is being entered, the first two digits could represent the year, the third and fourth digits could define the month, and the fifth and sixth digits could represent the month. For example, January 1, 1983 is entered as STORES 30101 (CAL DATE). Alternately, an instrument identification number of 242 is entered as STORE 242(CAL DATE). Oni integers may be entered: ifa decimal point ‘or exponent is used, an Error C condition is set. The multimeter can store only one set of six integers ata time, 78-8. Recall Operations ‘The last uncorrected reading and the calibration date (or instrument identifying) number can be recalled for display at any time (Calibration mode on or off) If the Calibration mode is on (AVG/(CAL) annunciator flashes), the sequences used to recall the uncorrected reading and the number are, respectively: RECALL (CAL COR) RECALL (CAL DATE) If the multimeter is not in the Calibration mode(AVG/ (CAL) annunciator not flashing), the following sequences must be used RECALL LO (CAL COR) RECALL LO (CAL DATE) Zero values for the function selected (VDC or OHMS) can be recalled by pushing: RECALL ZERO VDC/OHMS This operation can be repeated for cach range and does not affect either the stored zero value(s) or the zero mode status. Ifthe multimeteris in VDC or OHMS, the zero value for the range and function selected is recalled. Ifthe multimeter is not in VDC of OHMS, an Error 0 condition is set. The value recalled may be either of the following: I. If zero is recalled when the Calibration mode is off, the value displayed may differ from that actually stored in Calibration Memory. During Calibration mode off condition, the multimeter stores separate, temporary zero values whenever the ZERO VDC/OHMS button is pushed. Such entries are recalled if both the following conditions are met: a. A power-up or reset has not occurred since the entry b. Calibration mode is still off.2. If Calibration mode is on, the recalled zero value is always that stored in Calibration Memory, Also, Calibration Memory zero values automatically replace the values held in the temporary storage referred to above when a power-up or reset condition occurs when Calibration mode is off. 7B-9, Error Conditions ‘The multimeter employs both momentary and latching errors. Once a momentary error automatically clears, further multimeter operation is not impaired. A latching error does, hnot automatically clear and does impede further multimeter operation until the cause for the error has been corrected. Latching errors include Error, Error 2, Error 3, Error 4, Error $, Error 9, and Error E. Latching errors are normally enabled, but are afforded special treatment when the Calibration mode is on. The following rules then apply: CAUTION Donotdisable latching errore during multimeter calibration. The latching error disable feature Is useful during troubleshooting (when normally disallowed ‘module configurations may be necessary). Since latching errors may also Identify an ever voltage condition (as with local Error 4 or remote error 14), discretion must be used. 1. Latching errors are automatically enabled whenever Calibration mode is ‘enabled or disabled with the rear panel Calibration Switch. 2. If Calibration mode is on, latching errors can be disabled by pushing the AVG ‘button, Since Average mode and Calibration mode are mutually exclusive, this operation does not enable Average mode. The multimeter front panel display responds with (Err, OFF) 3. With Calibration mode sil on, latching errors are re-enabled and normal Calibration mode operation is restored when the AVG button is pushed again. Ifa Intching error condition exists at this time, the error message is displayed. If no Intching error exists, the multimeter front panel display responds with (Est. on) “The front pane! display identifies numerous potential error conditions. A full description of error conditions is presented in Section 2 of the appropriate Instruction Manual. The following list identifies error conditions specifically applicable to front panel calibration procedures 1, Error 0: Store 0 error. A zero STORE ot RECALL has been attempted in an unallowed function. Zero corrections can only be made in VDC or OHMS. 2, Exror I: Store during overrange: The STORE (CAL COR) sequence has been performed when the previously taken reading was overrange. This reading cannot be used in the multimeter’s gain correction computation, The applied source value must be revised immediately to fall within the limits defined in Table 2. Damage to the multimeter could otherwise result, In any event, Error 1 signifies that the gain correction factor has not been stored. With a legal value applied to the multimeter, the numerics representing that value must be entered again with the STORE (CAL COR) sequence. 3, Error b; Not allowed in Calibration mode: ‘An unallowed push button sequence has been attempted in the Calibration mode, ‘Use the correct sequence once the display has cleared..8505A/8506A 4, Error C: Invalid push button sequence: This error can occur under the following conditions: ‘a, Numerics representing a value less than 60% of range or more than full sale hhave been entered during the STORE (CAL COR) sequence. Select a new value and repeat this sequence. b. The wrong sequence has been used to clear all Calibration Memory entries when the Calibration mode is activated. ©. Error Calo oecurs when attempting to clear all Calibration Memory entries when not in Calibration mode. 5. Error d: Calibration Memory is faulty or not installed, 6. Error F: Calibration Memory check sum error: This error condition may occur when power is applied, when storing into Calibration Memory, or during a recall operation. It may be caused by an inadvertent cycling of input power when the multimeter is inthe Calibration mode. Reset the multimeter. If Error F renmains, it may be necessary to first clear, and then reenter, all correction factors, zero values, and the calibration date (or instrument identification number). If Error F recurs during either the clearing procedure or a subsequent programming attempt, the Calibration Memory may be faulty. NOTE If an error condition identifies a faulty Calibration Memory chip. refer to Calibration Memory Replacement in Section 4. If a new Calibration Memory is installed, the comprehensive clearing procedure should first be performed, followed by re-programming of all desired entries, 7, Etror H: Ohms input error: This error can be caused by an open input during OHMS measurements, a bad protection fuse, or a polarity reversal in connections for four-terminal ohms ‘measurements, 8. Error 4: Excessive voltage present at inputs (OHMS, ADC, AAC): An improper input level has been used for ohms or resistance calibration. The appropriate function must be re-selected, and the input level must be revised 9. Error E: Invalid module configuration ‘A Calibration Memory module may be installed. The 8505 and 8506A do not use a. separate module for calibration memory entries (calibration memory is a standard part of the Controller module). Ifa Calibration Memory module s instalied, it must be removed. This error may also identify an illegal ac converter configuration, For the 8505A, only one ac converter (-01 Option or -09A Option) is allowed, For the 8506A, only the Thermal True-RMS Converter is allowed, Additionalac converters, must be removed. 78-10. Clear Operations Calibration correction entries can also be removed or replaced from the front panel. The following procedures are available: 1. Applied zero correction values can be altered from the front panel as follows:a. If temporary zero corrections have been entered while the Calibration mode is off, Calibration Memory zero values can be reinstated in temporary memory. ‘With Calibration mode off, push the RESET button or cycle input power. b._ Application of all zero values can be disabled by pushing the ZERO VDC/OHMS button once (ZERO annunciator goes off). ¢. New zero values can be entered by applying a short across the inputs and pushing the ZERO VDC/OHMS button again (ZERO annunciator comes on), When Calibration mode is on, this procedure creates a new Calibration Memory. zero entry for the function (VDC or OHMS) and range selected only. If Calibration mode is off, this procedure creates a new temporary zero memory entry in the selected function (VDC or OHMS), the selected range, and all higher ranges, Zero values stored in temporary memory do not affect existing Calibration Memory entries, 2. Since only one or two gain correetion factors are allowed per range (depending fon the function), storing a new correction factor automatically replaces any Previously stored correction factor. For those functions requiring two gain Corrections per range (VDC and ADO), this operation must be performed twice (nee for positive, once for negative) to ensure new correction factors forthe full range of possible inputs. NOTE If hardware calibration is necessary, software calibration entries must first be cleared, The extent of hardware calibration determines the clearing operation required. If all functions are to be hardware calibrated, she procedure in step (4) must be used, If select functions only are to be hardware calibrated, respective gain correction factors must be cleared with the procedure in step @3.), and zero factors must be disabled where appropriate. 3, Gain correction factors can be erased by using the STORE (CAL COR) sequence (without numerics) once for each range in each function. Using STORE (CAL COR) once clears both positive and negative gain corrections for theselected range in VDC or ADC. 4. Calibration memory factors for all ranges and functions, zero correction values for all VDC and OHMS ranges, and the calibration date (or instrument identifier) ‘can also be erased using a single operation. This operation may be necessary if an Error F condition (check sum error) cannot be cleared with a multimeter reset orifit is necessary to clear software calibration entries for all functions prior to hardware calibration. With the multimeter in the Calibration mode, the following procedure is used: a. To initialize the clear procedure, push STORE ZERO VDC/OHMS. b. If the multimeter is not in the Calibration mode, a momentary Error C condition is set. After a brief pause, the multimeter reverts to the normal display to signify that no change has been initiated, ¢. If the multimeter is in the Calibration mode, the display responds with: CLEAr?. At this point, the clear operation can be aborted and the existing correction factors retained by pushing any button other than ZERO VDC/OHMS. The multimeter would then respond with a momentary Error C display and revert to the normal Calibration mode display.505A/05068 CAUTION If RESET ts pushed during the clearing interval, the clear operation may be Interrupted prior to completion. A check sum (Error) condition would then be set. Do not push the RESET button until the final clearing step (d) has been ‘completed. 4. If the operation is to be completed (not aborted), all zero correction values, calibration correction factors, and the calibration date (instrument identification) number can be cleared by pushing the ZERO VDC/OHMS. button a second time. Depending on the extent of Calibration Memory entries, the clear operation may require several seconds. Completion of the clear operation is verified by the removal of CLEAr?, a momentary blanking of the digit display, and extinguishment of the ZERO annunciator. If manual triggering is in effect, the display remains blank until the next manual trigger. 7B-11, REMOTE CALIBRATION Remote calibration procedures are similar to those used fos front panel calibration, The parameters defined in Tables | and 2 are also used in remote calibration. 7B-12, Equipment Configurations Remote calibration can be made using zero or reference value connections either at the front panel terminals or through the rear input connector. Connections are described in Section 2 of the appropriate Instruction Manual. The following general considerations should be noted: 1. When using the front panel terminals, the three input selectors must be positioned as follows: a. Guard Selector: in or out, as required. b. Ohms Selector: In (41) for Ohms Zero and Ohms gain corrections (850A. and 8506) and for VAC corrections (8506A only). The Guard Selector can be in or out for other calibration connections at the front panel terminals, ¢. Rear Input Selector: out 2. When the rear input connector is being used, the Guard Selector and the Ohms Selector have no affect, The Rear Input Selector must be pushed in. Rear inputs are dedicated to a four terminal configuration. Four terminal connections must be used. for Ohms Zero and Ohms Gain corrections (8505A and 8506A) and for VAC corrections (8506A only). 78-13. Local/Remate Control Remote calibration is carried out using any of the remote interface options available for the multimeter (IEEE~488, Bit Serial, or Parallel), Remote calibration requires that the ‘multimeter be placed in local control prior to enabling the Calibration mode. Refer tothe following local/ remote control guidelines: 1, To select local control: a. From the front panel: push the LCL/RMT button and verify that the REMOTE annunciator is off.b. From the remote location: send the # character (go to local, lockout remote) when using the Bit Serial Remote Interface (Option -06) or the Parallel Remote Interface (Option -07). With the IEEE-488 Remote Interface (Option-05), senda Go-to-Local (GTL) command. To select remote control: a. From the front panel: push the LCL/RMT button and verify that the REMOTE annunciator is on (Bit Serial and Parallel Interfaces only). With the TEEE-488 Interface, remote control cannot be selected from the front panel. '. From the remote location: With the Bit Serial or Parallel Interface, remote control can be selected by sending any character that the multimeter recognizes. However, if local control was originally commanded with the # character, the front panel LCL/RMT button must be pushed. With the IEEE-488 laterface, remote is selected (with REN asserted) by sending an MLA, Some IEEE- interfaced controllers (such as the Fluke 1720A) automatically supply an MLA with any transmitted command string. 78-14. Entry Format ‘Numeric entry commands are terminated by any subsequent non-numericcharacter. For calibration entries, an execution command must be included at the end of the string. Execution commands are not included in the instructions provided in this discussion but ‘must be included in practice. The following terminating commands are available 1," is used to execute the command string. 2, “?" is used to execute the command string and return a reading. 3. “@" is used to execute the command string, take a reading, and interrupt when ready, 7B-15. Zero Corrections Storing zero values involves separate commands for the de voltage and resistance functions. Calibration mode must be enabled when storing zero correction values during Software Calibration. With a high-quality, low-thermal shorting bar applied across SENSE HI and LO inputs, the zero value is stored asan offset (in the de voltage function) by first allowing sufficient thermal voltage settling time, verifying thatthe multimeter has returned at least one reading, and then sending the KO command. This operation stores the last reading as de voltage zero inthe existing range and function, Ohms zero values are stored using the KI command, The shorting bar must be applied to the Hi and LO inputs in a four terminal configuration, Remote commands Mi (inhibit all zero values) and M2 (enable ll zero values) can be sent at anytime without affectingthe stored values. 7B-16. Gain Corrections ‘The Calibration mode must be activated prior to entering gain correction factors. With the multimeter in local (front panel) control, the rear panel Calibration switch is positioned to ON (causing the AVG/(CAL) annunciator to begin flashing). Gain corrections are initiated remotely with the KNG command. Reference values are the same as those used for front panel calibration. Source connections for standard functions (de-volts with the 8505A, de volts and ac volts with the 8506A) are described in Section4. Source connections for optional functions are described in Section 6. Remote verification of Calibration mode status can be made by sending the G5 command. A returned 0 Sines thatthe Calbraon mode i of, nd a recurned | signifies that he Calibration mode is on.85054/8506A, Remote calibration for each range and function is accomplished by first taking. reading of the reference input and then programming the actual reference value. The programming step consists of the KNG command, followed by numerics representing the reference value, The first non-numeric following this entry terminates the numericentry. ‘The KNG command is only executed if followed by a terminating character(,?or @). The multimeter now computes and stores the gain correction factor. If the KNG is not followed by a number, or is followed by zero, the gain correction for the range selected is disabled (none stored), ‘78-17. Callbration Date (Multimeter Identitication) ‘The identifying number can be programmed remotely with the KND command. As in front panel calibration, Calibration mode must first be activated. A maximum of six digits can be programmed following the KND command. One set of digits can be stored at a time, Digits could be entered for the day, month, and year of the calibration date. February 18, 1983 is programmed as K N D 2 1 8 8 3. Alternately, an instrument identification number of 242 is entered as K ND 242. Any non-numericentry following these digits causes termination of the entry, ‘The digits programmed with the KND command can be recalled at any time (Calibration ‘mode on or off) by sending the G4 command, The response is expanded to six digits with the inclusion of leading zeros (0 2 1 883, 0r00.0242 for the examples mentioned above). 7B-18. Recall Operations Various commands are used to recall calibration entries. The following list identifies these commands: 1. GO: recall the de voltage zero value. If the multimeter is in the de voltage function, the zero value for the existing range is returned. If some other function is, selected, the zero value for the 100 mV range is returned. 2. G2: Recall multimeter configuration and send on next trigger. This recall command is useful in determining the multimeter type and identification number, verifying the installed modules prior to a performance test or calibration, and identifying the cause of an error 24 (illegal module configuration), A 22-character response identifies the multimeter and its hardware configuration as follows a. Characters 1-5: the model number (e.g. 8506A) b. Characters 6-8; a special number (or blank) Character 9: a colon ()) 4d. Characters 10-22: 13 characters identifying the loaded modules. D:: DC Signal Conditioner F: Active Filter C! A/D Converter 1: Averaging AC Converter (Option -01) 2: Ohms Converter (Option -02A) 3: Current Converter (Option -03) 4 Not used (always -) 5 : IEEE-488 Interface (Option -05) 6 : Bit Serial Interface (Option -06) 7: Parallel Interface (Option -07) 8: Isolator 9: True-RMS Converter (Option -094) ‘A’: Thermal True-RMS Converter‘Any module not installed i noted with a(-) in the response, For the 8505A, aresponse of DFC12—~78-- would signify a standard dc volts configuration (DFC) with the Isolator (8) and options for averaging ac (1), ohms 2), and parallel interfacing (7). For the 8506A, a response of DFC-3-5-~-8-A would identify a standard dc volts (DFC) and thermal true- rms volts (A) configuration with the Isolator (8) and options for de current (3) and IEEE 488 interfacing (5). Notes: (1). 85054 AC Volts (VA) uses either Averaging (Option -01) or True-RMS. (Option -09A) converter. 8505A AC Amps (IA) uses Current Converter (Option -03) and either ac converter. If both ac converters are installed with ac volts or ac amps selected, the True-RMS converter (Option -09A) is used. (2) 8506A can use either the Ohms Converter (Option -02A) or the Current Converter (Option -03) - not both. (3) 8505 and 8506A: only one interface (Option -05, -06, or -07) can be installed at one time. 3. Gd: recall the calibration date or instrument identification number on the next trigger. A total of six digits is returned - there is no leading zero suppression. 4._ GS: recall Calibration mode status. A retumed 0 identifies Calibration mode off, and a returned 1 identifies Calibration mode on. ‘5. G6: recall the ohms zero value. If the multimeter is in the ohms function, the zero vaiue for the existing range is returned. If some other function is selected, the zero value for the 10 ohm range is returned. 6. M: inhibit calibration factors. This command can be used to take a reading with ‘calibration correction disabled. Once the uncorrected reading has been noted, calibration correction factors can be enabled by sending the MO command. 78-19. Error Conditions ‘An error condition is identified by a user-defined response, This response is entered with the K3 command, followed by any combination of up to 15 characters. For example, an ‘obviously illegal response of 1E20 could be specified to flagan error condition. Ifan error exists, this response is returned whenever a reading is attempted. The Gl (get status) ‘command must then be sent to identify and note the specific error. This command can only be used once for each error response generated, The following error codes (defined in the first and second characters of the G I response) may be encountered during remote calibration: 1. 08: Command string error 2, 10; VDC/OHMS Zero error 3. 14: Excessive voltage present (Ohms or Current function) ‘This isa latching error condition and necessitates, in sequence, revision of the input level and re-selection of the appropriate function prior to further calibration. 4.16: Numeric display overflow5054/8506, 5. 23: The Calibration Memory ety o ot inated @ 6. 24: Illegal module configuration A Calibration Memory module may be installed, The 8505A and 8506A do not use a separate module for calibration memory entries (calibration memory isa standard part of the Controller module). Also, the wrong ac converter(s) may be installed ‘The 8505A uses cither the 01 Option or the-09A Option not both). The 8506A uses only the Thermal True-RMS Converter. Remove any disallowed module 7.25: The Calibration Memory check sum is wrong. This error condition may occur when applying power, when storing into Calibration, Memory, or when recalling a Calibration Memory entry. It may be caused by an inadvertent cycling of power when the multimeter isin the Calibration mode. Reset the multimeter. If error 25 remains, it may be necessary to first clear, and then reenter, all correction factors, zero values, and the calibration date (or instrument identification number). If error 25 recurs during the clearing procedure or during any subsequent programming attempt, the Calibration Memory may be faulty. NOTE If an error condition idemifies a faulty Calibration Memory chip, refer to Calibration Memory replacement in Section4. anew Calibration Memory is installed, the comprehensive clearing procedure should firs be performed, followed by re-programming of all desired entries, 8. 27: Ohms connections are faulty, Error 27 ean occur when an obms connection is open, a protection fuse is bad, or a polarity reversal has been made with the four-terminal connection, 78-20. Clear Operations ‘The following procedures are available to remove or replace Calibration Memory entries from the remote location: 1. In the de volts or ohms function, zero correction values can be replaced by centering new values. Existing Values can be inhibited by sending the M1 command (or enabled with the M2 command). 2. Any Calibration Memory gain correction entry can be replaced by merely making a new entry. Where multiple gain correction factors are stored (as in de volts), separate new factors must be stored (one for positive gain, one for negative sain). 3. Gain correction factors for the function selected can be erased by using the K N G0 command string once for each range. Using K NG 0 once clears both positive and negative gain corrections for the selected range in dc volts (V) or de amps (I), NOTE I hardware calibration is necessary, software calibration entries must first be cleared. The extent of hardware calibration determines the clearing operation required. If all functions are to be hardware calibrated, the procedure in step .) must be used. If select functions only are to be hardware calibrated. respective gain correction factors must be inhibited with the procedure in step .). and zero values must be disabled where appropriate,4, All.calibration factors can be inhibited (but not cleared) with the M command. The MO command reapplies these factors. CAUTION {any interrupting command Is sent Immediately alter Ké (and before G1), the ‘comprehensive clearing operation may be Interrupted prior to completion. A ‘check sum (error 25) condition would then be set. Donot send any interrupting ‘command (immediate characters, reset, etc.) between K4 and G1. 5. If it is necessary to clear all calibration factors (as in @ check sum error 25 condition of prior to hardware calibration of all functions), the K4G1 command String can be used. Depending on the number of entries being cleared, several Seconds may be necessary to complete this operation. Completion of this comprehensive clearing operation is Verified by return of the status response. 78-21. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 78-22. DC Voltage 78-23. LOCAL (FRONT PANEL) PROCEDURE Front panel de voltage calibration can be accomplished using reference inputs and the front panel push buttons. Calibration mode must first be enabled by sliding the rear panel Calibration switch to ON (AVG /(CAL) annunciator flashes). Remember never to cycle input power to the multimeter when the Calibration modeis on. Then proceed as follows: 1. On the multimeter, select VDC function and 100 mV (manual) range. 2. Apply a good-quality, low-thermal shorting bar between INPUT SENSE HI ‘and LO terminals, Allow sufficient thermal voltage settling time before proceeding to the next step. 3, Allow the multimeter to take at least one reading, then push the ZERO VDC/OHMS button, 4, Manually select the next higher VDC range, then push ZERO VDC/OHMS twice. In sequence, repeat this step for each higher VDC range. This procedure ensures that a discrete zero value is stored for each VDC range. 5, Remove the shorting bar. 6. Refer to Table 2 and select the reference value for the range being calibrated. Generally, any value between 60% of range and full scale may be selected. However, ‘values near the full scale point ensure minimum percentage of reading error. Values too near the full seale point may cause saturation problems in the A/D Converter. ‘The values given here (in parentheses) are recommended to both minimize percentage of reading error and avoid saturation problems. 7. Manually select the 10V range. With the reference value (19.000000V) applied to INPUT SENSE HI and LO terminals, push: ‘STORE (numerics of reference value) (CAL COR). 8. The gain correction is automatically applied to the next reading in this range. Verify proper reference value entry by observing that subsequent readings of the reference value equal that known value + multimeter accuracy specifications. If S0SArES0EA505485060 necessary, recall the uncorrected reading for comparison by using the RECALL, (CAL COR) sequence, 9. Manually select the 100 mV range, apply an appropriate reference value (490.0000 mV), allow the multimeter to take one reading, push STORE (reference numerics) (CAL COR) once again, and verify the result. Repeat this procedure in sequence for each higher VDC range. The following reference values are recommended: a, LV range: 1.9000000V 10V range: 19,000000V . 100V range: 120.00000V 4. 1000V range: 1000.0000¥ 10. The following steps store negative gain corrections foreach range. Reverse the input connections to the multimeter. I. Now return the reference source to the value used for the 10V range (19.000000V), and manually select the 10V range on the multimeter. 12, First allow the multimeter to take at least one reading, then push STORE (reference numerics) (CAL COR). Ignore polarity when entering numerics for the reference value, 13. The gain correction is automatically applied to the next reading in this range. Verify proper reference value entry by observing that subsequent readings of the reference value equal that known value + multimeter accuracy specifications. If necessary, recall the uncorrected reading for comparison by using the RECALL (CAL COR) sequence. 14, Manually select the 100 mV range, apply an appropriate reference value (190.0000 mY), allow the multimeter to take at least one reading, push STORE. (reference numerics) (CAL COR) once again, and verify the result. Using the preferred reference values mentioned above, repeat this procedure in sequence for each higher VDC range, 15, Set the reference output to zero, and remove connections between the reference source and the multimeter. 16, Front panel de voltage calibration is complete once ze70 valves and positive and negative gain corrections have been entered for each of the five ranges. 17, If no further calibration is required, disable the Calibration mode by sliding the rear panel switch to OFF. 7B-24. REMOTE PROCEDURE Remote calibration employs the same sequence as that used for local calibration, The Calibration mode must be enabled when the multimeter is in local control (REMOTE annunciator off). The rear panel Calibration switch can then be positioned to ON (front panel AVG/(CAL) annunciator flashes) and remote control selected. Remember neverto cycle input power to the multimeter when Calibration mode is on. The full calibration procedure is as follows:1. Select the de volts function (V) and 100 mV (manual) range (RO). 2. Apply a good-quality, low-thermal shorting bar between input SENSE HI and Lo inputs. Allow sufficient thermal voltage settling time before proceeding to the next step. 3, Allow the multimeter to take at least one reading, then send KO (store last reading as de volts zero). 4, Send the next higher de volts range command, allow the multimeter to return at least one reading, then send KO again. In sequence, repeat ths step for each higher de volts range (1, R2, R3, Ré), This procedure ensures that a discrete zero valueis stored for each de vols range. 5, Remove the shorting bar. 6, Refer to Table 2 and select the reference value for the range being calibrated. Generally, any value between 60% of range and full seale may be selected. However, ‘values near the full scale point ensure minimum percentage of reading error. Values too near the full scale point may cause saturation problems in the A/D Converter. ‘The values given here (in parentheses) are recommended to both minimize percentage of reading error and avoid saturation problems. 7, Send the R2 command (10 volt range). 8. With the reference value (19.000000V) for the 10V range applied to SENSE HI and LO inputs, send the following command: K NG (numerics of reference value) 9. The gain correction is automatically applied to the next reading in this range. Verify proper reference value entry by observing that subsequent readings of the referene Value equal that known Value -+ multimeter accuracy specifications. 10. Revise the reference source output to the value used for the 100 mV range (190,00000 mV), Then send the RO command. 1, Allow the multimeter to return at least one reading, then send KNG (reference rumerics), and verify the result, Repeat this procedure in sequence for each higher ddc volts range (R 1, R2, R3, Rd). The following reference values are recommended: a. 1V range (Rs 19000000 , 10V range (R2}: 19,000000¥ ¢.100¥ range (R3): 120.00000V 4.1000 range (RA: 1000.0000¥ 12, Nowsend the R2 command again, and return the reference source to the value used for the 10V range (19.000000V). 13, ‘The following steps store negative gain corrections foreach range. Reverse the input connections to the multimeter. 5054/8500,BS05A/8506A 14, First allow the multimeter to return at least one reading, then send KNG (reference numerics). Ignore polarity when entering numerics for the reference value 13, ‘The gain correction is automatically applied to the next reading in this range. Verify proper reference value entry by observing that subsequent readings of the reference value equa! that known value ++ multimeter accuracy specifications. 16, Apply a reference value appropriate for the 100 mV range (190.0000 mV), allow the multimeter to return at least one reading, send KNG (reference numerics), and verify the result. Using the preferred reference values mentioned above, repeat this procedure in sequence for each higher de volts range (RI, R2, R3, R4). 17. Set the reference output to zero, and remove connections between the reference source and the multimeter. 18. Remote de voltage calibration is complete once zero values and positive and negative gain corrections have been entered for each of the five ranges. 19. If no further calibration is required, disable the Calibration mode by sliding the rear panel switch to OFF. 78-25. AC Volts ‘AC voltage software calibration involves storing one gain correction factor for each range. The type of multimeter (8505A or 8506A), the variety of ac converter installed, and the ac volts function selected (ac or ac + de) are all factors that determine the exact procedure to use. Separate sets of ac volts gain corrections can be stored for the following configurations: 1, 850SA, Averaging Converter (Option-O1) installed, VAC (VA) selected. AC + DC (©) cannot be selected for use with the Averaging Converter 2. 8505A, True-RMS Converter (Option -09A) installed, VAC (VA) selected, If both the Averaging and True-RMS converters are installed, selecting VAC (VA) automatically connects the True-RMS Converter, 3. 8505A, True-RMS Converter (Option -09A) installed, VAC + VDC (C) selected. 4. 8506A, Thermal True-RMS Converter installed, VAC Hl ACCUR (VA) selected, 5. 8506A, Thermal True-RMS Converter installed, VAC HI ACCUR + VDC(C) selected. 7B-26. 8805A AG VOLTS “The three possible ac volts configurations for the 8505A each require the same calibration procedure. First, a 1 kHz reference signal is applied at a level between 60% of range and full seale, and the reference level is entered numerically. Second, accuracy is checked at several higher frequencies. These accuracy checks are made at different sels of frequencies for the Averaging Converter and the True-RMS Converter, 78-27. Local (Front Panel) Procedure Refer to Table 2for the allowed range of reference values and Table 3 for reference source requirements. Calibration mode must first be activated (with the multimeter in local850SA/8506A @ control) by sliding the rear panel Calibration switch to ON (AVG/(CAL) anmunciator flashes). Remember never to cycle input power to the multimeter when Calibration mode is on. 1, Select the ac volts function (VAC for either ac converter, VAC + VDC for True- RMS Converter only) and the lowest range (IV manual) 2, Select the appropriate reference value with the aid of Table 2. Recommended values are as follows: a. 1V range: 2V @ 1 kHz b, 10V range: 19V @ I kHz ©. 100V range: 100V @ J kHz 4. 1000V range: 900V @ 1 kHz 3. Apply this value to the INPUT SENSE HY and LO terminals and allow the multimeter to take at least one reading. 4, Now push the following buttons: STORE (reference value numerics)(CAL COR) 5. The multimeter computes the gain correction factor and automatically applies it to the next reading in this range. Verify proper reference value entry by observing that subsequent readings of the reference value equal that known value + accuracy specifications. If necessary, recall the uncorrected reading for comparison by using the RECALL (CAL COR) sequence. 6. Verify accuracy at higher input frequencies. The required check frequencies (depending on the type of ae converter) are as follows: a. Averaging Converter (Option -O1), VAC only: 10 kHz, 50 kHz, 100 kH, b._ True-RMS Converter (Option -094), VAC or VAC + VDC: 100 kHz, 500 kHz, and 1 MHz. 7. Manually increment he range, apply the appropriate reference value(at | KHz), allow the multimeter to return ‘at least one reading, and then push STORE (reference numerics) (CAL COR) once again. 8. Verify gain correction entry by either observing subsequent readings or using the RECALL (CAL COR) routine. 9. Verity accuracy at the higher frequencies specified above. 10, Repeat steps 7, 8, and 9 for each higher range (10V, 100V, 1000V).. 11, Front panel ac volts calibration is complete once gain corrections have been eniered foreach ofthe five ranges. Ifrequired, a maximum of three sets of correction factors can be stored (one set each for Averaging Converter and VAC, True-RMS. Converter and VAC, True-RMS Converter and VAC + VDC), Just repeat the entire procedure with the desired function and module, Remember that the True RMS Converter is always selected if both ac converters are installedas05A8506A NOTE @ Ifac converters are improperly interchanged, software calibration is defeated. The calibration correction factors for each type of ac converter are stored in the Controller module. Therefore, it is possible t0 remove ether type of ac converter, replace it with another ae converter of the same type, and reiain software calibration factors. But remember, these factors are unique to the combination of the originally calibrated ac converter and this multimeter only. 12. Af no further calibration is required, disable the Calibration mode by sliding the rear panel switch to OFF. 7B-28, Remote Procedure Remote ac volts calibration can be carried out when the multimeter is in the Calibration ‘mode. With the multimeter in local control, position the rear panel Calibration switch to ON. Refer to Table 2 for the allowed range of reference values and Table 3 for reference source requirements. Remember never to cycle input power to the multimeter when Calibration mode is on. Then select remote control and continue with the following procedure: 1, Send the appropriate ac volts command (VA for either ac converter, C for True- RMS Converter only) and the 1V range command (Rl). 2. Select the appropriate reference value with the aid of Table 2. Recommended values are as follows: a. 1V range (RI): 2V @ U kHz b. 10V range (R2): 19V @ 1 kHz © 100V range (R3): 100 @ 1 kHz 4. 1000V range (R4}: 900V @ 1 kHz 3. Apply this value to the SENSE HI and LO inputs and allow the multimeter to retuen at least one reading, 4, Now send the following commands: KN G (reference numerics) 5. The multimeter computes the gain correction factor and automatically applies it to the next reading in this range. Verify proper reference value entry by observing. that subsequent returned readings of the reference value equal that known value + accuracy specifications. 6. Verify accuracy at higher input frequencies. The required check frequencies (depending on the type of ac converter) are as follows: Averaging Converter (Option -01), VAC only: 10 kHz, 50 kHz, 100 kHz b._ True-RMS Converter (Option -09A), VAC or VAC + VDC: 100 kHz, 500 kHz, and 1 MHz,7. Send the next higher range command, apply the appropriate reference value (at 1 kHz), allow the multimeter to return at least one reading, and then send KNG (Feference numerics) once again 8. Verify gain correction entry by observing subsequently returned readings. 9. Verify accuracy at the higher frequencies specified above. 10, Perform steps 7, 8, and 9 for each higher range (R2, R3, Rd). 11, Remote ac volts calibration is complete once gain corrections have been entered for each of the five ranges. Ifrequired, a maximum of three sets of correction factors can be stored (one set each for Averaging Converter and VAC, True-RMS. Converter and VAC, True-RMS Converter and VAC + VDC). Just repeat the entire procedure with the desired function and module, Remember that the True- RMS Converter is always selected if both ac converters are installed. NOTE ‘Ifac converters are improperly interchanged, software calibration is defeated. ‘The calibration correction factors for each type of ac converter are stored inthe Controller module. Therefore, it is possible to remove either type of ac converter, replace it with another ac converter of the same type, and retain Software calibration factors, But remember, these factors are unique 10 the ‘combination of the originally calibrated ac converter and this multimeter only. 12, Hfno farther calibration is required, disable the Calibration mode by sliding the rear panel switch to OFF. 7B-29. 508A AG VOLTS ‘The same procedure (1 kHz reference signal applied at level between 609 or range and full scale, reference level entered numerically) is used for each range in High Accuracy mode for the 8506A. Gain corrections stored in High Accuracy mode are subsequently applied in all ac volts modes (High Accuracy, Enhanced, or Normal), Separate sets of ‘gain corrections can be stored for VAC (VA2) or VAC and VDC (C2). 78-30. Local (Front Panel) Procedure Refer to Table 2for the allowed range of reference values and Table 3for reference source requirements, Calibration mode must first be activated (With the multimeter in local Control by siding the rear pane! Calibration switch to ON (AVG /(CAL) annunciator flashes). Remember never to cycle input power to the multimeter when Calibration mode I. Select the ae volts high accuracy function (VAC HI ACCUR) and 100 mV manual range. 2, Select the appropriate reference value with the aid of Table 2. Recommended values are as follows a, 100 mV range: 120 mV @ I kHz b. 300 mV range: 390 mV @ I kHz ec. 1V range: 12V @ 1 kHz‘8S05A/85068 3V range: 39V @ | kHz 1OV range: 12V @ 1 kHz 30V range: 359V @ I kHz 100V range: 120V @ 1 kHz S00V range: S00V @ I kHz 3. Apply this value to the INPUT HI and LO terminals in a four-terminal configuration. Ensure that the Ohms Selector is pushed in (47). 4, Allow the multimeter to take at least one reading, then push the following battons STORE (reference value numeries) (CAL COR) 5. The multimeter computes the gain correction factor and automatically applies itto the next reading in ths range. Verify proper reference value entry by observing. that subsequent readings ofthe reference value equal that Known value + accuracy specifications, f necessary, recall the uncorrected reading for comparison by using the RECALL (CAL COR) sequence. 6. Verify accuracy at higher input frequencies. The required check frequencies are 10 kHz and 100 kHz. 7. Manvally increment the range, apply the appropriate reference value (at 1 kH2), allow the multimeter to return ‘at least one reading, and then push STORE (reference numerics) (CAL COR) once again. 8. Verify gain correction entry by either observing subsequent readings or using the RECALL (CAL COR) routine. 9. Verify accuracy at the higher frequencies specified above. 10. Repeat steps 7, 8, and 9 for each higher range (IV, 3V, 10V, 30V, 100V, 500V). 11. Front panel ac volts calibration is complete once gain corrections have been ‘entered for each of the cight ranges. If required, a separate set of correction factors ‘can be stored for de coupled ac volts (VAC HI ACCUR + VDC), Just repeat the entire procedure with the new function, 12, Ino further calibration is required, disable the Calibration mode by sliding the rear panel switch to OFF. 78-31. Remote Procedure Remote ac volts calibration can be carried out when the multimeter isin the Calibration mode. With the multimeter in local control, position the rear panel Calibration switch to ON. Refer to Table 2 for the allowed range of reference values and Table 3 for reference source requirements. Remember never to cycle input power to the multimeter when Calibration mode is on. Then select remote control and continue with the following procedure:1, Send the desired ac volts function command (VA2 for ac coupled, or C2 for de coupled High Accuracy ac volts) and the RO range command. 2 Select the appropriate reference value with the aid of Table 2, Recommended values are as follows: a. 100 mV range (RO): 120 mV @ 1 kHz b, 300 mV range (RI): 390 mV @ 1 kHz AV range (R2): 1.2V @ 1 kHz 3V range (R3): 3.9V @ 1 kHz 10V range (R4): 12V @ 1 kHz 30V range (RS): 35V @ 1 kHz & 100V range (RO): 120V @ 1 kHz 1h. SOOV range (RT): SOV @ I kHz 3. Apply this value to the HI and LO SENSE inputs and allow the multimeter to return at least one reading. 4, Now send the following commands: K N G (reference numerics). ‘5. The multimeter computes the gain correction factor and automatically applies itto the next reading in this range. Verify proper reference value entry by observing that subsequent returned readings of the reference valuc equal that known value 2 accuracy specifications 6. Verity accuracy at higher input frequencies. The required check frequencies are: 10 kHz and 100 kHz 7. Send the next higher range command, apply the appropriate reference value (at 1 kHz), allow the multimeter to return at least one reading, and then send KNG (reference numerics) once again. 8. Verify gain correction entry by observing subsequently returned readings. 9. Verify accuracy at the higher frequencies specified above. 10. Perform steps 7, 8, and 9 for each higher range (R2, R3, R4, RS, R6, R7). 11, Remote ac volts calibration is complete once gain corrections have been entered for each of the eight ranges. I required, a separate set of correction factors can be stored for decoupled ac volts (C2), Just repeat the entire procedure with the new function selected. 12. If no further calibration is required, disable the Calibration mode by sliding. the rear panel switch to OFF. 5054850607B-32, Resistance 7B-33. LOCAL (FRONT PANEL) PROCEDURE Front panel OHMS calibration is accomplished using zero corrections and positive gain corrections for each range, The Calibration mode must be enabled, With the multimeter in loca} control, the rear panel Calibration switch is positioned to ON (AVG/(CAL) annunciator flashes). Remember never to cycle input power to the multimeter when the Calibration mode is on. The complete calibration procedure is as follows: 1, Apply a good-quality, low-thermal shorting bar to the HI and LO inputs in a four wire configuration. If connections are made at the front panel terminals, the (Ohms Selector must be in (4T) and the Guard Selector must be out (internal guard). 2, Allow sufficient thermal voltage settling time before proceeding to the next step. 3. Push the OHMS button and manually select the lowest range (10 ohms). 4, Allow the multimeter to take at least one reading, If an Error H condition is encountered, a multimeter protection fuse may be bad, or the four-terminal ‘connections may be faulty. In either case, the problem must be corrected before proceeding with the calibration procedure. 5. Once a reading is properly returned, push the ZERO VDC/OHMS button. 6. Manually select the next higher OHMS range. Allow the multimeter to take at least one reading and then push ZERO VDC/ OHMS twice. In sequence, repeat this step for each higher OHMS range. Eight ranges are zeroed in this fashion. 7. Remove the shorting bar. 8, Manually select the lowest OHMS range (10 ohms) once again. 9. Positive gain corrections are next stored for each OHMS range, Refer to Table 2 and select the reference resistance value for the range being calibrated. Recommended values are shown (in parentheses) in the following procedure, Also refer to Table 3 for reference resistance tolerance requirements. 10, _ With the reference resistance for the 10 ohm range (20 ohms) applied to the INPUT HI and LO terminals(four wire configuration), allow the multimeter to take at least one reading and then push: STORE (reference numerics) (CAL COR). LL, The gain correction is automatically applied to the next reading in this range Verify proper reference value entry by observing that subsequent readings of the reference value equal that known value +: multimeter accuracy specifications. If necessary, recall the uncorrected reading for comparison by using the RECALL (CAL COR) sequence. 12, Manually increment the range, apply an appropriate reference resistance value, allow the multimeter to take atleast one reading, and push STORE (reference numerics) (CAL COR) once again. Repeat this step in sequence for each higher OHMS range (total of eight). Recommended reference resistance values are as follows:100 ohm range: 200 ohms 1 kohm range: 2 kohms 10 kohm range: 20 kohms 100 kohm range: 200 kohms 1 Moki range: 2 Moms f. 10 Mohm range: 20 Mohms & 100 Mohm range: 100 Mohms 13. Front panél resistance calibration is complete once zero corrections and positive gain corrections have been entered for each of the eight ranges. 14, If no further calibration is required, disable the Calibration mode by sliding the rear panel switch to OFF. 78-34. REMOTE PROCEDURE Remote resistance calibration follows the same pattern as that used for front panel calibration. Calibration mode must be enabled for all calibration procedures. With the ‘multimeter in local control, position the rear panel Calibration switch to ON (AVG| (CAL) annunciator on front panel flashes), Remember never to cycle input power to the multimeter when the Calibration mode is on. Select remote control and use the following calibration procedure: 1. Apply a good-quality, low-thermal shorting bar to the HI and LO inputs in a four wire configuration, If connections are made at the front panel terminals, the ‘Ohms Selector must be in (4T) and the Guard Selector must be out (internal guard). Allow sufficient thermal voltage settling time before proceeding to the next step. 2. Verify that ohms connections are correct and multimeter protection fuses are ‘good before proceeding. Use the following sequence: 4, Send the G2 command (recall status). Ignore the response b, Send the ohms function command (2) and the 10 ohm range command (RO). ¢. Trigger a reading. If the error response is returned, send G2again, ferror27 js defined (frst two digits of the response), the four terminal connections may be faulty of a protection fuse may be bad. d._In either case, correct the problem before proceeding with ohms software calibration, 3. Once a proper reading has been returned, send the K1 command (store last reading as ohms zero). 4. Send the next higher range command, Allow the multimeter to return at least one reading, and then send KI again. In sequence, repeat this step for each higher OHMS range. Eight ranges are zeroed in this fashion, 5. Remove the shorting bar.6. Send the RO (10 ohms) command again. 1. Positive gain corrections are next stored for each OHMS range, Refer to Table 2 and select the reference resistance value for the range being calibrated Recommended values are shown (in parentheses) in the following procedure, Also refer to Table 3 for reference resistance tolerance requirements. 8. With the reference resistance for the 10 ohm range (20 ohms) applied to the INPUT HI and LO terminals (four wire configuration), allow the multimeter to return at least one reading and then send: KN G (reference numerics) 9. The gain correction is automatically applied to the next reading inthis range, Verify proper reference value entry by observing that subsequentiy returned readings of the reference value equal that known value == multimeter accuracy specifications. 10. Send the next higher range command, apply an appropriate reference resistance value, allow the multimeter to return atleast one reading, and send KNG (Geference numerics) once again. Repeat this step in sequence for each higher OHMS ‘ange (total of eight). Recommended reference resistance values are as follows 100 ohm range (Ri): 200 ofms b. 1 koh range (R2): 2 kobms 10 kohm range (R3}: 20 kokms 4.100 kohm range (R4): 200 kohms 1 Mohm range (RS): 2 Mohms £10 Mohm range (R6): 20 Moms & 100 Mohm range (R7): 100 Mohms 11, Remote resistance calibration is complete once zero corrections and positive gain corrections have been entered for cach of the eight ranges. 12, If no further calibration is required, disable the Calibration mode by sliding, the rear panel switch to OFF, 78-35. DC Current DC current calibration procedures are very similar to the positive and negative gain corrections used with de voltage calibration. With the multimeter in local control, Calibration mode can be enabled by sliding the rear panel Calibration switch to ON (AVG)/(CAL) anounciator flashes), Remember never to eycle input power to the multimeter when the Calibration mode is on. 78-36, LOCAL (FRONT PANEL) PROCEDURE Use the front pane! push buttons as follows: |. Push the ADC button and manually select the lowest (100 wA) decurrent range.2. Refer to Table 2 and select the reference value for the range being calibrated. Recommended reference values are mentioned in the following steps. Also refer to, Table 3 for de current reference source requirements, 3. With the reference value for the 100 wA range (190 vA) applied to the INPUT SOURCE HI and LO terminals, allow the multimeter to take atleast one reading, then push: STORE (numerics of reference value) (CAL COR) 4. The gain correction is automatically applied to the next reading in this range. ‘Verify proper reference value entry by observing that subsequent readings of the reference Value equal that known value ++ multimeter accuracy specifications. If necessary, recall the uncorrected reading for comparison by using the RECALL (CAL COR) sequence. ‘5. Manually increment the range, apply the appropriate reference value, allow the ‘multimeter to take at least one reading, and then push STORE (eference numerics) (CAL COR) once again, Repeat this step in sequence for cach higher ADC range. Recommended reference values are as follows: a. mA range: 19 mA b. 10 mA range: 10 mA 100 mA range: 100 mA 4. 1A range: LOA 6. Return the reference output to the value used for the 100 wA range, Then manually select the 100 uA range on the multimeter. 7. Reverse the reference output polarity. 8. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5. Ignore polarity when entering the reference value numerics. 9. Front pane! de current calibration is complete once positive and negative gain corrections have been entered for each of the five ranges, 10. If no further calibration is required, disable the Calibration mode by sliding. the rear panel switch to OFF. 78-87. REMOTE PROCEDURE Remote de current calibration employs the same sequence as used for local calibration. Proceed as follows: 1. Select the required function and range by sending: I (for do current) and RO (for 100 uA range) 2._ Refer to Table 2 and select an appropriate reference value. Recommended teference values are shown in the following steps. Also refer to Table 3 for reference source requirements, Apply the selected reference value for RO range (190 UA) to SOURCE HI and LO inputs. 3. _Allow the multimeter to return at least one reading, then send: KNG (numerics of reference valve).‘B505A/65068 4. Proper gain eprrection storage can be verified by comparing subsequently returned readings to the reference value(s) used + multimeter accuracy specifications. 5. increment the range by sending the next higher range command (R1, R2, R 4), apply an appropriate reference value, allow the multimeter to return at lea one reading, and send K NG (reference numerics), Repeat this step for each higher range in the de current function, Recommended reference values are as follows a Tm range (RI): 1.9 mA b. 10 mA range (R2); 10 mA 100 mA range (R3}: 100 mA 4. 1A range (R4): LOA 6, Return the reference output to the value used for the RO (100 wA) range. Send the RO command again to select the 100 wA range on the multimeter, 7. Reverse the reference output polarity. 8, Repeat steps 3,4, and 5, Ignore polarity when sending reference value numerics, 9. Remote dc current calibration is complete once positive and negative gain corrections have been entered for each of the five ranges. 10. If no further calibration is required, disable the Calibration mode by sliding the rear panel switch to OFF. 78-38. AC Current The ac current function is available with the 8S05A, but not with the 8506A. Before software calibration (using either the RMS Converter or the Averaging Converter) is carried out, the following conditions must be met: 1. The Current Shunts module (Option -03) must be installed. 2, Either the Averaging AC Converter (Option -01) or the True-RMS Converter (Option -09A) must be installed. 3. With the multimeter in local control, Calibration mode must be enabled by sliding the rear panel Calibration switch to ON (AVG /(CAL) annunciator flashes). Remember never to cycle input power to the multimeter when the Calibration mode 4. AC current function (AAC push button, or remote command | A) must be selected, 78-39. LOCAL (FRONT PANEL) PROCEDURE Front panel AAG calibration is accomplished using gain correction factors at mid-band (1 kHz) for each range. The following procedure is used: |, Select the ac current function (AAC) and manually select the 100 vA range. 2. Select the appropriate reference value with the aid of Table 2. The recommended value for the 100 UA range is 200 uA. Apply this value (verified level at | kHz) to the INPUT SOURCE HI and LO terminals.NOTE The actual reference level must be verified at the source output. 3. Allow the multimeter to take at least one reading. Now push the following buttons: STORE (numerics for verified value) (CAL COR) 4, The gain correction is automatically applied to the next reading in this range. Verify proper reference value entry by observing that subsequent readings of the reference value equal that known value © applicable accuracy specifications. If necessary, recall the uncorrected reading for comparison by using the RECALL (CAL COR) sequence. 5. On the multimeter, select the next higher range. 6. Select a reference value for the next higher multimeter range. Verify this reference value at the source output, Recommended reference values are as follows: a. 1 mA range: 2.0 mA @ I kHz b. 10 mA range: 19 mA @ | kHz 100 mA range: 150 mA @ I kHz 4. 1A range: 1.0A @ I kHz 7. With the verified reference value (at 1 kHz) applied to the multimeter, allow at least one reading to be returned. 8, Now push STORE (numerics for verified reference value) (CAL COR) once again, 9. Repeat steps 5, 6, 7, and 8 for each higher range. 10, Front panel ac current calibration is complete once gain corrections have been centered for each of the five ranges, 11, Ino further calibration is required, disable the Calibration mode by sliding the rear panel switch to OFF, 78-40. REMOTE PROCEDURE Remote ac current calibration is accomplished using gain correction factors at mid-band (kHz) for each range, The following procedure is used: I. Select the required function and range by sending I A (for ac current) and RO (for 100 vA range). 2, Refer to Table 2 and select an appropriate reference value. The recommended value for the 100 WA range RO) is 200 wA at | kHz. Apply this value (verified level at I kHz) to the Source Hi and Lo inputs. NOTE The actual reference level must be verified at the source output.505485064, 43. Allow the multimeter to return at least one reading. 4. Now send: K N G (numerics for verified reference level) 5. Proper gain correction storage can be verified by comparing subsequently returned readings ofthe reference value to that known value + applicable accuracy specifications 6. Increment the multimeter range by sending the next higher range command, 7. Select areference value for the next higher multimeter range. Verify this value at the source output. Recommended reference values are as follows: a, 1 mA range (RU): 20 mA @ I kHz D. 10 mA range (R2): 19 mA @ 1 KH, c. 100 mA range (R3): 150 mA @ 1 kHz dA range (Rd): 0A @ I kHz 8. With the verified reference value applied, allow the multimeter to return at least one reading, 9. Now send K N G (numeries for verified reference level) 10. Repeat steps 6, 7, 8, and 9 for each of the remaining ac current ranges. 11. Remote ac current calibration is complete once gain corrections have been ceniered for each of the five ranges. 12, If no further calibration is required, disable the Calibration mode by sliding the rear panel switch to OFF. 7B-41, SPECIFICATIONS Use of software calibration allows for extended intervals between hardware calibration. Software calibration can be performed at any time, as determined by the user's accuracy requirements. Specifications attainable with software calibration are defined in Section | (standard functions) and Section 6 (optional functions). If the multimeter has been repaired, hardware calibration may be necessary. Once hardware calibration has been carried out, 24-hour specifications are in effect and immediate software calibration is not necessary,Section 8 Schematic Diagrams ‘TABLE OF CONTENTS. FIGURE Tme List of Mnemonies ...----+.-- ee ‘AI Front Panel Dispiay PCB Assembly 82, ‘A2 Motherboard PCB Assembly 83, ‘A3 Bus Interconnest : 4, ‘Ad Power Supply PCB Asiemby ... 8, ‘AS Power Supply Interconnect, 36 ‘AG Controller PCB Astembly a7, ‘AT Pront/Rear Switch Assembly es, ‘AB DCSignal Conditioner PCB Assembly 89, ‘A9 Active Fiker PCB Assembly #10, AIOAL A/D Analog PCB Assembly : ‘AIOA2 Fast RR A/D Converter Digital PCB Atsembly AMIAL Atenuator PCB Assembly ALLA2 Amplifier PCB Assembly...UST OF MNEMONICS AOA ACK ACKINT cPUINT GPUREADY cPURESET 0-07 Dain DLDACK extcom extINT FUNE axFLING FRONT/REAR, Ic0-107 ICENABLE 100-107 INA. INP INTA INTCLR LINEREF MARKINT on 2 out READY RESET RUN SCANADY STOP sTsTB SYNC SYNCDEXTINT vee Vee vas veo vss watt we [Address bus on controle ‘Acknowiedgo signal from module Interrupt generated when module does not respond Interrupt signal for uP Reaay signal for uP Reset signal Data bus on controller Data bus input signal (from 4) Dolayod version of ACK Module communication signal Interrupt trom module ‘Shaped line frequency signal 8 times line frequency Front or rear input signal Module addross/control bus Enable module address signal Module data bus Interrupt acknowledge signal in response to EXTINT VO status signal Interrupt acknowledge status signal oar interrupt signal Line reference signal, bus Input on TS Intereupt to synchronize to tine frequency ‘One phase of uP clock Other phase of #P clock VO status signal Signal to gonorate CPUREADY Reset signal Exit wait state signal SSoan advance signal, A/D conversion complet Enter wait state signal Glock signal to latch uP status Signal trom uP, usod to generate STSTB Synchronized interrupt trom module -5V supply +5 supply +12V supply =12¥ supply Logic common LP in walt state signal ‘Wate data signal torn pPlus us B luz Fy ls us vs TPPTEE! Pee! TATE Ee! PPT Ee THAETE TE! PPE ELTE| ES! PORTE a 7 Py Figure &-. At Front Panel Display PCB Assembly (cont) 8586FIG. ha sur. Lor 3 GH QuauiT eus wut a" SOURCE 19 wour woTlalelelclele a= |= |e ze |store foxcan [ou Figure 8-1. At Front Panel DlapiayTL sles ete Bh fro |aanu Jemma a hes fee ber Figure 0-1. A1 Front Panel Diaplay PCB Assembly (cot) erCONTROLLER, A/o CONVERTER Nb CONVERTER AcTWvE FILTER ssi -08ro,08-098 -o2aaoyenoe 102y03,-01,0R-09 CONTROLLER cowraoier Te RCONNEST Ao CONVERTER, VD CONVERTER ACTIVE FILTER Rin CONVERTER wenn TRUE Res COWERTERFIC. F2 HT. 2 0F 2 SEAN ADVAN THIGKER INR wa Sa Se =55 Sw8 iB JERSE Figure 8-2. A2 Motherboard PCB Assembly 505A-160229K ‘SOLATOR J sue uA zr nat steppers} ats EUS Ege Tees st vive sve aa ee away sia feuer9 ise WH 7 INOH S32 i» D300] van eae g soem be Ty anon sow aw E31 a] * aol psstoeeast 4 [se] 2] ap SSAA S sneunu3e aot ap 52> 97m WoW LanaPIN: iw 399011 Ea ani wa errr) eit vad, urn Ey STE: sfel> rower INTERCONNECT eer Lea esl isi eas 2 ve ae Trtete sene ERR TYAS, Tretatetste of uf al LoL | wus Jao ssn owe sunos uy Gea PARA ‘we yen cotatyea oat Ree? ED Wieedtd 2A 3 40am ar 6a renwaty s9921mOWN>y (Lene Tarrrerstetster ‘aaoaeann {2140s 390 CHD RAS? om a9 190 50 aM 3 O2 3nd 48 oor f Fp eeION INSTALLED IN UNIT. ‘5054-1002 Figure 82. A2 Motherboard PCB Assambiy (cont) 0S INTERCONNE ACTIVE OME WITH. OPE OBS INSTALLED FUNCTION WILL VARY DEPENDING UPON ci NOTES: Lu & 3 fa] vain vivo soa int 0 4x09 saan ef anor snus 23) Pee ee bs [re[ 3 [29-0 i aie {ast bs s9onNON LansHIN ‘40> we G99 Ea wis re3) alae wae) ot HC aMiL Wa, Jowastnanway 3000 a TNTERCOMNECT 2 ore A swneim| [A Tet?LoGie RET) ¥56 Gs) vee LNGUROED BUSVs (tov Looe RETURN) Cisy eee “Sermvy vee(tov vaste RETURN (Cisy Weare ‘SoperHi. 8-4 sur. 1OF 5FIG. 8-4 worn cum 3 OFSi tEae crafeast py tov | Sov Lose ReTuRN4 neives) } ssyivecd 6 s0nz REF ars.ry s300(0A3) ~sovivasi vary a ANALOG fcusros RETURN cee -isvivazy Lowe SUPPLY ‘vee? 20 Losic RETURNS sevivoo! Lose RETURNIvss) To POWER SUPPLY INTERCONNECT, (85054-1032) 2tvea ssvevee sone REF Rvs. Figure 04. A& Power Supply PCB Assembly (cont) 813/018=ISV GUARDED) LOSIC SUPPLY Yn=20V LOGIC RETURN ANALOG RETURN vas $30V West (UNGUARDED! RTS 60H REF. ’ eG. ve ee Uvouanoeo | — | ucuanoen uaroeo Bus Bus yaa 30(85054-1392 Figure 6-5, AS Power Supply InterconnectFlog. €-6 Ser Lor SRG. &-& gr. 20% 3 som Figure 6-6. AG Controller PCB Assembly a6is-1687 Figure 6-6. A6 Controller PCB Assembly 46Teun Siemis-1187 sheet 1 Figur 6-6. AS Controle PCB Assambly (cont) a17/818FG. 6b SHT: 2 oF Sis-r187 ‘Shoot 2 Figure &-8. 6 Controller PCB Assombly (cont) 19Figure 8-7. AT FronvRear Switch Assembly 820Fig. P-7 esse gw BOF S Figure 6-7. A7 Front/Rear Switch Assembly 20Jsounce wi neo, F3CD> 5 [source wo can, REF HL YE. assis fN/YEL PL B x Nbur CONNECTOR [D>Fa Fant nour aE or SeeLW werexr cues Figure 7. A7 FronvRear Switch Assembly (cont)TPL Tee JES TRAfle. 2B an 2 OF Bes088 SDO®D @ a I @ Figure 8-8. A8 DC Signal Conuitioner PCB Assembly BeMis-1700 Figure 8-8, AB DC Signal Conditioner PCB Assembly onePB loo ua Ty BUS Piz e200 we Losic neruan, , to cu BINS eg8 BEB o tS "ROTH 3 EStxnening F [ean [ aanse 103 quasioeo aus pte Ihenaus Braco vs Guneur Nout FOULOWER 0 ie ‘igure 64. A8 OBINOING Post INPUT \gan ance Tids [62 [01 Paepao SAE ee [2s [ee-[ar Foul eur TWTERGUS Tee e.srw yet 2s gor PY, ayanoeo wus are Invenous FOLLOWER .8505A-1100 Figure #8 AB DC Signal Conditioner PCB Assembly (cont) aaournare are wener 0) oc REF HD pre. Tua COMORES tee ire i BYPASS (wall = OMSECTTrae Va FILTER Y FILTER 2 TREaaTS Toler ier foro int oH SoowsecT ToftFILTER Y FILTER 2 Figure 68. Ad Active Fiter PCB Assembly (on!) 825FIG. C12 sur | OF S Pel ae Fe] BOS af eeFic. GIO R ST | oF SBFROM Mis-11 WA converreR S28 a4 5 OF eR Pe. Bae Y REMAINDER CHANNEL tev BBB teal Bac EEE cy viet | Stee Ere 2 Teg -8v 930) Trac ord Figure 8-10, OAS AD AnalogFG S108 Sut. Zor 3 Y REMAINDER CHANNEL | TE Fes Sal X% REMAINDER, CHANNEL fds nite iy 28.90% Poway BREESE 232] mis-1140 Figure 810. A10A1 A/D Analog PCB Ansambly (cont) eaFAG. GA) syn 1 oF & Figure 8-1. Ag Digitesa FIG P11 Sup 2 of 2 us ue Mis-1741 [AIOAZ Fast AR A/D Converter Digital PCB AssemblyFAG. Bila ser LOF 3 cig ee (oie SUPPL) -20 Vss (ose ervey]FAG eI SHT. Zoe 3 REMAINDER Figure 8-1, A10e Digtal Pccre Mis-ttat Figure 811, A1OAZ Fant RR A/D Converter Digital PCB Assembly (com!)FIG. @-12 won gw ZORZ Figure 8-12, A11A1 Attenuator PCB Assembly 830ATTENUATOR cinewiTS, are enyem 20 HocD sete geeeeo Ae eelsFigure 8-12. A11A1 Attenuator PCSFIG. 8-128 see 3 OF 2 aaa 85068-1024 Figure 8-12. ATA1 Attenuator PCB Assembly (cont) erFIG. BIZ won Sor oor 2 85064-1625 Figure 8-13, A11A2 Amplifier PCB Assembly eszFIG. FIZ AW sur, 1OFSFigure 8-13. A11A2 Ampll85064-1025 Figure 8-13, A11A2 Amplifier PCB Assembly (cont) 2-33 /8-84